joliet - [project.toc] arc...arc/oms/uhs safety pays w912qr-10-r-0001 joliet il certified...

Solicitation For Army Reserve Center Joliet, Illinois Specifications

Volume 3 Certified Final P2 153362 21 October 2009 W912QR-10-R-0001

ARC/OMS/UHS ***SAFETY PAYS*** W912QR-10-R-0001 JOLIET IL CERTIFIED FINAL SUBMITTAL

PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

00 30 00 AVAILABLE INFORMATION00 31 32 GEOTECHNICAL DATA00 41 00 BID SCHEDULES00 80 00.00 06 SPECIAL CLAUSES00 80 00.01 06 ATTACHMENTS (SPECIAL CLAUSES)

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 32 01.00 06 PROJECT SCHEDULE01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES01 33 29.10 06 LEED™ DOCUMENTATION FOR GOVERNMENT VALIDATION01 35 29.00 06 SAFETY AND OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH REQUIREMENTS01 35 29.01 06 ATTACHMENTS (SAFETY AND OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH REQUIREMENTS)01 42 00 SOURCES FOR REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS01 45 01.10 USACE QUALITY CONTROL SYSTEM (QCS)01 45 04.10 06 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL01 46 00.00 06 COMMISSIONING OF BUILDING ENERGY SYSTEMS01 50 00 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND CONTROLS01 57 20.00 10 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION01 57 23 TEMPORARY STORM WATER POLLUTION CONTROL01 62 35 RECYCLED / RECOVERED MATERIALS01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT01 78 23.00 06 EQUIPMENT OPERATING, MAINTENANCE, AND REPAIR MANUALS

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

02 41 00 DEMOLITION

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE

03 11 13.00 10 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FORMWORK03 20 01.00 10 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT03 31 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE

DIVISION 04 - MASONRY

04 20 00 MASONRY

DIVISION 05 - METALS

05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL05 21 19 OPEN WEB STEEL JOIST FRAMING05 30 00 STEEL DECKS05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY06 41 16.00 10 LAMINATE CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CASEWORK06 61 16 SOLID POLYMER (SOLID SURFACING) FABRICATIONS

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1


07 11 13 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING07 13 53 ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING07 19 00 WATER REPELLENTS07 21 13 BOARD AND BLOCK INSULATION07 21 16 MINERAL FIBER BLANKET INSULATION07 22 00 ROOF AND DECK INSULATION07 25 00.00 06 BUILDING AIR BARRIER SYSTEM07 27 00 FLUID-APPLIED AIR AND VAPOR BARRIER07 42 13 METAL WALL PANELS07 52 22.00 48 MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING07 53 23 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER ROOFING07 60 00 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL07 61 14.00 48 HYDROSTATIC (WATER-TIGHT) STANDING SEAM METAL ROOFING

SYSTEM (HS-SSMRS)07 72 33 ROOF ACCESSORIES07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS

08 11 13 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 16 ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES08 14 00 WOOD DOORS08 33 23 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS08 34 59 VAULT DOORS AND DAY GATES08 36 13 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS08 44 00.00 40 CURTAIN WALL AND GLAZED ASSEMBLIES08 45 23.00 48 INSULATED TRANSLUCENT FIBERGLASS SANDWICH PANEL WALL/ROOF

SYSTEM08 51 14.00 48 ALUMINUM AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL ALUMINUM WINDOWS08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE08 81 00.00 48 GLAZING08 91 00 METAL WALL LOUVERS

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

09 06 90.00 48 COLOR SCHEDULE09 22 00 SUPPORTS FOR PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD09 30 00 CERAMIC TILE, QUARRY TILE, AND PAVER TILE09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING09 65 66 RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING09 68 00 CARPET09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS09 96 00 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

10 10 00 VISUAL COMMUNICATIONS SPECIALTIES10 12 01.00 48 RECESSED DISPLAY CASES10 14 01 EXTERIOR SIGNAGE10 14 02 INTERIOR SIGNAGE10 21 13 TOILET COMPARTMENTS10 22 13.00 48 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS10 22 26.00 48 OPERABLE PARTITIONS10 26 13 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS10 28 00.00 48 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES10 44 13.00 48 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS



10 51 52.00 48 METAL WARDROBE LOCKERS AND BENCH SEAT10 56 13.00 48 METAL STORAGE SHELVING AND PALLET RACKS10 75 00.00 48 FLAGPOLES10 90 00.00 48 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES (PARTIAL OMAR FUNDED)

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT

11 05 40 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT11 13 13.00 48 DOCK BUMPERS11 31 13 ELECTRIC KITCHEN EQUIPMENT11 42 00 FOOD PREPARATION EQUIPMENT11 44 00 FOOD COOKING EQUIPMENT11 46 00 FOOD DISPENSING EQUIPMENT11 46 01.01 48 APPENDIX TO FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT11 47 00 ICE MACHINES11 48 00 CLEANING AND DISPOSAL EQUIPMENT11 52 13.00 48 PROJECTION SCREENS

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

12 21 00 WINDOW BLINDS12 48 00.00 48 WALK-OFF MAT12 93 00 SITE FURNISHINGS

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13 34 19 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

14 21 00.00 20 ELECTRIC TRACTION PASSENGER ELEVATORS

DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION

21 13 13.00 10 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, FIRE PROTECTION21 21 03.00 10 WET CHEMICAL FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING

22 00 00.00 48 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE22 31 00 WATER SOFTENERS, CATION-EXCHANGE (SODIUM CYCLE)

DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING

23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS23 09 23 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC AND OTHER LOCAL BUILDING

SYSTEMS23 11 25 FACILITY GAS PIPING23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING23 25 00 CHEMICAL TREATMENT OF WATER FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS23 35 00.00 10 OVERHEAD VEHICLE TAILPIPE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM(S)23 52 00.00 48 WATER HEATING; GAS; UP TO 20 MBTUH23 54 16.00 48 HEATING SYSTEM; GAS-FIRED HEATERS23 54 17.00 48 WARM AIR HEATING SYSTEMS23 64 00.00 48 LIQUID CHILLERS23 64 26.00 48 CHILLED, CHILLED-HOT, AND CONDENSER WATER PIPING SYSTEMS



23 82 02.00 48 UNITARY HEATING AND COOLING EQUIPMENT

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM26 23 00 SWITCHBOARDS26 41 01.00 10 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM26 42 14.00 10 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM (SACRIFICIAL ANODE)26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING26 56 00 EXTERIOR LIGHTING

DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS

27 10 00 BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM27 51 16 RADIO AND PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS

DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

28 20 01.00 10 ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEM28 31 76 INTERIOR FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM

DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK

31 00 00 EARTHWORK31 11 00 CLEARING AND GRUBBING31 21 13 RADON MITIGATION31 31 16 SOIL TREATMENT FOR SUBTERRANEAN TERMITE CONTROL

DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 11 23 AGGREGATE AND/OR GRADED-CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE32 12 16 HOT-MIX ASPHALT (HMA) FOR ROADS32 13 13.06 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT FOR ROADS AND SITE

FACILITIES32 16 13 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND CURBS AND GUTTERS32 17 24.00 10 PAVEMENT MARKINGS32 31 13 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES

DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES

33 11 00 WATER DISTRIBUTION33 16 15 WATER STORAGE STEEL TANKS33 30 00 SANITARY SEWERS33 40 00 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES33 46 13 FOUNDATION DRAINAGE SYSTEM33 51 15 NATURAL-GAS / LIQUID PETROLEUM GAS DISTRIBUTION33 82 00 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTSIDE PLANT (OSP)

-- End of Project Table of Contents --



SECTION 26 20 00

INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM08/08

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.

ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

ASTM B 1 (2001; R 2007) Standard Specification for Hard-Drawn Copper Wire

ASTM B 8 (2004) Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft

ASTM D 709 (2001; R 2007) Laminated Thermosetting Materials

INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)

IEEE C2 (2007; Errata 2007; INT 2008) National Electrical Safety Code

IEEE Std 100 (2000) The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms

IEEE Std 81 (1983) Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System (Part 1)Normal Measurements

INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION (NETA)

NETA ATS (2003) Acceptance Testing Specifications

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)

NEMA 250 (2003) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)

NEMA AB 1 (2002) Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures

NEMA C12.1 (2008) Electric Meters; Code for Electricity Metering

NEMA C80.1 (2005) Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC)

NEMA C80.3 (2005) Standard for Electrical Metallic

SECTION 26 20 00 Page 1


Tubing (EMT)

NEMA FU 1 (2002; R 2007) Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses

NEMA ICS 1 (2000; R 2005) Standard for Industrial Control and Systems General Requirements

NEMA ICS 2 (1996; R 2004) Standard for Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contractors, and Overload Relays Rated Not More than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC: Part 8 - Disconnect Devices for Use in Industrial Control Equipment

NEMA ICS 4 (2005) Industrial Control and Systems: Terminal Blocks

NEMA ICS 6 (1993; R 2006) Standard for Industrial Controls and Systems Enclosures

NEMA KS 1 (2001; R 2006) Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum)

NEMA MG 1 (2007) Standard for Motors and Generators

NEMA MG 10 (2001; R 2007) Energy Management Guide for Selection and Use of Fixed Frequency Medium AC Squirrel-Cage Polyphase Induction Motors

NEMA MG 11 (1977; R 2007) Energy Management Guide for Selection and Use of Single Phase Motors

NEMA RN 1 (2005) Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit

NEMA ST 20 (1992; R 1997) Standard for Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications

NEMA TC 2 (2003) Standard for Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit

NEMA TC 3 (2004) Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride PVC Fittings for Use With Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing

NEMA TP 1 (2002) Guide for Determining Energy Efficiency for Distribution Transformers

NEMA VE 1 (2002) Standard for Metallic Cable Tray Systems

NEMA WD 1 (1999; R 2005) Standard for General Requirements for Wiring Devices

NEMA WD 6 (2002; R 2008) Standard for Wiring Devices



- Dimensional Requirements

NEMA Z535.4 (2007; Errata 2007) Product Safety Signs and Labels

NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

NFPA 70 (2007; AMD 1 2008) National Electrical Code - 2008 Edition

NFPA 70E (2008) Electrical Safety in the Workplace

NFPA 780 (2007) Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems

TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION (TIA)

TIA J-STD-607-A (2002) Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications

TIA/EIA-568-B.1 (2001 Addendums 2001, 2003, 2003, 2003, 2004, 2007) Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 1: General Requirements

TIA/EIA-569-A (1998; Addenda 2000, 2001) Commercial Building Standards for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces

U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)

29 CFR 1910.147 Control of Hazardous Energy (Lock Out/Tag Out)

UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)

UL 1 (2005; Rev thru Jul 2007) Standard for Flexible Metal Conduit

UL 1010 (2006) Receptacle-Plug Combinations for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations

UL 1063 (2006) Standard for Safety Machine-Tools Wires and Cables

UL 1242 (2006; Rev thru Jul 2007) Standard for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit -- Steel

UL 1449 (2006) Surge Protective Devices

UL 1561 (1999; Rev thru Sep 2005) Dry-Type General Purpose and Power Transformers

UL 1660 (2004; Rev thru Jan 2005) Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit

UL 20 (2000 ; Rev thru Dec 2004) Standard for



General-Use Snap Switches

UL 360 (2003; Rev thru Jul 2007) Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit

UL 44 (2005; Rev thru Nov 2005) Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables

UL 467 (2007) Standard for Grounding and Bonding Equipment

UL 486A-486B (2003; Rev thru Aug 2006) Standard for Wire Connectors

UL 486C (2004; Rev thru Aug 2006) Standard for Splicing Wire Connectors

UL 489 (2002; Rev thru Jun 2006) Standard for Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures

UL 498 (2001; Rev thru Nov 2007) Attachment Plugs and Receptacles

UL 5 (2004; Rev thru May 2007) Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings

UL 50 (2007) Standard for Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

UL 506 (2000; Rev thru May 2006) Standard for Specialty Transformers

UL 508 (1999; Rev thru Sep 2008) Standard for Industrial Control Equipment

UL 510 (2005; Rev thru Aug 2005) Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape

UL 512 (1993; Rev thru Jan 2008) Fuseholders

UL 514A (2004; Rev thru Aug 2007) Standard for Metallic Outlet Boxes

UL 514B (2004; Rev thru Aug 2007) Standard for Conduit, Tubing and Cable Fittings

UL 514C (1996; Rev thru Jul 2008) Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes, and Covers

UL 5A (2003; Rev thru Aug 2008) Nonmetallic Surface Raceways and Fittings

UL 6 (2007) Standard for Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel

UL 651 (2005; Rev thru May 2007) Standard for



Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings

UL 67 (1993; Rev thru Jul 2008) Standard for Panelboards

UL 674 (2003; Rev thru Oct 2007) Standard for Electric Motors and Generators for Use in Division 1 Hazardous (Classified) Locations

UL 6A (2000; Rev thru Jan 2004) Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit - Aluminum, Red Brass, and Stainless Steel

UL 797 (2007) Standard for Electrical Metallic Tubing -- Steel

UL 817 (2001; Rev thru May 2007) Cord Sets and Power-Supply Cords

UL 83 (20086) Standard for Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables

UL 845 (2005; Rev thru Aug 2006) Standard for Motor Control Centers

UL 869A (2006) Reference Standard for Service Equipment

UL 870 (1995; Rev thru Jul 2003) Standard for Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings

UL 877 (1993; Rev thru Nov 1999) Circuit Breakers and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations

UL 886 (1994; Rev thru Nov 2005) Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations

UL 943 (2006; Rev thru Feb 2008) Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters

1.2 DEFINITIONS

Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, shall be as defined in IEEE Std 100.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings



Panelboards; G

Transformers; G

Wire basket; G

Motor control centers; G

Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated installation. Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment devices.

Wireways; G

Marking strips drawings; G

SD-03 Product Data

Receptacles; G

Circuit breakers; G

Switches; G

Transformers; G

Enclosed circuit breakers; G

Motor controllers; G

Combination motor controllers; G

Manual motor starters; G

Metering; G

CATV outlets; G

Telecommunications Grounding Busbar; G

Surge protective devices; G

Submittals shall include performance and characteristic curves.

SD-06 Test Reports

600-volt wiring test; G

Grounding system test; G

Transformer tests; G



Ground-fault receptacle test; G

SD-07 Certificates

Fuses; G

SD-09 Manufacturer's Field Reports

Transformer factory tests

SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data

Electrical Systems, Data Package 5; G

Metering, Data Package 5; G

Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.4.1 Fuses

Submit coordination data as specified in paragraph, FUSES of this section.

1.4.2 Regulatory Requirements

In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated.

1.4.3 Standard Products

Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.

1.4.3.1 Alternative Qualifications

Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is furnished.



1.4.3.2 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date

Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used, unless specified otherwise.

1.5 MAINTENANCE

1.5.1 Electrical Systems

Submit operation and maintenance manuals for electrical systems that provide basic data relating to the design, operation, and maintenance of the electrical distribution system for the building. This shall include:

a. Single line diagram of the "as-built" building electrical system.

b. Schematic diagram of electrical control system (other than HVAC, covered elsewhere).

c. Manufacturers' operating and maintenance manuals on active electrical equipment.

1.6 WARRANTY

The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

Materials, equipment, and devices shall, as a minimum, meet requirements of UL, where UL standards are established for those items, and requirements of NFPA 70.

2.2 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

Shall conform to the following:

2.2.1 Rigid Metallic Conduit

2.2.1.1 Rigid, Threaded Zinc-Coated Steel Conduit

NEMA C80.1, UL 6.

2.2.1.2 Rigid Aluminum Conduit

UL 6A.

2.2.2 Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit

PVC Type EPC-40, and EPC-80 in accordance with NEMA TC 2,UL 651.

2.2.3 Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC)

UL 1242, zinc-coated steel only.



2.2.4 Electrical, Zinc-Coated Steel Metallic Tubing (EMT)

UL 797, NEMA C80.3.

2.2.5 Plastic-Coated Rigid Steel and IMC Conduit

NEMA RN 1, Type 40( 40 mils thick).

2.2.6 Flexible Metal Conduit

UL 1.

2.2.6.1 Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit, Steel

UL 360.

2.2.7 Fittings for Metal Conduit, EMT, and Flexible Metal Conduit

UL 514B. Ferrous fittings shall be cadmium- or zinc-coated in accordance with UL 514B.

2.2.7.1 Fittings for Rigid Metal Conduit and IMC

Threaded-type. Split couplings unacceptable.

2.2.7.2 Fittings for EMT

Steel compression type.

2.2.8 Fittings for Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit

NEMA TC 3 for PVC, and UL 514B.

2.2.9 Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit

UL 1660.

2.3 SURFACE RACEWAY

2.3.1 Surface Metal Raceway

UL 5, two-piece painted steel, totally enclosed, snap-cover type. Provide multiple outlet-type raceway with grounding-type receptacle where indicated. Receptacles shall be as specified herein and shall be spaced as indicated on the drawings.

2.3.2 Surface Nonmetallic Raceway

UL 5A, nonmetallic totally enclosed, snap-cover type.

2.4 CABLE TRAYS

NEMA VE 1. Ladder and wire mesh type cable tray shall form a wireway system, and shall be of nominal 4 inch depth. Trays shall be constructed of aluminum or steel that has been zinc-coated after fabrication as noted per drawings. Trays shall include splice and end plates, dropouts, and miscellaneous hardware. Edges, fittings, and hardware shall be finished free from burrs and sharp edges. Fittings shall have not less than load-carrying ability of straight ladder sections and shall have



manufacturer's minimum standard radius. Minimum bend radius of tray to be equal to nominal wire mesh/ladder tray width.

2.4.1 Ladder-Type Cable Trays

Provide size as indicated with 6 inch rung spacing, wall mount where feasible.

2.4.2 Wire Mesh-Type Cable Trays

Provide size as indicated, wall mount where feasible.

2.5 OUTLET BOXES AND COVERS

UL 514A, cadmium- or zinc-coated, if ferrous metal. UL 514C, if nonmetallic.

2.5.1 Floor Outlet Boxes

Boxes shall be adjustable and concrete tight. Each outlet shall consist of cast-metal body with threaded openings, for conduits, adjustable brass flange ring, and cover plate with 1 1/4 inch threaded plug. Telecommunications outlets shall consist of flush, aluminum or stainless steel housing with a receptacle as specified and 3/4 inch top opening. Receptacle outlets shall consist of flush aluminum or stainless steel housing with duplex-type receptacle as specified herein. Provide gaskets where necessary to ensure watertight installation. Provide plugs with installation instructions to the Contracting Officer for 5 percent of outlet boxes for the capping of outlets upon removal of service fittings.

2.5.2 Outlet Boxes for Telecommunications System

Provide standard type 4 inches square by 2 1/8 inches deep. Outlet boxes for wall-mounted telecommunications outlets shall be 4 by 2 1/8 by 2 1/8 inches deep. Depth of boxes shall be large enough to allow manufacturers' recommended conductor bend radii.

2.6 CABINETS, JUNCTION BOXES, AND PULL BOXES

Volume greater than 100 cubic inches, UL 50, hot-dip, zinc-coated, if sheet steel.

2.7 WIRES AND CABLES

Wires and cables shall meet applicable requirements of NFPA 70 and UL for type of insulation, jacket, and conductor specified or indicated. Wires and cables manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used.

2.7.1 Conductors

Conductors No. 8 AWG and larger diameter shall be stranded. Conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller diameter shall be solid, except that conductors for remote control, alarm, and signal circuits, classes 1, 2, and 3, shall be stranded unless specifically indicated otherwise. Conductor sizes and capacities shown are based on copper.



2.7.1.1 Minimum Conductor Sizes

Minimum size for branch circuits shall be No. 12 AWG; for Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits, No. 14 AWG; for Class 2 low-energy, remote-control and signal circuits, No. 16 AWG; and for Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm and signal circuits, No. 22 AWG.

2.7.2 Color Coding

Provide for service, feeder, branch, control, and signaling circuit conductors. Color shall be green for grounding conductors and white for neutrals; except where neutrals of more than one system are installed in same raceway or box, other neutrals shall be white with a different colored (not green) stripe for each. Color of ungrounded conductors in different voltage systems shall be as follows:

a. 208/120 volt, three-phase

(1) Phase A - black

(2) Phase B - red

(3) Phase C - blue

b. 480/277 volt, three-phase

(1) Phase A - brown

(2) Phase B - orange

(3) Phase C - yellow

c. 120/240 volt, single phase: Black and red

2.7.3 Insulation

Unless specified or indicated otherwise or required by NFPA 70, power and lighting wires shall be 600-volt, Type THWN/THHN conforming to UL 83, except that grounding wire may be type TW conforming to UL 83; remote-control and signal circuits shall be Type TW or TF, conforming to UL 83. Where lighting fixtures require 90-degree Centigrade (C) conductors, provide only conductors with 90-degree C insulation or better.

2.7.4 Bonding Conductors

ASTM B 1, solid bare copper wire for sizes No. 8 AWG and smaller diameter; ASTM B 8, Class B, stranded bare copper wire for sizes No. 6 AWG and larger diameter.

2.7.4.1 Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB)

Provide a copper conductor TBB in accordance with TIA J-STD-607-A. The TBB shall be a minimum No. 6 AWG and be sized at 2 kcmil per linear foot of conductor length up to a maximum size of 3/0 AWG.

2.7.4.2 Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications

Provide a copper conductor Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications between the telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB) and the electrical



service ground in accordance with TIA J-STD-607-A. The bonding conductor for telecommunications shall be sized the same as the TBB.

2.7.5 Cord Sets and Power-Supply Cords

UL 817.

2.8 SPLICES AND TERMINATION COMPONENTS

UL 486A-486B for wire connectors and UL 510 for insulating tapes. Connectors for No. 10 AWG and smaller diameter wires shall be insulated, pressure-type in accordance with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C (twist-on splicing connector). Provide solderless terminal lugs on stranded conductors.

2.9 DEVICE PLATES

Provide UL listed, one-piece device plates for outlets to suit the devices installed. For metal outlet boxes, plates on unfinished walls shall be of zinc-coated sheet steel or cast metal having round or beveled edges. For nonmetallic boxes and fittings, other suitable plates may be provided. Plates on finished walls shall be satin finish stainless steel or brushed-finish aluminum, minimum 0.03 inch thick. Screws shall be machine-type with countersunk heads in color to match finish of plate. Sectional type device plates will not be permitted. Plates installed in wet locations shall be gasketed and UL listed for "wet locations."

2.10 SWITCHES

2.10.1 Toggle Switches

NEMA WD 1, UL 20, single pole, double pole, three-way, and four-way, totally enclosed with bodies of thermoplastic or thermoset plastic and mounting strap with grounding screw. Handles shall be grey thermoplastic. Wiring terminals shall be screw-type, side-wired. Contacts shall be silver-cadmium and contact arm shall be one-piece copper alloy. Switches shall be rated quiet-type ac only, 120/277 volts, with current rating and number of poles indicated.

2.10.2 Switch with Red Pilot Handle

NEMA WD 1. Provide pilot lights that are integrally constructed as a part of the switch's handle. The pilot light shall be red and shall illuminate whenever the switch is closed or "on". The pilot lighted switch shall be rated 20 amps and 120 volts or 277 volts as indicated. Provide the circuit's neutral conductor to each switch with a pilot light.

2.10.3 Breakers Used as Switches

For 120- and 277-Volt fluorescent fixtures, mark breakers "SWD" in accordance with UL 489.

2.10.4 Disconnect Switches

NEMA KS 1. Provide heavy duty-type switches where indicated, where switches are rated higher than 240 volts, and for double-throw switches. Fused switches shall utilize Class R fuseholders and fuses, unless indicated otherwise. Switches serving as motor-disconnect means shall be horsepower rated. Provide switches in either a NEMA 1 or 3R enclosure, depending on application, per NEMA ICS 6.



2.11 FUSES

NEMA FU 1. Provide complete set of fuses for each fusible switch. Time-current characteristics curves of fuses serving motors or connected in series with circuit breakers or other circuit protective devices shall be coordinated for proper operation. Submit coordination data for approval. Fuses shall have voltage rating not less than circuit voltage.

2.11.1 Fuseholders

Provide in accordance with UL 512.

2.11.2 Cartridge Fuses, Current Limiting Type (Class R)

Class RK-5 time-delay type. Associated fuseholders shall be Class R only.

2.12 RECEPTACLES

UL 498, hard use, heavy-duty, grounding-type. Ratings and configurations shall be as indicated. Bodies shall be of grey as per NEMA WD 1. Face and body shall be thermoplastic supported on a metal mounting strap. Dimensional requirements shall be per NEMA WD 6. Provide screw-type, side-wired wiring terminals. Connect grounding pole to mounting strap. The receptacle shall contain triple-wipe power contacts and double or triple-wipe ground contacts.

2.12.1 Weatherproof Receptacles

Provide in cast metal box with gasketed, weatherproof, cast-metal cover plate and gasketed cap over each receptacle opening. Provide caps with a spring-hinged flap. Receptacle shall be UL listed for use in "wet locations with plug in use."

2.12.2 Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles

UL 943, duplex type for mounting in standard outlet box. Device shall be capable of detecting current leak of 6 milliamperes or greater and tripping per requirements of UL 943 for Class A GFCI devices. Provide screw-type, side-wired wiring terminals or pre-wired (pigtail) leads.

2.12.3 Plugs

Provide heavy-duty, rubber-covered three-, four-, or five-wire cord of required size, install plugs thereon, and attach to equipment. Plugs shall be UL listed with receptacles, complete with grounding blades. Where equipment is not available, turn over plugs and cord assemblies to the Government.

2.13 PANELBOARDS

UL 67 and UL 50 having a short-circuit current rating as indicated. Panelboards for use as service disconnecting means shall additionally conform to UL 869A. Panelboards shall be circuit breaker-equipped. Design shall be such that individual breakers can be removed without disturbing adjacent units or without loosening or removing supplemental insulation supplied as means of obtaining clearances as required by UL. "Specific breaker placement" is required in panelboards to match the breaker placement indicated in the panelboard schedule on the drawings. Use of



"Subfeed Breakers" is not acceptable unless specifically indicated otherwise. Main breaker shall be "separately" mounted "above" or "below" branch breakers. Where "space only" is indicated, make provisions for future installation of breakers. Directories shall indicate load served by each circuit in panelboard. Directories shall also indicate source of service to panelboard (e.g., Panel PA served from Panel MDP). Type directories and mount in holder behind transparent protective covering. Panelboards shall be listed and labeled for their intended use. Panelboard shall have nameplates in accordance with paragraph FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES.

2.13.1 Enclosure

Enclosures shall meet the requirements of UL 50. All cabinets shall be fabricated from sheet steel of not less than No. 10 gauge if flush-mounted or mounted outdoors, and not less than No. 12 gauge if surface-mounted indoors, with full seam-welded box ends. Cabinets mounted outdoors or flush-mounted shall be hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication. Cabinets shall be painted in accordance with paragraph PAINTING. Outdoor cabinets shall be of NEMA 3R raintight with conduit hubs welded to the cabinet. Front edges of cabinets shall be form-flanged or fitted with structural shapes welded or riveted to the sheet steel, for supporting the panelboard front. All cabinets shall be so fabricated that no part of any surface on the finished cabinet shall deviate from a true plane by more than 1/8 inch. Holes shall be provided in the back of indoor surface-mounted cabinets, with outside spacers and inside stiffeners, for mounting the cabinets with a 1/2 inch clear space between the back of the cabinet and the wall surface. Flush doors shall be mounted on hinges that expose only the hinge roll to view when the door is closed. Each door shall be fitted with a combined catch and lock, except that doors over 24 inches long shall be provided with a three-point latch having a knob with a T-handle, and a cylinder lock. Two keys shall be provided with each lock, and all locks shall be keyed alike. Finished-head cap screws shall be provided for mounting the panelboard fronts on the cabinets.

2.13.2 Panelboard Buses

Support bus bars on bases independent of circuit breakers. Main buses and back pans shall be designed so that breakers may be changed without machining, drilling, or tapping. Provide isolated neutral bus in each panel for connection of circuit neutral conductors. Provide separate ground bus identified as equipment grounding bus per UL 67 for connecting grounding conductors; bond to steel cabinet. In addition to equipment grounding bus, provide second "isolated" ground bus, where indicated.

2.13.2.1 Panelboard Neutrals for Non-Linear Loads

UL listed, and panelboard type shall have been specifically UL heat rise tested for use on non-linear loads. Panelboard shall be heat rise tested in accordance with UL 67, except with the neutral assembly installed and carrying 200 percent of the phase bus current during testing. Verification of the testing procedure shall be provided upon request. Two neutral assemblies paralleled together with cable is not acceptable. Nameplates for panelboard rated for use on non-linear loads shall be marked "SUITABLE FOR NON-LINEAR LOADS"and shall be in accordance with paragraph FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES. Provide a neutral label with instructions for wiring the neutral of panelboards rated for use on non-linear loads.



2.13.3 Circuit Breakers

UL 489, thermal magnetic-type having a minimum short-circuit current rating equal to the short-circuit current rating of the panelboard in which the circuit breaker shall be mounted. Breaker terminals shall be UL listed as suitable for type of conductor provided. Where indicated on the drawings, provide circuit breakers with shunt trip devices. Series rated circuit breakers and plug-in circuit breakers without a self-contained bracket and not secured by a positive locking device requiring mechanical release for removal are unacceptable.

2.13.3.1 Multipole Breakers

Provide common trip-type with single operating handle. Breaker design shall be such that overload in one pole automatically causes all poles to open. Maintain phase sequence throughout each panel so that any three adjacent breaker poles are connected to Phases A, B, and C, respectively.

2.13.3.2 Circuit Breaker With GFCI

UL 943 and NFPA 70. Provide with "push-to-test" button, visible indication of tripped condition, and ability to detect and trip on current imbalance of 6 milliamperes or greater per requirements of UL 943 for Class A GFCI devices, for personnel protection,

2.13.3.3 Circuit Breakers for HVAC Equipment

Circuit breakers for HVAC equipment having motors (group or individual) shall be marked for use with HACR type and UL listed as HACR type.

2.13.4 Fusible Switches for Panelboards

NEMA KS 1, hinged door-type. Switches serving as motor disconnect means shall be horsepower rated.

2.14 MOTOR SHORT-CIRCUIT PROTECTOR (MSCP)

Motor short-circuit protectors, also called motor circuit protectors (MCPs); shall conform to UL 508 and UL 489 and shall be provided as shown. MSCPs shall consist of an adjustable instantaneous trip circuit breaker used only in conjunction with a combination motor controller which provides coordinated motor branch-circuit overload and short-circuit protection. MSCPs shall be rated in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70.

2.15 TRANSFORMERS

NEMA ST 20, general purpose, dry-type, self-cooled, ventilated. Provide transformers in NEMA 1 enclosure. Transformer shall have 220 degrees C insulation system for transformers 15 kVA and greater, and shall have 180 degrees C insulation for transformers rated 10 kVA and less, with temperature rise not exceeding 115 degrees C under full-rated load in maximum ambient of 40 degrees C. Transformer of 115 degrees C temperature rise shall be capable of carrying continuously 115 percent of nameplate kVA without exceeding insulation rating. Transformers shall be quiet type with maximum sound level at least 3 decibels less than NEMA standard level for transformer ratings indicated.



2.15.1 Specified Transformer Efficiency

Transformers shall be energy efficient type. Minimum efficiency, based on factory test results, shall not be less than NEMA Class 1 efficiency as defined by NEMA TP 1.

2.15.2 Transformers With Non-Linear Loads

Transformer insulation shall be a UL recognized 220 degrees C system. Neither the primary nor the secondary temperature shall exceed 220 degrees C at any point in the coils while carrying their full rating of non-sinusoidal load. Transformers are to be UL listed and labeled for K-13 in accordance with UL 1561. Transformers evaluated by the UL K-Factor evaluation shall be listed for 115 degrees C average temperature rise only. Transformers with K-Factor ratings with temperature rise of 150 degrees C rise shall not be acceptable. K-Factor rated transformers shall have an impedance range of 3 percent to 5 percent, and shall have a minimum reactance of 2 percent to prevent excessive neutral current when supplying loads with large amounts of third harmonic.

2.16 MOTORS

Provide the size in terms of HP, or kVA, or full-load current, or a combination of these characteristics, and other characteristics, of each motor as indicated or specified. Determine specific motor characteristics to ensure provision of correctly sized starters and overload heaters. Motors for operation on 208-volt, 3-phase circuits shall have terminal voltage rating of 200 volts, and those for operation on 480-volt, 3-phase circuits shall have terminal voltage rating of 460 volts. Motors shall be designed to operate at full capacity with voltage variation of plus or minus 10 percent of motor voltage rating. Unless otherwise indicated, motors rated 1 HP and above shall be continuous duty type.

Where fuse protection is specifically recommended by the equipment manufacturer, provide fused switches in lieu of non-fused switches indicated.

2.16.1 High Efficiency Single-Phase Motors

Single-phase fractional-horsepower alternating-current motors shall be high efficiency types corresponding to the applications listed in NEMA MG 11. In exception, for motor-driven equipment with a minimum seasonal or overall efficiency rating, such as a SEER rating, provide equipment with motor to meet the overall system rating indicated.

2.16.2 Premium Efficiency Polyphase Motors

Polyphase motors shall be selected based on high efficiency characteristics relative to typical characteristics and applications as listed in NEMA MG 10. In addition, continuous rated, polyphase squirrel-cage medium induction motors shall meet the requirements for premium efficiency electric motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1, including the NEMA full load efficiency ratings. In exception, for motor-driven equipment with a minimum seasonal or overall efficiency rating, such as a SEER rating, provide equipment with motor to meet the overall system rating indicated.

2.16.3 Motor Sizes

Provide size for duty to be performed, not exceeding the full-load



nameplate current rating when driven equipment is operated at specified capacity under most severe conditions likely to be encountered. When motor size provided differs from size indicated or specified, make adjustments to wiring, disconnect devices, and branch circuit protection to accommodate equipment actually provided. Provide controllers for motors rated 1-hp and above with electronic phase-voltage monitors designed to protect motors from phase-loss, undervoltage, and overvoltage. Provide protection for motors from immediate restart by a time adjustable restart relay.

2.16.4 Wiring and Conduit

Provide internal wiring for components of packaged equipment as an integral part of the equipment. Provide power wiring and conduit for field-installed equipment, and motor control equipment forming part of motor control centers, the conduit and wiring connecting such centers, assemblies, or other power sources to equipment as specified herein. Power wiring and conduit shall conform to the requirements specified herein. Control wiring shall be provided under, and conform to the requirements of the section specifying the associated equipment.

2.17 MOTOR CONTROLLERS

UL 508, NEMA ICS 1, and NEMA ICS 2. Controllers shall have thermal overload protection in each phase and shall have one spare normally open and one spare normally closed auxiliary contact. Provide controllers for motors rated 1-hp and above with electronic phase-voltage monitors designed to protect motors from phase-loss, undervoltage, and overvoltage. Provide protection for motors from immediate restart by a time adjustable restart relay. Magnetic-type motor controllers shall have undervoltage protection when used with momentary-contact pushbutton stations or switches and shall have undervoltage release when used with maintained-contact pushbutton stations or switches. When used with pressure, float, or similar automatic-type or maintained-contact switch, controller shall have hand/off/automatic selector switch. Connections to selector switch shall be such that only normal automatic regulatory control devices are bypassed when switch is in "hand" position. Safety control devices, such as low and high pressure cutouts, high temperature cutouts, and motor overload protective devices, shall be connected in motor control circuit in "hand" and "automatic" positions. Control circuit connections to hand/off/automatic selector switch or to more than one automatic regulatory control device shall be made in accordance with indicated or manufacturer's approved wiring diagram. Selector switch shall have means for locking in any position. For each motor not in sight of controller or where controller disconnecting means is not in sight of motor location and driven machinery location, controller disconnecting means shall be capable of being locked in open position. As an alternative, provide a manually operated, lockable, nonfused switch which disconnects motor from supply source within sight of motor. Overload protective devices shall provide adequate protection to motor windings; be thermal inverse-time-limit type; and include manual reset-type pushbutton on outside of motor controller case. Cover of combination motor controller and manual switch or circuit breaker shall be interlocked with operating handle of switch or circuit breaker so that cover cannot be opened unless handle of switch or circuit breaker is in "off" position. Provide controllers in hazardous locations with classifications as indicated.

2.17.1 Control Wiring

All control wire shall be stranded tinned copper switchboard wire with



600-volt flame-retardant insulation Type SIS meeting UL 44, or Type MTW meeting UL 1063, and shall pass the VW-1 flame tests included in those standards. Hinge wire shall have Class K stranding. Current transformer secondary leads shall be not smaller than No. 10 AWG. The minimum size of control wire shall be No. 14 AWG. Power wiring for 480-volt circuits and below shall be of the same type as control wiring and the minimum size shall be No. 12 AWG. Special attention shall be given to wiring and terminal arrangement on the terminal blocks to permit the individual conductors of each external cable to be terminated on adjacent terminal points.

2.17.2 Control Circuit Terminal Blocks

NEMA ICS 4. Control circuit terminal blocks for control wiring shall be molded or fabricated type with barriers, rated not less than 600 volts. The terminals shall be removable binding, fillister or washer head screw type, or of the stud type with contact and locking nuts. The terminals shall be not less than No. 10 in size and shall have sufficient length and space for connecting at least two indented terminals for 10 AWG conductors to each terminal. The terminal arrangement shall be subject to the approval of the Contracting Officer and not less than four (4) spare terminals or 10 percent, whichever is greater, shall be provided on each block or group of blocks. Modular, pull apart, terminal blocks will be acceptable provided they are of the channel or rail-mounted type. The Contractor shall submit data showing that the proposed alternate will accommodate the specified number of wires, are of adequate current-carrying capacity, and are constructed to assure positive contact between current-carrying parts.

2.17.2.1 Types of Terminal Blocks

a. Short-Circuiting Type: Short-circuiting type terminal blocks shall be furnished for all current transformer secondary leads and shall have provision for shorting together all leads from each current transformer without first opening any circuit. Terminal blocks shall meet the requirements of paragraph CONTROL CIRCUIT TERMINAL BLOCKS above.

b. Load Type: Load terminal blocks rated not less than 600 volts and of adequate capacity shall be provided for the conductors for NEMA Size 3 and smaller motor controllers and for other power circuits, except those for feeder tap units. The terminals shall be of either the stud type with contact nuts and locking nuts or of the removable screw type, having length and space for at least two indented terminals of the size required on the conductors to be terminated. For conductors rated more than 50 amperes, screws shall have hexagonal heads. Conducting parts between connected terminals shall have adequate contact surface and cross-section to operate without overheating. Each connected terminal shall have the circuit designation or wire number placed on or near the terminal in permanent contrasting color.

2.17.3 Control Circuits

Control circuits shall have maximum voltage of 120 volts derived from control transformer in same enclosure. Transformers shall conform to UL 506, as applicable. Transformers, other than transformers in bridge circuits, shall have primaries wound for voltage available and secondaries wound for correct control circuit voltage. Size transformers so that 80 percent of



rated capacity equals connected load. Provide disconnect switch on primary side. One secondary lead shall be fused; other shall be grounded.

2.17.4 Enclosures for Motor Controllers

NEMA ICS 6.

2.17.5 Multiple-Speed Motor Controllers and Reversible Motor Controllers

Across-the-line-type, electrically and mechanically interlocked. Multiple-speed controllers shall have compelling relays and shall be multiple-button, station-type with pilot lights for each speed.

2.17.6 Pushbutton Stations

Provide with "start/stop" momentary contacts having one normally open and one normally closed set of contacts, and red lights to indicate when motor is running. Stations shall be heavy duty, oil-tight design.

2.17.7 Variable-Frequency Controllers

NEMA ICS 2, pulse-width-modulated, variable-frequency controller; listed and labeled as a complete unit and arranged to provide variable speed of the induction motor to be controlled by adjusting output voltage and frequency.

a. Design and Rating: Match load type such as fans, blowers, and pumps; and type of connection used between motor and load such as direct or through a powered-transmission connection. Full load output current shall be equal to or greater than the equivalent motor horsepower as listed in the NEC.

b. Output Rating: 3-phase; 6 to 60 Hz, with voltage proportional to frequency throughout voltage range for air handling motors; 66 Hz, with torque constant as speed changes for pump motors.

c. Starting Torque: 100 percent of rated torque for pump motors.

d. Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 1 percent.

e. Ambient Temperature: 0 to 40 degrees C.

f. Efficiency: 95 percent minimum at full load and 60 Hz.

g. Minimum Displacement Power Factor at Input Terminals: 95 percent.

h. Isolated control interface allows controller to follow control signal over an 11:1 speed range.

(1) Electrical Signal: 4 to 20 mA at 24 V.

i. Internal Adjustability: Include the following internal adjustment capabilities:

(1) Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum rpm.(2) Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum rpm.(3) Acceleration: 2 to 22 seconds.(4) Deceleration: 2 to 22 seconds.(5) Current Limit: 50 to 110 percent of maximum rating.



j. Self-protection and reliability features shall include the following:

(1) Input transient protection by means of surge protection.(2) Snubber networks to protect against malfunction due to system voltage transients.(3) Motor Overload Relay: Adjustable and capable of NEMA 250, Class 10 performance.(4) Notch filter to prevent operation of the controller-motor-load combination at a natural frequency of the combination.(5) Instantaneous overcurrent trip.(6) Loss-of-phase protection.(7) Reverse-phase protection.(8) Under- and overvoltage trips.(9) Overtemperature trip.(10) Short-circuit protection.

k. Automatic Reset/Restart: Attempt three restarts after controller fault or on return of power after an interruption and before shutting down for manual reset or fault correction. Restarting during deceleration shall not damage controller, motor, or load.

l. Status Lights: Door-mounted LED indicators shall indicate the following conditions:

(1) Power on.(2) Run.(3) Overvoltage.(4) Line fault.(5) Overcurrent.(6) External fault.

m. Panel-Mounted Operator Station: Start-stop and auto-manual selector switches with manual selector switches with manual speed control potentiometer and elapsed time meter.

n. Indicating Devices: Meters or digital readout devices and selector switch, mounted flush in controller door and connected to indicate controller output current, voltage, and frequency.

o. Integral Disconnecting Means: NEMA AB 1, molded-case switch.

p. Logic control boards shall be interchangeable from 5 to 400 HP.

q. Keypad operation with English language display. Fault condition displayed in English language, not by letter code.

r. Linear or "S" curve acceleration or deceleration, individually programmable.

s. Provide one set of normally open and one set of normally closed auxiliary contacts with programmable state.

2.17.8 Pilot and Indicating Lights

Provide LED cluster lamps.



2.18 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS (MOTOR RATED SWITCHES)

Single pole designed for flush or surface mounting as indicated with overload protection and pilot lights.

2.18.1 Pilot Lights

Provide yoke-mounted, seven element LED cluster light module. Color shall be red in accordance with NEMA ICS 2.

2.19 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS UL 845, NEMA ICS 2. Wiring shall be Class I, Type B, in NEMA Type 1 enclosure. Arrange busing so that control center can be expanded from both ends. Interconnecting wires shall be copper. Terminal blocks shall be plug-in-type so that controllers may be removed without disconnecting individual control wiring.

2.19.1 Bus Systems

Provide the following bus systems. Power bus shall be braced to withstand fault current as indicated. Wiring troughs shall be isolated from horizontal and vertical bus bars.

2.19.1.1 Horizontal and Vertical Buses

Horizontal and vertical buses shall have continuous current rating as indicated. Horizontal and vertical buses shall be copper silver-plated.

2.19.1.2 Ground Bus

Copper ground bus shall be provided full width of motor control center and shall be equipped with necessary lugs.

2.19.1.3 Neutral Bus

Insulated neutral bus shall be provided continuous through the motor control center; neutral shall be 50 percent rated. Lugs of appropriate capacity shall be provided, as required.

2.19.2 Motor Disconnecting Devices and Controllers

Shall comply with paragraph COMBINATION MOTOR CONTROLLERS.

2.19.3 Combination Motor Controllers

UL 508 and other requirements in paragraph, MOTOR CONTROLLERS. Controller shall employ molded case circuit breaker. Circuit breakers for combination controllers shall be thermal magnetic.

2.20 LOCKOUT REQUIREMENTS

Provide disconnecting means capable of being locked out for machines and other equipment to prevent unexpected startup or release of stored energy in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.147. Mechanical isolation of machines and other equipment shall be in accordance with requirements of Division 23, "Mechanical."



2.21 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM

Provide system of telecommunications wire-supporting structures (pathway), including: outlet boxes, conduits with pull wires, wireways, cable trays, and other accessories for telecommunications outlets and pathway in accordance with TIA/EIA-569-A and as specified herein. Additional telecommunications requirements are specified in Section 27 10 00, BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM.

2.22 COMMUNITY ANTENNA TELEVISION (CATV) SYSTEM

2.22.1 CATV Outlets

Provide flush mounted, 75-ohm, F-type connector outlet rated from 5 to 1000 MHz in standard electrical outlet boxes with isolation barrier with mounting frame.

2.22.2 CATV Faceplates

Provide modular faceplates for mounting of CATV Outlets. Faceplate color shall match outlet and switch coverplates.

2.22.3 Backboards

Coordinate CATV backboard requirements with telecommunications backboard requirements as specified in Section 27 10 00, BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING.

2.23 GROUNDING AND BONDING EQUIPMENT

2.23.1 Ground Rods

UL 467. Ground rods shall be copper-clad steel, with minimum diameter of 3/4 inch and minimum length of 10 feet.

2.23.2 Ground Bus

A copper ground bus shall be provided in the electrical equipment rooms as indicated.

2.23.3 Telecommunications Grounding Busbar

Provide corrosion-resistant grounding busbar suitable for indoor installation in accordance with TIA J-STD-607-A. Busbars shall be electro-tin-plated for reduced contact resistance. If not plated, the busbar shall be cleaned prior to fastening the conductors to the busbar, and an anti-oxidant shall be applied to the contact area to control corrosion and reduce contact resistance. Provide a telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB) in the telecommunications equipment room (TER) and a (TGB) in all other telecommunications rooms, equipment rooms, entrance facility, and SIPRNET Room. The telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB) and the telecommunications grounding busbar (TGB) shall be sized in accordance with the immediate application requirements and with consideration of future growth. Provide telecommunications grounding busbars with the following:

a. Predrilled copper busbar provided with holes for use with standard sized lugs,



b. Minimum dimensions of 0.25 in thick x 4 in wide for the TMGB and 2 in wide for TGBs with length of 24 inches.

c. Listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory.

2.24 HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS

Electrical materials, equipment, and devices for installation in hazardous locations, as defined by NFPA 70, shall be specifically approved by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., or Factory Mutual for particular "Class," "Division," and "Group" of hazardous locations involved. Boundaries and classifications of hazardous locations shall be as indicated. Equipment in hazardous locations shall comply with UL 877 for circuit breakers, UL 886 for outlet boxes and fittings, UL 1010 for receptacles and UL 674 for motors.

2.25 MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE

Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.

2.26 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES

ASTM D 709. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified or as indicated on the drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and, when applicable, the position. Nameplates shall be melamine plastic, 0.125 inch thick, white with black center core. Surface shall be matte finish. Corners shall be square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be one by 2.5 inches. Lettering shall be a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal block style.

2.27 WARNING SIGNS

Provide warning signs for flash protection in accordance with NFPA 70E and NEMA Z535.4 for switchboards, panelboards, and motor control centers. Provide field installed signs to warn qualified persons of potential electric arc flash hazards when warning signs are not provided by the manufacturer. The marking shall be clearly visible to qualified persons before examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance of the equipment.

2.28 FIRESTOPPING MATERIALS

Provide firestopping around electrical penetrations in accordance with Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.

2.29 WIREWAYS

UL 870. Material shall be steel epoxy painted 16 gauge for heights and depths up to 6 by 6 inches, and 14 gauge for heights and depths up to 12 by 12 inches. Provide in length required for the application with screw- cover NEMA 1 enclosure per NEMA ICS 6.

2.30 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES

Provide parallel type surge protective devices which comply with UL 1449 at the service entrance. Provide surge protectors in a NEMA 1 enclosure per NEMA ICS 6. Provide the following modes of protection:



FOR SINGLE PHASE AND THREE PHASE WYE CONNECTED SYSTEMS- Each phase to neutral ( L-N ) Neutral to ground ( N-G ) Phase to ground ( L-G )

Surge protective devices at the service entrance shall have a minimum surge current rating of 80,000 amperes per mode minimum. The maximum line to neutral (L-N) Suppressed Voltage Rating (SVR) shall be:

500V for 208Y/120V, three phase system 900V for 480Y/277V, three phase system

The minimum MCOV (Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage) rating shall be:

300/150V for 208Y/120V, three phase system 600/320V for 480Y/277V, three phase system

EMI/RFI filtering shall be provided for each mode with the capability to attenuate high frequency noise. Minimum attenuation shall be 20db.

2.31 FACTORY APPLIED FINISH

Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance test and the additional requirements as specified herein. Interior and exterior steel surfaces of equipment enclosures shall be thoroughly cleaned and then receive a rust-inhibitive phosphatizing or equivalent treatment prior to painting. Exterior surfaces shall be free from holes, seams, dents, weld marks, loose scale or other imperfections. Interior surfaces shall receive not less than one coat of corrosion-resisting paint in accordance with the manufacturer's standard practice. Exterior surfaces shall be primed, filled where necessary, and given not less than two coats baked enamel with semigloss finish. Equipment located indoors shall be ANSI Light Gray. Provide manufacturer's coatings for touch-up work and as specified in paragraph FIELD APPLIED PAINTING.

2.32 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

2.32.1 Transformer Factory Tests

Submittal shall include routine NEMA ST 20 transformer test results on each transformer and also contain the results of NEMA "design" and "prototype" tests that were made on transformers electrically and mechanically equal to those specified.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Electrical installations, including weatherproof and hazardous locations and ducts, plenums and other air-handling spaces, shall conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 and to requirements specified herein.

3.1.1 Underground Service

Underground service conductors and associated conduit shall be continuous from service entrance equipment to outdoor power system connection.



3.1.2 Hazardous Locations

Work in hazardous locations, as defined by NFPA 70, shall be performed in strict accordance with NFPA 70 for particular "Class," "Division," and "Group" of hazardous locations involved. Provide conduit and cable seals where required by NFPA 70. Conduit shall have tapered threads.

3.1.3 Service Entrance Identification

Service entrance disconnect devices, switches, and enclosures shall be labeled and identified as such.

3.1.4 Wiring Methods

Provide insulated conductors installed in rigid steel conduit, IMC, rigid nonmetallic conduit, or EMT, except where specifically indicated or specified otherwise or required by NFPA 70 to be installed otherwise. Grounding conductor shall be separate from electrical system neutral conductor. Provide insulated green equipment grounding conductor for circuit(s) installed in conduit and raceways. Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2 inch in diameter for low voltage lighting and power circuits. Conduit which penetrates fire-rated walls, fire-rated partitions, or fire-rated floors shall be firestopped in accordance with Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.

3.1.4.1 Pull Wire

Install pull wires in empty conduits. Pull wire shall be plastic having minimum 200-pound force tensile strength. Leave minimum 36 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.

3.1.5 Conduit Installation

Unless indicated otherwise, conceal conduit under floor slabs and within finished walls, ceilings, and floors. Keep conduit minimum 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot water pipes. Install conduit parallel with or at right angles to ceilings, walls, and structural members where located above accessible ceilings and where conduit will be visible after completion of project.

3.1.5.1 Restrictions Applicable to EMT

a. Do not install underground.

b. Do not encase in concrete, mortar, grout, or other cementitious materials.

c. Do not use in areas subject to severe physical damage including but not limited to equipment rooms where moving or replacing equipment could physically damage the EMT.

d. Do not use in hazardous areas.

e. Do not use outdoors.

f. Do not use in fire pump rooms.

g. Do not use when the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the



effects of High-altitude Electromagnetic Pulse (HEMP).

3.1.5.2 Restrictions Applicable to Nonmetallic Conduit

a. PVC Schedule 40 and PVC Schedule 80

(1) Do not use in areas where subject to severe physical damage, including but not limited to, mechanical equipment rooms, electrical equipment rooms, and other such areas.

(2) Do not use in hazardous (classified) areas.

(3) Do not use in fire pump rooms.

(4) Do not use in penetrating fire-rated walls or partitions, or fire-rated floors.

(5) Do not use above grade, except where allowed in this section for rising through floor slab or indicated otherwise.

(6) Do not use when the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the effects of High-altitude Electromagnetic Pulse (HEMP).

3.1.5.3 Restrictions Applicable to Flexible Conduit

Use only as specified in paragraph FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS. Do not use when the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the effects of High-altitude Electromagnetic Pulse (HEMP).

3.1.5.4 Service Entrance Conduit, Underground

PVC, Type-EPC 40, galvanized rigid steel or steel IMC. Underground portion shall be encased in minimum of 3 inches of concrete and shall be installed minimum 18 inches below slab or grade.

3.1.5.5 Underground Conduit Other Than Service Entrance

Plastic-coated rigid steel; plastic-coated steel IMC; PVC, Type EPC-40. Plastic coating shall extend minimum 6 inches above floor.

3.1.5.6 Conduit Installed Under Floor Slabs

Conduit run under floor slab shall be located a minimum of 12 inches below the vapor barrier. Seal around conduits at penetrations thru vapor barrier.

3.1.5.7 Conduit Through Floor Slabs

Where conduits rise through floor slabs, curved portion of bends shall not be visible above finished slab.

3.1.5.8 Conduit Installed in Concrete Floor Slabs

Rigid steel; steel IMC; or PVC, Type EPC-40. Locate so as not to adversely affect structural strength of slabs. Install conduit within middle one-third of concrete slab. Do not stack conduits. Space conduits horizontally not closer than three diameters, except at cabinet locations. Curved portions of bends shall not be visible above finish slab. Increase slab thickness as necessary to provide minimum one inch cover over conduit. Where embedded conduits cross building and/or expansion joints,



provide suitable watertight expansion/deflection fittings and bonding jumpers. Expansion/deflection fittings shall allow horizontal and vertical movement of raceway. Conduit larger than one inch trade size shall be parallel with or at right angles to main reinforcement; when at right angles to reinforcement, conduit shall be close to one of supports of slab. Where nonmetallic conduit is used, raceway shall be converted to plastic coated rigid steel or plastic coated steel IMC before rising above floor, unless specifically indicated.

3.1.5.9 Stub-Ups

Provide conduits stubbed up through concrete floor for connection to free-standing equipment with adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs, set flush with finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment in rigid steel conduit, except that flexible metal conduit may be used 6 inches above floor. Where no equipment connections are made, install screwdriver-operated threaded flush plugs in conduit end.

3.1.5.10 Conduit Support

Support conduit by pipe straps, wall brackets, hangers, or ceiling trapeze. Fasten by wood screws to wood; by toggle bolts on hollow masonry units; by concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or brick; and by machine screws, welded threaded studs, or spring-tension clamps on steel work. Threaded C-clamps may be used on rigid steel conduit only. Do not weld conduits or pipe straps to steel structures. Load applied to fasteners shall not exceed one-fourth proof test load. Fasteners attached to concrete ceiling shall be vibration resistant and shock-resistant. Holes cut to depth of more than 1 1/2 inches in reinforced concrete beams or to depth of more than 3/4 inch in concrete joints shall not cut main reinforcing bars. Fill unused holes. In partitions of light steel construction, use sheet metal screws. In suspended-ceiling construction, run conduit above ceiling. Do not support conduit by ceiling support system. Conduit and box systems shall be supported independently of both (a) tie wires supporting ceiling grid system, and (b) ceiling grid system into which ceiling panels are placed. Supporting means shall not be shared between electrical raceways and mechanical piping or ducts. Installation shall be coordinated with above-ceiling mechanical systems to assure maximum accessibility to all systems. Spring-steel fasteners may be used for lighting branch circuit conduit supports in suspended ceilings in dry locations. Where conduit crosses building expansion joints, provide suitable watertight expansion fitting that maintains conduit electrical continuity by bonding jumpers or other means. For conduits greater than 2 1/2 inches inside diameter, provide supports to resist forces of 0.5 times the equipment weight in any direction and 1.5 times the equipment weight in the downward direction.

3.1.5.11 Directional Changes in Conduit Runs

Make changes in direction of runs with symmetrical bends or cast-metal fittings. Make field-made bends and offsets with hickey or conduit-bending machine. Do not install crushed or deformed conduits. Avoid trapped conduits. Prevent plaster, dirt, or trash from lodging in conduits, boxes, fittings, and equipment during construction. Free clogged conduits of obstructions.

3.1.5.12 Locknuts and Bushings

Fasten conduits to sheet metal boxes and cabinets with two locknuts where



required by NFPA 70, where insulated bushings are used, and where bushings cannot be brought into firm contact with the box; otherwise, use at least minimum single locknut and bushing. Locknuts shall have sharp edges for digging into wall of metal enclosures. Install bushings on ends of conduits, and provide insulating type where required by NFPA 70.

3.1.5.13 Flexible Connections

Provide flexible steel conduit between 3 and 6 feet in length for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for motors. Install flexible conduit to allow 20 percent slack. Minimum flexible steel conduit size shall be 1/2 inch diameter. Provide liquidtight flexible conduit in wet and damp locations for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, movement or motors. Provide separate ground conductor across flexible connections.

3.1.5.14 Telecommunications and Signal System Pathway

Install telecommunications pathway in accordance with TIA/EIA-569-A.

a. Horizontal Pathway: Telecommunications pathways from the work area to the telecommunications room shall be installed and cabling length requirements in accordance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. Size conduits, wireways, and cable trays in accordance with TIA/EIA-569-A and as indicated.

b. Backbone Pathway: Telecommunication pathways from the telecommunications entrance facility to telecommunications rooms, and, telecommunications equipment rooms (backbone cabling) shall be installed in accordance with TIA/EIA-569-A. Size conduits, wireways, and cable trays for telecommunications risers in accordance with TIA/EIA-569-A and as indicated.

3.1.5.15 Community Antenna Television (CATV) System Conduits

Install a system of CATV wire-supporting structures (pathway), including: outlet boxes, conduits with pull wires, cable trays, and other accessories for CATV outlets and pathway in accordance with TIA/EIA-569-A. Distribution system shall be star topology with empty conduit and pullwire from each outlet to the headend equipment location.

3.1.6 Cable Tray Installation

Install and ground in accordance with NFPA 70. In addition, install and ground telecommunications cable tray in accordance with TIA/EIA-569-A, and TIA J-STD-607-A. Install cable trays parallel with or at right angles to ceilings, walls, and structural members. Support in accordance with manufacturer recommendations but at not more than 6 foot intervals. Contact surfaces of aluminum connections shall be coated with an antioxidant compound prior to assembly. Adjacent cable tray sections shall be bonded together by connector plates of an identical type as the cable tray sections. For grounding of cable tray system provide No. 2 AWG bare copper wire throughout cable tray system, and bond to each section, except use No. 1/0 aluminum wire if cable tray is aluminum. Terminate cable trays 6 inches from both sides of smoke and fire partitions. Provide rectangular, modular, fire rated wall penetration assemblies using either integral, sliding covers or removable plugs. Provide usable penetration area equal to cable tray cross section. Penetrations shall be firestopped in accordance with Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING. Provide supports to



resist forces of 0.5 times the equipment weight in any direction and 1.5 times the equipment weight in the downward direction.

3.1.7 Boxes, Outlets, and Supports

Provide boxes in wiring and raceway systems wherever required for pulling of wires, making connections, and mounting of devices or fixtures. Boxes for metallic raceways shall be cast-metal, hub-type when located in wet locations, when surface mounted on outside of exterior surfaces, when surface mounted on interior walls exposed up to 7 feet above floors and walkways, or when installed in hazardous areas and when specifically indicated. Boxes in other locations shall be sheet steel, except that aluminum boxes may be used with aluminum conduit, and nonmetallic boxes may be used with nonmetallic conduit system. Each box shall have volume required by NFPA 70 for number of conductors enclosed in box. Boxes for mounting lighting fixtures shall be minimum 4 inches square, or octagonal, except that smaller boxes may be installed as required by fixture configurations, as approved. Boxes for use in masonry-block or tile walls shall be square-cornered, tile-type, or standard boxes having square-cornered, tile-type covers. Provide gaskets for cast-metal boxes installed in wet locations and boxes installed flush with outside of exterior surfaces. Provide separate boxes for flush or recessed fixtures when required by fixture terminal operating temperature; fixtures shall be readily removable for access to boxes unless ceiling access panels are provided. Support boxes and pendants for surface-mounted fixtures on suspended ceilings independently of ceiling supports. Fasten boxes and supports with wood screws on wood, with bolts and expansion shields on concrete or brick, with toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, and with machine screws or welded studs on steel. Threaded studs driven in by powder charge and provided with lockwashers and nuts may be used in lieu of wood screws, expansion shields, or machine screws. In open overhead spaces, cast boxes threaded to raceways need not be separately supported except where used for fixture support; support sheet metal boxes directly from building structure or by bar hangers. Where bar hangers are used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of box, and support raceway with approved-type fastener maximum 24 inches from box. When penetrating reinforced concrete members, avoid cutting reinforcing steel.

3.1.7.1 Boxes

Boxes for use with raceway systems shall be minimum 1 1/2 inches deep, except where shallower boxes required by structural conditions are approved. Boxes for other than lighting fixture outlets shall be minimum 4 inches square, except that 4 by 2 inch boxes may be used where only one raceway enters outlet. Telecommunications outlets shall be a minimum of 4 inches square by 2 1/8 inches deep, except for wall mounted telephones. Mount outlet boxes flush in finished walls.

3.1.7.2 Pull Boxes

Construct of at least minimum size required by NFPA 70 of code-gauge aluminum or galvanized sheet steel, except where cast-metal boxes are required in locations specified herein. Provide boxes with screw-fastened covers. Where several feeders pass through common pull box, tag feeders to indicate clearly electrical characteristics, circuit number, and panel designation.



3.1.7.3 Extension Rings

Extension rings are not permitted for new construction. Use only on existing boxes in concealed conduit systems where wall is furred out for new finish.

3.1.8 Mounting Heights

Mount panelboards, enclosed circuit breakers, motor controller and disconnecting switches so height of operating handle at its highest position is maximum 78 inches above floor. Mount lighting switches 48 inches above finished floor. Mount receptacles and telecommunications outlets 15 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. Wall-mounted telecommunications outlets shall be mounted at height 60 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. Mount other devices as indicated. Measure mounting heights of wiring devices and outlets in non-hazardous areas to center of device or outlet. Measure mounting heights of receptacle outlet boxes in the hazardous area to the bottom of the outlet box.

3.1.9 Conductor Identification

Provide conductor identification within each enclosure where tap, splice, or termination is made. For conductors No. 6 AWG and smaller diameter, color coding shall be by factory-applied, color-impregnated insulation. For conductors No. 4 AWG and larger diameter, color coding shall be by plastic-coated, self-sticking markers; colored nylon cable ties and plates; or heat shrink-type sleeves. Identify control circuit terminations in accordance with Section 23 09 23, DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC AND OTHER LOCAL BUILDING SYSTEMS. Provide telecommunications system conductor identification as specified in Section 27 10 00, BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEMS.

3.1.9.1 Marking Strips

White or other light-colored plastic marking strips, fastened by screws to each terminal block, shall be provided for wire designations. The wire numbers shall be made with permanent ink. The marking strips shall be reversible to permit marking both sides, or two marking strips shall be furnished with each block. Marking strips shall accommodate the two sets of wire numbers. Each device to which a connection is made shall be assigned a device designation in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 and each device terminal to which a connection is made shall be marked with a distinct terminal marking corresponding to the wire designation used on the Contractor's schematic and connection diagrams. The wire (terminal point) designations used on the Contractor's wiring diagrams and printed on terminal block marking strips may be according to the Contractor's standard practice; however, additional wire and cable designations for identification of remote (external) circuits shall be provided for the Government's wire designations. Prints of the marking strips drawings submitted for approval will be so marked and returned to the Contractor for addition of the designations to the terminal strips and tracings, along with any rearrangement of points required.

3.1.10 Splices

Make splices in accessible locations. Make splices in conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller diameter with insulated, pressure-type connector. Make splices in conductors No. 8 AWG and larger diameter with solderless



connector, and cover with insulation material equivalent to conductor insulation.

3.1.11 Covers and Device Plates

Install with edges in continuous contact with finished wall surfaces without use of mats or similar devices. Plaster fillings are not permitted. Install plates with alignment tolerance of 1/16 inch. Use of sectional-type device plates are not permitted. Provide gasket for plates installed in wet locations.

3.1.12 Electrical Penetrations

Seal openings around electrical penetrations through fire resistance-rated walls, partitions, floors, or ceilings in accordance with Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.

3.1.13 Grounding and Bonding

Provide In accordance with NFPA 70 and NFPA 780. Ground exposed, non-current-carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment, metallic raceway systems, grounding conductor in metallic and nonmetallic raceways, telecommunications system grounds, and neutral conductor of wiring systems. Make ground connection at main service equipment, and extend grounding conductor to point of entrance of metallic water service. Make connection to water pipe by suitable ground clamp or lug connection to plugged tee. If flanged pipes are encountered, make connection with lug bolted to street side of flanged connection. Supplement metallic water service grounding system with additional made electrode in compliance with NFPA 70. Make ground connection to driven ground rods on exterior of building. Interconnect all grounding media in or on the structure to provide a common ground potential. This shall include lightning protection, electrical service, telecommunications system grounds, as well as underground metallic piping systems. Interconnection to the gas line shall be made on the customer's side of the meter. Use main size lightning conductors for interconnecting these grounding systems to the lightning protection system. In addition to the requirements specified herein, provide telecommunications grounding in accordance with TIA J-STD-607-A. Where ground fault protection is employed, ensure that connection of ground and neutral does not interfere with correct operation of fault protection.

3.1.13.1 Ground Rods

Provide cone pointed ground rods. The resistance to ground shall be measured using the fall-of-potential method described in IEEE Std 81. The maximum resistance of a driven ground shall not exceed 25 ohms under normally dry conditions. If this resistance cannot be obtained with a single rod, additional rods not less than 6 feet on centers, to be added. If the resultant resistance exceeds 25 ohms measured not less than 48 hours after rainfall, notify the Contracting Officer who will decide on the number of ground rods to add.

3.1.13.2 Grounding Connections

Make grounding connections which are buried or otherwise normally inaccessible, except specifically those connections for which access for periodic testing is required, by exothermic weld or compression connector.

a. Make exothermic welds strictly in accordance with the weld



manufacturer's written recommendations. Welds which are "puffed up" or which show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable. Mechanical connectors are not required at exothermic welds.

b. Make compression connections using a hydraulic compression tool to provide the correct circumferential pressure. Tools and dies shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. An embossing die code or other standard method shall provide visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on the ground wire.

3.1.13.3 Ground Bus

A copper ground bus shall be provided in the electrical equipment rooms as indicated. Noncurrent-carrying metal parts of transformer neutrals and other electrical equipment shall be effectively grounded by bonding to the ground bus. The ground bus shall be bonded to both the entrance ground, and to a ground rod or rods as specified above having the upper ends terminating approximately 4 inches above the floor. Connections and splices shall be of the brazed, welded, bolted, or pressure-connector type, except that pressure connectors or bolted connections shall be used for connections to removable equipment.

3.1.13.4 Resistance

Maximum resistance-to-ground of grounding system shall not exceed 5 ohms under dry conditions. Where resistance obtained exceeds 5 ohms, contact Contracting Officer for further instructions.

3.1.13.5 Telecommunications System

Provide telecommunications grounding in accordance with the following:

a. Telecommunications Grounding Busbars: Provide a telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB) in the entrance facility (EF). The TMGB shall be as close to the electrical service entrance grounding connection as practicable. Provide a telecommunications grounding busbar (TGB) in all other telecommunications equipment rooms (TER), telecommunications rooms (TR), telecommunications areas, and the SIPRNET Cafe. Telecommunications grounding busbars shall be installed to maintain clearances as required by NFPA 70 and shall be insulated from its support. A minimum of 2 inches separation from the wall is recommended to allow access to the rear of the busbar and the mounting height shall be adjusted to accommodate overhead or underfloor cable routing.

b. Telecommunications Bonding Conductors: Provide main telecommunications service equipment ground consisting of separate bonding conductor for telecommunications, between the TMGB and readily accessible grounding connection of the electrical service. Grounding and bonding conductors should not be placed in ferrous metallic conduit. If it is necessary to place grounding and bonding conductors in ferrous metallic conduit that exceeds 3 feet in length, the conductors shall be bonded to each end of the conduit using a grounding bushing or a No. 6 AWG conductor, minimum.

c. Telecommunications Grounding Connections: Telecommunications



grounding connections to the TMGB or TGB shall utilize listed compression two-hole lugs, exothermic welding, suitable and equivalent one hole non-twisting lugs, or other irreversible compression type connections. All metallic pathways, cabinets, and racks for telecommunications cabling and interconnecting hardware located within the same room or space as the TMGB or TGB shall be bonded to the TMGB or TGB respectively. In a metal frame (structural steel) building, where the steel framework is readily accessible within the room; each TMGB and TGB shall be bonded to the vertical steel metal frame using a minimum No. 6 AWG conductor. Where the metal frame is external to the room and readily accessible, the metal frame shall be bonded to the TGB or TMGB with a minimum No. 6 AWG conductor. When practicable because of shorter distances and, where horizontal steel members are permanently electrically bonded to vertical column members, the TGB may be bonded to these horizontal members in lieu of the vertical column members. All connectors used for bonding to the metal frame of a building shall be listed for the intended purpose.

3.1.14 Equipment Connections

Provide power wiring for the connection of motors and control equipment under this section of the specification. Except as otherwise specifically noted or specified, automatic control wiring, control devices, and protective devices within the control circuitry are not included in this section of the specifications but shall be provided under the section specifying the associated equipment.

3.1.15 Elevator

Provide circuit to line terminals of elevator controller, and disconnect switch on line side of controller, outlet for control power, outlet receptacle and work light at midheight of elevator shaft, and work light and outlet receptacle in elevator pit.

3.1.16 Government-Furnished Equipment

Contractor shall make connections to Government-furnished equipment to make equipment operate as intended, including providing miscellaneous items such as plugs, receptacles, wire, cable, conduit, flexible conduit, and outlet boxes or fittings.

3.1.17 Repair of Existing Work

3.1.17.1 Workmanship

Lay out work in advance. Exercise care where cutting, channeling, chasing, or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, or other surfaces is necessary for proper installation, support, or anchorage of conduit, raceways, or other electrical work. Repair damage to buildings, piping, and equipment using skilled craftsmen of trades involved.

3.1.17.2 Continuation of Service

Maintain continuity of existing circuits of equipment to remain. Existing circuits of equipment shall remain energized. Circuits which are to remain but were disturbed during demolition shall have circuits wiring and power restored back to original condition.



3.1.18 Watthour Meters

NEMA C12.1.

3.1.19 Surge Protective Devices

Connect the surge protective devices in parallel to the power source, keeping the conductors as short and straight as practically possible.

3.2 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING

Provide number, location, and letter designation of nameplates as indicated. Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two sheet-metal screws or two rivets.

3.3 WARNING SIGN MOUNTING

Provide the number of signs required to be readable from each accessible side. Space the signs in accordance with NFPA 70E.

3.4 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING

Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. Painting shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00, PAINTS AND COATINGS.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

Furnish test equipment and personnel and submit written copies of test results. Give Contracting Officer 5 working days notice prior to each test.

3.5.1 Devices Subject to Manual Operation

Each device subject to manual operation shall be operated at least five times, demonstrating satisfactory operation each time.

3.5.2 600-Volt Wiring Test

Test wiring rated 600 volt and less to verify that no short circuits or accidental grounds exist. Perform insulation resistance tests on wiring No. 6 AWG and larger diameter using instrument which applies voltage of approximately 500 volts to provide direct reading of resistance. Minimum resistance shall be 250,000 ohms.

3.5.3 Transformer Tests

Perform the standard, not optional, tests in accordance with the Inspection and Test Procedures for transformers, dry type, air-cooled, 600 volt and below; as specified in NETA ATS. Measure primary and secondary voltages for proper tap settings. Tests need not be performed by a recognized independent testing firm or independent electrical consulting firm.

3.5.4 Ground-Fault Receptacle Test

Test ground-fault receptacles with a "load" (such as a plug in light) to verify that the "line" and "load" leads are not reversed.



3.5.5 Grounding System Test

Test grounding system to ensure continuity, and that resistance to ground is not excessive. Test each ground rod for resistance to ground before making connections to rod; tie grounding system together and test for resistance to ground. Make resistance measurements in dry weather, not earlier than 48 hours after rainfall. Submit written results of each test to Contracting Officer, and indicate location of rods as well as resistance and soil conditions at time measurements were made.

3.5.6 Watthour Meter

a. Visual and mechanical inspection

(1) Examine for broken parts, shipping damage, and tightness of connections.

(2) Verify that meter type, scales, and connections are in accordance with approved shop drawings.

b. Electrical tests

(1) Determine accuracy of meter.

(2) Calibrate watthour meters to one-half percent.

(3) Verify that correct multiplier has been placed on face of meter, where applicable.

-- End of Section --



SECTION 26 23 00

SWITCHBOARDS07/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)

ANSI C57.13 (1993) IEEE Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers


ASTM A 123/A 123M (2008) Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

ASTM A 153/A 153M (2005) Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware

ASTM A 653/A 653M (2008) Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process

ASTM A 780 (2001; R 2006) Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings

ASTM D 1535 (2008) Specifying Color by the Munsell System



IEEE C12.16 (1991) Solid-State Electricity Meters


IEEE C37.90.1 (2002; Errata 2003) Surge Withstand Capability (SWC) Tests for Relays and Relay Systems Associated with Electric Power Apparatus

IEEE C57.12.28 (2005) Standard for Pad-Mounted Equipment - Enclosure Integrity



IEEE C57.13 (2008) Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers


IEEE Std 81 (1983) Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System (Part 1)Normal Measurements

INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION (NETA)

NETA ATS (2003) Acceptance Testing Specifications


NEMA C12.1 (2008) Electric Meters; Code for Electricity Metering


NEMA LI 1 (1998) Industrial Laminated Thermosetting Products

NEMA PB 2 (2006) Deadfront Distribution Switchboards

NEMA PB 2.1 (2007) General Instructions for Proper Handling, Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Deadfront Distribution Switchboards Rated 600 Volts or Less





UL 489 (2002; Rev thru Jun 2006) Standard for Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures

UL 891 (2005) Dead-Front Switchboards

1.2 DEFINITIONS

a. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, shall be as defined in IEEE Std 100.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When



used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Switchboard Drawings; G

Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated installation. Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment devices. Submittals shall include the nameplate data, size, and capacity. Submittals shall also include applicable federal, military, industry, and technical society publication references.

SD-03 Product Data

Switchboard; G

SD-06 Test Reports

Switchboard design tests; G

Switchboard production tests; G

Acceptance checks and tests; G


Switchboard Operation and Maintenance, Data Package 5; G

SD-11 Closeout Submittals

Assembled Operation and Maintenance Manuals; G

Equipment Test Schedule; G

Request for Settings; G


1.4.1 Switchboard Product Data

Each submittal shall include manufacturer's information for each component, device and accessory provided with the switchboard including:

a. Circuit breaker type, interrupting rating, and trip devices, including available settings

b. Manufacturer's instruction manuals and published time-current curves (on full size logarithmic paper) of the main secondary breaker and largest secondary feeder device.



1.4.2 Switchboard Drawings

Drawings shall include, but are not limited to the following:

a. One-line diagram including breakers, fuses, current transformers, and meters

b. Outline drawings including front elevation, section views, footprint, and overall dimensions

c. Bus configuration including dimensions and ampere ratings of bus bars

d. Markings and NEMA nameplate data

e. Circuit breaker type, interrupting rating, and trip devices, including available settings

f. Three-line diagrams and elementary diagrams and wiring diagrams with terminals identified, and indicating prewired interconnections between items of equipment and the interconnection between the items.

g. Manufacturer's instruction manuals and published time-current curves (on full size logarithmic paper) of the main secondary breaker and largest secondary feeder device. These shall be used by the designer of record to provide breaker settings that will ensure protection and coordination are achieved.

h. Provisions for future extension.






Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is



furnished.



1.5 MAINTENANCE

1.5.1 Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Data

Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.

1.5.2 Assembled Operation and Maintenance Manuals

Manuals shall be assembled and bound securely in durable, hard covered, water resistant binders. The manuals shall be assembled and indexed in the following order with a table of contents. The contents of the assembled operation and maintenance manuals shall be as follows:

a. Manufacturer's O&M information required by the paragraph entitled "SD-10, Operation and Maintenance Data".

b. Catalog data required by the paragraph entitled, "SD-03, Product Data".

c. Drawings required by the paragraph entitled, "SD-02, Shop Drawings".

d. Prices for spare parts and supply list.

e. Information on metering

f. Design test reports

g. Production test reports

1.6 WARRANTY


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT COORDINATION

Products and materials not considered to be switchboards and related accessories are specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

2.2 SWITCHBOARD

NEMA PB 2 and UL 891.

2.2.1 Ratings

The voltage rating of the switchboard shall be 480Y/277 volts AC, 4-wire 3 phase. The continuous current rating of the main bus shall be as indicated. The short-circuit current rating shall be as indicated. The switchboard



shall be UL listed and labeled as service entrance equipment.

2.2.2 Construction

Switchboard shall consist of vertical sections bolted together to form a rigid assembly and shall be rear aligned. All circuit breakers shall be front accessible. Rear aligned switchboards shall have front accessible load connections. Compartmentalized switchboards shall have vertical insulating barriers between the front device section, the main bus section, and the cable compartment with full front to rear vertical insulating barriers between adjacent sections. Where indicated, "space for future" or "space" shall mean to include bus, device supports, and connections. Provide insulating barriers in accordance with NEMA LI 1, Type GPO-3, 0.25 inch minimum thickness. Apply moisture resistant coating to all rough-cut edges of barriers. Switchboard shall be completely factory engineered and assembled, including protective devices and equipment indicated with necessary interconnections, instrumentation, and control wiring.

2.2.2.1 Enclosure

The switchboard enclosure shall be a NEMA ICS 6 Type 1. Enclosure shall be bolted together with removable bolt-on side and rear covers. Front doors shall be provided with padlockable vault handles with a three point catch. Bases, frames and channels of enclosure shall be corrosion resistant and shall be fabricated of galvanized steel. Base shall include any part of enclosure that is within 3 inches of concrete pad. Galvanized steel shall be ASTM A 123/A 123M, ASTM A 653/A 653M G90 coating, and ASTM A 153/A 153M, as applicable. Galvanize after fabrication where practicable. Paint enclosure, including bases, ASTM D 1535 light gray No. 61 or No. 49. Paint coating system shall comply with IEEE C57.12.28 for galvanized steel.

2.2.2.2 Bus Bars

Bus bars shall be copper with silver-plated contact surfaces. Plating shall be a minimum of 0.0002 inch thick. Make bus connections and joints with hardened steel bolts. The through-bus shall be rated at the full ampacity of the main throughout the switchboard. Provide minimum one-quarter by 2 inch copper ground bus secured to each vertical section along the entire length of the switchboard. The neutral bus shall be rated 100 percent of the main bus continuous current rating.

2.2.2.3 Main Section

The main section shall consist of an individually mounted molded-case circuit breaker and user metering compartment.

2.2.2.4 Distribution Sections

The distribution sections shall consist of individually mounted, molded-case circuit breakers as indicated.

2.2.2.5 Handles

Handles for individually mounted devices shall be of the same design and method of external operation. Label handles prominently to indicate device ampere rating, color coded for device type. Identify ON-OFF indication by handle position and by prominent marking.



2.2.3 Protective Device

Provide main and branch protective devices as indicated.

2.2.3.1 Molded-Case Circuit Breaker

UL 489. UL listed and labeled, 100 percent rated, stationary, manually operated, low voltage molded-case circuit breaker, with a short-circuit current rating as indicated at 480 volts. Breaker frame size shall be as indicated. Series rated circuit breakers are unacceptable.

2.2.4 Watthour and Digital Meters

2.2.4.1 Advanced Electrical Metering

Electrical meters and transformers shall meet or exceed the following minimum requirements:

a. Measure quantities. Electrical meter quantities measured are Power (kilowatt), average demand over 15 minute intervals and Energy (kilowatt-hours).

b. System Accuracy. System accuracy for the meter product devices including instrument transformers shall not exceed 1% as calculated using the Root Sum Square (RSS) method and assuming normal distribution.

c. Meter Accuracy. Meter certification shall be IEEE/ANSI C12.16, Accuracy class 0.5%.

d. Communication Protocol. Meters shall communicate via either Modbus RTU or ANSI/CEA-709.lb (LonTalk) protocols or as otherwise specified.

e. Auxiliary data ports. Unless otherwise specified, electrical meters shall have a minimum of two pulse inputs for incorporation and transmission of other external meter data.

f. Surge Protection. IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1, Standard surge withstand capability (SWC) tests for relays and relay systems associated with electric power apparatus.

2.2.4.1.1 Current Transformers

Current transformers (CTs) sized properly so that the meter secondary of the transformer shall output current to ensure at least a plus or minus 0.6% accuracy of current when measured between 10% and 90% of full amperage range.

a. CTs shall not exceed 5 amps on the secondary side.

b. Burden on CTs shall not exceed rated burden for the accuracy class.

c. CTs shall be provided in split core configuration.

d. CTs shall be provided in the appropriate ranges to meet the service entrance amperage requirements.

f. For facilities with a connected load equal to or greater than 1



MVA, CT certification shall be IEC 185 or ANSI/IEEE C57.13 for 0.3% accuracy class or better. For facilities with a connected load less than 1 MVA, CTs shall revenue grade and certified per IEEE/ANSI C57.13 or IEC 185.

2.2.4.1.2 Current Sensors

Current sensors shall be sized properly for the application and provide a voltage (normally 0-2 volts) to the meter that results in at least a plus or minus 0.6% accuracy of current when measured between 10% and 90% of full amperage range.

2.2.4.1.3 Voltage or Potential Transformers (PTs)

Voltage or Potential Transformers (PTs) sized properly so that the meter secondary of the transformer shall output voltage to ensure at lest a plus or minus 0.6% accuracy of voltage when measured from zero to the IEEE/ASI C57.13 or IEC 185 specified standard burden, at the specified standard burden power factor, and at any value from 90% to 110% of rated voltage.

a. For facilities with a connected load equal to or greater than 1 MVA, PT certification shall be IEC 185 or IEEE/ANSI C57.13 for 0.3% accuracy class or better.

b. For facilities with a connected load less than 1 MVA, PTs shall be revenue grade and certified per IEEE/ANSI C57.13 or IEC 185.

c. Burden on PTs shall not exceed rated burden for accuracy class.

2.2.4.1.4 Data Storage

Unless otherwise specified, the meter must be capable of providing and storing required interval data for a minimum of 30 days.

2.2.4.1.5 Environmental Tolerances of Metering Devices

Meters shall be installed in indoors/interior locations and rates for operation and storage from 0 degrees to 50 degrees C or better and 5 to 90% relative humidity (non-condensing). Interior meters shall be provided with or installed within a NEMA 12 enclosure.

2.2.4.1.6 Advanced Metering Data Management System

Front end computer requirements are data encapsulation format shall be Extensible Markup Language (XML) and Simple Object Access Protocol (SOAP) for future output to a remote centralized meter data management system.

a. Storage of metered data for at least 2 years.

b. Display of data upon request and selectable from 1 minute to 15 minutes for kW. Display capability shall include multiple graphical formats such as data vs. time (minutes, hours, days, weeks, months, and year) comparison between metered data from two or more meters and other standard meter data.

c. Final install of front end equipment shall, at minimum, display accurate data readings for each meter in a text format. Customization of the user interface is not required. Two hardcopies and two electronic copies of detailed instructions



shall be provided for customization and integration of additional display features that are not prepared at the time of final install.

2.2.4.1.7 Expansion Capability

System expansion capability of 50 times for incremental future growth of metered data to include water, gas and steam.

2.2.4.1.8 Data Transmission Media

Data Transmission Media is LAN, Radio Frequency, or Power Lines for interface of metered data to the Advanced Metering Data Management System, whichever is most economical for the site.

2.2.4.2 Digital Meters

IEEE C37.90.1 for surge withstand. Provide true rms, plus/minus one percent accuracy, programmable, microprocessor-based meter enclosed in sealed cases with a simultaneous three line, twelve value LED display. Meters shall have 0.56 inch, minimum, LEDs. Programming shall be via a front panel display and a communication interface with a computer. Password secured programming shall be stored in non-volatile EEPROM memory. Digital communications shall be Modbus RTU protocol via a RS485 serial port. The meter shall calculate and store average max/min demand values for all readings based on a user selectable sliding window averaging period. The meter shall have programmable hi/low set limits with two Form C dry contact relays when exceeding alarm conditions. Historical trend logging capability shall include ability to store up to 100,000 data points with intervals of 1 second to 180 minutes. The unit shall also store and time stamp up to 100 programmable triggered conditions.

a. Multi-Function Meter: Meter shall simultaneously display a selected phase to neutral voltage, phase to phase voltage, percent phase to neutral voltage THD, percent phase to phase voltage THD; a selected phase current, neutral current, percent phase current THD, percent neutral current; selected total PF, kW, KVA, kVAR, FREQ, kVAh, kWh. Detected alarm conditions include over/under current, over/under voltage, over/under KVA, over/under frequency, over/under selected PF/kVAR, voltage phase reversal, voltage imbalance, reverse power, over percent THD. The meter shall have a Form C KYZ pulse output relay.

b. Power Meter: Meter shall simultaneously display Watts, VARs, and selected KVA/PF. Detected alarm conditions include over/under KVA, over/under PF, over/under VARs, over/under reverse power.

c. Volt Meter: Meter shall be selectable between simultaneous display of the three phases of phase to neutral voltages and simultaneous display of the three phases of the phase to phase voltages. Detected alarm conditions include over/under voltage, over/under voltage imbalance, over percent THD.

d. Ammeter: Meter shall simultaneously display phase A, B, and C currents. Detected alarm conditions include over/under current, over percent THD.

e. Digital Watthour Meter: Meter shall have a single selectable display for watts, total kilowatt hours (kWh) and watt demand (Wd). The meter shall have a Form C KYZ pulse output relay.



2.2.4.3 Electronic Watthour Meter

Provide a switchboard style electronic programmable watthour meter, semi-drawout, semi-flush mounted, rated for operation and storage from 0-50 degrees C or better and 5 to 90 percent relative humidity (non-condensing). Meter shall either be programmed at the factory or shall be programmed in the field. When field programming is performed, turn field programming device over to the Contracting Officer at completion of project. Meter shall be coordinated to system requirements and conform to IEEE C12.16.

a. Design: Provide meter designed for use on a 3-phase, 4-wire, 480Y/277 volt system with 3 current transformers. Include necessary KYZ pulse initiation hardware for Energy Monitoring and Control System (EMCS) as specified in Section 23 09 23 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC AND OTHER LOCAL BUILDING SYSTEMS. Meters shall communicate via either Modbus RTU or ANSI/CEA-709.1B (LonTalk) protocols.

b. Coordination: Provide meter coordinated with ratios of current transformers and transformer secondary voltage.

c. Class: 20. Form: 9S. Accuracy: +/- 0.5 percent. Finish: Class II.

d. Kilowatt-hour Register: 5 digit electronic programmable type.

e. Demand Register:

1. Meter reading multiplier: Indicate multiplier on the meter face.

2. Demand interval length: shall be programmed for 15 minutes with rolling demand up to six subintervals per interval.

f. Meter fusing: Provide a fuse block mounted in the metering compartment containing one fuse per phase to protect the voltage input to the watthour meter. Size fuses as recommended by the meter manufacturer.

g. Data encapsulation format shall be extensive mark-up language (XML) and simple object access protocol (SOAP) for future output to a remote centralized meter data management system.

2.2.5 Current Transformers (CTs)

ANSI/IEEE C57.13. Size current transformers so the meter secondary shall output current to ensure at least a plus or minus 0.6 percent accuracy of current when measured between 10 percent and 90 percent of full amperage range. CTs shall not exceed 5 amps on the secondary side and be provided in split core configurations. Burden on CTs shall not exceed rated burden for the accuracy class.

2.2.6 Potential Transformers (PTs)

Size so the meter secondary of the transformer shall output voltage to ensure at least a plus or minus 0.6 percent accuracy of voltage when measured from zero to IEEE/ANSI C57.13 specified standard burden, at the specified standard burden power factor, and at any value from 90 percent to 110 percent of rated voltage.



2.2.7 Meter Fusing

Provide a fuse block mounted in the metering compartment containing one fuse per phase to protect the voltage input to voltage sensing meters. Size fuses as recommended by the meter manufacturer.

2.2.8 Terminal Boards

Provide with engraved plastic terminal strips and screw type terminals for external wiring between components and for internal wiring between removable assemblies. Terminal boards associated with current transformers shall be short-circuiting type. Terminate conductors for current transformers with ring-tongue lugs. Terminal board identification shall be identical in similar units. External wiring shall be color coded consistently for similar terminal boards.

2.2.9 Wire Marking

Mark control and metering conductors at each end. Provide factory-installed, white, plastic tubing, heat stamped with black block type letters on factory-installed wiring. On field-installed wiring, provide white, preprinted, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) sleeves, heat stamped with black block type letters. Each sleeve shall contain a single letter or number, shall be elliptically shaped to securely grip the wire, and shall be keyed in such a manner to ensure alignment with adjacent sleeves. Provide specific wire markings using the appropriate combination of individual sleeves. Each wire marker shall indicate the device or equipment, including specific terminal number to which the remote end of the wire is attached.


Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable. This nameplate and method of attachment may be the manufacturer's standard if it contains the required information.


ASTM D 709. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each switchboard, equipment enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified in this section or as indicated on the drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and, when applicable, the position. Nameplates shall be melamine plastic, 0.125 inch thick, white with black center core. Surface shall be matte finish. Corners shall be square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be one by 2.5 inches. Lettering shall be a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal block style.

2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

2.5.1 Equipment Test Schedule

The Government reserves the right to witness tests. Provide equipment test schedules for tests to be performed at the manufacturer's test facility. Submit required test schedule and location, and notify the Contracting Officer 30 calendar days before scheduled test date. Notify Contracting Officer 15 calendar days in advance of changes to scheduled date.



a. Test Instrument Calibration

1. The manufacturer shall have a calibration program which assures that all applicable test instruments are maintained within rated accuracy.

2. The accuracy shall be directly traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology.

3. Instrument calibration frequency schedule shall not exceed 12 months for both test floor instruments and leased specialty equipment.

4. Dated calibration labels shall be visible on all test equipment.

5. Calibrating standard shall be of higher accuracy than that of the instrument tested.

6. Keep up-to-date records that indicate dates and test results of instruments calibrated or tested. For instruments calibrated by the manufacturer on a routine basis, in lieu of third party calibration, include the following:

(a) Maintain up-to-date instrument calibration instructions and procedures for each test instrument.

(b) Identify the third party/laboratory calibrated instrument to verify that calibrating standard is met.

2.5.2 Switchboard Design Tests

NEMA PB 2 and UL 891.

2.5.2.1 Design Tests

Furnish documentation showing the results of design tests on a product of the same series and rating as that provided by this specification.

a. Short-circuit current test

b. Enclosure tests

c. Dielectric test

2.5.2.2 Additional design tests

In addition to normal design tests, perform the following tests on the actual equipment. Furnish reports which include results of design tests performed on the actual equipment.

a. Temperature rise tests

b. Continuous current

2.5.3 Switchboard Production Tests

NEMA PB 2 and UL 891. Furnish reports which include results of production tests performed on the actual equipment for this project. These tests



include:

a. 60-hertz dielectric tests

b. Mechanical operation tests

c. Electrical operation and control wiring tests

d. Ground fault sensing equipment test

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and to the requirements specified herein.

3.2 GROUNDING

NFPA 70 and IEEE C2, except that grounds and grounding systems shall have a resistance to solid earth ground not exceeding 5 ohms.

3.2.1 Grounding Electrodes

Provide driven ground rods. Connect ground conductors to the upper end of the ground rods by exothermic weld or compression connector. Provide compression connectors at equipment end of ground conductors.

3.2.2 Equipment Grounding

Provide bare copper cable not smaller than No. 4/0 AWG not less than 24 inches below grade connecting to the indicated ground rods. When work in addition to that indicated or specified is directed to obtain the specified ground resistance, the provision of the contract covering "Changes" shall apply.

3.2.3 Connections

Make joints in grounding conductors and loops by exothermic weld or compression connector.

3.2.4 Grounding and Bonding Equipment

UL 467, except as indicated or specified otherwise.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND ASSEMBLIES

Install and connect equipment furnished under this section as indicated on project drawings, the approved shop drawings, and as specified herein.

3.3.1 Switchboard

NEMA PB 2.1.

3.3.2 Meters and Instrument Transformers

NEMA C12.1.



3.3.3 Field Applied Painting

Where field painting of enclosures is required to correct damage to the manufacturer's factory applied coatings, provide manufacturer's recommended coatings and apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.3.4 Galvanizing Repair

Repair damage to galvanized coatings using ASTM A 780, zinc rich paint, for galvanizing damaged by handling, transporting, cutting, welding, or bolting. Do not heat surfaces that repair paint has been applied to.

3.3.5 Field Fabricated Nameplate Mounting


3.4 FOUNDATION FOR EQUIPMENT AND ASSEMBLIES

3.4.1 Interior Location

Mount switchboard on concrete slab. Unless otherwise indicated, the slab shall be at least 4 inches thick. The top of the concrete slab shall be approximately 4 inches above finished floor. Edges above floor shall have 1/2 inch chamfer. The slab shall be of adequate size to project at least 8 inches beyond the equipment. Provide conduit turnups and cable entrance space required by the equipment to be mounted. Seal voids around conduit openings in slab with water- and oil-resistant caulking or sealant. Cut off and bush conduits 3 inches above slab surface. Concrete work shall be as specified in Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.


Contractor shall submit request for settings of breakers to the Contracting Officer after approval of switchboard and at least 30 days in advance of their requirement.

3.5.1 Performance of Acceptance Checks and Tests

Perform in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and include the following visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests, performed in accordance with NETA ATS.

3.5.1.1 Switchboard Assemblies

a. Visual and Mechanical Inspection

1. Compare equipment nameplate data with specifications and approved shop drawings.

2. Inspect physical, electrical, and mechanical condition.

3. Confirm correct application of manufacturer's recommended lubricants.

4. Verify appropriate anchorage, required area clearances, and correct alignment.



5. Inspect all doors, panels, and sections for paint, dents, scratches, fit, and missing hardware.

6. Verify that circuit breaker sizes and types correspond to approved shop drawings.

7. Verify that current transformer ratios correspond to approved shop drawings.

8. Inspect all bolted electrical connections for high resistance using low-resistance ohmmeter, verifying tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method, or performing thermographic survey.

9. Confirm correct operation and sequencing of electrical and mechanical interlock systems.

10. Clean switchboard.

11. Inspect insulators for evidence of physical damage or contaminated surfaces.

12. Verify correct barrier installation.

13. Exercise all active components.

14. Inspect all mechanical indicating devices for correct operation.

15. Verify that vents are clear.

16. Test operation, alignment, and penetration of instrument transformer withdrawal disconnects.

17. Inspect control power transformers.

b. Electrical Tests

1. Perform insulation-resistance tests on each bus section.

2. Perform overpotential tests.

3. Perform insulation-resistance test on control wiring; Do not perform this test on wiring connected to solid-state components.

4. Perform control wiring performance test.

5. Perform primary current injection tests on the entire current circuit in each section of assembly.

3.5.1.2 Circuit Breakers

Low Voltage Molded Case with Solid State Trips


1. Compare nameplate data with specifications and approved shop drawings.



2. Inspect circuit breaker for correct mounting.

3. Operate circuit breaker to ensure smooth operation.

4. Inspect case for cracks or other defects.

5. Inspect all bolted electrical connections for high resistance using low resistance ohmmeter, verifying tightness of accessible bolted connections and/or cable connections by calibrated torque-wrench method, or performing thermographic survey.

6. Inspect mechanism contacts and arc chutes in unsealed units.

b. Electrical Tests

1. Perform contact-resistance tests.

2. Perform insulation-resistance tests.

3. Perform Breaker adjustments for final settings in accordance with Government provided settings.

4. Perform long-time delay time-current characteristic tests

3.5.1.3 Current Transformers



2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.

3. Verify correct connection.

4. Verify that adequate clearances exist between primary and secondary circuit.

5. Inspect all bolted electrical connections for high resistance using low-resistance ohmmeter, verifying tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method, or performing thermographic survey.

6. Verify that all required grounding and shorting connections provide good contact.

b. Electrical Tests

1. Perform resistance measurements through all bolted connections with low-resistance ohmmeter, if applicable.

2. Perform insulation-resistance tests.

3. Perform polarity tests.

4. Perform ratio-verification tests.



3.5.1.4 Metering and Instrumentation



2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.

3. Verify tightness of electrical connections.

b. Electrical Tests

1. Determine accuracy of meters at 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent of full scale.

2. Calibrate watthour meters according to manufacturer's published data.

3. Verify all instrument multipliers.

4. Electrically confirm that current transformer and voltage transformer secondary circuits are intact.

3.5.1.5 Grounding System


1. Inspect ground system for compliance with contract plans and specifications.

b. Electrical Tests

1. IEEE Std 81. Perform ground-impedance measurements utilizing the fall-of-potential method. On systems consisting of interconnected ground rods, perform tests after interconnections are complete. On systems consisting of a single ground rod perform tests before any wire is connected. Take measurements in normally dry weather, not less than 48 hours after rainfall. Use a portable ground testing megger in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to test each ground or group of grounds. The instrument shall be equipped with a meter reading directly in ohms or fractions thereof to indicate the ground value of the ground rod or grounding systems under test.

2. Submit the measured ground resistance of each ground rod and grounding system, indicating the location of the rod and grounding system. Include the test method and test setup (i.e., pin location) used to determine ground resistance and soil conditions at the time the measurements were made.

3.5.2 Follow-Up Verification

Upon completion of acceptance checks, settings, and tests, the Contractor shall show by demonstration in service that circuits and devices are in good operating condition and properly performing the intended function. Circuit breakers shall be tripped by operation of each protective device. Test shall require each item to perform its function not less than three times. As an exception to requirements stated elsewhere in the contract,



the Contracting Officer shall be given 5 working days advance notice of the dates and times for checks, settings, and tests.




SECTION 26 41 01.00 10

LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM11/08

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.


IEEE C135.30 (1988) Zinc-Coated Ferrous Ground Rods for Overhead or Underground Line Construction



NFPA 780 (2007) Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems



UL 96 (2005) Standard for Lightning Protection Components

UL 96A (2007) Standard for Installation Requirements for Lightning Protection Systems

1.2 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Detail Drawings

Detail drawings, as specified.

SD-07 Certificates

Materials

Proof of compliance with requirements of UL, where material or

SECTION 26 41 01.00 10 Page 1


equipment is specified to comply. The label of or listing in UL Electrical Construction will be acceptable evidence. In lieu of the label or listing, a written certificate from an approved nationally recognized testing organization equipped to perform such services, stating that the items have been tested and conform to the requirements and testing methods of Underwriters Laboratories may be submitted.


1.3.1 Detail Drawings

Submit detail drawings consisting of a complete list of material, including manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature, catalog cuts, drawings, and installation instructions. Detail drawings shall demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will function as a unit. Drawings shall show proposed layout and mounting and relationship to other parts of the work.

1.3.2 System Requirements

The Contractor shall employ a professional lightning protection designer to design the lightning protection system and a UL listed installer to install the system. Provide a lightning protection system with a UL 96A Master Label Certification.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 STANDARD PRODUCTS

Provide a system consisting of the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of lightning protection systems and which is the manufacturer's latest UL approved design. The lightning protection system shall conform to NFPA 70 and NFPA 780, UL 96 and UL 96A, except where requirements in excess thereof are specified herein.

2.2 MATERIALS

2.2.1 General Requirements

Do not use any combination of materials that form an electrolytic couple of such nature that corrosion is accelerated in the presence of moisture, unless moisture is permanently excluded from the junction of such metals. Where unusual conditions exist, which would cause corrosion of conductors, use conductors with protective coatings or oversize conductors. Where a mechanical hazard is involved, increase the conductor size to compensate for the hazard or protect the conductors by covering them with molding or tubing made of wood or nonmagnetic material. When metallic conduit or tubing is used, the conductor shall be electrically connected at the upper and lower ends.

2.2.2 Main and Secondary Conductors

Conductors shall be in accordance with NFPA 780 and UL 96 for Class I, Class II, or Class II modified materials as applicable.

2.2.2.1 Copper

Copper conductors used on nonmetallic stacks shall weigh not less than 375

SECTION 26 41 01.00 10 Page 2


pounds/thousand feet, and the size of any wire in the cable shall be not less than No. 15 AWG. The thickness of any web or ribbon used on stacks shall be not less than No. 12 AWG. Counterpoise shall be copper conductors not smaller than No. 1/0 AWG.

2.2.2.2 Aluminum

Aluminum shall not contact the earth nor shall it be used in any other manner that will contribute to rapid deterioration of the metal. Appropriate precautions shall be observed at connections with dissimilar metals. Aluminum conductors for bonding and interconnecting metallic bodies to the main cable shall be at least equivalent to strength and cross-sectional area of a No. 4 AWG aluminum wire. When perforated strips are provided, strips that are much wider than solid strips shall be. A strip width that is at least twice that of the diameter of the perforations shall be used. Aluminum strip for connecting exposed water pipes shall be not less than No. 12 AWG in thickness and at least 1-1/2 inch wide.

2.2.3 Air Terminals

Terminals shall be in accordance with UL 96 and NFPA 780. The tip of air terminals on buildings used for manufacturing, processing, handling, or storing explosives, ammunition, or explosive ingredients shall be a minimum of 2 feet above the ridge parapet, ventilator or perimeter. On open or hooded vents emitting explosive dusts or vapors under natural or forced draft, air terminals shall be a minimum of 5 feet above the opening. On open stacks emitting explosive dusts, gases, or vapor under forced draft, air terminals shall extend a minimum of 15 feet above vent opening. Air terminals more than 24 inch in length shall be supported by a suitable brace, with guides not less than one-half the height of the terminal.

2.2.4 Ground Rods

Rods made of copper-clad steel shall conform to UL 467 and galvanized ferrous rods shall conform to IEEE C135.30. Ground rods shall be not less than 3/4 inch in diameter and 10 feet in length. Ground rods of copper-clad steel, stainless steel, galvanized ferrous, and solid copper shall not be mixed on the job.

2.2.5 Connectors

Clamp-type connectors for splicing conductors shall conform to UL 96, class as applicable, and, Class 2, style and size as required for the installation.

2.2.6 Lightning Protection Components

Lightning protection components, such as bonding plates, air terminal supports, chimney bands, clips, and fasteners shall conform to UL 96, classes as applicable.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

After becoming familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing the work. No departures shall be made without the prior approval of the Contracting Officer.

SECTION 26 41 01.00 10 Page 3


3.2 INTEGRAL SYSTEM


Provide a lightning protection system consisting of air terminals, roof conductors, down conductors, ground connections, and grounds, electrically interconnected to form the shortest distance to ground. All conductors on the structures shall be exposed except where conductors are in protective sleeves exposed on the outside walls. Secondary conductors shall interconnect with grounded metallic parts within the building. Interconnections made within side-flash distances shall be at or above the level of the grounded metallic parts.

3.2.1.1 Air Terminals

Air terminal design and support shall be in accordance with NFPA 780. Terminals shall be rigidly connected to, and made electrically continuous with, roof conductors by means of pressure connectors or crimped joints of T-shaped malleable metal and connected to the air terminal by a dowel or threaded fitting. Air terminals at the ends of the structure shall be set not more than 2 feet from the ends of the ridge or edges and corners of roofs. Spacing of air terminals 2 feet in height on ridges, parapets, and around the perimeter of buildings with flat roofs shall not exceed 25 feet. In specific instances where it is necessary to exceed this spacing, the specified height of air terminals shall be increased not less than 2 inch for each foot of increase over 25 feet. On large, flat or gently sloping roofs, as defined in NFPA 780, air terminals shall be placed at points of the intersection of imaginary lines dividing the surface into rectangles having sides not exceeding 50 feet in length. Air terminals shall be secured against overturning either by attachment to the object to be protected or by means of a substantial tripod or other braces permanently and rigidly attached to the building or structure. Metal projections and metal parts of buildings, smokestacks, and other metal objects that do not contain hazardous materials and that may be struck but not appreciably damaged by lightning, need not be provided with air terminals. However, these metal objects shall be bonded to the lightning conductor through a metal conductor of the same unit weight per length as the main conductor. Where metal ventilators are installed, air terminals shall be mounted thereon, where practicable. Any air terminal erected by necessity adjacent to a metal ventilator shall be bonded to the ventilator near the top and bottom. Where metal ventilators are installed with air terminals mounted thereon, the air terminal shall not be more than 24 inch away from the farther edge or corner. If the air terminal is farther than this distance, an additional air terminal shall be added in order to meet this requirement. Where metal ventilators are installed with air terminals mounted adjacent, the air terminal shall not be more than 24 inches away from the farther edge or corner. If the air terminal is farther than this distance, an additional air terminal shall be added in order to meet this requirement.

3.2.1.2 Roof Conductors

Roof conductors shall be connected directly to the roof or ridge roll. Sharp bends or turns in conductors shall be avoided. Necessary turns shall have a radius of not less than 8 inch. Conductors shall preserve a downward or horizontal course and shall be rigidly fastened every 3 feet along the roof and down the building to ground. Metal ventilators shall be rigidly connected to the roof conductor at three places. All connections

SECTION 26 41 01.00 10 Page 4


shall be electrically continuous. Roof conductors shall be coursed along the contours of flat roofs, ridges, parapets, and edges; and where necessary, over flat surfaces, in such a way as to join each air terminal to all the rest. Roof conductors surrounding tank tops, decks, flat surfaces, and flat roofs shall be connected to form a closed loop.

3.2.1.3 Down Conductors

Down conductors shall be electrically continuous from air terminals and roof conductors to grounding electrodes. Down conductors shall be coursed over extreme outer portions of the building, such as corners, with consideration given to the location of ground connections and air terminals. Each building or structure shall have not less than two down conductors located as widely separated as practicable, at diagonally opposite corners. On rectangular structures having gable, hip, or gambrel roofs more than 110 feet long, there shall be at least one additional down conductor for each additional 50 feet of length or fraction thereof. On rectangular structures having French, flat, or sawtooth roofs exceeding 250 feet in perimeter, there shall be at least one additional down conductor for each 100 feet of perimeter or fraction thereof. On an L- or T-shaped structure, there shall be at least one additional down conductor; on an H-shaped structure, at least two additional down conductors; and on a wing-built structure, at least one additional down conductor for each wing. On irregularly shaped structures, the total number of down conductors shall be sufficient to make the average distance between them along the perimeter not greater than 100 feet. On structures exceeding 50 feet in height, there shall be at least one additional down conductor for each additional 60 feet of height or fraction thereof, except that this application shall not cause down conductors to be placed about the perimeter of the structure at intervals of less than 50 feet. Additional down conductors shall be installed when necessary to avoid "dead ends" or branch conductors ending at air terminals, except where the air terminal is on a roof below the main protected level and the "dead end" or branch conductor is less than 16 feet in length and maintains a horizontal or downward coursing. Down conductors shall be equally and symmetrically spaced about the perimeter of the structure. Down conductors shall be protected by placing in pvc conduit for a minimum distance of 36 inch above finished grade level.

3.2.1.4 Interconnection of Metallic Parts

Metal doors, windows, and gutters shall be connected directly to the grounds or down conductors using not smaller than No. 6 copper conductor, or equivalent. Conductors placed where there is probability of unusual wear, mechanical injury, or corrosion shall be of greater electrical capacity than would normally be used, or shall be protected. The ground connection to metal doors and windows shall be by means of mechanical ties under pressure, or equivalent.

3.2.1.5 Ground Connections

Ground connections comprising continuations of down conductors from the structure to the grounding electrode shall securely connect the down conductor and ground in a manner to ensure electrical continuity between the two. All connections shall be of the clamp type. There shall be a ground connection for each down conductor. Metal water pipes and other large underground metallic objects shall be bonded together with all grounding mediums. Ground connections shall be protected from mechanical injury. In making ground connections, advantage shall be taken of all

SECTION 26 41 01.00 10 Page 5


permanently moist places where practicable, although such places shall be avoided if the area is wet with waste water that contains chemical substances, especially those corrosive to metal.

3.2.1.6 Grounding Electrodes

A grounding electrode shall be provided for each down conductor located as shown. A driven ground shall extend into the earth for a distance of not less than 10 feet. Ground rods shall be set not less than 3 feet, nor more than 8 feet, from the structures foundation. The complete installation shall have a total resistance to ground of not more than 25 ohms. Ground rods shall be tested individually prior to connection to the system and the system as a whole shall be tested not less than 48 hours after rainfall. When the resistance of the complete installation exceeds the specified value or two ground rods individually exceed 25 ohms, the Contracting Officer shall be notified immediately. All connections between ground connectors and grounds shall be electrically continuous. Where so indicated on the drawings, an alternate method for grounding electrodes in shallow soil shall be provided by digging trenches radially from the building. The lower ends of the down conductors are then buried in the trenches.

3.2.2 Metal Roofs

Wood-Frame, Wall-Bearing Masonry or Tile Structure with Metallic Roof and Nonmetallic Exterior Walls, or Reinforced Concrete Building with Metallic Roof: Metal roofs which are in the form of sections insulated from each other shall be made electrically continuous by bonding. Air terminals shall be connected to, and made electrically continuous with, the metal roof as well as the roof conductors and down conductors. Ridge cables and roof conductors shall be bonded to the roof at the upper and lower edges of the roof and at intervals not to exceed 100 feet. The down conductors shall be bonded to roof conductors and to the lower edge of the metal roof. Where the metal of the roof is in small sections, the air terminals and down conductors shall have connections made to at least four of the sections. All connections shall have electrical continuity and have a surface contact of at least 3 square inch.

3.2.3 Metal Roofs With Metal Walls

Wood-Frame Building With Metal Roof and Metal Exterior Walls: The metal roof and the metal walls shall be bonded and made electrically continuous and considered as one unit. The air terminals shall be connected to and made electrically continuous with the metal roof as well as the roof and down conductors. All connections shall have electrical continuity and have a surface contact of at least 3 square inch.

3.2.4 Steel Frame Building

The steel framework shall be made electrically continuous. Electrical continuity may be provided by bolting, riveting, or welding steel frame, unless a specific method is noted on the drawings. The air terminals shall be connected to the structural steel framework at the ridge. Short runs of conductors shall be used as necessary to join air terminals to the metal framework so that proper placing of air terminals is maintained. Separate down conductors from air terminals to ground connections are not required. Where a grounded metal pipe water system enters the building, the structural steel framework and the water system shall be connected at the point of entrance by a ground connector. Connections to pipes shall be by

SECTION 26 41 01.00 10 Page 6


means of ground clamps with lugs. Connections to structural framework shall be by means of nut and bolt or welding. All connections between columns and ground connections shall be made at the bottom of the steel columns. Ground connections to grounding electrons or counterpoise shall be run from not less than one-half of all the columns distributed equally around the perimeter of the structure at intervals averaging not more than 60 feet.

3.2.5 Ramps

Lightning protection for covered ramps (connecting passageways) shall conform to the requirements for lightning protection systems for buildings of similar construction. A down conductor and a driven ground shall be placed at one of the corners where the ramp connects to each building or structure. This down conductor and driven ground shall be connected to the nearest ground connection of the building or structure. Where buildings or structures and connecting ramps are clad with metal, the metal of the buildings or structures and metal of the ramp shall be connected to ensure electrical continuity, in order to avoid the possibility of a flash-over or spark due to a difference in potential.

3.3 INTERCONNECTION OF METAL BODIES

Metal bodies of conductance shall be protected if not within the zone of protection of an air terminal. Metal bodies of conductance having an area of 400 square inch or greater or a volume of 1000 cubic inch or greater shall be bonded to the lightning protection system using main size conductors and a bonding plate having a surface contact area of not less than 3 square inch. Provisions shall be made to guard against the corrosive effect of bonding dissimilar metals. Metal bodies of inductance shall be bonded at their closest point to the lightning protection system using secondary bonding conductors and fittings. A metal body that exceeds 5 feet in any dimension, that is situated wholly within a building, and that does not at any point come within 6 feet of a lightning conductor or metal connected thereto shall be independently grounded.

3.4 FENCES

Except as indicated below, metal fences that are electrically continuous with metal posts extending at least 2 feet into the ground require no additional grounding. Other fences shall be grounded on each side of every gate. Fences shall be grounded by means of ground rods every 500 to 750 feet. The connection to ground shall be made from the post where it is of metal and is electrically continuous with the fencing. All metal fences shall be grounded at or near points crossed by overhead lines in excess of 600 volts and at distances not exceeding 150 feet on each side of line crossings.

3.5 INSPECTION

The lightning protection system will be inspected by the Contracting Officer to determine conformance with the requirements of this specification. No part of the system shall be concealed until so authorized by the Contracting Officer.


SECTION 26 41 01.00 10 Page 7


SECTION 26 42 14.00 10

CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM (SACRIFICIAL ANODE)04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASTM B 418 (2001) Cast and Wrought Galvanic Zinc Anodes

ASTM B 843 (1993; R 2003) Magnesium Alloy Anodes for Cathodic Protection

ASTM D 1248 (2005) Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable

NACE INTERNATIONAL (NACE)

NACE RP0169 (2002) Control of External Corrosion on Underground or Submerged Metallic Piping Systems

NACE RP0177 (2000) Mitigation of Alternating Current and Lightning Effects on Metallic Structures and Corrosion Control Systems

NACE RP0188 (1999) Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of New Protective Coatings on Conductive Substrates

NACE RP0190 (1995) External Protective Coatings for Joints, Fittings, and Valves on Metallic Underground or Submerged Pipelines and Piping Systems


NEMA TC 2 (2003) Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit


NFPA 70 (2005) National Electrical Code


49 CFR 192 Transportation of Natural and Other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards

SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 1



UL 510 (2005) Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape

UL 514A (2004) Metallic Outlet Boxes

UL 6 (2000; Rev thru May 2003) Rigid Metal Conduit

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Drawings; G, AE

Six copies of detail drawings consisting of a complete list of equipment and material including manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature, catalog cuts, results of system design calculations including soil-resistivity, installation instructions and certified test data stating the maximum recommended anode current output density and the rate of gaseous production if any at that current density. Detail drawings shall contain complete wiring and schematic diagrams and any other details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will function properly as a unit.

SD-03 Product Data

Equipment; G, AE

Within 30 days after receipt of notice to proceed, an itemized list of equipment and materials including item number, quantity, and manufacturer of each item. The list shall be accompanied by a description of procedures for each type of testing and adjustments, including testing of coating for thickness and holidays. Installation of materials and equipment shall not commence until this submittal is approved.

Spare Parts

Spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment specified, after approval of detail drawings and not later than six (6) months prior to the date of beneficial occupancy. The data shall include a complete list of parts, special tools, and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply. One (1) spare anode of each type shall be furnished.

SD-06 Test Reports

Tests and Measurements; G, AE

Test reports in booklet form tabulating all field tests and

SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 2


measurements performed, upon completion and testing of the installed system and including close interval potential survey, casing and interference tests, final system test verifying protection, insulated joint and bond tests, and holiday coating test. A certified test report showing that the connecting method has passed a 120-day laboratory test without failure at the place of connection, wherein the anode is subjected to maximum recommended current output while immersed in a three percent sodium chloride solution.

Contractor's Modifications; G, AE

Final report regarding Contractor's modifications. The report shall include pipe-to-soil measurements throughout the affected area, indicating that the modifications improved the overall conditions, and current measurements for anodes. The following special materials and information are required: taping materials and conductors; zinc grounding cell, installation and testing procedures, and equipment; coating material; system design calculations for anode number, life, and parameters to achieve protective potential; backfill shield material and installation details showing waterproofing; bonding and waterproofing details; insulated resistance wire; exothermic weld equipment and material.

SD-07 Certificates

Cathodic Protection System

Proof that the materials and equipment furnished under this section conform to the specified requirements contained in the referenced standards or publications. The label or listing by the specified agency will be acceptable evidence of such compliance.

Services of "Corrosion Expert"; G, AE

Evidence of qualifications of the "corrosion expert."

a. The "corrosion expert's" name and qualifications shall be certified in writing to the Contracting Officer prior to the start of construction.

b. Certification shall be submitted giving the name of the firm, the number of years of experience, and a list of not less than five (5) of the firm's installations three (3) or more years old that have been tested and found satisfactory.


Cathodic Protection System

Before final acceptance of the cathodic protection system, six copies of operating manuals outlining the step-by-step procedures required for system startup, operation, adjustment of current flow, and shutdown. The manuals shall include the manufacturer's name, model number, service manual, parts list, and brief description of all equipment and their basic operating features. Six copies of maintenance manual, listing routine maintenance procedures, recommendation for maintenance testing, possible breakdowns and repairs, and troubleshooting guides. The manuals

SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 3


shall include single-line diagrams for the system as installed; instructions in making pipe-to-reference cell and tank-to-reference cell potential measurements and frequency of monitoring; instructions for dielectric connections, interference and sacrificial anode bonds; instructions shall include precautions to ensure safe conditions during repair of pipe or other metallic systems. The instructions shall be neatly bound between permanent covers and titled "Operating and Maintenance Instructions." These instructions shall be submitted for the Contracting Officer's approval. The instructions shall include the following:

a. As-built drawings, to scale of the entire system, showing the locations of the piping, location of all anodes and test stations, locations of all insulating joints, and structure-to-reference cell potentials as measured during the tests required by Paragraph: TESTS AND MEASUREMENTS, of this section.

b. Recommendations for maintenance testing, including instructions in making pipe-to-reference cell potential measurements and frequency of testing.

c. All maintenance and operating instructions and nameplate data shall be in English.

d. Instructions shall include precautions to insure safe conditions during repair of pipe system.

Training Course

The proposed Training Course Curriculum (including topics and dates of discussion) indicating that all of the items contained in the operating and maintenance instructions, as well as demonstrations of routine maintenance operations, including testing procedures included in the maintenance instructions, are to be covered.

1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

The Contractor shall design, furnish and install a complete, operating, sacrificial anode cathodic protection system in complete compliance with NFPA 70, with all applicable Federal, State, and local regulations and with minimum requirements of this contract. In addition to the minimum requirements of these specifications, construction of gas pipelines and associated cathodic protection systems shall be in compliance with 49 CFR 192. The services required include designing, planning, installation, adjusting and testing of a cathodic protection system, using sacrificial anodes for cathodic protection of the Water, Fire Protection, Gas, and Sewer lines, their connectors and lines under the slab or floor foundation. The cathodic protection system shall include anodes, cables, connectors, corrosion protection test stations, and any other equipment required for a complete operating system providing the NACE criteria of protection as specified. Insulators are required whenever needed to insulate the pipes from any other structure.

1.3.1 Services of "Corrosion Expert"

The Contractor shall obtain the services of a "corrosion expert" to design,

SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 4


supervise, inspect, and test the installation and performance of the cathodic protection system. "Corrosion expert" refers to a person, who by thorough knowledge of the physical sciences and the principles of engineering and mathematics, acquired by professional education and related practical experience, is qualified to engage in the practice of corrosion control of buried or submerged metallic surfaces. Such a person must be accredited or certified by the National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE) as a NACE Accredited Corrosion Specialist or a NACE certified Cathodic Protection (CP) Specialist or be a registered professional engineer who has certification or licensing that includes education and experience in corrosion control of buried or submerged metallic piping and tank systems, if such certification or licensing includes 5 years experience in corrosion control on underground metallic surfaces of the type under this contract. The "corrosion expert" shall make at least 3 visits to the project site. The first of these visits shall include obtaining soil resistivity data, acknowledging the type of pipeline coatings to be used and reporting to the Contractor the type of cathodic protection required. Once the submittals are approved and the materials delivered, the "corrosion expert" shall revisit the site to ensure the Contractor understands installation practices and laying out the components. The third visit shall involve testing the installed cathodic protection systems and training applicable personnel on proper maintenance techniques. The "corrosion expert" shall supervise installation and testing of all cathodic protection.

1.3.2 Contractor's Modifications

The specified system is based on a complete system with magnesium sacrificial anodes. The Contractor may modify the cathodic protection system after review of the project, site verification, and analysis, if the proposed modifications include the anodes specified and will provide better overall system performance. The modifications shall be fully described, shall be approved by the Contracting Officer's representative, and shall meet the following criteria. The proposed system shall achieve a minimum pipe-to-soil "instant off" potential of minus 850 millivolts with reference to a saturated copper-copper sulfate reference cell on the underground components of the piping or other metallic surface. The Contractor shall take resistivity measurements of the soil in the vicinity of the pipes and ground bed sites. Based upon the measurements taken, the current and voltage shall be required to produce a minimum of minus 850 millivolts "instant off" potential between the structure being tested and the reference cell. This potential shall be obtained over 95 percent of the metallic area. The anode system shall be designed for a life of twenty-five (25) years of continuous operation.

1.3.3 Isolators

Isolators are required to insulate the indicated pipes from any other structure. Isolators shall be provided with lightning protection and a test station as shown.

1.3.4 Anode and Bond Wires

Magnesium anodes and test stations shall be provided uniform distances along the metallic pipe lines. These anodes shall be in addition to anodes for the pipe under concrete slab and casing requirements. For each cathodic system, the metallic components and structures to be protected shall be made electrically continuous. This shall be accomplished by installing bond wires between the various structures. Bonding of existing

SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 5


buried structures may also be required to preclude detrimental stray current effects and safety hazards. Provisions shall be included to return stray current to its source without damaging structures intercepting the stray current. The electrical isolation of underground facilities in accordance with acceptable industry practice shall be included under this section. All tests shall be witnessed by the Contracting Officer.

1.3.5 Surge Protection

Approved zinc grounding cells or sealed weatherproof lightning arrestor devices shall be installed across insulated flanges or fittings installed in underground piping. The arrestor shall be gapless, self-healing, solid state type. Zinc anode composition shall conform to ASTM B 418, Type II. Lead wires shall be number 6 AWG copper with high molecular weight polyethylene (HMWPE) insulation. The zinc grounding cells shall not be prepackaged in backfill. Lightning arrestors or zinc grounding cells are not required for insulated flanges on metallic components used on nonmetallic piping systems.

1.3.6 Summary of Services Required

The scope of services shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:

a. Close-interval potential surveys.

b. Cathodic Protection Systems design.

c. Cathodic Protection Systems.

d. System testing.

e. Casing corrosion control.

f. Interference testing.

g. Training.

h. Operating and maintenance manual.

i. Insulator testing and bonding testing.

j. Coating and holiday testing shall be submitted within 45 days of notice to proceed.

1.3.7 Nonmetallic Pipe System

In the event pipe other than metallic pipe is approved and used in lieu of metallic pipe, all metallic components of this pipe system shall be protected with cathodic protection. Detailed drawings of cathodic protection for each component shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer for approval within 45 days after date of receipt of notice to proceed, and before commencement of any work.

1.3.7.1 Coatings

Coatings for metallic components shall be as required for metallic fittings. Protective covering (coating and taping) shall be completed and tested on each metallic component (such as valves, hydrants and fillings).

SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 6


This covering shall be as required for underground metallic pipe. Each test shall be witnessed by the Contracting Officer. Coatings shall be selected, applied, and inspected in accordance with NACE RP0190 and as specified in these specifications. The use of nonmetallic pipe does not change other requirements of the specifications. Any deviations due to the use of nonmetallic pipe shall be submitted for approval.

1.3.7.2 Tracer Wire

When a nonmetallic pipe line is used to extend or add to an existing metallic line, an insulated No. 8 AWG copper wire shall be thermit-welded to the existing metallic line and run the length of the new nonmetallic line. This wire shall be used as a locator tracer wire and to maintain continuity to any future extensions of the pipe line.

1.3.8 Tests of Components

A minimum of four (4) tests shall be made at each metallic component in the piping system. Two (2) measurements shall be made directly over the anodes and the other two (2) tests shall be over the outer edge of the component, but at the farthest point from the anodes. Structure and pipes shall be shown with the cathodic protection equipment. All components of the cathodic protection system shall be shown on drawings, showing their relationship to the protected structure or component. A narrative shall describe how the cathodic protection system will work and provide testing at each component. Components requiring cathodic protection shall include but not be limited to the following:

a. Pipes under the floor slab or foundations.

b. PIV.

c. Shutoff valves.

d. Metallic pipe extended from aboveground locations.

e. Each connector or change-of-direction device.

f. Any metallic pipe component or section.

g. Backflow preventor.

h. Culvert.

1.3.9 Drawings

Detailed drawings shall be provided showing location of anodes, insulated fittings, test stations, permanent reference cells, and bonding. Locations shall be referenced to two (2) permanent facilities or mark points.

1.3.10 Electrical Potential Measurements

All potential tests shall be made at a minimum of 10 foot intervals witnessed by the Contracting Officer. Submittals shall identify test locations on separate drawing, showing all metal to be protected and all cathodic protection equipment. Test points equipment and protected metal shall be easily distinguished and identified.

SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 7


1.3.11 Achievement of Criteria for Protection

All conductors, unless otherwise shown, shall be routed to or through the test stations. Each system provided shall achieve a minimum pipe-to-soil "instant off" potential of minus 850 millivolt potentials with reference to a saturated copper-copper-sulfate reference cell on all underground components of the piping. Based upon the measurements taken, the current and voltage of the anodes should be adjusted as required to produce a minimum of minus 850 millivolts "instant off" potential between the structure being tested and the reference cell. This potential should be obtained over 95 percent of the metallic area. This must be achieved without the "instant off" potential exceeding 1150 millivolts. Testing will be witnessed by the Contracting Officer. Additional anodes shall be provided by the Contractor if required to achieve the minus 850 millivolts "instant off". Although acceptance criteria of the cathodic protection systems are defined in NACE RP0169, for this project the "instant off" potential of minus 850 millivolts is the only acceptable criteria.

1.3.12 Metallic Components and Typicals

a. Metallic components: As a minimum, each metallic component shall be protected with two (2) magnesium anodes. This number of anodes is required to achieve minus 850 millivolts "instant off" potential on the metallic area and at the same time not provide overvoltage above 1150 millivolts "instant off." Cathodic Protection Expert to specify the minimum anode weight. The magnesium anodes shall be located on each side of the metallic component and routed through a test station.

b. Fire Hydrants: Fire hydrant pipe components shall have a minimum of two (2) anodes. These magnesium anodes shall have an unpackaged weight of 17 pounds.

c. Pipe Under Concrete Slab: Cathodic Protection Expert to specify the minimum number and weight of anodes and number of reference electrodes. Pipe under concrete slab shall have permanent reference electrodes located under the slab. One (1) permanent reference electrode shall be located where the pipe enters the concrete slab. All conductors shall be routed to a test station.

d. Valves: Each valve shall be protected with magnesium anodes. Cathodic Protection Expert to specify the minimum number and weight of anodes.

e. Metallic Pipe Component or Section: Each section of metallic pipe shall be protected with magnesium anodes. Cathodic Protection Expert to specify the minimum number and weight of anodes.

f. Connectors or Change-of-Direction Devices: Each change-of-direction device shall be protected with magnesium anodes. Cathodic Protection Expert to specify the minimum number and weight of anodes.

1.3.13 Metallic Component Coating

Coatings for metallic components shall be as required for metallic fittings as indicated. This will include fire hydrants, T's, elbows, valves, etc. Coatings shall be selected, applied, and inspected in accordance with NACE RP0190 and as specified in these specifications.

SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 8


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MAGNESIUM ANODES

2.1.1 Anode Composition

Anodes shall be of high-potential magnesium alloy, made of primary magnesium obtained from sea water or brine, and not made from scrap metal. Magnesium anodes shall conform to ASTM B 843 and to the following analysis (in percents) otherwise indicated:

Aluminum, max. 0.010Manganese, max. 0.50 to 1.30Zinc 0.05Silicon, max. 0.05Copper, max. 0.02Nickel, max. 0.001Iron, Max. 0.03Other impurities, max. 0.05 each or 0.3 max. totalMagnesium Remainder

The Contractor shall furnish spectrographic analysis on samples from each heat or batch of anodes used on this project.

2.1.2 Dimensions and Weights

Dimensions and weights of anodes shall be approximately as follows:

TYPICAL MAGNESIUM ANODE SIZE

(Cross sections may be round, square, or D shaped)

NOMINAL GROSS NOMINAL APPROX. WT lb PACKAGED NOMINAL PACKAGE WT. LBS. SIZE (IN) IN BACKFILL DIMENSIONS (IN) _________________________________________________________________________

3 3 X 3 X 5 8 5-1/4 X 5-1/4 X 8 5 3 X 3 X 8 13 5-1/4 X 5-1/4 X 11-1/4 9 3 X 3 X 14 27 5-1/4 X 20 12 4 X 4 X 12 32 7-1/2 X 18 17 4 X 4 X 17 45 7-1/2 X 24 32 5 X 5 X 20-1/2 68 8-1/2 X 28 50 7 X 7 X 16 100 10 X 24

2.1.3 Packaged Anodes

Anodes shall be provided in packaged form with the anode surrounded by specially-prepared quick-wetting backfill and contained in a water permeable cloth or paper sack. Anodes shall be centered by means of spacers in the backfill material. The backfill material shall have the following composition, unless otherwise indicated:

Material Approximate Percent by Weight

Gypsum 75Bentonite 20Sodium Sulphate 5

SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 9


Total 100

2.1.4 Zinc Anodes

Zinc anodes shall conform to ASTM B 418, Type II.

2.1.5 Connecting Wire

2.1.5.1 Wire Requirements

Wire shall be solid copper wire, not less than 10 feet long, unspliced, complying with NFPA 70. Cathodic Protection Expert to specify minimum wire size and insulation type. Connecting wires for magnesium anodes shall be factory installed with the place or emergence from the anode in a cavity sealed flush with a dielectric sealing compound. Connecting wires for zinc anodes shall be factory installed with the place of connection to the protruding steel core completely sealed with a dielectric material.

2.1.5.2 Anode Header Cable

Cable for anode header and distribution shall be stranded copper wire with type CP high molecular weight polyethylene, 7/64 inch thick insulation, 600-volt rating.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

2.2.1 Electrical Wire

Wire shall be stranded copper wire complying with NFPA 70. Polyethylene insulation shall comply with the requirements of ASTM D 1248 and shall be of the following types, classes, and grades:

High-molecular weight polyethylene shall be Type I, Class C, Grade E5.

High-density polyethylene shall be Type III, Class C, Grade E3.

2.2.1.1 Wire Splicing

Connecting wire splicing shall be made with copper compression connectors or exothermic welds, following instructions of the manufacturer. Single split-bolt connections shall not be used. Sheaths for encapsulating electrical wire splices to be buried underground shall fit the insulated wires entering the spliced joints and epoxy potting compound shall be as specified below.

2.2.1.2 Test Wires

Test wires shall be AWG No. 12 stranded copper wire with NFPA 70, Type TW or RHW or polyethylene insulation.

2.2.1.3 Resistance Wire

Resistance wire shall be AWG No. 16 or No. 22 nickel-chromium wire.

2.2.2 Conduit

Rigid galvanized steel conduit and accessories shall conform to UL 6. Non metallic conduit shall conform to NEMA TC 2.

SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 10


2.2.3 Test Boxes and Junctions Boxes

Boxes shall be outdoor type conforming to UL 514A.

2.2.4 Joint, Patch, Seal, and Repair Coating

Sealing and dielectric compound shall be a black, rubber based compound that is soft, permanently pliable, tacky, moldable, and unbacked. Compound shall be applied as recommended by the manufacturer, but not less than 1/2-inch thick. Coating compound shall be cold-applied coal-tar base mastic hot-applied coal-tar enamel. Pressure-sensitive vinyl plastic electrical tape shall conform to UL 510.

2.2.5 Backfill Shields

Shields shall consist of approved pipeline wrapping or fiberglass-reinforced, coal-tar impregnated tape, or plastic weld caps, specifically made for the purpose and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. When joint bonds are required, due to the use of mechanical joints, the entire joint shall be protected by the use of a kraft paper joint cover. The joint cover shall be filled with poured-in, hot coat-tar enamel.

2.2.6 Epoxy Potting Compound

Compound for encapsulating electrical wire splices to be buried underground shall be a two package system made for the purpose.

2.2.7 Test Stations

Stations shall be of the flush-curb-box type and shall be the standard product of a recognized manufacturer. Test stations shall be complete with an insulated terminal block having the required number of terminals. The test station shall be provided with a lockable over and shall have an embossed legend, "C.P. Test." A minimum of one (1) test station shall be provided for each component of the pipe. Test stations may be constructed of nonmetallic materials. However, if nonmetallic materials are utilized, as a minimum, the materials shall be resistant to damage from ultraviolet radiation, contain good color retention qualities, contain high strength qualities, and be resistant to accidental or vandalistic impacts that might be normally encountered in the environment for which they are to be installed. The test stations shall be listed for the particular application for which they are to be utilized.

2.2.8 Joint and Continuity Bonds

Bonds shall be provided across all joints in the metallic pipe lines, across any electrically discontinuous connections and all other pipes and structures with other than welded or threaded joints that are included in this cathodic protection system. Unless otherwise specified in the specifications, bonds between structures and across joints in pipe with other than welded or threaded joints shall be No. 8 AWG stranded copper cable with polyethylene insulation. Bonds between structures shall contain sufficient slack for any anticipated movement between structures. Bonds across pipe joints shall contain a minimum of 4 inches of slack to allow for pipe movement and soil stress. Bonds shall be attached by exothermic welding. Exothermic weld areas shall be insulated with coating compound and approved, and witnessed by the Contracting Officer. Continuity bonds shall be installed as necessary to reduce stray current interference.

SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 11


Additional joint bondings shall be accomplished by the Contractor where the necessity is discovered during construction or testing or where the Contracting Officer's representative directs that such bonding be done. Joint bonding shall include all associated excavation and backfilling. There shall be a minimum of two (2) continuity bonds between each structure and other than welded or threaded joints. The Contractor shall test for electrical continuity across all joints with other than welded or threaded joints and across all metallic portions or components. The Contractor shall provide bonding as required and as specified above until electrical continuity is achieved. Bonding test data shall be submitted for approval.

2.2.9 Resistance Bonds

Resistance bonds should be adjusted as outlined in this specification. Alternate methods may be used if they are approved by the Contracting Officer.

2.2.10 Stray Current Measurements

Stray current measurements should be performed at each test station. Stray currents resulting from lightning or overhead alternating current (AC) power transmission systems shall be mitigated in accordance with NACE RP0177.

2.2.11 Electrical Isolation of Structures

As a minimum, isolating flanges or unions shall be provided at the following locations:

a. Connection of new metallic piping or components to existing piping.

b. Pressure piping under floor slab to a building.

Isolation shall be provided at metallic connection of all lines to existing system and where connecting to a building. Additionally, isolation shall be provided between pipe line; and foreign pipes that cross the new lines within 10 feet. Isolation fittings, including isolating flanges and couplings, shall be installed aboveground or in a concrete pit.

2.2.11.1 Electrically Isolating Pipe Joints

Electrically isolating pipe joints shall be of a type that is in regular factory production.

2.2.11.2 Electrically Conductive Couplings

Electrically conductive couplings shall be of a type that has a published maximum electrical resistance rating given in the manufacturer's literature. Cradles and seals shall be of a type that is in regular factory production made for the purpose of electrically insulating the carrier pipe from the casing and preventing the incursion of water into the annular space.

2.2.11.3 Insulating Joint Testing

A Model 601 Insulation Checker, as manufactured by "Gas Electronics" or an approved equal, shall be used for insulating joint (flange) electrical testing.

SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 12


2.2.12 Underground Structure Coating

This coating specification shall take precedence over any other project specification and drawing notes, whether stated or implied, and shall also apply to the pipeline or tank supplier. No variance in coating quality shall be allowed by the Contractor or Base Construction Representative without the written consent of the designer. All underground metallic pipelines and tanks to be cathodically protected shall be afforded a good quality factory-applied coating. This includes all carbon steel, cast-iron and ductile-iron pipelines or vessels. Coatings shall be selected, applied, and inspected in accordance with NACE RP0190 and as specified. If non-metallic pipelines are installed, all metallic fittings on pipe sections shall be coated in accordance with this specification section.

a. Cathodic Protection Expert to specify the nominal thickness of the metallic pipe joint or other component coating.

b. Pipe and joint coating for factory applied or field repair material shall be applied as recommended by the manufacturer and shall be one of the following:

(1) Continuously extruded polyethylene and adhesive coating system.(2) Polyvinyl chloride pressure-sensitive adhesive tape.(3) High density polyethylene/bituminous rubber compound tape.(4) Butyl rubber tape.(5) Coal tar epoxy.

2.2.12.1 Field Joints

All field joints shall be coated with materials compatible with the pipeline coating compound. The joint coating material shall be applied to an equal thickness as the pipeline coating. Unbonded coatings shall not be used on these buried metallic components. This includes the elimination of all unbonded polymer wraps or tubes. Once the pipeline or vessel is set in the trench, an inspection of the coating shall be conducted. This inspection shall include electrical holiday detection. Any damaged areas of the coating shall be properly repaired. The Contracting Officer shall be asked to witness inspection of the coating and testing using a holiday detector.

2.2.12.2 Inspection of Pipe Coatings

Any damage to the protective covering during transit and handling shall be repaired before installation. After field coating and wrapping has been applied, the entire pipe shall be inspected by an electric holiday detector with impressed current in accordance with NACE RP0188 using a full-ring, spring-type coil electrode. The holiday detector shall be equipped with a bell, buzzer, or other type of audible signal which sounds when a holiday is detected. All holidays in the protective covering shall be repaired immediately upon detection. Occasional checks of holiday detector potential will be made by the Contracting Officer's representative to determine suitability of the detector. All labor, materials, and equipment necessary for conducting the inspection shall be furnished by the Contractor.

a. Protective covering for aboveground piping system: Finish painting shall conform to the applicable paragraph of SECTION: 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS and as follows:

SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 13


b. Ferrous surfaces: Shop-primed surfaces shall be touched-up with ferrous metal primer. Surfaces that have not been shop-primed shall be solvent-cleaned. Surfaces that contain loose rust, loose mil scale, and other foreign substances shall be mechanically-cleaned by power wire-brushing and primed with ferrous metal primer. Primed surface shall be finished with two (2) coats of exterior oil paint and vinyl paint. Coating for each entire piping service shall be an approved pipe line wrapping having a minimum coating resistance of 50,000 Ohms per square foot.

2.2.13 Resistance Wire

Wire shall be No. 16 or No. 22 nickel-chromium wire with TW insulation.

2.2.14 Electrical Connections

Electrical connections shall be done as follows:

a. Exothermic welds shall be "Cadweld", " Bundy", "Thermoweld", or an approved equal. Use of this material shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

b. Electrical-shielded arc welds shall be approved for use on steel pipe by shop drawing submittal action.

c. Brazing shall be as specified in Paragraph: Lead Wire Connections.

2.2.15 Electrical Tape

Pressure-sensitive vinyl plastic electrical tape shall conform to UL 510.

2.2.16 Permanent Reference Electrodes

Permanent reference electrodes shall be Cu-CuS04 electrodes suitable for direct burial. Electrodes shall be guaranteed by the supplier for 15 years' service in the environment in which they shall be placed. Electrodes shall be installed directly beneath pipe, or metallic component.

2.2.17 Casing

Where a pipeline is installed in a casing under a roadway or railway, the pipeline shall be electrically insulated from the casing, and the annular space sealed and filled with an approved corrosion inhibiting product against incursion of water.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 CRITERIA OF PROTECTION

Acceptance criteria for determining the adequacy of protection on a buried underground pipe shall be in accordance with NACE RP0169 and as specified below.

3.1.1 Iron and Steel

The following method a. shall be used for testing cathodic protection voltages. If more than one method is required, method b. shall be used.

SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 14


a. A negative voltage of at least minus 850 millivolts as measured between the underground component and a saturated copper-copper sulphate reference electrode connecting the earth (electrolyte) directly over the underground component. Determination of this voltage shall be made with the cathodic protection system in operation. Voltage drops shall be considered for valid interpretation of this voltage measurement. A minimum of minus 850 millivolts "instant off" potential between the underground component being tested and the reference cell shall be achieved over 95 percent of the area of the structure. Adequate number of measurements shall be obtained over the entire structure, pipe, tank, or other metallic component to verify and record achievement of minus 850 millivolts "instant off." This potential shall be obtained over 95 percent of the total metallic area without the "instant off" potential exceeding 1200 millivolts.

b. A minimum polarization voltage shift of 100 millivolts as measured between the underground component and a saturated copper-copper sulphate reference electrode contacting the earth directly over the underground component. This polarization voltage shift shall be determined by interrupting the protective current and measuring the polarization decay. When the protective current is interrupted, an immediate voltage shift will occur. The voltage reading, after the immediate shift, shall be used as the base reading from which to measure polarization decay. Measurements achieving 100 millivolts decay shall be made over 95 percent of the metallic surface being protected.

c. For any metallic component, a minimum of four (4) measurements shall be made using subparagraph a., above, and achieving the "instant off" potential of minus 850 millivolts. Two (2) measurements shall be made over the anodes and two (2) measurements shall be made at different locations near the component and farthest away from the anode.

3.1.2 Aluminum

Aluminum underground component shall not be protected to a potential more negative than minus 1200 millivolts, measured between the underground component and a saturated copper-copper sulphate reference electrode contacting the earth, directly over the metallic component. Resistance, if required, shall be inserted in the anode circuit within the test station to reduce the potential of the aluminum to a value which will not exceed a potential more negative than minus 1200 millivolts. Voltage shift criterion shall be a minimum negative polarization shift of 100 millivolts measured between the metallic component and a saturated copper-copper sulphate reference electrode contacting the earth, directly over the metallic component. The polarization voltage shift shall be determined as outlined for iron and steel.

3.1.3 Copper Piping

For copper piping, the following criteria shall apply: A minimum of 100 millivolts of cathodic polarization between the structure surface and a stable reference electrode contacting the electrolyte. The polarization voltage shift shall be determined as outlined for iron and steel.

SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 15


3.2 ANODE STORAGE AND INSTALLATION

3.2.1 Anode Storage

Storage area for magnesium anodes will be designated by the Contracting Officer. If anodes are not stored in a building, tarps or similar protection should be used to protect anodes from inclement weather. Packaged anodes, damaged as a result of improper handling or being exposed to rain, shall be resacked by the Contractor and the required backfill added.

3.2.2 Anode Installation

Unless otherwise authorized, installation shall not proceed without the presence of the Contracting Officer. Anodes of the size specified shall be installed to the depth indicated and at the locations shown. Locations may be changed to clear obstructions with the approval of the Contracting Officer. Anodes shall be installed in sufficient number and of the required type, size, and spacing to obtain a uniform current distribution over the surface of the structure. The anode system shall e designed for a life of 25 years of continuous operation. Anodes shall be installed as indicated in a dry condition after any plastic or waterproof protective covering has been completely removed from the water permeable, permanent container housing the anode metal. The anode connecting wire shall not be used for lowering the anode into the hole. The annular space around the anode shall be backfilled with fine earth in 6 inch layers and each layer shall be hand tamped. Care must be exercised not to strike the anode or connecting wire with the tamper. Approximately 5 gallons of water shall be applied to each filled hole after anode backfilling and tamping has been completed to a point about 6inches above the anode. After the water has been absorbed by the earth, backfilling shall be completed to the ground surface level.

3.2.2.1 Single Anodes

Single anodes, spaced as shown, shall be connected through a test station to the pipeline, allowing adequate slack in the connecting wire to compensate for movement during backfill operation.

3.2.2.2 Groups of Anodes

Groups of anodes, in quantity and location shown, shall be connected to an anode header cable. The anode header cable shall make contact with the structure to be protected only through a test station. Anode lead connection to the anode header cable shall be made by an approved crimp connector or exothermic weld and splice mold kit with appropriate potting compound.

3.2.2.3 Welding Methods

Connections to ferrous pipe shall be made by exothermic weld methods manufactured for the type of pipe supplied. Electric arc welded connections and other types of welded connections to ferrous pipe and structures shall be approved before use.

3.2.3 Anode Placement - General

Packaged anodes shall be installed completely dry, and shall be lowered

SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 16


into holes by rope sling or by grasping the cloth gather. The anode lead wire shall not be used in lowering the anodes. The hole shall be backfilled with fine soil in 6inch layers and each layer shall be hand-tamped around the anode. Care must be exercised not to strike the anode or lead wire with the tamper. If immediate testing is to be performed, water shall be added only after backfilling and tamping has been completed to a point 6 inches above the anode. Approximately 2 gallons of water may be poured into the hole. After the water has been absorbed by the soil, backfilling and tamping may be completed to the top of the hole. Anodes shall be installed as specified or shown. In the event a rock strata is encountered prior to achieving specified augered-hole depth, anodes may be installed horizontally to a depth at least as deep as the bottom of the pipe, with the approval of the Contracting Officer.

3.2.4 Underground Pipeline

Anodes shall be installed at a minimum of 8 feet and a maximum of 10 feet from the line to be protected.

3.2.5 Installation Details

Details shall conform to the requirements of this specification. Details shown on the drawings are indicative of the general type of material required, and are not intended to restrict selection to material of any particular manufacturer.

3.2.6 Lead Wire Connections

3.2.6.1 Underground Pipeline (Metallic)

To facilitate periodic electrical measurements during the life of the sacrificial anode system and to reduce the output current of the anodes, if required, all anode lead wires shall be connected to a test station and buried a minimum of 24 inches in depth. The cable shall be No. 10 AWG, stranded copper, polyethylene or RHW-USE insulated cable. The cable shall make contact with the structure only through a test station. Resistance wire shall be installed between the cable and the pipe cable, in the test station, to reduce the current output, if required. Anode connections, except in the test station, shall be made with exothermic welding process, and shall be insulated by means of at least three (3) layers of electrical tape; and all lead wire connections shall be installed in a moistureproof splice mold kit and filled with epoxy resin. Lead wire-to-structure connections shall be accomplished by an exothermic welding process. All welds shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. A backfill shield filled with a pipeline mastic sealant or material compatible with the coating shall be placed over the weld connection and shall be of such diameter as to cover the exposed metal adequately.

3.2.6.2 Resistance Wire Splices

Resistance wire connections shall be accomplished with silver solder and the solder joints wrapped with a minimum of three (3) layers of pressure-sensitive tape. Lead wire connections shall be installed in a moistureproof splice mold kit and filled with epoxy resin.

3.2.7 Location of Test Stations

Test stations shall be of the type required for the location and shall be mounted as approved by the Contracting Officer. Buried insulating joints

SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 17


shall be provided with test wire connections brought to a test station. Unless otherwise shown, other test stations shall be located as follows:

a. At 1,000-foot intervals or less.

b. Where the pipe or conduit crosses any other metal pipe.

c. At both ends of casings under roadways and railways.

d. Where both sides of an insulating joint are not accessible above ground for testing purposes.

3.2.8 Underground Pipe Joint Bonds

Underground pipe having other than welded or threaded coupling joints shall be made electrically continuous by means of a bonding connection installed across the joint.

3.3 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION OF STRUCTURES

3.3.1 Isolation Joints and Fittings

Isolating fittings, including main line isolating flanges and couplings, shall be installed aboveground, or within manholes, wherever possible. Where isolating joints must be covered with soil, they shall be fitted with a paper joint cover specifically manufactured for covering the particular joint, and the space within the cover filled with hot coal-tar enamel. Isolating fittings in lines entering buildings shall be located at least 12 inches above grade of floor level, when possible. Isolating joints shall be provided with grounding cells to protect against over-voltage surges or approved surge protection devices. The cells shall provide a low resistance across isolating joint without excessive loss of cathodic current.

3.3.2 Gas Distribution Piping

Electrical isolation shall be provided at each building riser pipe to the pressure regulator, at all points where a short to another structure or to a foreign structure may occur, and at other locations as indicated on the drawings.

3.4 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

Trenching and backfilling shall be in accordance with Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.

3.5 TESTS AND MEASUREMENTS

3.5.1 Baseline Potentials

Each test and measurement will be witnessed by the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer a minimum of five (5) working days prior to each test. After backfill of the pipe, the static potential-to-soil of the pipe shall be measured. The locations of these measurements shall be identical to the locations specified for pipe- to-reference electrode potential measurements. The initial measurements shall be recorded.

SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 18


3.5.2 Isolation Testing

Before the anode system is connected to the pipe, an isolation test shall be made at each isolating joint or fitting. This test shall demonstrate that no metallic contact, or short circuit exists between the two isolated sections of the pipe. Any isolating fittings installed and found to be defective shall be reported to the Contracting Officer.

3.5.2.1 Insulation Checker

A Model 601 insulation checker, as manufactured by "Gas Electronics" or an approved equal, using the continuity check circuit, shall be used for isolating joint (flange) electrical testing. Testing shall conform to the manufacturer's operating instructions. Test shall be witnessed by the Contracting Officer. An isolating joint that is good will read full scale on the meter. If an isolating joint is shorted, the meter pointer will be deflected or near zero on the meter scale. Location of the fault shall be determined from the instructions, and the joint shall be repaired. If an isolating joint is located inside a vault, the pipe shall be sleeved with insulator when entering and leaving the vault.

3.5.2.2 Cathodic Protection Meter

A Model B3A2 cathodic protection meter, as manufactured by "M.C. Miller" or an approved equal, using the continuity check circuit, shall be used for isolating joint (flange) electrical testing. This test shall be performed in addition to the Model 601 insulation checker. Continuity is checked across the isolation joint after the test lead wire is shorted together and the meter adjusted to scale. A full-scale deflection indicates the system is shorted at some location. The Model 601 verifies that the particular insulation under test is good and the Model B3A2 verifies that the system is isolated. If the system is shorted, further testing shall be performed to isolate the location of the short.

3.5.3 Anode Output

As the anodes or groups of anodes are connected to the pipe, current output shall be measured with an approved clamp-on milliammeter, calibrated shunt with a suitable millivoltmeter or multimeter, or a low resistance ammeter. (Of the three methods, the low-resistance ammeter is the least desirable and most inaccurate. The clamp-on milliammeter is the most accurate.) The values obtained and the date, time, and location shall be recorded.

3.5.4 Reference Electrode Potential Measurements

Upon completion of the installation and with the entire cathodic protection system in operation, electrode potential measurements shall be made using a copper-copper sulphate reference electrode and a potentiometer-voltmeter, or a direct-current voltmeter having an internal resistance (sensitivity) of not less than 10 megohms per volt and a full scale of 10 volts. The locations of these measurements shall be identical to the locations used for baseline potentials. The values obtained and the date, time, and locations of measurements shall be recorded. No less than eight (8) measurements shall be made over any length of line or component. Additional measurements shall be made at each distribution service riser, with the reference electrode placed directly over the service line.

SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 19


3.5.5 Location of Measurements

3.5.5.1 Piping or Conduit

For coated piping or conduit, measurements shall be taken from the reference electrode located in contact with the earth, directly over the pipe. Connection to the pipe shall be made at service risers, valves, test leads, or by other means suitable for test purposes. Cathodic Protection Expert to specify pipe-to-soil potential measurements. The Contractor may use a continuous pipe-to-soil potential profile in lieu of 5 foot interval pipe-to-soil potential measurements. Additional measurements shall be made at each distribution service riser, with the reference electrode placed directly over the service line adjacent to the riser. Potentials shall be plotted versus distance to an approved scale. Locations where potentials do not meet or exceed the criteria shall be identified and reported to the Contracting Officer's representative.

3.5.5.2 Casing Tests

Before final acceptance of the installation, the electrical separation of carrier pipe from casings shall be tested and any short circuits corrected.

3.5.5.3 Interference Testing

Before final acceptance of the installation, interference tests shall be made with respect to any foreign pipes in cooperation with the owner of the foreign pipes. A full report of the tests giving all details shall be made. Stray current measurements shall be performed at all isolating locations and at locations where the new pipeline crosses foreign metallic pipes; results of stray current measurements shall also be submitted for approval. The method of measurements and locations of measurements shall be submitted for approval. As a minimum, stray current measurements shall be performed at the following locations:

a. Connection point of new pipeline to existing pipeline.

b. Crossing points of new pipeline with existing lines.

3.5.5.4 Holiday Test

Any damage to the protective covering during transit and handling shall be repaired before installation. After field-coating and wrapping has been applied, the entire pipe shall be inspected by an electric holiday detector with impressed current in accordance with NACE RP0188 using a full-ring, spring-type coil electrode. The holiday detector shall be equipped with a bell, buzzer, or other type of audible signal which sounds when a holiday is detected. Holidays in the protective covering shall be repaired upon detection. Occasional checks of holiday detector potential will be made by the Contracting Officer to determine suitability of the detector. Labor, materials, and equipment necessary for conducting the inspection shall be furnished by the Contractor. The coating system shall be inspected for holes, voids, cracks, and other damage during installation.

3.5.5.5 Recording Measurements

All pipe-to-soil potential measurements, including initial potentials where required, shall be recorded. The Contractor shall locate, correct and report to the Contracting Officer any short circuits to foreign pipes encountered during checkout of the installed cathodic protection system.

SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 20


Pipe-to-soil potential measurements shall be taken on as many pipes as necessary to determine the extent of protection or to locate short-circuits.

3.6 TRAINING COURSE

The Contractor shall conduct a training course for the operating staff as designated by the Contracting Officer. The training period shall consist of a total of 8 hours of normal working time and shall start after the system is functionally completed but prior to final acceptance tests. The field instructions shall cover all of the items contained in the operating and maintenance instructions, as well as demonstrations of routine maintenance operations, including testing procedures included in the maintenance instructions. At least 14 days prior to date of proposed conduction of the training course, the training course curriculum shall be submitted for approval, along with the proposed training date. Training shall consist of demonstration of test equipment, providing forms for test data and the tolerances which indicate that the system works.

3.7 CLEANUP

The Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup of the construction site. All paper bags, wire clippings, etc., shall be disposed of as directed. Paper bags, wire clippings and other waste shall not be put in bell holes or anodes excavation.

3.8 MISCELLANEOUS INSTALLATION AND TESTING

3.8.1 Coatings

All aboveground pipeline shall be coated as indicated or as approved. The coating shall have a minimum thickness of 7 mil. The pipeline coating shall be in accordance with all applicable Federal, State, and local regulations.

3.8.2 Excavation

In the event rock is encountered in providing the required depth for anodes, the Contractor shall determine an alternate approved location and, if the depth is still not provided, an alternate plan shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer. Alternate techniques and depths must be approved prior to implementation.

3.9 SPARE PARTS

After approval of shop drawings, and not later than three (3) months prior to the date of beneficial occupancy, the Contractor shall furnish spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment specified. The data shall include a complete list of parts, special tools, and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply. In addition, the Contractor shall supply information for material and equipment replacement for all other components of the complete system, including anodes, cables, splice kits and connectors, corrosion test stations, and any other components not listed above. The Contractor shall furnish a reference cell on a reel with 350 feet of conductor, along with other accessories, and a digital voltmeter that can be used in the maintenance of this cathodic protection system. Use of this equipment shall be demonstrated in actual tests during the training course, which shall include a description of the the equipment and measurement of the pipe-to-soil potential, rainfall, and gas company voltages.

SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 21


3.10 SEEDING

Seeding shall be done by the Contractor, as directed, in all unsurfaced locations disturbed by this construction. In areas where grass cover exists, it is possible that sod can be carefully removed, watered, and stored during construction operations, and replaced after the operations are completed since it is estimated that no section of pipeline should remain uncovered for more than two (2) days. The use of sod in lieu of seeding shall require approval by the Contracting Officer.

3.11 SYSTEM TESTING

The Contractor shall submit a report including potential measurements taken at adequately-close intervals to establish that minus 850 millivolts potential, "instant-off" potential, is provided, and that the cathodic protection is not providing interference to other foreign pipes causing damage to paint or pipes. The report shall provide a narrative describing how the criteria of protection is achieved without damaging other pipe or structures in the area.

3.12 CLEARING OF TREES AND UNDERBRUSH

In the areas of the anode beds, all trees and underbrush shall be cleared and grubbed to the limits shown or indicated.


SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 22


SECTION 26 51 00

INTERIOR LIGHTING07/07

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASTM A 641/A 641M (2003) Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire

GREEN SEAL (GS)

GC-12 (1997) Occupancy Sensors

ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING SOCIETY OF NORTH AMERICA (IESNA)

IESNA HB-9 (2000; Errata 2004; Errata 2005) IES Lighting Handbook



IEEE C62.41.1 (2002) IEEE Guide on the Surges Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits

IEEE C62.41.2 (2002) IEEE Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits




NEMA C78.43 (2007) Standard for Electric Lamps - Single-Ended Metal-Halide Lamps

NEMA C78.81 (2005) Electric Lamps - Double-capped Fluorescent Lamps Dimensional and Electrical Characteristics

NEMA C78.901 (2005) Electric Lamps - Single Base Fluorescent Lamps Dimensional and Electrical Characteristics



NEMA C82.11 (2002) High-Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts

NEMA C82.4 (2002) Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge and Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type)

NEMA ICS 2 (2000; Errata 2002; R 2005; Errata 2006) Standard for Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contractors, and Overload Relays Rated Not More than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC: Part 8 - Disconnect Devices for Use in Industrial Control Equipment


NEMA LL 1 (1997; R 2002) Procedures for Linear Fluorescent Lamp Sample Preparation and the TCLP Extraction


NFPA 101 (2008) Life Safety Code, 2006 Edition


U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)

Energy Star (1992; R 2006) Energy Star Energy Efficiency Labeling System


UL 1029 (1994; Rev thru Dec 2007) Standard for Safety High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts

UL 1598 (2008) Luminaires

UL 20 (2000 ; Rev thru Dec 2004) Standard for General-Use Snap Switches

UL 508 (1999; Rev thru Sep 2008) Standard for Industrial Control Equipment

UL 773 (1995; Rev thru Mar 2002) Standard for Plug-In Locking Type Photocontrols for Use with Area Lighting

UL 773A (2006) Nonindustrial Photoelectric Switches for Lighting Control

UL 844 (2006; Rev thru Sep 2008) Standard for Electric Lighting Fixtures for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations



UL 924 (2006) Standard for Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment

UL 935 (2001; Rev thru Dec 2007) Standard for Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

Materials not considered to be lighting equipment or lighting fixture accessories are specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Lighting fixtures and accessories mounted on exterior surfaces of buildings are specified in this section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


b. Average life is the time after which 50 percent will have failed and 50 percent will have survived under normal conditions.

c. Total harmonic distortion (THD) is the root mean square (RMS) of all the harmonic components divided by the total fundamental current.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

1.4.1 Lighting Control System

Provide lighting control system as indicated. Lighting control equipment shall include, as indicated: control modules, power packs, dimming ballasts, occupancy sensors, relay cabinet, and light level sensors.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only or as otherwise designated. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

Data, drawings, and reports shall employ the terminology, classifications, and methods prescribed by the IESNA HB-9, as applicable, for the lighting system specified.

SD-03 Product Data

Fluorescent lighting fixtures; G

Fluorescent electronic ballasts; G

Fluorescent electromagnetic ballasts; G

Fluorescent lamps; G

High-intensity-discharge (HID) lighting fixtures; G



HID ballasts; G

Metal-halide lamps; G

Incandescent lighting fixtures; G

Incandescent lamps; G

Dimmer switch; G

Lighting contactor; G

Time switch; G

Photocell switch; G

Power hook fixture hangers; G

Exit signs; G

Relay panelG

Emergency lighting equipment; G

Occupancy sensors; G

Electronic dimming ballast; G

Dimming ballast controls; G

Light Level Sensor ; G

Local/Regional Materials

Documentation indicating distance between manufacturing facility and the project site. Indicate distance of raw material origin from the project site. Indicate relative dollar value of local/regional materials to total dollar value of products included in project.

Energy Efficiency

SD-04 Samples

Lighting fixtures, complete with lamps and ballasts; G

SD-06 Test Reports

Operating test

Submit test results as stated in paragraph entitled "Field Quality Control."


Lighting Control System, Data Package 5; G

Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein,



showing all light fixtures, control modules, control zones, occupancy sensors, light level sensors, power packs, dimming ballasts, schematic diagrams and all interconnecting control wire, conduit, and associated hardware.

Operational Service

Submit documentation that includes contact information, summary of procedures, and the limitations and conditions applicable to the project. Indicate manufacturer's commitment to reclaim materials for recycling and/or reuse.


1.6.1 Fluorescent Electronic Ballasts

Submit ballast catalog data as required in the paragraph entitled "Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Ballasts" contained herein. As an option, submit the fluorescent fixture manufacturer's electronic ballast specification information in lieu of the actual ballast manufacturer's catalog data. This information shall include published specifications and sketches, which covers the information required by the paragraph entitled "Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Ballasts" herein. This information may be supplemented by catalog data if required, and shall contain a list of vendors with vendor part numbers.











1.6.3.3 Energy Efficiency

Comply with National Energy Policy Act and Energy Star requirements for lighting products. Submit data indicating lumens per watt efficiency and color rendition index of light source.

1.7 WARRANTY


1.7.1 Electronic Ballast Warranty

Furnish the electronic ballast manufacturer's warranty. The warranty period shall not be less than 5 years from the date of manufacture of the electronic ballast. Ballast assembly in the lighting fixture, transportation, and on-site storage shall not exceed 12 months, thereby permitting 4 years of the ballast 5 year warranty to be in service and energized. The warranty shall state that the malfunctioning ballast shall be exchanged by the manufacturer and promptly shipped to the using Government facility. The replacement ballast shall be identical to, or an improvement upon, the original design of the malfunctioning ballast.

1.8 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

1.8.1 Local/Regional Materials

Use materials or products extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within a 500 mile radius from the project site, if available from a minimum of three sources.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES

UL 1598. Fluorescent fixtures shall have electronic ballasts unless specifically indicated otherwise.

2.1.1 Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Ballasts

The electronic ballast shall as a minimum meet the following characteristics:

a. Ballast shall comply with UL 935, NEMA C82.11, and NFPA 70 unless specified otherwise. Ballast shall be 100% electronic high frequency type with no magnetic core and coil components. Ballast shall provide transient immunity as recommended by IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2. Ballast shall be designed for the wattage of the lamps used in the indicated application. Ballasts shall be designed to operate on the voltage system to which they are connected.

b. Power factor shall be 0.95 (minimum).



c. Ballast shall operate at a frequency of 20,000 Hertz (minimum). Ballast shall be compatible with and not cause interference with the operation of occupancy sensors or other infrared control systems. Provide ballasts operating at or above 40,000 Hertz where available.

d. Ballast shall have light regulation of plus or minus 10 percent lumen output with a plus or minus 10 percent input voltage regulation. Ballast shall have 10 percent flicker (maximum) using any compatible lamp.

e. Ballast factor shall be between 0.85 (minimum) and 1.00 (maximum). Current crest factor shall be 1.7 (maximum).

f. Ballast shall be UL listed Class P with a sound rating of "A."

g. Ballast shall have circuit diagrams and lamp connections displayed on the ballast.

h. Ballasts shall be programmed start unless otherwise indicated. Programmed start ballasts may operate lamps in a series circuit configuration. Provide series/parallel wiring for programmed start ballasts where available.

i. Ballasts for compact fluorescent fixtures shall be programmed start.

j. Ballasts for T-5 and smaller lamps shall have end-of-life protection circuits as required by NEMA C78.81 and NEMA C78.901 as applicable.

k. Ballast shall be capable of starting and maintaining operation at a minimum of 0 degrees F unless otherwise indicated.

l. Electronic ballast shall have a full replacement warranty of 5 years from date of manufacture as specified in paragraph entitled "Electronic Ballast Warranty" herein.

2.1.1.1 T-8 Lamp Ballast

a. Total harmonic distortion (THD): Shall be 10 percent (maximum).

b. Input wattage.

1. 28 watts (maximum) when operating one F30T8 lamp

2. 55 watts (maximum) when operating two F30T8 lamps

3. 80 watts (maximum) when operating three F30T8 lamps

4. 106 watts (maximum) when operating four F30T8 lamps

c. Ballast efficacy factor.

1. 2.54 (minimum) when operating one F30T8 lamp

2. 1.44 (minimum) when operating two F30T8 lamps

3. 0.93 (minimum) when operating three F30T8 lamps

4. 0.73 (minimum) when operating four F30T8 lamps



d. Provide three and four lamp fixtures with two ballasts per fixture where multilevel switching is indicated.

2.1.2 Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Dimming Ballast

The electronic ballast shall as a minimum meet the following characteristics:

a. Ballast shall comply with NEMA C82.11, UL 935, and NFPA 70, unless specified otherwise. Ballast shall provide transient immunity as recommended by IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2. Ballast dimming capability range shall be from 100 to 5 percent (minimum range) of light output, flicker free. Ballast shall start lamp at any preset light output setting without first having to go to full light output. Ballast shall be designed for the wattage of the lamps used in the indicated application. Ballasts shall be designed to operate on the voltage system to which they are connected.

b. Power factor shall be 0.95 (minimum) at full light output, and 0.90 (minimum) over the entire dimming range.

c. Ballast shall operate at a frequency of 20,000 Hertz (minimum). Ballast shall be compatible with and not cause interference with the operation of occupancy sensors or other infrared control systems. Provide ballasts operating at or above 40,000 Hertz where available.

d. Ballast factor at full light output shall be between 0.85 (minimum) and 1.00 (maximum). Current crest factor shall be 1.7 (maximum).

e. Ballast shall be UL listed Class P with a sound rating of "A".

f. Ballast shall have circuit diagrams and lamp connections displayed on the ballast.

g. Ballast shall be programmed start. Ballast may operate lamps in a series circuit configuration. Provide series/parallel wiring for programmed start ballasts where available.

h. Ballasts for compact fluorescent fixtures shall be programmed start.

i. Ballast shall be capable of starting and maintaining operation at a minimum of 0 degrees F unless otherwise indicated.

j. Total harmonic distortion (THD): Shall be 20 percent (maximum) over the entire dimming range.

k. Ballasts for T-5 and smaller lamps shall have end-of-life protection circuits as required by NEMA C78.81 and NEMA C78.901 as applicable.

2.1.3 Dimming Ballast Controls

The dimming ballast controls shall be a slide dimmer with on/off control. The slide dimmer shall be compatible with the ballast and control the ballast light output over the full dimming range. Dimming ballast controls shall be approved by the ballast manufacturer.



2.1.4 Light Level Sensor

UL listed. Light level sensor shall be capable of detecting changes in ambient lighting levels, shall provide a dimming range of 20 percent to 100 percent, minimum, and shall be designed for use with dimming ballast and voltage system to which they are connected. Sensor shall be capable of controlling 40 electronic dimming ballast, minimum. Sensor light level shall be adjustable and have a set level range from 10 to 100 footcandles, minimum. Sensor shall have a bypass function to electrically override sensor control.

2.1.5 Fluorescent Lamps

a. T-8 program start low mercury lamps shall be rated 30 watts (maximum), 2850 initial lumens (minimum), CRI of 75 (minimum), color temperature of 3500 K, and an average rated life of 20,000 hours. Low mercury lamps shall have passed the EPA Toxicity Characteristic Leachate Procedure (TCLP) for mercury by using the lamp sample preparation procedure described in NEMA LL 1.

b. T-8 program start lamp, 17 watt (maximum), nominal length of 24 inches, 1300 initial lumens, CRI of 75 (minimum), color temperature of 3500 K, and an average rated life of 20,000 hours.

c. T-8 instant start lamp, 59 watts (maximum), nominal length of 96 inches, minimum CRI of 75, 5700 initial lumens, color temperature of 3500 K, and average rated life of 15,000 hours.

d. T-8, U shaped fluorescent lamp, 31 watts maximum, 2600 initial lumens (minimum), 3500 K, 75 CRI (minimum), 20,000 hours average rated life, 1.625 inch leg spacing.

e. Compact fluorescent lamps shall be: CRI 80, minimum, 3500 K, 10,000 hours average rated life.

2.1.6 Compact Fluorescent Fixtures

Compact fluorescent fixtures shall be manufactured specifically for compact fluorescent lamps with ballasts integral to the fixture. Providing assemblies designed to retrofit incandescent fixtures is prohibited except when specifically indicated for renovation of existing fixtures. Fixtures shall use lamps as indicated.

2.1.7 Open-Tube Fluorescent Fixtures

Provide with self-locking sockets, or lamp retainers (two per lamp). Where indicated, provide a clear polycarbonate protective sleeve with end caps, over lamp, with 95 percent (minimum) light transmission. The sleeve shall be rated to withstand the thermal profile of the lamp and ballast.

2.2 HIGH-INTENSITY-DISCHARGE (HID) LIGHTING FIXTURES

UL 1598. Provide HID fixtures with tempered glass lenses when using metal-halide lamps.

2.2.1 HID Ballasts

UL 1029 and NEMA C82.4 and shall be constant wattage autotransformer (CWA) or regulator, high power factor type (minimum 90%). Provide single-lamp



ballasts which shall have a minimum starting temperature of minus 30 degrees C. Ballasts shall be:

a. Designed to operate on the voltage system to which they are connected.

b. Designed for installation in a normal ambient temperature of 40 degrees C.

c. Constructed so that open circuit operation will not reduce the average life.

2.2.2 Metal-Halide Lamps

a. Single-ended, wattage as indicated, conforming to NEMA C78.43

2.3 INCANDESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES

Use of incandescent lamps and fixtures is prohibited, unless specifically indicated otherwise. UL 1598.

2.3.1 Incandescent Lamps

Provide the number, type, and wattage indicated.

2.4 RECESS- AND FLUSH-MOUNTED FIXTURES

Provide type that can be relamped from the bottom. Access to ballast shall be from the bottom. Trim for the exposed surface of flush-mounted fixtures shall be as indicated.

2.5 SUSPENDED FIXTURES

Provide hangers capable of supporting twice the combined weight of fixtures supported by hangers. Provide with swivel hangers to ensure a plumb installation. Hangers shall be cadmium-plated steel with a swivel-ball tapped for the conduit size indicated. Hangers shall allow fixtures to swing within an angle of 45 degrees. Brace pendants 4 feet or longer to limit swinging. Single-unit suspended fluorescent fixtures shall have twin-stem hangers. Multiple-unit or continuous row fluorescent fixtures shall have a tubing or stem for wiring at one point and a tubing or rod suspension provided for each unit length of chassis, including one at each end. Rods shall be a minimum 0.18 inch diameter.

2.6 FIXTURES FOR HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS

In addition to requirements stated herein, provide fluorescent fixtures for hazardous locations which conform to UL 844 or which have Factory Mutual certification for the class and division indicated.

2.7 SWITCHES

2.7.1 Toggle Switches

Provide toggle switches as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

2.7.2 Incandescent Dimmer Switch

UL 20, single-pole, 600 watt, 120 volt ac, full-range rotary on-off type



with built-in electromagnetic interference filter.

2.8 LIGHTING CONTROL RELAY PANEL

2.8.1 Relay Panel

Relay panel shall comply with UL 508. Relay panel shall be Leviton Z-Max or equal and be supplied in the following configuration:

a. Panel shall be populated with (24) relays.b. Panel shall support installation of control module with associated

accessories, control protocols, and inputs and outputs.c. Panel shall support installation of multiple relay modules, up to

the maximum number of relays supported by the cabinet.d. Surface panel shall be constructed of steel, a NEMA 1, IP-20

protection, rated enclosure with removable door.e. Panel shall be provided with a locking hinged door which can be

removed for ease of installation.

2.8.2 Relay Panel Power Supply

a. Relay panel shall include an integral power supply to power control modules, backplane, keypad, and other accessories which shall be powered directly or indirectly from the relay panel.

b. An optional external power supply may be used to power external accessories and control devices.

c. Control backplane shall provide data bus and data intercommunication between all relay modules, control module, and low voltage inputs.

d. Standard relay panel shall accept to a tolerance of +/- 10% incoming voltage of 277 VAC.

e. Optional barriers for field installation in the cabinets shall be available to separate differing voltages or for any other purpose as may be required by prevailing jurisdiction.

2.8.3 Relay Panel Control Module

The control module for the relay panel shall be a single self-contained unit, secured into the panel with readily accessible mounting screws and must be field installable and/or replaceable.

a. The control module shall receive all power from the power supply, integral to the relay power.

b. The control module shall distribute power to all connected devices and accessories as required.

c. The total available power for all connected devices shall be at least 500mA at 24VDC.

d. Voltage supplied to connected devices shall be +24VDC. Other supply voltages can be achieved with an external supply.

2.8.4 Control Module Installation

The control module shall be pre-installed into the cabinet by the factory.

2.8.5 Control Module Operation and Features

The basic and master control module keypad interface shall offer the following user interface components:



a. LCD display to indicate current status, error conditions, current time, programming confirmation and feedback.

b. Alphanumeric data entry keys.c. Arrow keys.d. Lock/unlock relay.e. Relay/group On/Off.f. Programming keys.g. Keypad interface shall offer programming of relay cabinet features

and operation, relay On/Off, timed relay/group Off, network relay groups On/Off and lock/unlock relay state.

2.8.6 Relay Panel Visual Mechanisms

Relay panel shall offer the following visual feedback mechanisms:

a. Individual relay status.(i) On.(ii) Off.(iii) Locked On.(iv) Locked off.(v) Overrride On.(vi) Override Off.

b. Control Module Microprocessor Online.c. Ethernet link.d. Modem connection.e. Relay communication microprocessor.f. +5VDC power supply normal operation.

2.8.7 Control Protocols

The following control protocols shall be supported:

a. Low voltage inputs.(12) 0-10 VDC inputs

b. BACnet MSTP

2.8.8 Time, Time Clock, Scheduler and Astronomical Features

a. 12 or 24 hour clock.b. Automatic daylight savings time adjustment.c. Latitude and longitude data entry.d. Sunrise/sunset offsets.e. Holiday and holiday schedule event engine.

(i) Holiday schedules can be assigned to any of the predefined holiday.s

f. 999 event dates (recurring by day of week, day of month, to occur only on a specified date or a specified date range.

2.8.9 Blink Warn

a. Adjustable time between blink warn and lights off.b. Adjustable time of blink flash.c. Individual relays can be selected for the blink warn feature.

2.8.10 Priorities

a. The system shall support 16 priorities.b. Each control input or many internal events can be assigned a

priority level.



c. The highest priority is 1, the lowest priority is 16.d. Higher priorities shall take and maintain control until a

"relinquish" command has been issued for that relay.e. Priority control is applied on a relay-by-relay basis.

2.8.11 Low Voltage Switch Support

a. Low voltage switch inputs shall be supported through any of the low voltage inputs.

b. Switch inputs can be triggered by either an "active low" (pull to common) or an "active high" )(pull to + voltage) signal.

c. Feedback shall be returned by the panel to the switch as either +V or common. Feedback can be used to illuminate LED's in the low voltage switch.

d. Inputs can be assigned the following functions:(i) Momentary (assigned relays operate in toggle behavior, press for on, press for off)(ii) Contact closures shall be connected to any of the low voltage inputs. Any contact closure can be assigned any action or any scheduled event/action.

2.9 LIGHTING CONTACTOR

NEMA ICS 2, mechanically held contactor. Contacts shall be rated 600 volts, 30 amperes, and have number of poles shown. Coils shall be rated 120 volts. Provide in NEMA 1 enclosure conforming to NEMA ICS 6. Contactor shall have silver alloy double-break contacts and coil clearing contacts for mechanically held contactor. Provide contactor with hand-off-automatic selector switch.

2.10 TIME SWITCH

Astronomic dial type or electronic type, arranged to turn "ON" at sunset and turn "OFF" at predetermined time between 8:30 p.m. and 2:30 a.m. or sunrise, automatically changing the settings each day in accordance with seasonal changes of sunset and sunrise. Provide switch rated 120 volts, having automatically wound spring mechanism or capacitor, to maintain accurate time for a minimum of 15 hours following power failure. Provide time switch with a manual on-off bypass switch. Housing for the time switch shall be surface-mounted, NEMA 1 enclosure conforming to NEMA ICS 6.

2.11 PHOTOCELL SWITCH

UL 773 or UL 773A, hermetically sealed cadmium-sulfide or silicon diode type cell rated 120 volts ac, 60 Hz with single pole double-throw (SPDT) contacts for control of mechanically held contactors, rated 1000 W. Switch shall turn on at or below 3 footcandles and off at 2 to 10 footcandles. A time delay shall prevent accidental switching from transient light sources. Provide switch:

a. In a U.V. stabilized polycarbonate housing with swivel arm and adjustable window slide, rated 1800 VA, minimum.

2.12 POWER HOOK FIXTURE HANGERS

Provide UL listed assembly including through-wired power hook housing, interlocking plug and receptacle, power cord, and fixture support loop. Power hook housing shall be cast aluminum having two 3/4 inch threaded hubs. Support hook shall have safety screw. Fixture support loop shall be



cast aluminum with provisions for accepting 3/4 inch threaded fixture stems. Power cord shall include 16 inches of 3 conductor No. 16 Type SO cord. Assembly shall be rated 120 volts or 277 volts, 15 amperes.

2.13 EXIT SIGNS

UL 924, NFPA 70, and NFPA 101. Exit signs shall be self-powered type. Exit signs shall use no more than 5 watts.

2.13.1 Self-Powered LED Type Exit Signs (Battery Backup)

Provide with automatic power failure device, test switch, pilot light, and fully automatic high/low trickle charger in a self-contained power pack. Battery shall be sealed electrolyte type, shall operate unattended, and require no maintenance, including no additional water, for a period of not less than 5 years. LED exit sign shall have emergency run time of 1 1/2 hours (minimum). The light emitting diodes shall have rated lamp life of 70,000 hours (minimum).

2.14 EMERGENCY LIGHTING EQUIPMENT

UL 924, NFPA 70, and NFPA 101. Provide lamps in wattage indicated. Provide accessories required for remote-mounted lamps where indicated. Remote-mounted lamps shall be as indicated.

2.14.1 Emergency Lighting Unit

Provide as indicated. Emergency lighting units shall be rated for 12 volts, except units having no remote-mounted lamps and having no more than two unit-mounted lamps may be rated 6 volts. Equip units with brown-out sensitive circuit to activate battery when ac input falls to 75 percent of normal voltage.

2.14.2 Fluorescent Emergency System

Each system shall consist of an automatic power failure device, test switch operable from outside of the fixture, pilot light visible from outside the fixture, and fully automatic solid-state charger in a self-contained power pack. Charger shall be either trickle, float, constant current or constant potential type, or a combination of these. Battery shall be sealed electrolyte type with capacity as required to supply power to the number of lamps shown for each system for 90 minutes at a minimum of 1100 lumens per lamp output. Battery shall operate unattended and require no maintenance, including no additional water, for a period of not less than 5 years. Emergency ballasts provided with fixtures containing solid-state ballasts shall be fully compatible with the solid-state ballasts.

2.15 OCCUPANCY SENSORS

Provide occupancy sensors with an integral set of auxiliary contacts for HVAC control. Acceptable alternatives are an add-on relay unit designed by the occupancy sensor manufacturer for HVAC control; or a separate, enclosed relay typical of the "RIB" relay by Functional Devices, Inc., or equal, which is controlled by the line voltage switch leg of the occupancy sensor.

UL listed. Comply with GC-12. Occupancy sensors and power packs shall be designed to operate on the voltage indicated. Sensors and power packs shall have circuitry that only allows load switching at or near zero current crossing of supply voltage. Occupancy sensor mounting as



indicated. Sensor shall have an LED occupant detection indicator. Sensor shall have adjustable sensitivity and adjustable delayed-off time range of 5 minutes to 15 minutes. Wall mounted sensors shall match the color of adjacent wall plates as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, ceiling mounted sensors shall be white. Ceiling mounted sensors shall have 360 degree coverage unless otherwise indicated.

a. Ultrasonic sensor shall be crystal controlled and shall not cause detection interference between adjacent sensors.

b. Infrared sensors shall have a daylight filter. Sensor shall have a fresnel lens that is applicable to space to be controlled.

c. Ultrasonic/Infrared Combination Sensor

d. Microwave and audiophonic sensors.

Occupancy detection to turn lights on requires both ultrasonic and infrared sensor detection. Lights shall remain on if either the ultrasonic or infrared sensor detects movement. Infrared sensor shall have lens selected for indicated usage and daylight filter to prevent short wavelength infrared interference. Ultrasonic sensor frequency shall be crystal controlled.

2.16 SUPPORT HANGERS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES IN SUSPENDED CEILINGS

2.16.1 Wires

ASTM A 641/A 641M, galvanized regular coating, soft temper, 0.1055 inches in diameter (12 gage).

2.17 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

2.17.1 Manufacturer's Nameplate



Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance test.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


3.1.1 Lamps

Lamps of the type, wattage, and voltage rating indicated shall be delivered to the project in the original cartons and installed just prior to project completion. Lamps installed and used for working light during construction shall be replaced prior to turnover to the Government if more than 15



percent of their rated life has been used. Lamps shall be tested for proper operation prior to turn-over and shall be replaced if necessary with new lamps from the original manufacturer. Provide 10 percent spare lamps of each type from the original manufacturer.

3.1.2 Lighting Fixtures

Set lighting fixtures plumb, square, and level with ceiling and walls, in alignment with adjacent lighting fixtures, and secure in accordance with manufacturers' directions and approved drawings. Installation shall meet requirements of NFPA 70. Mounting heights specified or indicated shall be to the bottom of fixture for ceiling-mounted fixtures and to center of fixture for wall-mounted fixtures. Obtain approval of the exact mounting for lighting fixtures on the job before commencing installation and, where applicable, after coordinating with the type, style, and pattern of the ceiling being installed. Recessed and semi-recessed fixtures shall be independently supported from the building structure by a minimum of four wires per fixture and located near each corner of each fixture. Ceiling grid clips are not allowed as an alternative to independently supported light fixtures. Round fixtures or fixtures smaller in size than the ceiling grid shall be independently supported from the building structure by a minimum of four wires per fixture spaced approximately equidistant around the fixture. Do not support fixtures by ceiling acoustical panels. Where fixtures of sizes less than the ceiling grid are indicated to be centered in the acoustical panel, support such fixtures independently and provide at least two 3/4 inch metal channels spanning, and secured to, the ceiling tees for centering and aligning the fixture. Provide wires for lighting fixture support in this section. Lighting fixtures installed in suspended ceilings shall also comply with the requirements of Section 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS.

3.1.3 Suspended Fixtures

Suspended fixtures shall be provided with 45 degree swivel hangers so that they hang plumb and shall be located with no obstructions within the 45 degree range in all directions. The stem, canopy and fixture shall be capable of 45 degree swing. Pendants, rods, or chains 4 feet or longer excluding fixture shall be braced to prevent swaying using three cables at 120 degree separation. Suspended fixtures in continuous rows shall have internal wireway systems for end to end wiring and shall be properly aligned to provide a straight and continuous row without bends, gaps, light leaks or filler pieces. Aligning splines shall be used on extruded aluminum fixtures to assure hairline joints. Steel fixtures shall be supported to prevent "oil-canning" effects. Fixture finishes shall be free of scratches, nicks, dents, and warps, and shall match the color and gloss specified. Pendants shall be finished to match fixtures. Aircraft cable shall be stainless steel. Canopies shall be finished to match the ceiling and shall be low profile unless otherwise shown. Maximum distance between suspension points shall be 10 feet or as recommended by the manufacturer, whichever is less.

3.1.4 Ballasts

3.1.4.1 Remote Ballasts

Remote type ballasts or transformers, where indicated, shall be mounted in a well ventilated, easily accessible location, within the maximum operating distance from the lamp, as designated by the manufacturer.



3.1.4.2 Electronic Dimming Ballasts

All electronic dimming ballasts controlled by the same controller shall be of the same manufacturer. All fluorescent lamps on electronic dimming ballast control shall be seasoned or burned in at full light output for 100 hours before dimming.

3.1.5 Exit Signs and Emergency Lighting Units

Wire exit signs and emergency lighting units ahead of any switching of the normal lighting circuit located in the same room or area.

3.1.6 Photocell Switch Aiming

Aim switch according to manufacturer's recommendations.

3.1.7 Occupancy Sensor

Provide an empty conduit from wall mounted occupancy sensors to accessible ceiling space for sensors that have integral auxiliary contacts. For occupancy sensors that are provided with a manufacturer's add-on relay or a separate "RIB" type relay, mount the relay in a location accessible to the HVAC controls contractor to allow them to make connections to it. Coordinate installation with the HVAC controls contractor to ensure a complete installation.

Provide quantity of sensor units indicated as a minimum. Provide additional units to give full coverage over controlled area. Full coverage shall provide hand and arm motion detection for office and administration type areas and walking motion for storage rooms and hallways. Locate the sensor(s) as indicated and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to maximize energy savings and to avoid nuisance activation and deactivation due to sudden temperature or airflow changes and usage. Set sensor "on" duration to 15 minutes.

3.1.8 Light Level Sensor

Locate light level sensor as indicated and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Adjust sensor for 50 footcandles or for the indicated light level at the typical work plane for that area.


Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. Painting shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.


Upon completion of installation, verify that equipment is properly installed, connected, and adjusted. Conduct an operating test to show that equipment operates in accordance with requirements of this section.

3.3.1 Electronic Dimming Ballast

Test for full range of dimming capability. Observe for visually detectable flicker over full dimming range.



3.3.2 Occupancy Sensor

Test sensors for proper operation. Observe for light control over entire area being covered. Test sensor/relay/power pack to make sure that the proper occupied/unoccupied signals are being given to the mechanical HVAC system (VAV boxes) that are located within the same area as the associated occupancy sensor.




SECTION 26 56 00

EXTERIOR LIGHTING07/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO)

AASHTO LTS (2001; Am 2002, Am 2003, Am 2006) Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signals


ANSI C136.21 (2004) Roadway Lighting Equipment - Vertical Tenons Used with Post-Top-Mounted Luminairesk


ASTM A 123/A 123M (2008) Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products


ASTM B 108/B 108M (2008) Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Permanent Mold Castings

ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING SOCIETY OF NORTH AMERICA (IESNA)

IESNA HB-9 (2000; Errata 2004; Errata 2005) IES Lighting Handbook








NEMA C136.13 (2004) Roadway Lighting Equipment, Metal Brackets for Wood Poles

NEMA C136.3 (2005) Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment Luminaire Attachments

NEMA C78.43 (2007) Standard for Electric Lamps - Single-Ended Metal-Halide Lamps

NEMA C82.4 (2002) Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge and Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type)

NEMA ICS 2 (2000; Errata 2002; R 2005; Errata 2006) Standard for Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contractors, and Overload Relays Rated Not More than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC: Part 8 - Disconnect Devices for Use in Industrial Control Equipment





Energy Star (1992; R 2006) Energy Star Energy Efficiency Labeling System


UL 1029 (1994; Rev thru Dec 2007) Standard for Safety High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts

UL 1598 (2008) Luminaires

UL 773 (1995; Rev thru Mar 2002) Standard for Plug-In Locking Type Photocontrols for Use with Area Lighting

UL 773A (2006) Nonindustrial Photoelectric Switches for Lighting Control

1.2 DEFINITIONS


b. Average life is the time after which 50 percent will have failed and 50 percent will have survived under normal conditions.

c. Groundline section is that portion between one foot above and 2 feet



below the groundline.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only or as otherwise designated. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Luminaire drawings; G

Poles; G

SD-03 Product Data

Local/Regional Materials

Submit documentation indicating distance between manufacturing facility and the project site. Indicate distance of raw material origin from the project site. Indicate relative dollar value of local/regional materials to total dollar value of products included in project.

Environmental Data

Luminaires; G

Lamps; G

Ballasts; G

Lighting contactor; G

Time switch; G

Photocell switch; G

Aluminum poles; G

Steel poles; G

Brackets

SD-05 Design Data

Design Data for luminaires; G

SD-06 Test Reports

Pressure treated wood pole quality

Tests for fiberglass poles; G

Operating test



Submit operating test results as stated in paragraph entitled "Field Quality Control."

SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions

Concrete poles

Submit instructions prior to installation.

Fiberglass poles



Operational Service

Submit documentation that includes contact information, summary of procedures, and the limitations and conditions applicable to the project. Indicate manufacturer's commitment to reclaim materials for recycling and/or reuse.


1.4.1 Drawing Requirements

1.4.1.1 Luminaire Drawings

Include dimensions, effective projected area (EPA), accessories, and installation and construction details. Photometric data, including zonal lumen data, average and minimum ratio, aiming diagram, and computerized candlepower distribution data shall accompany shop drawings.

1.4.1.2 Poles

Include dimensions, wind load determined in accordance with AASHTO LTS, pole deflection, pole class, and other applicable information.

1.4.2 Design Data for Luminaires

a. Distribution data according to IESNA classification type as defined in IESNA HB-9.

b. Computerized horizontal illumination levels in footcandles at ground level, taken every 10 feet. Include average maintained footcandle level and maximum and minimum ratio.

c. Amount of shielding on luminaires.











1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

1.5.1 Aluminum and Steel Poles

Do not store poles on ground. Support poles so they are at least one foot above ground level and growing vegetation. Do not remove factory-applied pole wrappings until just before installing pole.

1.6 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

1.6.1 Local/Regional Materials

Use materials or products extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within a 500 mile radius from the project site, if available from a minimum of three sources.

1.6.2 Energy Efficiency

Comply with National Energy Policy Act and Energy Star requirements for lighting products. Submit documentation for Energy Star qualifications for equipment provided under this section. Submit data indicating lumens per watt efficiency and color rendition index of light source.

1.7 WARRANTY




PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT COORDINATION

Products and materials not considered to be lighting equipment or lighting fixture accessories are specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Lighting fixtures and accessories mounted on exterior surfaces of buildings are specified in Section 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING.

2.2 LUMINAIRES

UL 1598. Provide luminaires as indicated. Provide luminaires complete with lamps of number, type, and wattage indicated. Details, shapes, and dimensions are indicative of the general type desired, but are not intended to restrict selection to luminaires of a particular manufacturer. Luminaires of similar designs, light distribution and brightness characteristics, and of equal finish and quality will be acceptable as approved.

2.2.1 Lamps

2.2.1.1 Metal-Halide Lamps

Provide luminaires with tempered glass lens.

a. Single-ended, wattage as indicated, conforming to NEMA C78.43

2.2.2 Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge (HID) Luminaires

UL 1029 and NEMA C82.4, and shall be constant wattage autotransformer (CWA) or regulator, high power-factor type (minimum 90%). Provide single-lamp ballasts which shall have a minimum starting temperature of minus 30 degrees C. Ballasts shall be:

a. Designed to operate on voltage system to which they are connected.

b. Constructed so that open circuit operation will not reduce the average life.

HID ballasts shall have a solid-state igniter/starter with an average life in the pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at the intended ambient temperature. Igniter case temperature shall not exceed 90 degrees C.

2.3 LIGHTING CONTACTOR

NEMA ICS 2, mechanically held contactor. Contacts shall be rated 300 volts, 30 amperes, and number of poles shown. Coils shall be rated 120 volts. Provide in NEMA 1 enclosure conforming to NEMA ICS 6. Contactor shall have silver alloy double-break contacts and coil clearing contacts for mechanically held contactor and shall require no arcing contacts. Provide contactor with hand-off-automatic selector switch.

2.4 TIME SWITCH

Astronomic dial type or electronic type, arranged to turn "ON" at sunset, and turn "OFF" at predetermined time between 8:30 p.m. and 2:30 a.m. or sunrise, automatically changing the settings each day in accordance with seasonal changes of sunset and sunrise. Provide switch rated 120 volts, having automatically wound spring mechanism or capacitor, to maintain



accurate time for a minimum of 7 hours following power failure. Provide time switch with a manual on-off bypass switch. Housing for the time switch shall be surface mounted, NEMA 1 enclosure conforming to NEMA ICS 6.

2.5 PHOTOCELL SWITCH

UL 773 or UL 773A, hermetically sealed cadmium-sulfide or silicon diode type cell rated 120 volts ac, 60 Hz with single pole double-throw (spdt) contacts for mechanically held contactors rated 1000 watts designed to fail to the ON position. Switch shall turn on at or below 3 footcandles and off at 4 to 10 footcandles. A time delay shall prevent accidental switching from transient light sources. Provide a directional lens in front of the cell to prevent fixed light sources from creating a turnoff condition. Provide switch:

a. In a U.V. stabilized polycarbonate housing with swivel arm and adjustable window slide, rated 1800 VA, minimum.

2.6 POLES

Provide poles designed for wind loading of 100 miles per hour determined in accordance with AASHTO LTS while supporting luminaires and all other appurtenances indicated. The effective projected areas of luminaires and appurtenances used in calculations shall be specific for the actual products provided on each pole. Poles shall be anchor-base type designed for use with underground supply conductors. Poles shall have oval-shaped handhole having a minimum clear opening of 2.5 by 5 inches. Handhole cover shall be secured by stainless steel captive screws. Metal poles shall have an internal grounding connection accessible from the handhole near the bottom of each pole. Scratched, stained, chipped, or dented poles shall not be installed.

2.6.1 Aluminum Poles

Provide aluminum poles manufactured of corrosion resistant aluminum alloys conforming to AASHTO LTS for Alloy 6063-T6 or Alloy 6005-T5 for wrought alloys and Alloy 356-T4 (3,5) for cast alloys. Poles shall be seamless extruded or spun seamless type with minimum 0.188 inch wall thickness. Provide a pole grounding connection designed to prevent electrolysis when used with copper ground wire. Tops of shafts shall be fitted with a round or tapered cover. Base shall be anchor bolt mounted, made of cast 356-T6 aluminum alloy in accordance with ASTM B 108/B 108M and shall be machined to receive the lower end of shaft. Joint between shaft and base shall be welded. Base cover shall be cast 356-T6 aluminum alloy in accordance with ASTM B 108/B 108M. Hardware, except anchor bolts, shall be either 2024-T4 anodized aluminum alloy or stainless steel. Manufacturer's standard provision shall be made for protecting the finish during shipment and installation. Minimum protection shall consist of spirally wrapping each pole shaft with protective paper secured with tape, and shipping small parts in boxes.

2.6.2 Steel Poles

AASHTO LTS. Provide steel poles having minimum 11-gage steel with minimum yield/strength of 48,000 psi and hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123/A 123M factory finish. Provide a pole grounding connection designed to prevent electrolysis when used with copper ground wire. Pole shall be anchor bolt mounted type. Poles shall have tapered tubular members, either round in cross section or polygonal. Pole shafts shall be



one piece. Poles shall be welded construction with no bolts, rivets, or other means of fastening except as specifically approved. Pole markings shall be approximately 3 to 4 feet above grade and shall include manufacturer, year of manufacture, top and bottom diameters, and length. Base covers for steel poles shall be structural quality hot-rolled carbon steel plate having a minimum yield of 36,000 psi.

2.7 BRACKETS AND SUPPORTS

NEMA C136.3, NEMA C136.13, and ANSI C136.21, as applicable. Pole brackets shall be not less than 1 1/4 inch galvanized steel pipe secured to pole. Slip-fitter or pipe-threaded brackets may be used, but brackets shall be coordinated to luminaires provided, and brackets for use with one type of luminaire shall be identical. Brackets for pole-mounted street lights shall correctly position luminaire no lower than mounting height indicated. Mount brackets not less than 24 feet above street. Special mountings or brackets shall be as indicated and shall be of metal which will not promote galvanic reaction with luminaire head.

2.8 POLE FOUNDATIONS

Anchor bolts shall be steel rod having a minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi; the top 12 inches of the rod shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153/A 153M. Concrete shall be as specified in Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

2.9 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

2.9.1 Manufacturer's Nameplate



Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance test.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


3.1.1 Aluminum and Steel Poles

Provide pole foundations with galvanized steel anchor bolts, threaded at the top end and bent 90 degrees at the bottom end. Provide ornamental covers to match pole and galvanized nuts and washers for anchor bolts. Concrete for anchor bases, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit ells, and ground rods. Thoroughly compact backfill with compacting arranged to prevent pressure between conductor, jacket, or sheath and the end of conduit ell. Adjust poles as necessary to provide a permanent vertical position with the bracket arm in proper position for luminaire location.



3.1.2 GROUNDING

Ground noncurrent-carrying parts of equipment including metal poles, luminaires, mounting arms, brackets, and metallic enclosures as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Where copper grounding conductor is connected to a metal other than copper, provide specially treated or lined connectors suitable for this purpose.

3.1.3 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING



Upon completion of installation, verify that equipment is properly installed, connected, and adjusted. Conduct an operating test to show that the equipment operates in accordance with the requirements of this section.




SECTION 27 10 00

BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM01/08

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES




CONSUMER ELECTRONICS ASSOCIATION (CEA)

CEA-310-E (2005) Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment



INSULATED CABLE ENGINEERS ASSOCIATION (ICEA)

ICEA S-83-596 (2001) Fiber Optic Premises Distribution Cable

ICEA S-90-661 (2002) Category 3, 5, & 5e Individually Unshielded Twisted Pair Indoor Cable for Use in General Purpose and LAN Communications Wiring Systems


NEMA WC 63.1 (2005) Twisted Pair Premise Voice and Data Communications Cables





TIA-455-21-A (1988) FOTP-21 - Mating Durability of Fiber Optic Interconnecting Devices

TIA-492AAAB (1998; R 2002) 50-Um Core Diameter/125-Um



Cladding Diameter Class IA Graded-Index Multimode Optical Fibers

TIA-492CAAA (1998; R 2002) Class IVA Dispersion-Unshifted Single-Mode Optical Fibers

TIA-526-14-A (1998) OFSTP-14A Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant

TIA-526-7 (2002; R 2008) Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single-Mode Fiber Cable Plant OFSTP-7

TIA-568-C.1 (2009) Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard

TIA-568-C.3 (2008e1) Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard

TIA-569-B (2004) Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces

TIA/EIA-568-B.2 (2001) Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 2: Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components

TIA/EIA-598-B (2001) Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding

TIA/EIA-604-3A (2000) FOCUS 3 Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standard

TIA/EIA-606-A (2002) Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure

U.S. FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION (FCC)

FCC Part 68 Connection of Terminal Equipment to the Telephone Network (47 CFR 68)


UL 1286 (2008; Rev thru May 2009) Office Furnishings

UL 1666 (2007) Test for Flame Propagation Height of Electrical and Optical-Fiber Cables Installed Vertically in Shafts

UL 1863 (2004; Rev thru Aug 2008) Communication Circuit Accessories

UL 444 (2008; Rev thru Jul 2008) Communications Cables




UL 50 (2007) Standard for Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

UL 514C (1996; Rev thru Dec 2008) Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes, and Covers

UL 910 (1998) Test for Flame-Propagation and Smoke-Density Values for Electrical and Optical-Fiber Cables Used in Spaces Transporting Environmental Air

UL 969 (1995; Rev thru Nov 2008) Marking and Labeling Systems


Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM and Section 33 82 00 TELECOMMUNICATIONS, OUTSIDE PLANT, apply to this section with additions and modifications specified herein.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in this specification shall be as defined in TIA-568-C.1, TIA/EIA-568-B.2,TIA-569-B, TIA-568-C.3, TIA/EIA-606-A and IEEE Std 100 and herein.

1.3.1 Campus Distributor (CD)

A distributor from which the campus backbone cabling emanates. (International expression for main cross-connect (MC).)

1.3.2 Building Distributor (BD)

A distributor in which the building backbone cables terminate and at which connections to the campus backbone cables may be made. (International expression for intermediate cross-connect (IC).)

1.3.3 Floor Distributor (FD)

A distributor used to connect horizontal cable and cabling subsystems or equipment. (International expression for horizontal cross-connect (HC).)

1.3.4 Telecommunications Room (TR) and Telecommunications Equipment Room (TER)

An enclosed space for housing telecommunications equipment, cable, terminations, and cross-connects. The room is the recognized cross-connect between the backbone cable and the horizontal cabling. The main TR will be identified as the TER.

1.3.5 Entrance Facility (EF) (Telecommunications)

An entrance to the building for both private and public network service cables (including antennae) including the entrance point at the building wall and continuing to the entrance room or space.



1.3.6 Entrance Room (ER) (Telecommunications)

A centralized space for telecommunications equipment that serves the occupants of a building. Equipment housed therein is considered distinct from a telecommunications room because of the nature of its complexity.

1.3.7 Open Cable

Cabling that is not run in a raceway as defined by NFPA 70. This refers to cabling that is "open" to the space in which the cable has been installed and is therefore exposed to the environmental conditions associated with that space.

1.3.8 Open Office

A floor space division provided by furniture, moveable partitions, or other means instead of by building walls.

1.3.9 Pathway

A physical infrastructure utilized for the placement and routing of telecommunications cable.


The building telecommunications cabling and pathway system shall include permanently installed backbone and horizontal cabling, horizontal and backbone pathways, service entrance facilities, work area pathways, telecommunications outlet assemblies, conduit, raceway, and hardware for splicing, terminating, and interconnecting cabling necessary to transport telephone and data (including LAN) between equipment items in a building. The horizontal system shall be wired in a star topology from the telecommunications work area to the floor distributor or campus distributor at the center or hub of the star. The backbone cabling and pathway system includes intrabuilding and interbuilding interconnecting cabling, pathway, and terminal hardware. The intrabuilding backbone provides connectivity from the floor distributors to the building distributors or to the campus distributor and from the building distributors to the campus distributor as required. The backbone system shall be wired in a star topology with the campus distributor at the center or hub of the star. The interbuilding backbone system provides connectivity between the campus distributors and is specified in Section 33 82 00, TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTSIDE PLANT. Provide telecommunications pathway systems referenced herein as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Telecommunications drawings; G

Telecommunications Space Drawings; G



In addition to Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, provide shop drawings in accordance with paragraph SHOP DRAWINGS.

SD-03 Product Data

Telecommunications cabling (backbone and horizontal); G

Patch panels; G

Telecommunications outlet/connector assemblies; G

Equipment support frame; G

Connector blocks; G

Spare Parts; G

Submittals shall include the manufacturer's name, trade name, place of manufacture, and catalog model or number. Include performance and characteristic curves. Submittals shall also include applicable federal, military, industry, and technical society publication references. Should manufacturer's data require supplemental information for clarification, the supplemental information shall be submitted as specified in paragraph REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS and as required in Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.

SD-06 Test Reports

Telecommunications cabling testing; G

SD-07 Certificates

Telecommunications Contractor Qualifications; G

Key Personnel Qualifications; G

Manufacturer Qualifications; G

Test plan; G


Factory reel tests; G


Telecommunications cabling and pathway system Data Package 5; G


Record Documentation; G


1.6.1 Shop Drawings

In exception to Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, submit shop drawings a minimum of 14 by 20 inches in size using a minimum scale of 1/8



inch per foot, except as specified otherwise. Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated installation. Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment devices. Submittals shall include the nameplate data, size, and capacity. Submittals shall also include applicable federal, military, industry, and technical society publication references.

1.6.1.1 Telecommunications Drawings

Provide registered communications distribution designer (RCDD) approved, drawings in accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A. The identifier for each termination and cable shall appear on the drawings. Drawings shall depict final telecommunications installed wiring system infrastructure in accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A. The drawings should provide details required to prove that the distribution system shall properly support connectivity from the EF telecommunications and ER telecommunications, TER, TR, and CDs to the telecommunications work area outlets. Provide a plastic laminated schematic of the as-installed telecommunications cable system showing cabling, CDs, BDs, FDs, and the EF and ER for telecommunications keyed to floor plans by room number. Mount the laminated schematic in the TER space as directed by the Contracting Officer. The following drawings shall be provided as a minimum:

a. T1 - Layout of complete building per floor - Building Area/Serving Zone Boundaries, Backbone Systems, and Horizontal Pathways. Layout of complete building per floor. The drawing indicates location of building areas, serving zones, vertical backbone diagrams, telecommunications rooms, access points, pathways, grounding system, and other systems that need to be viewed from the complete building perspective.

b. T2 - Serving Zones/Building Area Drawings - Drop Locations and Cable Identification (ID’S). Shows a building area or serving zone. These drawings show drop locations, telecommunications rooms, access points and detail call outs for common equipment rooms and other congested areas.

c. T4 - Typical Detail Drawings - Faceplate Labeling, Firestopping, Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Safety, Department of Transportation (DOT). Detailed drawings of symbols and typicals such as faceplate labeling, faceplate types, faceplate population installation procedures, detail racking, and raceways.

1.6.1.2 Telecommunications Space Drawings

Provide T3 drawings in accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A that include telecommunications rooms plan views, pathway layout (cable tray, racks, ladder-racks, etc.), mechanical/electrical layout, and cabinet, rack, backboard and wall elevations. Drawings shall show layout of applicable equipment including incoming cable stub or connector blocks, building protector assembly, outgoing cable connector blocks, patch panels and equipment spaces and cabinet/racks. Drawings shall include a complete list of equipment and material, equipment rack details, proposed layout and anchorage of equipment and appurtenances, and equipment relationship to



other parts of the work including clearance for maintenance and operation. Drawings may also be an enlargement of a congested area of T1 or T2 drawings.

1.6.2 Telecommunications Qualifications

Work under this section shall be performed by and the equipment shall be provided by the approved telecommunications contractor and key personnel. Qualifications shall be provided for: the telecommunications system contractor, the telecommunications system installer, and the supervisor (if different from the installer). A minimum of 30 days prior to installation, submit documentation of the experience of the telecommunications contractor and of the key personnel.

1.6.2.1 Telecommunications Contractor

The telecommunications contractor shall be a firm which is regularly and professionally engaged in the business of the applications, installation, and testing of the specified telecommunications systems and equipment. The telecommunications contractor shall demonstrate experience in providing successful telecommunications systems within the past 3 years. Submit documentation for a minimum of three and a maximum of five successful telecommunication system installations for the telecommunications contractor.

1.6.2.2 Key Personnel

Provide key personnel who are regularly and professionally engaged in the business of the application, installation and testing of the specified telecommunications systems and equipment. There may be one key person or more key persons proposed for this solicitation depending upon how many of the key roles each has successfully provided. Each of the key personnel shall demonstrate experience in providing successful telecommunications systems within the past 3 years.

Supervisors and installers assigned to the installation of this system or any of its components shall be Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI) Registered Cabling Installers, Technician Level. Submit documentation of current BICSI certification for each of the key personnel.

In lieu of BICSI certification, supervisors and installers assigned to the installation of this system or any of its components shall have a minimum of 3 years experience in the installation of the specified copper and fiber optic cable and components. They shall have factory or factory approved certification from each equipment manufacturer indicating that they are qualified to install and test the provided products. Submit documentation for a minimum of three and a maximum of five successful telecommunication system installations for each of the key personnel. Documentation for each key person shall include at least two successful system installations provided that are equivalent in system size and in construction complexity to the telecommunications system proposed for this solicitation. Include specific experience in installing and testing telecommunications systems and provide the names and locations of at least two project installations successfully completed using optical fiber and copper telecommunications cabling systems. All of the existing telecommunications system installations offered by the key persons as successful experience shall have been in successful full-time service for at least 18 months prior to the issuance date for this solicitation. Provide the name and role of the



key person, the title, location, and completed installation date of the referenced project, the referenced project owner point of contact information including name, organization, title, and telephone number, and generally, the referenced project description including system size and construction complexity.

Indicate that all key persons are currently employed by the telecommunications contractor, or have a commitment to the telecommunications contractor to work on this project. All key persons shall be employed by the telecommunications contractor at the date of issuance of this solicitation, or if not, have a commitment to the telecommunications contractor to work on this project by the date that the bid was due to the Contracting Officer.

Note that only the key personnel approved by the Contracting Officer in the successful proposal shall do work on this solicitation's telecommunications system. Key personnel shall function in the same roles in this contract, as they functioned in the offered successful experience. Any substitutions for the telecommunications contractor's key personnel requires approval from The Contracting Officer.

1.6.2.3 Minimum Manufacturer Qualifications

Cabling, equipment and hardware manufacturers shall have a minimum of 3 years experience in the manufacturing, assembly, and factory testing of components which comply with TIA-568-C.1, TIA/EIA-568-B.2 and TIA-568-C.3.

1.6.3 Test Plan

Provide a complete and detailed test plan for the telecommunications cabling system including a complete list of test equipment for the UTP and optical fiber components and accessories 60 days prior to the proposed test date. Include procedures for certification, validation, and testing.











1.7 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

Provide protection from weather, moisture, extreme heat and cold, dirt, dust, and other contaminants for telecommunications cabling and equipment placed in storage.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

Connecting hardware shall be rated for operation under ambient conditions of 32 to 140 degrees F and in the range of 0 to 95 percent relative humidity, noncondensing.

1.9 WARRANTY


1.10 MAINTENANCE

1.10.1 Operation and Maintenance Manuals

Commercial off the shelf manuals shall be furnished for operation, installation, configuration, and maintenance of products provided as a part of the telecommunications cabling and pathway system. Submit operations and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein not later than 2 months prior to the date of beneficial occupancy. In addition to requirements of Data package 5, include the requirements of paragraphs TELECOMMUNICATIONS DRAWINGS, TELECOMMUNICATIONS SPACE DRAWINGS, and RECORD DOCUMENTATION.

1.10.2 Record Documentation

Provide T5 drawings including documentation on cables and termination hardware in accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A. T5 drawings shall include schedules to show information for cut-overs and cable plant management, patch panel layouts and cover plate assignments, cross-connect information and connecting terminal layout as a minimum. T5 drawings shall be provided in hard copy format and on electronic media using Windows based computer cable management software. Provide the following T5 drawing documentation as a minimum:

a. Cables - A record of installed cable shall be provided in accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A. The cable records shall include the required data fields for each cable and complete end-to-end circuit report for each complete circuit from the assigned outlet



to the entry facility in accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A. Include manufacture date of cable with submittal.

b. Termination Hardware - A record of installed patch panels, cross-connect points, distribution frames, terminating block arrangements and type, and outlets shall be provided in accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A. Documentation shall include the required data fields in accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A.

1.10.3 Spare Parts

In addition to the requirements of Section 01 78 23, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA, provide a complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply, and a list of spare parts recommended for stocking.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPONENTS

UL or third party certified. Where equipment or materials are specified to conform to industry and technical society reference standards of the organizations, submit proof of such compliance. The label or listing by the specified organization will be acceptable evidence of compliance. In lieu of the label or listing, submit a certificate from an independent testing organization, competent to perform testing, and approved by the Contracting Officer. The certificate shall state that the item has been tested in accordance with the specified organization's test methods and that the item complies with the specified organization's reference standard. Provide a complete system of telecommunications cabling and pathway components using star topology. Provide support structures and pathways, complete with outlets, cables, connecting hardware and telecommunications cabinets/racks. Cabling and interconnecting hardware and components for telecommunications systems shall be UL listed or third party independent testing laboratory certified, and shall comply with NFPA 70 and conform to the requirements specified herein.

2.2 TELECOMMUNICATIONS PATHWAY

Provide telecommunications pathways in accordance with TIA-569-B and as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Provide system furniture pathways in accordance with UL 1286.

2.3 TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING

Cabling shall be UL listed for the application and shall comply with TIA-568-C.1 , TIA/EIA-568-B.2, TIA-568-C.3 and NFPA 70. Provide a labeling system for cabling as required by TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969. Ship cable on reels and in boxes bearing manufacture date for UTP in accordance with ICEA S-90-661 and optical fiber cables in accordance with ICEA S-83-596 for all cable used on this project. Cabling manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of installation shall not be used.

2.3.1 Backbone Cabling

2.3.1.1 Backbone Copper

ICEA S-90-661, TIA-568-C.1, TIA/EIA-568-B.2, NEMA WC 63.1 and UL 444, copper backbone cable shall be solid conductor, 24 AWG, 100 ohm, 12-, 25-,



50-, 100-, and 200-pair UTP (Unshielded twisted pair), as shown on Drawings, formed into 25 pair binder groups covered with a gray thermoplastic jacket. Cable shall be imprinted with manufacturers name or identifier, flammability rating, gauge of conductor, transmission performance rating (category designation) at regular intervals not to exceed 2 feet. The word "FEET" or the abbreviation "FT" shall appear after each length marking. Provide communications general purpose (CM or CMG), communications plenum (CMP) or communications riser (CMR) rated cabling in accordance with NFPA 70. Type CMP and CMR may be substituted for type CM or CMG and type CMP may be substituted for type CMR in accordance with NFPA 70. Color coding shall comply with industry standards for 25 pair cables.

2.3.1.2 Backbone Optical Fiber

Provide in accordance with ICEA S-83-596, TIA-568-C.3, UL 1666 and NFPA 70. Cable shall be imprinted with fiber count, fiber type and aggregate length at regular intervals not to exceed 40 inches.

TIA-492AAAB, OM3, multimode, 50/125-um diameter, 0.275 numerical aperture and TIA-492CAAA, single-mode, 8/125-um diameter, 0.10 numerical aperture, tight buffered fiber optic cable. Provide a 24-fiber hybrid cable bundled with 12 multimode and 12 single-mode fiber optic units fiber optic cable. Provide nonconductive optical fiber general purpose cable (OFN or OFNG), nonconductive optical fiber plenum cable (OFNP), and nonconductive optical fiber riser cable (OFNR) rated cable in accordance with NFPA 70 and UL 910. Type OFNP or OFNR may be substituted for type OFN or OFNG and type OFNP may be substituted for type OFNR in accordance with NFPA 70. The cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group color shall be in accordance with TIA/EIA-598-B.

2.3.2 Horizontal Cabling

Provide horizontal cable in compliance with NFPA 70 and performance characteristics in accordance with TIA-568-C.1.

2.3.2.1 Horizontal Copper Provide horizontal copper cable in accordance with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, UL 444, NEMA WC 63.1, ICEA S-90-661 UTP (unshielded twisted pair), 100 ohm. Provide four each individually twisted pair, 24 AWG conductors, Category 6, with awhite thermoplastic jacket for voice cabling and a blue thermoplastic jacket for data cabling. Cable shall be imprinted with manufacturers name or identifier, flammability rating, gauge of conductor, transmission performance rating (category designation) at regular intervals not to exceed 2 feet. The word "FEET" or the abbreviation "FT" shall appear after each length marking. Provide communications general purpose (CM or CMG), communications plenum (CMP) or communications riser (CMR) rated cabling in accordance with NFPA 70. Type CMP and CMR may be substituted for type CM or CMG and type CMP may be substituted for type CMR in accordance with NFPA 70.

2.3.3 Work Area Cabling

2.3.3.1 Work Area Copper

Provide work area copper cable in accordance with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, with a blue, thermoplastic jacket.



2.4 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SPACES Provide connecting hardware and termination equipment in the telecommunications entrance facility and telecommunication equipment rooms to facilitate installation as shown on design drawings for terminating and cross-connecting permanent cabling. Provide telecommunications interconnecting hardware color coding in accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A.

2.4.1 Backboards

Provide void-free, interior grade plywood 3/4 inch thick as indicated. Backboards shall be fire rated. Backboards shall be provided on a minimum of two walls in the telecommunication spaces. Do not cover the fire stamp on the backboard.

2.4.2 Equipment Support Frame

Provide in accordance with CEA-310-E and UL 50.

a. Racks, floor mounted modular type, 16 gauge steel or 11 gauge aluminum construction, minimum, treated to resist corrosion. Provide rack with vertical and horizontal cable management channels, top and bottom cable troughs, grounding lug and a surge protected power strip with 6 duplex 20 amp receptacles. Rack shall be compatible with 19 inch panel mounting.

b. Cabinets, wall-mounted modular type, 16 gauge steel construction, minimum, treated to resist corrosion. Cabinet shall have have lockable front and rear doors, louvered side panels, ground lug, and top and bottom cable access. Cabinet shall be compatible with 19 inch panel mounting. A duplex AC outlet shall be provided within the cabinet. Provide 24" high by 24" wide by 24" deep wall-mounted cabinet in SIPRNET Room as shown on Drawings.

c. Provide cable runway in TER/TR above equipment rack and along plywood backboard as shown in the TER/TR room and rack diagrams. Cable runway shall be a heavy duty, flat top, ladder rack style pathway system designed for use in TR and TER spaces. Construct runway of 1-1/2 inch x 3/8 inch tubular stringers with 1/2 inch x 1 inch welded rungs at 9-inch intervals. The minimum width shall be 18 inches. Equip runway with metal cable dropouts where cables feed to equipment racks. Install cable runway 4 inches to 6 inches above equipment racks and fastened to equipment racks with elevation kits; fasten to wall with support brackets.

d. Provide one vertically mounted power strip with surge protector mounted on the back of each equipment rack. Power strips shall have 10 NEMA 5-20R outlet plugs, a 10 foot line cord with twist-locking NEMA L5-20P inlet plug, and 6 inch offset mounting brackets for mounting to the back side of the equipment racks.

2.4.3 Connector Blocks

Provide insulation displacement connector (IDC) Type 110 for Category 5e and higher systems. Provide blocks for the number of horizontal and backbone cables terminated on the block plus 25 percent spare. Provide wall-mounted blocks in the EF and rack-mounted blocks in the TER and TRs.



2.4.4 Cable Guides

Provide cable guides specifically manufactured for the purpose of routing cables, wires and patch cords horizontally and vertically on 19 inch equipment racks. Cable guides equipped with double hinged covers shall be mounted on racks for horizontal and vertical cable management. Mount cable guides with screws in threaded mounting holes. Provide horizontal and vertical cable managers as shown on TER and TR rack elevation diagrams.

2.4.5 Patch Panels

Provide ports for the number of horizontal and backbone cables terminated on the panel plus 25 percent spare. Provide pre-connectorized optical fiber and copper patch cords for patch panels. Provide patch cords, as complete assemblies, with matching connectors as specified. Patch cords shall meet minimum performance requirements specified in TIA-568-C.1, TIA/EIA-568-B.2 and TIA-568-C.3 for cables, cable length and hardware specified. Provide Category 5e, 8-pin modular to 1-pair 110 clip, patch cords for telephone device connections from rack-mounted 110 blocks to patch panels.

2.4.5.1 Modular to 110 Block Patch Panel

Provide in accordance with TIA-568-C.1 and TIA/EIA-568-B.2. Panels shall be third party verified and shall comply with EIA/TIA Category 6 requirements. Panel shall be constructed of 0.09 inch minimum aluminum and shall be cabinet or rack mounted and compatible with an CEA-310-E 19 inch equipment cabinet or rack. Panel shall provide 48 non-keyed, 8-pin modular ports, wired to T568A. Patch panels shall terminate the building cabling on Type 110 IDCs and shall utilize a printed circuit board interface. The rear of each panel shall have incoming cable strain-relief and routing guides. Panels shall have each port factory numbered and be equipped with laminated plastic nameplates above each port.

2.4.5.2 Fiber Optic Patch Panel

Provide panel for maintenance and cross-connecting of optical fiber cables. Panel shall be constructed of 16 gauge steel or 11 gauge aluminum minimum and shall be rack mounted and compatible with a CEA-310-E 19 inch equipment rack. Each panel shall provide 24 to 48 multimode and single-mode adapters as duplex SC in accordance with TIA/EIA-604-3A with zirconia ceramic alignment sleeves. Provide dust cover for unused adapters. The rear of each panel shall have a cable management tray a minimum of 8 inches deep with removable cover, incoming cable strain-relief and routing guides. Panels shall have each adapter factory numbered and be equipped with laminated plastic nameplates above each adapter.

2.5 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTOR ASSEMBLIES

2.5.1 Outlet/Connector Copper

Outlet/connectors shall comply with FCC Part 68 TIA-568-C.1, and TIA/EIA-568-B.2. UTP outlet/connectors shall be UL 1863 listed, non-keyed, 8-pin modular, constructed of high impact rated thermoplastic housing and shall be third party verified and shall comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Category 6 requirements. Outlet/connectors provided for UTP cabling shall meet or exceed the requirements for the cable provided. Outlet/connectors shall be terminated using a Type 110 IDC PC board connector, color-coded for both T568A and T568B wiring. Each outlet/connector shall be wired T568A. UTP outlet/connectors shall comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2 for 200 mating



cycles.

2.5.2 Optical Fiber Adapters

Provide optical fiber adapters suitable for duplex SC in accordance with TIA/EIA-604-3A with zirconia ceramic alignment sleeves, as indicated. Provide dust cover for adapters. Optical fiber adapters shall comply with TIA-455-21-A for 500 mating cycles.

2.5.3 Optical Fiber Connectors

Provide in accordance with TIA-455-21-A. Optical fiber connectors shall be duplex SC in accordance with TIA/EIA-604-3A with zirconia ceramic ferrule, epoxyless compatible with50/125 multimode or 8/125 single-mode fiber. The connectors shall provide a maximum attenuation of 0.3 dB @ 1310 nm with less than a 0.2 dB change after 500 mating cycles.

2.5.4 Cover Plates

Telecommunications cover plates shall comply with UL 514C, and TIA-568-C.1, TIA/EIA-568-B.2, TIA-568-C.3; flush design constructed of 302 stainless material. Provide labeling in accordance with the paragraph LABELING in this section.

2.6 GROUNDING AND BONDING PRODUCTS Provide in accordance with UL 467, TIA J-STD-607-A, and NFPA 70. Components shall be identified as required by TIA/EIA-606-A. Provide ground rods, bonding conductors, and grounding busbars as specified in Section 26 20 00, INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

2.7 FIRESTOPPING MATERIAL

Provide as specified in Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.




ASTM D 709. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified or as indicated on the drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and, when applicable, the position. Nameplates shall be melamine plastic, 0.125 inch thick, white with black center core. Surface shall be matte finish. Corners shall be square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be one by 2.5 inches. Lettering shall be a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal block style.

2.10 TESTS, INSPECTIONS, AND VERIFICATIONS

2.10.1 Factory Reel Tests

Provide documentation of the testing and verification actions taken by manufacturer to confirm compliance with TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.3, TIA-526-7



for single mode optical fiber , and TIA-526-14-A for multimode optical fiber cables.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Install telecommunications cabling and pathway systems, including the horizontal and backbone cable, pathway systems, telecommunications outlet/connector assemblies, and associated hardware in accordance with TIA-568-C.1, TIA/EIA-568-B.2, TIA-568-C.3, TIA-569-B, NFPA 70, and UL standards as applicable. Provide cabling in a star topology network. Pathways and outlet boxes shall be installed as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Install telecommunications cabling with copper media in accordance with the following criteria to avoid potential electromagnetic interference between power and telecommunications equipment. The interference ceiling shall not exceed 3.0 volts per meter measured over the usable bandwidth of the telecommunications cabling. Cabling shall be run with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.

3.1.1 Cabling

Install Category 6 UTP and optical fiber telecommunications cabling system as detailed in TIA-568-C.1, TIA/EIA-568-B.2, and TIA-568-C.3. Screw terminals shall not be used except where specifically indicated on plans. Use an approved insulation displacement connection (IDC) tool kit for copper cable terminations. Do not untwist Category 6 UTP cables more than one half inch from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry. Provide service loop on each end of the cable, 10 ft. in the telecommunications room, and 12 inches in the work area outlet. Do not exceed manufacturers' cable pull tensions for copper and optical fiber cables. Provide a device to monitor cable pull tensions. Do not exceed 25 pounds pull tension for four pair copper cables. Do not chafe or damage outer jacket materials. Use only lubricants approved by cable manufacturer. Do not over cinch cables, or crush cables with staples. For UTP cable, bend radii shall not be less than four times the cable diameter. Cables shall be terminated; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Cables shall not be spliced. Label cabling in accordance with paragraph LABELING in this section.

3.1.1.1 Open Cable

Use only where specifically indicated on plans for use in cable trays, or below raised floors. Install in accordance with TIA-568-C.1, TIA/EIA-568-B.2 and TIA-568-C.3. Do not exceed cable pull tensions recommended by the manufacturer. Copper cable not in a wireway or pathway shall be suspended a minimum of 8 inches above ceilings by cable supports no greater than 60 inches apart. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items. Placement of cable parallel to power conductors shall be avoided, if possible; a minimum separation of 12 inches shall be maintained when such placement cannot be avoided.

a. Plenum cable shall be used where open cables are routed through plenum areas. Plenum cables shall comply with flammability plenum requirements of NFPA 70.



3.1.1.2 Backbone Cable

a. Copper Backbone Cable. Install intrabuilding backbone copper cable, in indicated pathways, between the campus distributor, located in the telecommunications entrance facility or room, the building distributors and the floor distributors located in telecommunications rooms and telecommunications equipment rooms as indicated on drawings.

b. Optical fiber Backbone Cable. Install intrabuilding backbone optical fiber in indicated pathways. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended bending radii and pull tension. Prepare cable for pulling by cutting outer jacket 10 inches leaving strength members exposed for approximately 10 inches. Twist strength members together and attach to pulling eye. Vertical cable support intervals shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

c. Provide pull tension calculation for all voice/data cables such that it does not exceed the limits of the cable.

3.1.1.3 Horizontal Cabling

Install horizontal cabling as indicated on drawings between the campus distributor, building distributors, floor distributors and the telecommunications outlet assemblies at workstations.

3.1.2 Pathway Installations

Provide in accordance with TIA-569-B and NFPA 70. Provide building pathway as specified in Section 26 20 00, INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS.

3.1.3 Service Entrance Conduit, Underground

Provide service entrance underground as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS.

3.1.4 Cable Tray Installation

Install cable tray as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS. Only CMP and OFNP type cable shall be installed in a plenum.

3.1.5 Work Area Outlets

3.1.5.1 Terminations

Terminate UTP cable in accordance with TIA-568-C.1, TIA/EIA-568-B.2 and wiring configuration as specified. Terminate fiber optic cables in accordance with TIA-568-C.3

3.1.5.2 Cover Plates

As a minimum, each outlet/connector shall be labeled as to its function and a unique number to identify cable link in accordance with the paragraph LABELING in this section.

3.1.5.3 Cables

Unshielded twisted pair and fiber optic cables shall have a minimum of 12



inches of slack cable loosely coiled into the telecommunications outlet boxes. Minimum manufacturer's bend radius for each type of cable shall not be exceeded.

3.1.5.4 Pull Cords

Pull cords shall be installed in conduit serving telecommunications outlets that do not have cable installed.

3.1.6 Telecommunications Space Termination

Install termination hardware required for Category 6 and optical fiber system. An insulation displacement tool shall be used for terminating copper cable to insulation displacement connectors.

3.1.6.1 Connector Blocks

Connector blocks shall be rack mounted in orderly rows and columns. Adequate vertical and horizontal wire routing areas shall be provided between groups of blocks. Install in accordance with industry standard wire routing guides in accordance with TIA-569-B.

3.1.6.2 Patch Panels

Patch panels shall be mounted in equipment cabinets or racks with sufficient ports to accommodate the installed cable plant plus 25 percent spares.

a. Copper Patch Panel. Copper cable entering a patch panel shall be secured to the panel as recommended by the manufacturer to prevent movement of the cable.

b. Fiber Optic Patch Panel. Fiber optic cable loop shall be provided as recommended by the manufacturer. The outer jacket of each cable entering a patch panel shall be secured to the panel to prevent movement of the fibers within the panel, using clamps or brackets specifically manufactured for that purpose.

3.1.6.3 Equipment Support Frames

Install in accordance with TIA-569-B:

a. Racks, floor mounted modular type. Permanently anchor rack to the floor in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

b. Cabinets, wall-mounted modular type. Mount cabinet to plywood backboard in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Mount cabinet so height of highest panel does not exceed 78 inches above floor.

3.1.7 Electrical Penetrations

Seal openings around electrical penetrations through fire resistance-rated wall, partitions, floors, or ceilings as specified in Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.

3.1.8 Grounding and Bonding

Provide in accordance with TIA J-STD-607-A, NFPA 70 and as specified in



Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS.

3.2 LABELING

3.2.1 Labels

Provide labeling in accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A. Handwritten labeling is unacceptable. Stenciled lettering for voice and data circuits shall be provided using thermal ink transfer process.

3.2.2 Cable

Cables shall be labeled using color labels on both ends with identifiers in accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A.

3.2.3 Termination Hardware

Workstation outlets and patch panel connections shall be labeled using color coded labels with identifiers in accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A.





3.5 TESTING

3.5.1 Telecommunications Cabling Testing

Perform telecommunications cabling inspection, verification, and performance tests in accordance with TIA-568-C.1, TIA/EIA-568-B.2, TIA-568-C.3. Perform optical fiber field inspection tests via attenuation measurements on factory reels and provide results along with manufacturer certification for factory reel tests. Remove failed cable reels from project site upon attenuation test failure.

3.5.1.1 Inspection

Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber jacket materials for UL or third party certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in telecommunications rooms and at workstations to confirm color code for T568A or T568B pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm compliance with TIA-568-C.1, TIA/EIA-568-B.2 and TIA-568-C.3. Visually confirm Category 6, marking of outlets, cover plates, outlet/connectors, and patch panels.

3.5.1.2 Verification Tests

UTP backbone copper cabling shall be tested for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors, and between conductors and shield, if cable has overall shield. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not



cross-connected.

For multimode optical fiber, perform optical fiber end-to-end attenuation tests in accordance with TIA-568-C.3 and TIA-526-14-A using Method A, Optical Power Meter and Light Source for multimode optical fiber. For single-mode optical fiber, perform optical fiber end-to-end attenuation tests in accordance with TIA-568-C.3 and TIA-526-7 using Method B, OTDR for single-mode optical fiber. Perform verification acceptance tests.

3.5.1.3 Performance Tests

Perform testing for each outlet and MUTOA as follows:

a. Perform Category 6 link tests in accordance with TIA-568-C.1 and TIA/EIA-568-B.2. Tests shall include wire map, length, insertion loss, NEXT, PSNEXT, ELFEXT, PSELFEXT, return loss, propagation delay, and delay skew.

b. Optical fiber Links. Perform optical fiber end-to-end link tests in accordance with TIA-568-C.3.

3.5.1.4 Final Verification Tests

Perform verification tests for UTP and optical fiber systems after the complete telecommunications cabling and workstation outlet/connectors are installed.

a. Voice Tests. These tests assume that dial tone service has been installed. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Go off-hook and listen and receive a dial tone. If a test number is available, make and receive a local, long distance, and DSN telephone call.

b. Data Tests. These tests assume the Information Technology Staff has a network installed and are available to assist with testing. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Log onto the network to ensure proper connection to the network.




SECTION 27 51 16

RADIO AND PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES










UL 1449 (2006) Surge Protective Devices

UL 2043 (1996; R 2001, Bul. 2001) Fire Test for Heat and Visible Smoke Release for Discrete Products and Their Accessories Installed in Air-Handling Spaces


The radio and public address system shall consist of an audio distribution network to include amplifiers, mixers, microphones, speakers, cabling, and ancillary components required to meet the required system configuration and operation.

1.2.1 Single-Channel System

The system shall control and amplify an audio program for distribution within the areas indicated. Components of the system shall include a mixer-amplifier, mike input expander, microphone, speaker system, compact disc, AM-FM tuner, cabling and other associated hardware.



1.2.2 System Performance

The system shall provide even sound distribution throughout the designated area, plus or minus 3 dB for the 1/1 octave band centered at 4000 Hz. The system shall provide uniform frequency response throughout the designated area, plus or minus 3 dB as measured with 1/3-octave bands of pink noise at locations across the designated area selected by the Contracting Officer. The system shall be capable of delivering 75 dB average program level with additional 10 dB peaking margin sound pressure level (SPL) in the area at an acoustic distortion level below 5 percent total harmonic distortion (THD). Unless otherwise specified the sound pressure reference level is 20 micro Pascal (0.00002 Newtons per square meter).

1.2.3 Detail Drawings

Submit detail drawings consisting of a complete list of equipment and material, including manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature, performance charts and curves, catalog cuts, and installation instructions. Note that the contract drawings show layouts based on typical speakers. Check the layout based on the actual speakers to be installed and make necessary revisions in the detail drawings. Detail drawings shall also contain complete point to point wiring, schematic diagrams and other details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will properly function as a unit. Drawings shall show proposed layout of equipment and appurtenances, and equipment relationship to other parts of the work including clearances for maintenance and operation.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Detail Drawings; G

Detail drawings as specified.

SD-03 Product Data

Spare Parts

Spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment specified.

SD-06 Test Reports

Approved Test Procedures; G

Test plan and test procedures for the acceptance tests. The test plan and test procedures shall explain in detail, step-by-step actions and expected results to demonstrate compliance with the requirements specified. The procedure shall also explain methods for simulating the necessary conditions of operation to demonstrate system performance.



Acceptance Tests

Test reports in booklet form showing all field tests performed to adjust each component and to prove compliance with the specified performance criteria, upon completion and testing of the installed system. The reports shall include the manufacturer, model number, and serial number of test equipment used in each test. Each report shall indicate the final position of controls and operating mode of the system.

SD-07 Certificates

Components

Copies of current approvals or listings issued by UL, or other nationally recognized testing laboratory for all components.


Radio and Public Address System

Submit Data Package 3 in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA


Equipment placed in storage until installation shall be stored with protection from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, and other contaminants.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 STANDARD PRODUCTS

Provide materials and equipment which are the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products, and that essentially duplicate material and equipment that have been in satisfactory use at least 2 years. All components used in the system shall be commercial designs that comply with the requirements specified. Equipment shall be supported by a service organization that is within 50 miles of the site.

2.1.1 Identical Items

Items of the same classification shall be identical. This requirement includes equipment, modules, assemblies, parts, and components.

2.1.2 Nameplates

Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address, model and catalog number, and serial number on a plate secured to the equipment.

2.2 MIXER-PREAMPLIFIER

Mixer-preamplifier shall as a minimum conform to the following specifications:



Rated Output: 18 dB

Frequency Response: Plus or Minus 1 dB, 20 - 20,000 Hz

Distortion: Less than 0.5 percent, 20 - 20,000 Hz

Signal to noise: Microphone - 60 dB Aux - 70 dB

Inputs: 5 independent balanced low- impedance transformer-isolated

Input Sensitivity: Microphone - 0.003 volts Aux - 0.125 volts Magnetic Cartridge - 0.0005 volts

Input Channel Isolation: 80 dB minimum

Tone Controls: Plus or Minus 10 dB range at 50 and 15,000 Hz

Power Requirement: 110-125 Vac 60 Hz

2.3 MIXER AMPLIFIER

Mixer amplifier shall as a minimum conform to the following specifications:

Rated Power Output (RPO): 60 watts RMS

Frequency Response: Plus or Minus 3 dB, 20-20,000 Hz

Distortion: Less than 1% at RPO, 60 - 13,000 Hz

Inputs: 1 microphone Aux. (high-impedance)

Output Impedance: Balanced 4 and 8 ohms

Output Voltage: 25 and 70.7 volts

Power Requirement: 110-125 Vac 60 Hz

2.4 MICROPHONE INPUT MODULES

Microphone input modules shall as a minimum conform to the following specifications:

Rated Outputs: 0.25 volts into 10,000 ohms 1.0 volts into 10,000 ohms

Frequency Response: Plus or Minus 2 dB, 20 - 20,000 Hz

Distortion: Less than 0.5 percent 20 - 20,000 Hz

Inputs: 4 transformer - coupled balanced 150 ohm

Input Sensitivity: 0.003 volts

Input Channel Isolation: 70 dB minimum



2.5 MICROPHONES

2.5.1 Desk Microphone

Microphones shall as a minimum conform to the following specifications:

Element: Dynamic

Pattern: Cardioid

Frequency Response: 50 - 12,000 Hz

Impedance: Low impedance mic (150-400 ohms)

Front-to-back Ratio: 20 dB

Selector switches: Selector switches for zone shall be be integral microphone

2.5.2 Gooseneck Microphone

Gooseneck microphone shall meet the minimum requirements of the desk microphone. Microphone shall have push to talk button. Gooseneck tube length shall be 12 inch.

2.5.3 Microphone Jack

Each outlet for microphones shall consist of a standard outlet box, flush-mounted, and fitted with a three-pole, polarized, locking-type, female microphone jack and a corrosion resistant-steel device plate.

2.6 LOUDSPEAKERS

2.6.1 Cone Speaker

The cone speaker shall as a minimum conform to the following specifications:

Application: Ceiling

Frequency range: 60 to 12,000 Hz

Power Rating: Normal - 7 watts Peak - 10 watts

Voice Coil Impedance: 8 ohms

Line Matching Transformer Type: 25/ 70.7 volt line

Capacity: 4 watts

Magnet: 10 ounces or greater

Primary Taps: 0.5, 1, 2 and 4 watts

Primary Impedance: 25 volts - 1250, 625, and 312 ohms 70.7 volts - 10k, 5k, and 2.5k ohms



Frequency Response: 30 - 20,000 Hz

Insertion Loss: Less than 1 dB

2.6.2 Ceiling Speaker Enclosures

Ceiling speaker enclosure shall comply with UL 2043 and shall be constructed of heavy gauge cold steel with interior undercoating and 1-1/2 inch thick high density fiberglass 1-1/2 lbs/cu. ft. The unit shall be round and designed for recessed or surface installations which will be accomplished via standard screw mounting. Recessed models shall have a rust-preventive, textured black coating and the surface mount unit finished in textured white. Enclosure shall include four triple compound conduit knockouts.

2.7 AM/FM EQUIPMENT

2.7.1 AM/FM Tuner

AM/FM tuner shall be rack-mounted and shall as a minimum conform to the following characteristics:

Tuning Range: AM - 540 to 1605 kHz FM - 88 to 108 MHz

Selectivity: 60 dB on FM 40 dB on AM

Sensitivity: FM - 1.5 microvolts AM - 2.0 microvolts

Capture Ratio: 1.0 dB

Readout/selection: Digital

Other features: Phased Lock Loop (PLL)

Power Requirement: 110-125 Vac, 60Hz

2.7.2 AM/FM Antenna

The AM/FM antenna shall be roof-mounted, either combined and suitable for both AM and FM reception or separate AM and FM antennas and shall cover all frequency bands specified for radio tuners. The system shall be furnished complete with a transformer, insulators, crossover insulator, cable of proper length, lightning arresters, coupling transformer and divider network at the radio tuners.

2.8 COMPACT DISC PLAYER

Player shall have three beam laser pickup, dual Digital-to-Analog converters, random access and random mode programmable playback. Player shall have capability to play a minimum of 5 discs automatically. Player shall as a minimum conform to the following:

Frequency: 10 - 20,000 Hz Plus or Minus 1 dB

Signal-to-Noise: Minimum of 100 dB



Dynamic Range: Minimum of 96 dB

Total Harmonic Distortion: Maximum of 0.005% at 1 KHZ

Channel Separation: Minimum 100 dB at 1 KHZ

Quantization: Minimum of 18 Bits Linear per channel

Conversion Rate: Minimum 8 x Oversampling

Disc Size: 5 inch Power Requirement: 110-125 Vac, 60Hz

2.9 PRIORITY RELAYS AND CONTROLS

Provide priority relays and controls required to accomplish operations specified. Relays shall be completely enclosed with a plastic dust cover for maximum protection against foreign matter, and shall be plug-in type. Relays shall be provided with a diode wired across the relay coil for transient suppression and shall be installed utilizing factory-prewired, rack-mounted receptacle strips. Coil shall be maximum 24 volts dc.

2.10 EQUIPMENT RACKS

Equipment shall be mounted on 19 inch racks in accordance with CEA-310-E and located as shown on drawings. Ventilated rear panels, solid side panels, and solid top panels shall be provided. Equipment racks shall be provided with lockable front panels that limit access to equipment. The lockable front shall not cover items that require operator access such as am/fm tuner, CD player, or tape player. Rack cooling shall be through perforations or louvers in front panels to ensure adequate ventilation of equipment . The racks and panels shall be factory finished with a uniform baked enamel over rust inhibiting primer.

2.11 CABLES

2.11.1 Speaker Cable

Cables shall be of the gauge required depending upon the cable run length. In no case shall cable be used which is smaller than 18 AWG. Insulation on the conductors shall be plenum jacketed cable not less than 0.009 inch. Cables shall be jacketed with a PVC compound. The jacket thickness shall be 0.02 inch minimum.

2.11.2 Microphone Cable

Cable conductor shall be stranded copper 20 AWG. Insulation on the conductors shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or an equivalent synthetic thermoplastic not less than 0.009 inch. Cable shall be shielded 100% of aluminum polyester foil with a bare 22 gauge stranded soft copper drain conductor. Cables shall be jacketed with a PVC compound. The jacket thickness shall be 0.02 inch minimum.

2.11.3 Antenna Cable

Antenna coaxial cable shall have 75 ohm plus or minus 2 ohm. Attenuation of the coaxial cable span between the antenna and amplifier shall not



exceed 2.5 dB at 108 MHz.

2.12 TERMINALS

Terminals shall be solderless, tool-crimped pressure type.

2.13 SURGE PROTECTION

2.13.1 Power Line Surge Protection

Major components of the system such as power amplifiers, mixer-preamplifiers, and tuners, shall have a device, whether internal or external, which provides protection against voltage spikes and current surges originating from commercial power sources in accordance with IEEE C62.41.1/IEEE C62.41.2 B3 combination waveform and NFPA 70. Fuses shall not be used for surge protection. The surge protector shall be rated for a maximum let thru voltage of 350 Volts ac (line-to-neutral) and 350 Volt ac (neutral-to-ground). Surge protection device shall be UL listed and labeled as having been tested in accordance with UL 1449.

2.13.2 SIGNAL SURGE PROTECTION

Major components of the system shall have internal protection circuits which protects the component from mismatched loads, direct current, and shorted output lines. Communication cables/conductors shall have surge protection installed at each point where it exits or enters a building.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

After becoming familiar with the details of the work and working conditions, verify dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancies before performing the work.

3.2 INSTALLATION

Equipment shall be installed as indicated and specified, and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations except where otherwise indicated. Equipment mounted out-of-doors or subject to inclement conditions shall be weatherproofed. The antenna shall be supported at least 60 inch clear above the roof by means of self-supported or guyed mast.

3.2.1 Equipment Racks

Racks to be mounted side-by-side and bolted together, wall mounting is acceptable. Items of the same function shall be grouped together, either vertically or side-by-side. Controls shall be symmetrically arranged at a height as shown. Audio input and interconnections shall be made with approved shielded cable and plug connectors; output connections may be screw terminal type. All connections to power supplies shall utilize standard male plug and female receptacle connectors with the female receptacle being the source side of the connection.

3.2.2 Wiring

Install wiring in rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, cable trays, or electric metallic tubing as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Wiring for microphone, grounding, line



level, speaker and power cables shall be isolated from each other by physical isolation and metallic shielding. Shielding shall be terminated at only one end.

3.3 GROUNDING

All grounding practices shall comply with NFPA 70. The antenna mast shall be separately grounded. Equipment shall be grounded to the serving panelboard ground bus through a green grounding conductor. Metallic conduits serving the equipment shall be isolated on the equipment end with an insulating bushing to prevent noise from being transferred to the circuit. Equipment racks shall be grounded to the panelboard ground bus utilizing a #8 conductor. Grounding conductor shall be terminated to the rack using connector suitable for that purpose.

3.4 TRAINING

Conduct a training course for the operating and maintenance staff as designated by the Contracting Officer. The training course will be given at the installation during normal working hours for a total of two hours and shall start after the system is functionally complete but prior to final acceptance tests. The field instructions shall cover all of the items contained in the approved operating and maintenance manuals, as well as demonstrations of routine maintenance operations. Notify the Contracting Officer at least 14 days prior to the start of the training course.

3.5 ACCEPTANCE TESTS

After installation has been completed, conduct acceptance tests, utilizing the approved test procedures, to demonstrate that equipment operates in accordance with specification requirements. Notify the Contracting Officer 14 days prior to the performance of tests. In no case shall notice be given until after the Contractor has received written Contracting Officer approval of the test plans as specified. The acceptance tests shall include originating and receiving messages at specified stations, at proper volume levels, without cross talk or noise from other links or nondesignated units.




SECTION 28 20 01.00 10

ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEM10/07

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ANSI INCITS 154 (1988; R 2004) Office Machines and Supplies - Alphanumeric Machines-Keyboard Arrangement

ANSI X9.52 (1998) Triple Data Encryption Alogarithm Modes of Operation







IEEE Std 142 (2007) Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems - IEEE Green Book (Color Book Series)

INTERNATIONAL TELECOMMUNICATION UNION (ITU)

ITU V.34 (1998) Data Communication Over the Telephone Network: A Modem Operating at Data Signaling Rates of up to 33,600 bits for use on the General Switched Telephone Network and on Leased Point-to-Point Two-Wire Telephone Type Circuits

ITU V.42 (2002; CORR 1 2003) Data Communications Over the Telephone Network: Error-Correcting Procedures for DCEs Using Asynchronous-to-Synchronous Conversion

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 1


ITU V.92 (2000; AMD 2001, AMD 2002 and CORR 2003) Enhancements to Recommendation V.90 Series: V, with Amendments 1 and 2



NEMA ICS 1 (2000; R 2005) Standard for Industrial Control and Systems General Requirements




TIA-232-F (1997; R 2002) Interface Between Data Terminal Equipment and Data Circuit-Terminating Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data Interchange

TIA/EIA-568-B.1 (2001 Addendums 2001, 2003, 2003, 2003, 2004, 2007) Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 1: General Requirements


47 CFR 15 Radio Frequency Devices

47 CFR 68 Connection of Terminal Equipment to the Telephone Network


UL 1037 (1999; Rev thru Nov 2004) Standard for Safety Antitheft Alarms and Devices

UL 1076 (1995; Rev thru Mar 2005) Standard for Safety Proprietary Burglar Alarm Units and Systems

UL 294 (1999; Rev thru Aug 2005) Access Control System Units

UL 639 (2007) Intrusion Detection Units

UL 681 (1999; Rev thru Jan 2001) Installation and Classification of Burglar and Holdup Alarm Systems

UL 796 (2006; Rev thru Feb 2008) Printed-Wiring Boards

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 2


1.2 DEFINITIONS

1.2.1 Intrusion Alarm

An alarm resulting from the detection of a specified target, attempting to intrude into the protected area or when entry into an entry-controlled area is attempted without successfully using entry control procedures.

1.2.2 Nuisance Alarm

An alarm resulting from the detection of an appropriate alarm stimulus, or failure to use established entry control procedures, but which does not represent an attempt to intrude into the protected area.

1.2.3 Environmental Alarm

A nuisance alarm resulting from environmental factors.

1.2.4 False Alarm

An alarm when there is no alarm stimulus.

1.2.5 Duress Alarm

A normally covert alarm condition which results from a set of pre-established conditions such as entering a special code into a keypad or by activating a switch indicating immediate personal danger. This alarm category shall take precedence over other alarm categories.

1.2.6 Guard Tour Alarm

An alarm resulting from a guard being either early or late at a specified check-in location.

1.2.7 Fail-Safe Alarm

An alarm resulting from detection of diminished functional capabilities.

1.2.8 Power Loss Alarm

An alarm resulting from a loss of primary power.

1.2.9 Entry Control Alarm

An alarm resulting from improper use of entry control procedures or equipment.

1.2.10 Identifier

A card credential, keypad personal identification number or code, biometric characteristic or any other unique identification entered as data into the entry control database for the purpose of verifying the identity of an individual. Identifiers shall be used by the ESS for the purpose of validating passage requests for areas equipped with entry control equipment.

1.2.11 Entry Control Devices

Any equipment which gives a user the means to input identifier data into the entry control system for verification.

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 3


1.2.12 Facility Interface Device

A facility interface device shall be any type of mechanism which is controlled in response to passage requests and allows passage through a portal.

1.2.13 Portal

Specific control point, such as a door or a gate, providing entry or access from one security level to another.

1.2.14 Probability of Detection

Forty-five successful detections out of 46 tests or 98 successful detections out of 103 tests.

1.2.15 Standard Intruder

Person that weighs 100 pounds or less and is 5 ft tall or less, dressed in a long-sleeved shirt, slacks and shoes (unless environmental conditions at the site require protective clothing) and walking, running, crawling or jumping through a protected zone in the most advantageous manner for the intruder.


Provide an Electronic Security System (ESS) as described and shown including installation of any Government Furnished Equipment. All computing devices, as defined in 47 CFR 15, shall be certified to comply with the requirements for Class A computing devices and labeled as set forth in 47 CFR 15. Electronic equipment shall comply with 47 CFR 15.

1.3.1 Central Station

Configure the central station to provide operator interface, interaction, dynamic and real time monitoring, display, and control. The central station shall control system networks to interconnect all system components including peer or subordinate workstations, enrollment stations and field equipment. The system shall be able to manage up to 16,000 uniquely identifiable inputs and outputs.

1.3.2 Systems Networks

System networks shall interconnect all components of the system. These networks shall include communications between a central station and any peer or subordinate workstations, enrollment stations, local annunciation stations, portal control stations or redundant central stations. The systems network shall provide totally automatic communication of status changes, commands, field initiated interrupts and any other communications required for proper system operation. System communication shall not require operator initiation or response. System communication shall return to normal after any partial or total network interruption such as power loss or transient upset. The system shall automatically annunciate communication failures to the operator with identification of the communication link that has experienced a partial or total failure. A communications controller may be used as an interface between the central station display systems and the field device network. The communications controller shall provide those functions needed to attain the specified

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 4


network communications performance.

1.3.2.1 Console Network

A console network, if required, shall provide communication between a central station and any subordinate or separate stations of the system. Where redundant central or parallel stations are required, the console network shall allow the configuration of stations as master and slave. The console network may be a part of the field device network or may be separate depending upon the manufacturer's system configuration.

1.3.2.2 Field Device Network

The field device network shall provide communication between a central control station and field devices of the system. The field device network shall be configured as shown in the drawings. Field devices shall consist of alarm annunciation local processors and entry control local processors. Each field device shall be interrogated during each interrogation cycle. The field device network shall provide line supervision that detects and annunciates communications interruptions or compromised communications between any field device and the central station.

1.3.3 Field Equipment

Field equipment shall include local processors, sensors and controls. Local processors shall serve as an interface between the central station and sensors and controls. Data exchange between the central station and the local processors shall include down-line transmission of commands, software and databases to local processors. The up line data exchange from the local processor to the central station shall include status data such as intrusion alarms, status reports and entry control records. Local processors are categorized as alarm annunciation or entry control or a combination thereof.

1.3.4 Intercom Interface

Provide an interface for connection of the central station to the intercommunication systems as specified in Section 33 82 01 INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEM and as shown. This shall not be accomplished by using an electro-mechanical relay assembly.

1.3.5 Error Detection and Retransmission

Use a cyclic code error detection method, between local processors and the central station, which will detect single and double bit errors, burst errors of 8 bits or less, and at least 99 percent of all other multibit and burst error conditions. Interactive or product error detection codes alone will not be acceptable. A message is in error if 1 bit is received incorrectly. The system shall retransmit messages with detected errors. A 2-digit decimal number shall be operator assignable to each communication link representing the number of retransmission attempts. When the number of consecutive retransmission attempts equals the assigned quantity, the central station shall print a communication failure alarm message. The system shall monitor the frequency of data transmission failure for display and logging.

1.3.6 Probability of Detection

Each zone shall have a continuous probability of detection greater than 90

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 5


percent and shall be demonstrated with a confidence level of 95 percent. The actual number of tests performed, per sensor, to demonstrate system performance shall be nominated by the Contractor in the performance verification test procedures submitted to the Government for approval in the Group IV Technical Data package.

1.3.7 Standard Intruder

The system shall be able to detect a standard intruder moving through a protected zone.

1.3.8 False Alarm Rate

1.3.8.1 Interior

Provide a false alarm rate of no more than 1 false alarm per sensor per 30 days at the specified probability of detection.

1.3.8.2 Exterior

Provide a false alarm rate of no more than 1 false alarm per sensor per 5 days at the specified probability of detection.

1.3.9 Environmental Nuisance Alarm Rate

Environmental alarms during nominal conditions shall not exceed 1 per day per sensor.

1.3.10 Error and Throughput Rates

Error and throughput rates shall be single portal performance rates obtained when processing individuals one at a time.

1.3.10.1 Type I Error Rate

Type I error rate is an error where the system denies entry to an authorized, enrolled identifier or individual. The rate shall be less than 1 percent.

1.3.10.2 Type II Error Rate

Type II error rate is an error where the system grants entry to an unauthorized identifier or individual. The entry control Type II error rate shall be less than 0.01 percent.

1.3.11 System Throughput

At the specified error rates, the system throughput rate through a single portal shall be as shown.

1.3.12 Passage

Passage is ingress and/or egress past an entry control device, or through a portal. Entry control procedures and equipment shall be implemented for passage through each portal as shown.

1.3.13 Detection Resolution

The system shall have detection resolution sufficient to locate intrusions

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 6


at each device and zone; and tampering at individual devices.

1.3.14 Electrical Requirements

Electrically powered ESS equipment shall operate on 120 volt 60 Hz ac sources as shown. Equipment shall be able to tolerate variations in the voltage source of plus or minus 10 percent, and variations in the line frequency of plus or minus 2 percent with no degradation of performance.

1.3.15 System Reaction

1.3.15.1 System Response

The field device network shall provide a system end-to-end response time of 1 second or less for every device connected to the system. Alarms shall be annunciated at the central station within 4 seconds of the alarm occurring at a local processor or device controlled by a local processor, and within 100 milliseconds if the alarm occurs at the central station. Alarm and status changes shall be displayed within 100 milliseconds after receipt of data by the central station. All graphics shall be displayed, including graphics generated map displays, on the console monitor within 5 seconds of alarm receipt at the security console. This response time shall be maintained during system heavy load.

1.3.15.2 System Heavy Load Condition

For the purpose of system heavy load condition, the system shall consist of central station equipment, communication controllers and all local processors as shown. System heavy load condition is the occurrence of alarms at the rate of 10 alarms per second distributed evenly among all local processors in the system. The alarm printer shall continue to print out all occurrences, including time of occurrence, to the nearest second.

1.3.16 System Capacity

The system will be comprised of scalable central servers, regional servers, monitoring stations, administrative stations, and badging stations as shown. The system shall also monitor and control the inputs and outputs shown. The system will discriminate to the individual sensors, switches, and terminal devices and report status at the appropriate workstations as shown. Include a minimum expansion capability of 25 percent through additional software capacity.

1.3.17 Console

Console equipment, unless designated otherwise, shall be rated for continuous operation under ambient environmental conditions of 36 to 122 degrees F and a relative humidity of 20 to 80 percent.

1.4 SUBMITTAL OF TECHNICAL DATA AND COMPUTER SOFTWARE

All items of computer software and technical data (including technical data which relates to computer software), which is specifically identified in this specification shall be delivered in accordance with the CONTRACT CLAUSES, SPECIAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS, and in accordance with the Contract Data Requirements List (CDRL), DD FORM 1423, which is attached to and thereby made a part of this contract. All data delivered shall be identified by reference to the particular specification paragraph against which it is furnished.

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 7


1.4.1 Group I Technical Data Package

The data package shall include the following as required:

1.4.1.1 System Drawings

a. Functional System block diagram, identifying communications protocols, wire type and quantity, and approximate distances.

b. Security Console installation, including block and wiring diagrams and equipment layout.

c. Local processor installation, including typical block and wiring diagrams.

d. Field equipment enclosure with local processor installation and schematics.

e. Device wiring and installation drawings.

f. Details of connections to power sources, including power supplies and grounding.

g. Details of surge protection device installation.

h. Entry control system block diagram and layout.

i. Details of interconnections with Intercom system.

j. Intrusion detection system block diagram and sensor layout (including exterior and interior zones) as well as sensor detection patterns.

1.4.1.2 Manufacturer's Data

The data package shall include manufacturer's data for all materials and equipment, including terminal devices, local processors and central station equipment provided under this specification.

1.4.1.3 System Description and Analyses

The data package shall include system descriptions, analyses, and calculations used in sizing equipment specified. Descriptions and calculations shall show how the equipment will operate as a system to meet the performance of this specification. The data package shall include the following:

a. On-board Random Access Memory (RAM).

b. Communication speeds and protocol descriptions.

c. Hard disk size and configuration.

d. CD-ROM/CD-RW/DVD/DVD-RW drive speed and protocol descriptions.

e. Streaming tape back-up speed and capacity.

f. Floppy disk size and configuration.

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 8


g. Alarm response time calculations..

h. Command response time calculations.

i. Start-up operations including system and database backup operations.

j. Expansion capability and method of implementation.

k. Sample copy of each report specified.

l. Color output of typical graphics.

m. System throughput calculation.

The data package shall also include a table comparing the above information for the equipment supplied and the minimum required by the software manufacturer.

1.4.1.4 Software Data

The software data package shall consist of descriptions of the operation and capability of system, and application software as specified.

1.4.1.5 Overall System Reliability Calculations

The overall system reliability calculations data package shall include all manufacturer's reliability data and calculations required to show compliance with the specified reliability in accordance with paragraph, OVERALL SYSTEM RELIABILITY REQUIREMENTS.

1.4.1.6 Certifications

Specified manufacturer's certifications shall be included with the data package certification.

1.4.1.7 Key Control Plan

Provide a key control plan including the following:

a. Procedures that will be used to log and positively control all keys during installation.

b. A listing of all keys and where they are used.

c. A listing of all persons allowed access to the keys.

1.4.2 Group II Technical Data Package

Prepare and submit a report of "Current Site Conditions" to the Government documenting site conditions that significantly differ from the design drawings or conditions that affect performance of the system to be installed. Provide specification sheets, or written functional requirements to support the findings, and a cost estimate to correct those site changes or conditions. Do not correct any deficiency without written permission from the Government.

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 9


1.4.3 Group III Technical Data Package

Prepare test procedures and reports for the pre-delivery test.

1.4.4 Group IV Technical Data Package

Prepare test procedures and reports for the performance verification test and the endurance test. Deliver the performance verification test and endurance test procedures to the Government for approval.

1.4.4.1 Operation and Maintenance Manuals

Deliver draft copies of the operator's, software, hardware, functional design, and maintenance manuals, as specified below, to the Government prior to beginning the performance verification test for use during the test period.

1.4.4.2 Operator's Manuals

The operator's manual shall fully explain all procedures and instructions for the operation of the system, including:

a. Computers and peripherals.b. User enrollment.c. System start-up and shutdown procedures.d. Use of system and application software.e. Recovery and restart procedures.f. Graphic alarm presentation.g. Use of report generator and generation of reports.h. Data entry.i. Operator commands.j. Alarm and system messages and printing formats.k. System entry requirements.

1.4.4.3 Software Manual

The software manual shall describe the functions of all software and shall include all other information necessary to enable proper loading, testing, and operation. The manual shall include:

a. Definition of terms and functions.b. Use of system and application software.c. Procedures for system initialization, start-up and shutdownd. Alarm reports.e. Reports generation,f. Database format and date entry requirements.g. Directory of all disk files.h. Description of all communication protocols, including data formats, command characters, and a sample of each type of data transfer.i. Interface definition.

1.4.4.4 Hardware Manual

A manual describing all equipment furnished including:

a. General description and specifications.b. Installation and checkout procedures.c. Equipment electrical schematics and layout drawings.

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 10


d. System schematics and layout drawings.e. Alignment and calibration procedures.f. Manufacturer's repair parts list indicating sources of supply.g. Interface definition.

1.4.4.5 Functional Design Manual

The functional design manual shall identify the operational requirements for the system and explain the theory of operation, design philosophy, and specific functions. A description of hardware and software functions, interfaces, and requirements shall be included for all system operating modes.

1.4.4.6 Data Entry

Enter all data needed to make the system operational. Deliver the data to the Government on data entry forms, utilizing data from the contract documents, Contractor's field surveys, and other pertinent information in the Contractor's possession required for complete installation of the database. Identify and request from the Government, any additional data needed to provide a complete and operational ESS. The completed forms shall be delivered to the Government for review and approval at least 30 days prior to the Contractor's scheduled need date. When the ESS database is to be populated in whole or in part from an existing or Government furnished electronic database, demonstrate the field mapping scheme to correctly input the data.

1.4.4.7 Graphics

Where graphics are required and are to be delivered with the system, create and install the graphics needed to make the system operational. Utilize data from the contract documents, Contractor's field surveys, and other pertinent information in the Contractor's possession to complete the graphics. Identify and request from the Government, any additional data needed to provide a complete graphics package. Graphics shall have sufficient level of detail for the system operator to assess the alarm. Supply hard copy, color examples at least 8 x 10 inches in size, of each type of graphic to be used for the completed system. The graphics examples shall be delivered to the Government for review and approval at least 30 days prior to the Contractor's scheduled need date.

1.4.5 Group V Technical Data Package

Deliver final copies of the manuals as specified, bound in hardback, loose-leaf binders, to the Government within 30 days after completing the endurance test. The draft copy used during site testing shall be updated with any changes required prior to final delivery of the manuals. Each manual's contents shall be identified on the cover. The manual shall include names, addresses, and telephone numbers of each subcontractor installing equipment and systems, and nearest service representative for each item of equipment. The manuals shall have a table of contents and tab sheets. Tab sheets shall be placed at the beginning of each chapter or section and at the beginning of each appendix. The final copies delivered after completion of the endurance test shall include modifications made during installation, checkout, and acceptance. The number of copies of each manual to be delivered shall be as specified on DD FORM 1423 and below.

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 11


1.4.5.1 Operator's Manual

A copy of the final and approved Operator's Manual.

1.4.5.2 Software Manual

A copy of the final and approved Software Manual.

1.4.5.3 Hardware Manual

A copy of the final and approved Hardware Manual.

1.4.5.4 Functional Design Manual

A copy of the final and approved Functional Design Manual.

1.4.5.5 Maintenance Manual

A copy of the final and approved Maintenance Manual.

1.4.5.6 Final System Drawings

Maintain a separate set of drawings, elementary diagrams and wiring diagrams of the system to be used for final system drawings. This set shall be accurately kept up-to-date with all changes and additions to the ESS and shall be delivered to the Government with the final endurance test report. In addition to being complete and accurate, this set of drawings shall be kept neat and shall not be used for installation purposes. Final drawings submitted with the endurance test report shall be finished drawings on CD-ROM in format.


1.5.1 Pre-Delivery Testing

Perform pre-delivery testing, site performance verification testing, and adjustment of the completed ESS. Provide personnel, equipment, instrumentation, and supplies necessary to perform testing. Written notification of planned testing shall be given to the Government at least 14 days prior to the test; notice shall not be given until after the Contractor has received written approval of the specific test procedures.

a. Assemble the test system as specified, and perform tests to demonstrate that performance of the system complies with specified requirements in accordance with the approved predelivery test procedures. The tests shall take place during regular daytime working hours on weekdays. Model numbers of equipment tested shall be identical to those to be delivered to the site. Original copies of all data produced during predelivery testing, including results of each test procedure, shall be delivered to the Government at the conclusion of predelivery testing, prior to Government approval of the test. The test report shall be arranged so that all commands, stimuli, and responses are correlated to allow logical interpretation.

b. Test Setup: The predelivery test setup shall include the following:

1) All central station equipment.

2) At least 1 of each type DTS link, but not less than 2 links,

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 12


and associated equipment to provide a fully integrated system.

3) The number of local processors shall equal the amount required by the site design.

4) At least 1 of each type sensor used.

5) Enough sensor simulators to provide alarm signal inputs to the system equal to the number of sensors required by the design. The alarm signals shall be manually or software generated.

6) At least 1 of each type of terminal device used.

7) At least 1 of each type of portal configuration with all facility interface devices as specified or shown.

8) The Contractor shall prepare test procedures and reports for the predelivery test, and shall deliver the predelivery test procedures to the Government for approval. The final predelivery test report shall be delivered after completion of the predelivery test.

1.5.2 Test Procedures and Reports

Test procedures shall explain in detail, step-by-step actions and expected results, demonstrating compliance with the requirements specified. Test reports shall be used to document results of the tests. Reports shall be delivered to the Government within 7 days after completion of each test.

1.5.3 Line Supervision

1.5.3.1 Signal and Data Transmission System (DTS) Line Supervision

All signal and DTS lines shall be supervised by the system. The system shall supervise the signal lines by monitoring the circuit for changes or disturbances in the signal, and for conditions as described in UL 1076 for line security equipment. The system shall initiate an alarm in response to a current change of 10 percent or greater. The system shall also initiate an alarm in response to opening, closing, shorting, or grounding of the signal and DTS lines.

1.5.3.2 Data Encryption

The system shall incorporate data encryption equipment on data transmission circuits as shown. The algorithm used for encryption shall be the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) algorithm described in Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS) 197 of DES as described in FIPS 46-3 standards, ANSI X9.52, as a minimum.

1.5.4 Data Transmission System

Provide DTS as specified by the manufacturer for the transmission media employed.


1.6.1 Interior, Controlled Environment

System components, except the console equipment installed in interior

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 13


locations, having controlled environments shall be rated for continuous operation under ambient environmental conditions of 36 to 122 degrees F dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, non-condensing.

1.6.2 Interior, Uncontrolled Environment

System components installed in interior locations having uncontrolled environments shall be rated for continuous operation under ambient environmental conditions of 0 to 122 degrees F dry bulb and 10 to 95 percent relative humidity, non-condensing.

1.6.3 Exterior Environment

System components that are installed in locations exposed to weather shall be rated for continuous operation under ambient environmental conditions of -30 to plus 122 degrees F dry bulb and 10 to 95 percent relative humidity, condensing. In addition, the system components shall be rated for continuous operation when exposed to performance conditions as specified in UL 294 and UL 639 for outdoor use equipment. Components shall be rated for continuous operation when exposed to rain as specified in NEMA 250, winds up to 85 mph and snow cover up to 2 feet thick, measured vertically.

1.6.4 Hazardous Environment

System components located in areas where fire or explosion hazards may exist because of flammable gases or vapors, flammable liquids, combustible dust, or ignitable fibers or flyings, shall be rated and installed according to Chapter 5 of the NFPA 70 and as shown.

1.7 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

1.7.1 Warranty Period

Provide all labor, equipment, and materials required to maintain the entire system in an operational state as specified, for a period of one year after formal written acceptance of the system to include scheduled and nonscheduled adjustments.

1.7.2 Description of Work

The adjustment and repair of the system includes all computer equipment, software updates, communications transmission equipment and DTS, local processors, sensors and entry control, facility interface, and support equipment. Responsibility shall be limited to Contractor installed equipment. Repair, calibration, and other work shall be provided and performed in accordance with the manufacturer's documentation and instruction. The maintenance manual shall include descriptions of maintenance for all equipment including inspection, periodic prevention maintenance, fault diagnosis, and repair or replacement of defective components.

1.7.3 Personnel

Service personnel shall be certified in the maintenance and repair of the specific type of equipment installed and qualified to accomplish work promptly and satisfactorily. The Government shall be advised in writing of the name of the designated service representative, and of any change in personnel.

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 14


1.7.4 Schedule of Work

Perform two minor inspections at 6 month intervals (or more often if required by the manufacturer), and two major inspections offset equally between the minor inspections to effect quarterly inspection of alternating magnitude.

1.7.4.1 Minor Inspections

Minor inspections shall include visual checks and operational tests of console equipment, peripheral equipment, local processors, sensors, and electrical and mechanical controls. Minor inspections shall also include mechanical adjustment of laser printers.

1.7.4.2 Major Inspections

Major inspections shall include work described under paragraph Minor Inspections and the following work:

a. Clean interior and exterior surfaces of all system equipment and local processors, including workstation monitors, keyboards, and console equipment.

b. Perform diagnostics on all equipment.

c. Check, walk test, and calibrate each sensor.

d. Run all system software diagnostics and correct all diagnosed problems.

e. Resolve any previous outstanding problems.

f. Purge and compress data bases.

g. Review network configuration.

1.7.4.3 Scheduled Work

Scheduled work shall be performed during regular working hours, Monday through Friday, excluding federal holidays.

1.7.5 Emergency Service

The Government will initiate service calls when the system is not functioning properly. Qualified personnel shall be available to provide service to the complete system. The Government shall be furnished with a telephone number where the service supervisor can be reached at all times. Service personnel shall be at site within 4 hours after receiving a request for service. The system shall be restored to proper operating condition within 8 hours after service personnel arrive onsite and obtain access to the system.

1.7.6 Operation

Performance verification test procedures shall be used after all scheduled maintenance and repair activities to verify proper component and system operation.

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 15


1.7.7 Records and Logs

Keep records and logs of each task, and organize cumulative records for each component, and for the complete system chronologically resulting in a continuous log to be maintained for all devices. The log shall contain all initial settings. Complete logs shall be kept and shall be available for inspection onsite, demonstrating that planned and systematic adjustments and repairs have been accomplished for the system.

1.7.8 Work Requests

Separately record each service call request, as received. The form shall include the serial number identifying the component involved, its location, date and time the call was received, specific nature of trouble, names of service personnel assigned to the task, instructions describing what has to be done, the amount and nature of the material to be used, the time and date work started, and the time and date of completion. Deliver a record of the work performed within 5 days after work is accomplished.

1.7.9 System Modifications

Make any recommendations for system modification in writing to the Government. System modifications shall not be made without prior approval of the Government. Any modifications made to the system shall result in the updating of the operation and maintenance manuals as well as any other documentation affected.

1.7.10 Software

Provide a description of all software updates to the Government, who will then decide whether or not they are appropriate for implementation. After notification by the Government, implement the designated software updates and verify operation in the system. These updates shall be accomplished in a timely manner, fully coordinated with system operators, and shall be incorporated into the operation and maintenance manuals, and software documentation. Make a system image file so the system can be restored to its original state if the software update adversely affects system performance.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS REQUIREMENTS

2.1.1 Materials and Equipment

Units of equipment that perform identical, specified functions shall be products of a single manufacturer. All material and equipment shall be new and currently in production. Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturer's model and serial number in a conspicuous place. System equipment shall conform to UL 294 and UL 1076.

2.1.2 Nameplates

Laminated plastic nameplates shall be provided for local processors. Each nameplate shall identify the local processor and its location within the system. Laminated plastic shall be 1/8 inch thick, white with black center core. Nameplates shall be a minimum of 1 x 3 inches, with minimum 1/4 inch high engraved block lettering. Nameplates shall be attached to the inside of the enclosure housing the local processor. Other major components of

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 16


the system shall have the manufacturer's name, address, type or style, model or serial number, and catalog number on a corrosion resistant plate secured to the item of equipment. Nameplates will not be required for devices smaller than 1 x 3 inches.


Equipment connected to alternating current circuits shall be protected from power line surges. Equipment protection shall withstand surge test waveforms described in IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2. Fuses shall not be used for surge protection.

2.1.4 Sensor Device Wiring and Communication Circuit Surge Protection

Inputs shall be protected against surges induced on device wiring. Outputs shall be protected against surges induced on control and device wiring installed outdoors and as shown. Communications equipment shall be protected against surges induced on any communications circuit. Cables and conductors, except fiber optics, which serve as communications circuits from console to field equipment, and between field equipment, shall have surge protection circuits installed at each end. Protection shall be furnished at equipment, and additional triple electrode gas surge protectors rated for the application on each wireline circuit shall be installed within 3 feet of the building cable entrance. Fuses shall not be used for surge protection. The inputs and outputs shall be tested in both normal mode and common mode using the following two waveforms: a. A 10 microsecond rise time by 1000 microsecond pulse width waveform with a peak voltage of 1500 Volts and a peak current of 60 amperes. b. An 8 microsecond rise time by 20 microsecond pulse width waveform with a peak voltage of 1000 Volts and a peak current of 500 amperes.

2.1.5 Power Line Conditioners

A power line conditioner shall be furnished for the cosole equipment and each local processor. The power line conditioners shall be of the ferroresonant design, with no moving parts and no tap switching, while electrically isolating the secondary from the power line side. The power line conditioners shall be sized for 125 percent of the actual connected kVA load. Characteristics of the power line conditioners shall be as follows:

a. At 85 percent load, the output voltage shall not deviate by more than plus or minus 1 percent of nominal when the input voltage fluctuates between minus 20 percent to plus 10 percent of nominal.

b. During load changes of zero to full load, the output voltage shall not deviate by more than plus or minus 3 percent of nominal. Full correction of load switching disturbances shall be accomplished within 5 cycles, and 95 percent correction shall be accomplished within 2 cycles of the onset of the disturbance.

c. Total harmonic distortion shall not exceed 3.5 percent at full load.

2.1.6 Field Enclosures

2.1.6.1 Interior Sensor

Sensors to be used in an interior environment shall have a housing that provides protection against dust, falling dirt, and dripping noncorrosive

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 17


liquids.

2.1.6.2 Exterior Sensor

Sensors to be used in an exterior environment shall have a housing that provides protection against windblown dust, rain and splashing water, and hose directed water. Sensors shall be undamaged by the formation of ice on the enclosure.

2.1.6.3 Interior Electronics

System electronics to be used in an interior environment shall be housed in enclosures which meet the requirements of NEMA 250 Type 12.

2.1.6.4 Exterior Electronics

System electronics to be used in an exterior environment shall be housed in enclosures which meet the requirements of NEMA 250 Type 4.

2.1.6.5 Corrosion Resistant

System electronics to be used in a corrosive environment as defined in NEMA 250 shall be housed in metallic non-corrosive enclosures which meet the requirements of NEMA 250 Type 4X.

2.1.6.6 Hazardous Environment Equipment

System electronics to be used in a hazardous environment shall be housed in a enclosures which meet the requirements of paragraph Hazardous Environment.

2.1.7 Fungus Treatment

System components located in fungus growth inductive environments shall be completely treated for fungus resistance. Treating materials containing a mercury bearing fungicide shall not be used. Treating materials shall not increase the flammability of the material or surface being treated. Treating materials shall cause no skin irritation or other injury to personnel handling it during fabrication, transportation, operation, or maintenance of the equipment, or during use of the finished items when used for the purpose intended.

2.1.8 Tamper Provisions

2.1.8.1 Tamper Switches

Enclosures, cabinets, housings, boxes, and fittings having hinged doors or removable covers and which contain circuits or connections of the system and its power supplies, shall be provided with cover operated, corrosion-resistant tamper switches, arranged to initiate an alarm signal when the door or cover is moved. The enclosure and the tamper switch shall function together and shall not allow direct line of sight to any internal components before the switch activates. Tamper switches shall be inaccessible until the switch is activated; have mounting hardware concealed so that the location of the switch cannot be observed from the exterior of the enclosure; be connected to circuits which are under electrical supervision at all times, irrespective of the protection mode in which the circuit is operating; shall be spring-loaded and held in the closed position by the door or cover; and shall be wired so that the circuit is broken when the door or cover is disturbed.

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 18


a. Nonsensor Enclosures: Tamper switches must be installed on all nonsensor enclosures.

b. Sensor Enclosures: Tamper switches must be installed on all sensor enclosures or housings.

2.1.8.2 Enclosure Covers

Covers of pull and junction boxes provided to facilitate initial installation of the system need not be provided with tamper switches if they contain no splices or connections, but shall be protected by tack welding or brazing the covers in place or by tamper resistant security fasteners. Labels shall be affixed to such boxes indicating they contain no connections.

2.1.9 Locks and Key-Lock Switches

2.1.9.1 Locks

Locks shall be provided on system enclosures for maintenance purposes. Locks shall be UL listed, conventional key type lock having a combination of 5 cylinder pin and 5-point 3 position side bar. Keys shall be stamped "U.S. GOVT. DO NOT DUP." The locks shall be arranged so that the key can only be withdrawn when in the locked position. Maintenance locks shall be keyed alike and only 2 keys shall be furnished for all of these locks. These keys shall be controlled in accordance with the key control plan as specified in paragraph Key Control Plan.

2.1.9.2 Key-Lock-Operated Switches

Key-lock-operated switches required to be installed on system components shall be UL listed, conventional key type lock having a combination of 5 cylinder pin and 5-point 3 position side bar. Keys shall be stamped "U.S. GOVT. DO NOT DUP." Key-lock-operated switches shall be 2 position, with the key removable in either position. All key-lock-operated switches shall be keyed differently and only 2 keys shall be furnished for each key-lock-operated-switch. These keys shall be controlled in accordance with the key control plan as specified in paragraph Key Control Plan.

2.1.9.3 Construction Locks

A set of temporary locks shall be used during installation and construction. The final set of locks installed and delivered to the Government shall not include any of the temporary locks.

2.1.10 System Components

System components shall be designed for continuous operation. Electronic components shall be solid state type, mounted on printed circuit boards conforming to UL 796. Printed circuit board connectors shall be plug-in, quick-disconnect type. Power dissipating components shall incorporate safety margins of not less that 25 percent with respect to dissipation ratings, maximum voltages, and current carrying capacity. Control relays and similar switching devices shall be solid state type or sealed electro-mechanical.

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 19


2.1.10.1 Modularity

Equipment shall be designed for increase of system capability by installation of modular components. System components shall be designed to facilitate maintenance through replacement of modular subassemblies and parts.

2.1.10.2 Maintainability

Components shall be designed to be maintained using commercially available tools and equipment. Components shall be arranged and assembled so they are accessible to maintenance personnel. There shall be no degradation in tamper protection, structural integrity, EMI/RFI attenuation, or line supervision after maintenance when it is performed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

2.1.10.3 Interchangeability

The system shall be constructed with off-the-shelf components which are physically, electrically and functionally interchangeable with equivalent components as complete items. Replacement of equivalent components shall not require modification of either the new component or of other components with which the replacement items are used. Custom designed or one-of-a-kind items shall not be used. Interchangeable components or modules shall not require trial and error matching in order to meet integrated system requirements, system accuracy, or restore complete system functionality.

2.1.10.4 Product Safety

System components shall conform to applicable rules and requirements of NFPA 70 and UL 294. System components shall be equipped with instruction plates including warnings and cautions describing physical safety, and special or important procedures to be followed in operating and servicing system equipment.

2.1.11 Controls and Designations

Controls and designations shall be as specified in NEMA ICS 1.

2.1.12 Special Test Equipment

Provide all special test equipment, special hardware, software, tools, and programming or initialization equipment needed to start or maintain any part of the system and its components. Special test equipment is defined as any test equipment not normally used in an electronics maintenance facility.

2.1.13 Alarm Output

The alarm output of each sensor shall be a single pole double throw (SPDT) contact rated for a minimum of 0.25 A at 24 Volts dc.

2.2 CENTRAL STATION HARDWARE

The central station computer(s) shall be standard, off the shelf, unmodified digital computer of modular design.

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 20


2.2.1 Processor Speed

The processor shall utilize a minimum architecture of a 32-bit CSIC. The operating speed of the processor shall be a minimum of:

a. Workstation/Badging Station 2.4 GHZ.

2.2.2 Memory

The minimum installed and expandable RAM memory sizes are as follows:

Installed Expandable

a. Workstation/Badging Station 512 MB 2.0 GB.

2.2.3 Power Supply

The power supply shall have a minimum capacity of:

a. Workstation/Badging Station 330 Watts.

2.2.4 Real Time Clock (RTC)

An RTC shall be provided. Accuracy shall be within plus or minus 1 minute per month. The clock may be made accurate by automatic time-syncing software using standard protocols. The RTC shall maintain time in a 24-hour format including seconds, minutes, hours, date, and month and shall be resettable by software. The clock shall continue to function for a period of 1 year without power.

2.2.5 Serial Ports

The following ports shall be provided on each workstation type, as a minimum:

a. Two TIA-232-F serial.

b. Serial ports shall have adjustable data transmission rates from 9600 to 115.2 Kbps and shall be selectable under program control.

c. One enhanced parallel port.

d. One RJ-45 Network Interface Connector.

e. Two PS/2 or 6-pin mini-DIN ports for keyboard and mouse.

f. Two USB ports.

2.2.6 Network Interface Card

A Network Interface Card (NIC) shall be provided for each computer type with a minimum speed of:

a. Workstation/Badging Station 100 MBPS.

2.2.7 Color Monitor

The monitor shall be no less than 17 inches with a minimum resolution of 1280 by 1024 pixels, non-interlaced, and a maximum dot pitch of 0.28

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 21


millimeters. The video card shall support at least 256 colors at a resolution of 1280 by 768. The workstations shall operate with the following minimum size and types of video RAM:

a. Workstation/Badging Station 40 MB shared memory.

2.2.8 Keyboard A101

A keyboard having a minimum 64 character, standard ASCII character, based on ANSI INCITS 154 shall be furnished.

2.2.9 Enhancement Hardware

Enhancement hardware, such as special function keyboards, special function keys, touch screen devices, or mouse shall be provided for frequently used operator commands, or as shown, such as: Help, Alarm Acknowledge, Place Zone In Access, Place Zone In Secure, System Test, Print Reports, Change Operator, Security Lighting Controls, and Display Graphics.

2.2.10 Disk Storage

A hard disk with controller having a maximum average access time of 10 milliseconds shall be provided. The hard disk shall provide a minimum formatted storage:

a. Workstation 20 GB SCSI\EIDE @7200 RPM. b. Badging Station 40 GB SCSI\EIDE @7200 RPM. c. Server or Regional Server 40 GB SCSI\EIDE @7200 RPM. d. Enterprise or Global Server Quantity (3) Level 5 RAID, 18 GB SCSI\EIDE @ 10K RPM.

2.2.11 Floppy Disk Drives

A high-density floppy disk drive and controller in 3-1/2 inch size shall be provided.

2.2.12 Magnetic Tape System

A 4 mm cartridge magnetic tape system shall be provided. Each tape shall be computer grade, in a rigid cartridge with spring-loaded cover and write-protect. The tape drives shall utilize uncompressed and compressed capacity tapes as follows:

a. Workstation N/A. b. Badging Station N/A. c. Server or Regional Server 20/40 GB, DDS4. d. Enterprise or Global Server 20/40 GB, DDS4.

2.2.13 Modem

A modem shall be provided and operate at 57,600 bps, full duplex on circuits using asynchronous communications. Modem shall have error detection, auto answer/autodial, and call-in-progress detection. The modem shall meet the requirements of ITU V.34, ITU V.92 for error correction and ITU V.42 for data compression standards, and shall be suitable for operating on unconditioned voice grade telephone lines in conformance with 47 CFR 68.

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 22


2.2.14 Audible Alarm

The manufacturer's standard audible alarm shall be provided. Each of the computer station types shall include a soundboard and speakers to provide audio indications for the operator.

2.2.15 Mouse

A mouse with a minimum resolution of 400 dots per inch shall be provided.

2.2.16 CD-ROM/CD-RW

A CD-ROM/CD-RW nominal storage capacity of 700 megabytes shall be provided. These drives shall have the following minimum characteristics:

a. Data Transfer Rate: 3.6 Mbps.

b. Average Access Time: 150 milliseconds.

c. Cache memory: 256 Kbytes.

d. Data throughput: 3.6 Mbyte/second, minimum.

e. Read speed: 48x.

f. Write speed: 32x.

2.2.17 DVD/DVD-RW

A DVD/DVD-RW nominal storage capacity of 4.7 Gigabytes shall be provided. These drives shall have the following minimum characteristics:

a. Data Transfer Rate: 3.6 Mbps.

b. Average Access Time: 150 milliseconds.

c. Cache memory: 256 Kbytes.

d. Data throughput: 3.6 Mbyte/second, minimum.

e. Read speed: 12x.

f. Write speed: 4x.

2.2.18 Dot Matrix Alarm Printer

A dot matrix alarm printer shall be provided and interconnected to the central station equipment. The dot matrix alarm printer shall have a minimum 96 character, standard ASCII character set, based on ANSI INCITS 154 and with graphics capability. The printer shall be able to print in both red and black without ribbon change. The printers shall have adjustable sprockets for paper width up to 11 inches, print at least 80 columns per line and have a minimum speed of 200 characters per second. Character spacing shall be selectable at 10, 12 or 17 characters per inch. The printers shall utilize sprocket-fed fan fold paper. The units shall have programmable control of top-of-form.

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 23


2.2.19 Report Printer

A report printer shall be provided and interconnected to the central station equipment. The printer shall be a laser printer with printer resolution of at least 600 dots per inch. The printer shall have at least 2 megabytes of RAM. Printing speed shall be at least 8 pages per minute with a 100-sheet paper cassette and with automatic feed.

2.2.20 Controllers

Controllers required for operation of specified peripherals, serial, and parallel ports shall be provided.

2.2.21 Central Station Equipment Enclosures

Provide color coordinated consoles and equipment cabinets. Equipment cabinets shall have front and back plexiglass doors, thermostatic controlled bottom-mounted fan, and metal fitted and louvered tops. One locking cabinet approximately 6 feet high, 3 feet wide, 18 to 36 inches deep with 3 adjustable shelves, and 4 storage racks for storage of disks, tapes, printouts, printer paper, ribbons, manuals, and other documentation shall be provided.

2.2.22 Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)

A self contained UPS, suitable for installation and operation at the central station, shall be provided. The UPS shall be sized to provide a minimum of 6 hours of operation of the central station equipment. If the facility is without an emergency backup generator, the UPS shall provide necessary battery backup power for 24 hours. Equipment connected to the UPS shall not be affected by a power outage of a duration less than the rated capacity of the UPS. UPS shall be complete with necessary power supplies, transformers, batteries, and accessories and shall include visual indication of normal power operation, UPS operation, abnormal operation and visual and audible indication of low battery power. The UPS condition shall be monitored by the ESS and displayed at the Central Station through the use of outputs or data stream from the UPS.

2.2.23 Enrollment Center Equipment

Enrollment stations shall be provided and located as shown to enroll personnel into, and disenroll personnel from, the system database. The enrollment equipment shall only be accessible to authorized entry control enrollment personnel. Provide enough credential cards for all personnel to be enrolled at the site plus an extra 50 percent for future use. The enrollment equipment shall include subsystem configuration controls and electronic diagnostic aids for subsystem setup and troubleshooting with the central station. A printer shall be provided for the enrollment station which meets the requirements of paragraph Report Printer.

2.2.23.1 Enrollment Center Accessories

A steel desk-type console, a swivel chair on casters and equipment racks shall be provided. The console shall be as specified in CEA-310-E and as shown. Equipment racks shall be as specified in CEA-310-E and as shown. All equipment, with the exception of the printers, shall be rack mounted in the console and equipment racks or as shown. The console and equipment racks and cabinets shall be color coordinated. A locking cabinet approximately 6 feet high, 3 feet wide, and 2 feet deep with 3 adjustable

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 24


shelves, and 2 storage racks for storage of disks, tapes, printouts, printer paper, ribbons, manuals, and other documentation shall be provided.

2.2.23.2 Enrollment Center I.D. Production

The enrollment center shall be equipped with a high-resolution digital camera structurally mounted, or provided with a reliable tripod. The camera model shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the ESS. The camera and digital video capture card shall be commercially available, off the shelf components. Design and provide a lighting system sufficient for quality, still-video capture. The enrollment center shall be equipped with a die-sublimation printer capable of printing directly to the access control or I.D. credential. Printer ribbons and other printing supplies shall be provided to complete the initial enrollment by 200%. The quantity of credentials is a separate issue and will be as shown.

2.3 CENTRAL STATION SOFTWARE

Software shall support all specified functions. The central station shall be online at all times and shall perform required functions as specified. Software shall be resident at the central station, regional server, and/or the local processor as required to perform specified functions.

2.3.1 System Software

System software shall perform the following functions:

a. Support multi-user operation with multiple tasks for each user.

b. Support operation and management of peripheral devices.

c. Provide file management functions for disk I/O, including creation and deletion of files, copying files, a directory of all files including size and location of each sequential and random ordered record.

d. Provide printer spooling.

e. The system shall be designed to support any industry standard net protocol and topology listed below:

1. TCP/IP 2. Novel Netware (IPX/SPX) 3. Digital PATHWORKS 4. Banyan VINES 5. IBM LAN Server (NetBEUI) 6. IBM SNA Networks 7. Microsoft LAN Manager (NetBEUI) 8. NFS Networks 9. Remote Access Service (RAS) via ISDN, x.25, and standard phone lines

f. The system shall be Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) compliant.

g. The system shall support a relational database management system with the proper 32-bit ODBC drivers. Examples of these databases include, but are not limited to, Microsoft SQL 2000, Oracle Server 8i / 9i, or IBM B2 Universal Server 7.2.

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 25


h. The system shall be portable across multiple platforms to take full advantage of multiple hardware architectures, without changing system software.

i. The system shall support any standard video input source that utilizes a Red/Green/Blue (RGB), Composite, or S-Video signal. Monitor resolution shall support a minimum of 1024 x 768 pixels with SVGA graphics standards.

j. The system shall be designed to support any standard thermal dye transfer credential printer with certified drivers. The system shall also support any ink jet, laser, or dot matrix printer with certified drivers.

k. The system shall be designed to support an advanced distributed network architecture, where intelligent system controllers (ISCs) do not need to be home-run wired back to the database server. ISCs shall be wired to any authorized PC that is licensed to run the system software. Network based ISCs shall be able to communicate back with the database server through standard network switches and routers and shall not have to be on the same subnet. The system shall also support dual path upstream communications between the ISC and client workstations/database server. ISCs shall be connected to the Local Area Network (LAN)/Wide Area Network (WAN) via industry standard TCP/IP and RS-232/485 communications protocol. As such, any alarm in the system shall be capable of being routed to any client workstation(s) on the network, regardless of the ISC that generated the alarm.

2.3.2 Software Scalability

The system software shall be scalable as shown. The software shall have the capability of managing the total operations of the ESS system capacity of credential readers, alarm inputs, control outputs, and peripheral equipment as shown, as governed by licensing agreements. Minimum requirements for regional server additions shall be driven by bandwidth and latency calculations provided by the manufacturer of the ESS system.

2.3.3 System Architecture

Criticality, operational requirements, and/or limiting points of failure may dictate the development of an enterprise and regional server architecture as opposed to system capacity. Provide server and workstation configurations with all necessary connectors, interfaces, and accessories as shown.

2.3.4 Real Time Clock Synchronization

The system shall synchronize each real time clock within 1 second and at least once per day automatically, without operator intervention and without requiring system shutdown.

2.3.5 Database Definition Process

Software shall be provided to define and modify each point in the database using operator commands. The definition shall include all parameters and constraints associated with each sensor, commandable output, zone, facility interface device, terminal device, etc. Data entry software shall provide mass enrollment capability, such that multiple devices may be assigned similar parameters with a single entry. Each database item shall be

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 26


callable for display or printing, including EPROM, ROM and RAM resident data. The database shall be defined and entered into the ESS based upon input from the Government.

2.3.6 Software Tamper

The ESS shall annunciate a tamper alarm when unauthorized changes to the system database files are attempted. Three consecutive unsuccessful attempts to log onto the system shall generate a software tamper alarm. A software tamper alarm shall also be generated when an operator or other individual makes 3 consecutive unsuccessful attempts to invoke central processor functions beyond their authorization level. The ESS shall maintain a transcript file of the last 5000 commands entered at each central station to serve as an audit trail. The system shall not allow write access to the system transcript files by any person, regardless of their authorization level. The system shall only allow acknowledgment of software tamper alarms and read access to the system transcript files by operators and managers with the highest password authorization level available in the system.

2.3.7 Conditional Command Event

The ESS software shall provide a programmable timeframe and alarm output for failure of the operator to acknowledge an alarm condition. If an alarm is not acknowledged within the specified timeframe, the alarm and notice of lack of response shall be communicated to other stations on the system. If no other stations are manned 24 hours per day, then an automatic alert must be provided for security response personnel.

2.3.8 Peer Computer Control Software

The peer computer control software shall detect a failure of a central computer, and shall cause the other central computer to assume control of all system functions without interruption of operation. Drivers shall be provided in both central computers to support this mode of operation.

2.3.9 Application Software

The application software shall provide the interface between the alarm annunciation and entry control local processors; monitor all sensors and DTS links; operate displays; report alarms; generate reports; and assist in training system operators. Application software shall perform the following functions:

a. Support operation and management of peripheral devices.

b. Provide printer spooling.

c. The system shall be Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) compliant.

d. The system shall allow cardholder, visitor, and asset photos to be taken from any one of the live video signals listed above or to be scanned in using any standard scanning device that utilizes TWAIN interface. System support for other methods of inputting a cardholder's, visitor's, and asset's photo, such as through the use of a digital camera with TWAIN interface, or by importing a photo from any standard image file format, shall also be available.

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 27


2.3.9.1 Operator's Commands

The operator's commands shall provide the means for entry of monitoring and control commands, and for retrieval of system information. Processing of operator commands shall commence within 1 second of entry, with some form of acknowledgment provided at that time. The operator's commands shall perform tasks including:

a. Request help with the system operation.

b. Acknowledge alarms.

c. Clear alarms.

d. Place zone in access.

e. Place zone in secure.

f. Test the system.

g. Generate and format reports.

h. Print reports.

i. Change operator.

j. Request any graphic displays implemented in the system. Graphic displays shall be completed within 3 seconds from time of operator command.

k. Entry control functions.

2.3.9.2 Command Input

Operator's commands shall be full English language words, acronyms, or graphic symbols selected to allow operators to use the system without extensive training or data processing backgrounds. The system shall prompt the operator in English word, phrase, or acronym, or graphic symbols. Commands shall be available in an abbreviated mode, in addition to the full English language (words and acronyms) commands, allowing an experienced operator to disregard portions, or all, of the prompt-response requirements.

2.3.9.3 Command Input Errors

The system shall supervise operator inputs to ensure they are correct for proper execution. Operator input assistance shall be provided whenever a command cannot be executed because of operator input errors. The system shall explain to the operator, in English words and phrases, why the command cannot be executed. Error responses requiring an operator to look up a code in a manual or other document will not be accepted. Conditions for which operator error assist messages shall be generated include:

a. The command used is incorrect or incomplete.

b. The operator is restricted from using that command.

c. The command addresses a point which is disabled or out of service.

d. The command addresses a point which does not exist.

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 28


e. The command would violate constraints.

Additionally, the system shall write all input keystrokes to a file on the hard drive for subsequent audit purposes.

2.3.9.4 Enhancements

The system shall implement the following enhancements by use of special function keys, touch screen, or mouse, in addition to all other command inputs specified:

a. Help: Used to produce a display for all commands available to the operator. The help command, followed by a specific command, shall produce a short explanation of the purpose, use, and system reaction to that command.

b. Acknowledge Alarms: Used to acknowledge that the alarm message has been observed by the operator.

c. Clear Alarms: Used to remove an alarm from the active screen.

d. Input Guard Response: The system shall provide preprogrammed guard responses to allow the monitoring force to create a log of responses to alarm events. The preprogrammed guard inputs shall include phrases such as "dispatched security personnel", "contacted supervisor", or "false alarm".

e. Place Zone in Access: Used to remotely disable intrusion alarm circuits emanating from a specific zone. The system shall be structured so that tamper circuits cannot be disabled by the console operator.

f. Place Zone in Secure: Used to remotely activate intrusion alarm circuits emanating from a specific zone.

g. System Test: Allows the operator to initiate a system wide operational test.

h. Zone Test: Allows the operator to initiate an operational test for a specific zone.

i. Print Reports: Allows the operator to initiate printing of reports.

j. Change Operator: Used for changing operators.

k. Security Lighting Controls: Allows the operator to remotely turn on/off security lights.

l. Display Graphics: Used to display any graphic displays implemented in the system.

2.3.9.5 System Access Control

The system shall provide a means to define system operator capability and functions through multiple, password protected operator levels. At least 3 operator levels shall be provided. System operators and managers with appropriate password clearances shall be able to change operator levels for all operators. Three successive attempts by an operator to execute

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 29


functions beyond their defined level during a 24-hour period shall initiate a software tamper alarm. A minimum of 32 passwords shall be usable with the system software. The system shall display the operator's name or initials in the console's first field. The system shall print the operator's name or initials, action, date, and time on the system printer at log-on and log-off. The password shall not be displayed or printed. Each password shall be definable and assignable for the following:

a. Commands usable.

b. Menus available for display.

c. Access to system software.

d. Access to application software.

e. Individual zones which are to be accessed.

f. Access to database.

2.3.9.6 Alarm Monitoring Software

This program shall monitor all sensors, local processors and DTS circuits and notify the operator of an alarm condition. Alarms shall be printed in red on the alarm printer and displayed on the console's text and graphics map monitors. Higher priority alarms shall be displayed first; and within alarm priorities, the oldest unacknowledged alarm shall be displayed first. An alarm is latched into the system upon activation/annunciation. Once in alarm, no subsequent alarms from that specific device/sensor need be annunciated until the current alarm is investigated and cleared. The system may provide a counter to indicate the number of subsequent alarms from that specific device/sensor that occurred after the initial alarm, but no additional alarms are to be annunciated until the current alarm is "cleared". Operator acknowledgment of one alarm silences the audible alarm and changes associated map and text icons from flashing red to steady state red. These icons remain red to indicate that the alarm is still open and the system is awaiting identification of the course and resolution by the operator. The operator can resolve the alarm by either the use of CCTV assessment to identify the cause or by dispatching guards/response force to investigate. After the operator has satisfactorily determined the cause of the alarm and is prepared to enter pertinent information into the log, the operator will "clear" the alarm. Clearing the alarm indicates to the system that the operator needs to be notified of any new alarms from that device/sensor. Programmable alarm data to be displayed shall include type of alarm, location of alarm, and secondary alarm messages. Alarm data to be printed shall include: type of alarm, location of alarm, date and time (to nearest second) of occurrence, operator acknowledgement instructions, and operator response. A unique message field with a width of 60 characters shall be provided for each alarm. Assignment of messages to a zone or sensor shall be an operator editable function. Secondary messages shall be assignable by the operator for printing to provide further information and shall be editable by the operator. The system shall provide for 25 secondary messages with a field of 4 lines of 60 characters each. The most recent 1000 alarms shall be stored and shall be recallable by the operator using the report generator.

2.3.9.7 Monitor Display Software

Monitor display software shall provide for text and graphics map displays

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 30


that include zone status integrated into the display. Different colors shall be used for the various components and real time data. Colors shall be uniform on all displays. The following color coding shall be followed.

a. FLASHING RED to alert an operator that a zone has gone into an alarm or that primary power has failed.

b. RED to alert an operator that a zone is in alarm and that the alarm has been acknowledged.

c. YELLOW to advise an operator that a zone is in access.

d. GREEN to indicate that a zone is secure or that power is on.

2.3.9.8 Map Displays/Graphics Linked to Alarms

a. The System shall relate map displays or other graphics to alarms. Whenever one of the predefined alarms is annunciated on a system control terminal, the map display or graphic related to the alarm shall be automatically displayed. The definition of which maps or graphics shall be displayed with each alarm shall be selectable by system operators through simple menu choices as part of the system initial configuration.

b. System graphics shall be provided to allow multiple levels of information for the system operator. The initial level shall provide an overall site map distinguishing sensored facilities and assets. Active links or icons shall be used to trigger the display of subsequent maps, providing greater detail and definition of the area symbolized. These active links or icons shall be color dynamic, reflecting in real-time the highest priority off-normal conditions of the device or map it represents. Multiple layers may be used to arrive at the specific device locations.

c. The system may utilize two monitors for text and map displays respectively for enhancing operator performance.

2.3.9.9 User Defined Prompts/Messages Linked to Alarms

The System shall provide a means to relate operator defined prompts and other messages to predefined alarms. Whenever one of the predefined alarms is annunciated on a system control terminal, the prompts or messages related to the alarm shall be automatically displayed.

2.3.9.10 System Test Software

This software shall enable the operator to initiate a test of the system. This test can be of the entire system or of a particular portion of the system at the operator's option. The results of each test shall be stored for future display or print out in report form.

2.3.9.11 Report Generator

Software shall be provided with commands to generate reports for displaying, printing, and storing on disk and tape. Reports shall be stored by type, date, and time and shall be printed on the report printer. Reports shall be spooled, allowing the printing of one report to be complete before the printing of another report commences. The dynamic operation of the system shall not be interrupted to generate a report. The

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 31


report generation mode, either periodic, automatic or on request, shall be operator selectable. The report shall contain the time and date when the report was printed, and the name of operator generating the report. The exact format of each report type shall be operator configurable.

a. Periodic Automatic Report Modes: The system shall allow for specifying, modifying, or inhibiting the report to be generated, the time the initial report is to be generated, the time interval between reports, end of period, and the output peripheral.

b. Request Report Mode: The system shall allow the operator to request at any time an immediate printout of any report.

c. Alarm Report: The alarm report shall include all alarms recorded by the system over an operator selectable time. The report shall include such information as: the type of alarm (intrusion, tamper, etc.); the type of sensor; the location; the time; and the action taken.

d. System Test Report: This report documents the operational status of all system components following a system test.

e. Access/Secure Report: This report documents all zones placed in access, the time placed in access, and the time placed in secure mode.

f. Entry Control Reports: The system shall generate hard copy reports of identifier, terminal, and guard tour tracking reports, and versions with defined parameters of the manufacturer's standard management and activity reports.

2.3.9.12 Entry Control Enrollment Software

The enrollment station shall provide database management functions for the system, and shall allow an operator to change and modify the data entered in the system as needed. The enrollment station shall not have any alarm response or acknowledgment functions as a programmable function of the system. Multiple, password protected access levels shall be provided at the enrollment station. Database management and modification functions shall require a higher operator access level than personnel enrollment functions. The program shall provide a means for disabling the enrollment station when it is unattended to prevent unauthorized use. The program shall provide a method to enter personnel identifying information into the entry control database files through enrollment stations to include a credential unit in use at the installation. In the case of personnel identity verification subsystems, this data shall include biometric data. The program shall allow entry of this data into the system database files through the use of simple menu selections and data fields. The data field names shall be customized to suit user and site needs. All personnel identity verification subsystems selected for use with the system shall fully support the enrollment function and shall be compatible with the entry control database files.

2.4 FIELD PROCESSING HARDWARE

2.4.1 Alarm Annunciation Local Processor

The alarm annunciation local processor shall respond to interrogations from the field device network, recognize and store alarm status inputs until they are transmitted to the central station and change outputs based on commands received from the central station. The local processor shall also

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 32


automatically restore communication within 10 seconds after an interruption with the field device network and provide dc line supervision on each of its alarm inputs.

a. Inputs. Local processor inputs shall monitor dry contacts for changes of state that reflect alarm conditions. The local processor shall have at least 8 alarm inputs which allow wiring as normally open or normally closed contacts for alarm conditions. It shall also provide line supervision for each input by monitoring each input for abnormal open, grounded, or shorted conditions using dc current change measurements. The local processor shall report line supervision alarms to the central station. Alarms shall be reported for any condition that remains off normal at an input for longer than 500 milliseconds. Each alarm condition shall be transmitted to the central computer during the next interrogation cycle.

b. Outputs. Local processor outputs shall reflect the state of commands issued by the central station. The outputs shall be a form C contact and shall include normally open and normally closed contacts. The local processor shall have at least 4 command outputs.

c. Communications. The local processor shall be able to communicate with the Central Station via RS485 or TCP/IP as a minimum.

2.4.1.1 Processor Power Supply

Local processor and sensors shall be powered from an uninterruptible power source. The uninterruptible power source shall provide 8 hours of battery back-up power in the event of primary power failure and shall automatically fully recharge the batteries within 12 hours after primary power is restored. If the facility is without an emergency generator, the uninterruptible power source shall provide 24 hours of battery backup power. There will be no equipment malfunctions or perturbations or loss of data during the switch from primary to battery power and vice versa. Batteries shall be sealed, non-outgassing type. The power supply shall be equipped with an indicator for ac input power and an indicator for dc output power. Loss of primary power shall be reported to the central station as an alarm.

2.4.1.2 Auxiliary Equipment Power

A GFI service outlet shall be furnished inside the local processor's enclosure.

2.4.2 Entry Control Local Processor

The entry control local processor shall respond to interrogations from the field device network, recognize and store alarm status inputs until they are transmitted to the central station and change outputs based on commands received from the central station. The local processor shall also automatically restore communication within 10 seconds after an interruption with the field device network and provide dc line supervision on each of its alarm inputs. The entry control local processor shall provide local entry control functions including communicating with field devices such as card readers, keypads, biometric personal identity verification devices, door strikes, magnetic latches, gate and door operators and exit pushbuttons. The processor shall also accept data from entry control field devices as well as database downloads and updates from the central station that include enrollment and privilege information. The processor shall

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 33


also send indications of success or failure of attempts to use entry control field devices and make comparisons of presented information with stored identification information. The processor shall grant or deny entry by sending control signals to portal control devices and mask intrusion alarm annunciation from sensors stimulated by authorized entries. The entry control local processor shall use inputs from entry control devices to change modes between access and secure. The local processor shall maintain a date-time and location stamped record of each transaction and transmit transaction records to the central station. The processor shall operate as a stand-alone portal controller using the downloaded data base during periods of communication loss between the local processor and the central station. The processor shall store a minimum 4000 transactions during periods of communication loss between the local processor and the central station for subsequent upload to the central station upon restoration of communication.

a. Inputs. Local processor inputs shall monitor dry contacts for changes of state that reflect alarm conditions. The local processor shall have at least 8 alarm inputs which allow wiring as normally open or normally closed contacts for alarm conditions. It shall also provide line supervision for each input by monitoring each input for abnormal open, grounded, or shorted conditions using dc current change measurements. The local processor shall report line supervision alarms to the central station. Alarms shall be reported for any condition that remains off normal at an input for longer than 500 milliseconds. Each alarm condition shall be transmitted to the central station during the next interrogation cycle. The entry control local processor shall include the necessary software drivers to communicate with entry control field devices. Information generated by the entry control field devices shall be accepted by the local processor and automatically processed to determine valid identification of the individual present at the portal. Upon authentication of the credentials or information presented, the local processor shall automatically check privileges of the identified individual, allowing only those actions granted as privileges. Privileges shall include, but not be limited to, time of day control, day of week control, group control, and visitor escort control. The local processor shall maintain a date-time and location stamped record of each transaction. A transaction is defined as any successful or unsuccessful attempt to gain access through a controlled portal by the presentation of credentials or other identifying information.

b. Outputs. Local processor outputs shall reflect the state of commands issued by the central station. The outputs shall be a form C contact and shall include normally open and normally closed contacts. The local processor shall have at least 4 addressable outputs. The entry control local processor shall also provide control outputs to portal control devices.

c. Communications. The local processor shall be able to communicate with the Central Station via RS485 or TCP/IP as a minimum. The system manufacturer shall provide strategies for downloading database information for panel configurations and cardholder data to minimize the required download time when using IP connectivity.

2.4.2.1 Processor Power Supply

Local processor and sensors shall be powered from an uninterruptible power source. The uninterruptible power source shall provide 6 hours of battery

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 34


back-up power in the event of primary power failure and shall automatically fully recharge the batteries within 12 hours after primary power is restored. There shall be no equipment malfunctions or perturbations or loss of data during the switch from primary to battery power and vice versa. Batteries shall be sealed, non-outgassing type. The power supply shall be equipped with an indicator for ac input power and an indicator for dc output power.

2.4.2.2 Auxiliary Equipment Power

A GFI service outlet shall be furnished inside the local processor's enclosure.

2.5 FIELD PROCESSING SOFTWARE

All Field processing software described in this specification shall be furnished as part of the complete system.

2.5.1 Operating System

Each local processor shall contain an operating system that controls and schedules that local processor's activities in real time. The local processor shall maintain a point database in its memory that includes all parameters, constraints, and the latest value or status of all points connected to that local processor. The execution of local processor application programs shall utilize the data in memory resident files. The operating system shall include a real time clock function that maintains the seconds, minutes, hours, date and month, including day of the week. Each local processor real time clock shall be automatically synchronized with the central station at least once per day to plus or minus 10 seconds (the time synchronization shall be accomplished automatically, without operator action and without requiring system shutdown).

2.5.1.1 Startup

The local processor shall have startup software that causes automatic commencement of operation without human intervention, including startup of all connected Input/Output functions. A local processor restart program based on detection of power failure at the local processor shall be included in the local processor software. The startup software shall initiate operation of self-test diagnostic routines. Upon failure of the local processor, if the database and application software are no longer resident, the local processor shall not restart and systems shall remain in the failure mode indicated until the necessary repairs are made. If the database and application programs are resident, the local processor shall immediately resume operation.

2.5.1.2 Operating Mode

Each local processor shall control and monitor inputs and outputs as specified, independent of communications with the central station or designated workstations. Alarms, status changes and other data shall be transmitted to the central station or designated workstations when communications circuits are operable. If communications are not available, each local processor shall function in a stand-alone mode and operational data, including the status and alarm data normally transmitted to the central station or designated workstations shall be stored for later transmission to the central station or designated workstations. Storage for the latest 4000 events shall be provided at each local processor, as a

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 35


minimum. Each local processor shall accept software downloaded from the central station. The panel shall support flash ROM technology to accomplish firmware downloads from a central location.

2.5.1.3 Failure Mode

Upon failure for any reason, each local processor shall perform an orderly shutdown and force all local processor outputs to a predetermined (failure mode) state, consistent with the failure modes shown and the associated control device.

2.5.2 Functions

Provide software necessary to accomplish the following functions, as appropriate, fully implemented and operational, within each local processor.

a. Monitoring of inputs.

b. Control of outputs.

c. Reporting of alarms automatically to the central station.

d. Reporting of sensor and output status to central station upon request.

e. Maintenance of real time, automatically updated by the central station at least once a day.

f. Communication with the central station.

g. Execution of local processor resident programs.

h. Diagnostics.

i. Download and upload data to and from the central station.

2.6 INTERIOR SENSORS AND CONTROL DEVICES

Interior sensor housing shall provide protection against dust, falling dirt, and dripping noncorrosive liquids.

2.6.1 Balanced Magnetic Switch (BMS)

The BMS shall detect a 1/4 inch of separating relative movement between the magnet and the switch housing. Upon detecting such movement, the BMS shall transmit an alarm signal to the alarm annunciation system.

2.6.1.1 BMS Subassemblies

The BMS shall consist of a switch assembly and an actuating magnet assembly. The switch mechanism shall be of the balanced magnetic type or triple-biased reeds to provide detection of tamper attempts. The switches shall provide supervision and pry tamer capability. Each switch shall be provided with an overcurrent protective device, rated to limit current to 80 percent of the switch capacity. Switches shall be rated for a minimum lifetime of 1,000,000 operations. The magnet assembly shall house the actuating magnet.

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 36


2.6.1.2 Housing

The housings of surface mounted switches and magnets shall be made of nonferrous metal and shall be weatherproof. The housings of recess mounted switches and magnets shall be made of nonferrous metal or plastic.

2.6.1.3 Remote Test

A remote test capability shall be provided. The remote test shall be initiated when commanded by the alarm annunciation system. The remote test shall activate the sensor's switch mechanism causing an alarm signal to be transmitted to the alarm annunciation system. The remote test shall simulate the movement of the actuating magnet relative to the switch subassembly.

2.7 ENTRY CONTROL DEVICES

2.7.1 Card Readers and Credential Cards

a. Entry control card readers shall use unique coded data stored in or on a compatible credential card as an identifier. The card readers shall be proximity type, and shall incorporate built-in heaters or other cold weather equipment to extend the operating temperature range as needed for operation at the site. Communications protocol shall be compatible with the local processor. Furnish card readers to read passive proximity detection entry cards, and the matching credential cards. The cards shall contain coded data arranged as a unique identification code stored on or within the card, and of the type readable by the card readers. Include within the card's encoded data, a non-duplicated unique identification code. Enrollment equipment to support local encoding of badges including cryptographic and other internal security checks shall be supplied.

b. The encoded data shall adhere to the Government Smart Card Interoperability Specification V2.1 (GSC-IS). Any card formats that differ from the above specification must receive approval of the offered cards, readers, and data panels prior to the bid date be approved by the Government.

2.7.1.1 Data Encryption

Encryption between the card, card reader, and panels shall meet Federal Information Protocol Standards (FIPS) of FIPS 46-3 (DES and TDES) and FIPS 197 (AES).

2.7.1.2 Proximity

Proximity card readers shall use passive proximity detection and shall not require contact with the proximity credential card for proper operation. Passive detection proximity card readers shall use a swept-frequency, radio frequency field generator to read the resonant frequencies of tuned circuits laminated into compatible credential cards. The resonant frequencies read shall constitute a unique identification code number. The card reader shall read proximity cards in a range from 0 to at least 6 inches from the reader. The credential card design shall allow for a minimum of 32,000 unique identification codes per facility.

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 37


2.7.1.3 Card Reader Display

The card readers shall include an LED or other visual indicator display. The display shall indicate power on/off, and whether user passage requests have been accepted or rejected.

2.7.1.4 Card Reader Response Time

The card reader shall respond to passage requests by generating a signal to the local processor. The response time shall be 800 milliseconds or less, from the time the card reader finishes reading the credential card until a response signal is generated.

2.7.1.5 Card Reader Power

The card reader shall be powered from the source as shown and shall not dissipate more than 5 Watts.

2.7.1.6 Card Reader Mounting Method

Card readers shall be suitable for surface, semi-flush, pedestal, or weatherproof mounting as required.

2.7.1.7 Credential Card Modification

Entry control cards shall be able to be modified by lamination or direct print process during the enrollment process for use as a picture and identification badge as needed for the site without reduction of readability. The design of the credential cards shall allow for the addition of at least one slot or hole to accommodate the attachment of a clip for affixing the credential card to the type badge holder used at the site.

2.7.1.8 Card Size and Dimensional Stability

Credential cards shall be 2-1/8 x 3-3/8 inches. The credential card material shall be dimensionally stable so that an undamaged card with deformations resulting from normal use shall be readable by the card reader.

2.7.1.9 Card Materials and Physical Characteristics

The credential card shall be abrasion resistant, non-flammable, and present no toxic hazard to humans when used in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. The credential card shall be impervious to solar radiation and the effects of ultra-violet light.

2.7.1.10 Card Construction

The credential card shall be of core and laminate or monolithic construction. Lettering, logos and other markings shall be hot stamped into the credential material or direct printed. Provide a means to allow onsite assembly and lamination of credential cards by Government personnel.

2.7.1.11 Card Durability and Maintainability

The credential cards shall be designed and constructed to yield a useful lifetime of at least 5000 insertions or swipes or 5 years whichever results in a longer period of time. The credential card shall be able to be cleaned by wiping the credential card with a sponge or cloth wet with a

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 38


soap and water solution.

2.7.1.12 Warranty

The credential card shall include a minimum 3-year warranty.

2.7.2 Keypads

Entry control keypads shall use a unique combination of alphanumeric and other symbols as an identifier. Keypads shall contain an integral alphanumeric/special symbols keyboard with symbols arranged in ascending ASCII code ordinal sequence . Communications protocol shall be compatible with the local processor.

2.7.2.1 Keypad Display

Keypads shall include an LED or other type of visual indicator display and provide visual status indications and user prompts. The display shall indicate power on/off, and whether user passage requests have been accepted or rejected. The design of the keypad display or keypad enclosure shall limit the maximum horizontal and vertical viewing angles of the keypad. The maximum horizontal viewing angle shall be plus and minus 5 degrees or less off a vertical plane perpendicular to the plane of the face of the keypad display. The maximum vertical viewing angle shall be plus and minus 15 degrees or less off a horizontal plane perpendicular to the plane of the face of the keypad display.

2.7.2.2 Keypad Response Time

The keypad shall respond to passage requests by generating a signal to the local processor. The response time shall be 800 milliseconds or less from the time the last alphanumeric symbol is entered until a response signal is generated.

2.7.2.3 Keypad Power

The keypad shall be powered from the source as shown and shall not dissipate more than 150 Watts.

2.7.2.4 Keypad Mounting Method

Keypads shall be suitable for surface, semi-flush, pedestal, or weatherproof mounting as required.

2.7.2.5 Keypad Duress Codes

Keypads shall provide a means for users to indicate a duress situation by entering a special code.

2.7.3 Card Readers With Integral Keypad

2.7.3.1 Proximity

The proximity card reader, as specified in paragraphs "Card Readers And Credential Cards" and "Proximity", shall be equipped with integral keypads as specified in paragraph Keypads.

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 39


2.7.4 Portal Control Devices

2.7.4.1 Push-button Switches

Provide momentary contact, back lighted push buttons and stainless steel switch enclosures for each push button as shown. Switch enclosures shall be suitable for flush, or surface mounting as required. Push buttons shall be suitable for flush mount in the switch enclosures. The push button switches shall meet the requirements of NEMA 250 for the area in which they are to be installed. Where multiple push buttons are housed within a single switch enclosure, they shall be stacked vertically with each push button switch labeled with 1/4 inch high text and symbols as required. The push button switches shall be connected to the local processor associated with the portal to which they are applied and shall operate the appropriate electric strike, electric bolt or other facility release device. The continuous current of the IDS circuit shall be no more than 50% of the continuous current rating of the device supplied. The push button switches shall have double-break silver contacts that will make 720 VA at 60 amperes and break 720 VA at 10 amperes.

2.7.4.2 Panic Bar Emergency Exit With Alarm

Entry control portals shall include panic bar emergency exit hardware as shown. Panic bar emergency exit hardware shall provide an alarm shunt signal to the appropriate local processor. The panic bar shall include a conspicuous warning sign with 1 inch high, red lettering notifying personnel that an alarm will be annunciated if the panic bar is operated. Operation of the panic bar hardware shall generate an intrusion alarm. The panic bar, except for local alarm annunciation and alarm communications, shall depend upon a mechanical connection only and shall not depend upon electric power for operation. The panic bar shall be compatible with mortise or rim mount door hardware and shall operate by retracting the bolt.

2.7.4.3 Panic Bars: Normal Exit

a. Entry control portals shall include panic bar emergency exit hardware as shown. Panic bar emergency exit hardware shall provide to the portal's local processor. Operation of the panic bar hardware shall not generate an intrusion alarm. When exiting, the panic bar shall depend upon a mechanical connection only. The exterior, non-secure side of the door shall be provided with an electrified thumb latch or lever to provide access after the credential I.D. authentication by the ESS. The panic bar shall be compatible with mortise or rim mount door hardware and shall operate by retracting the bolt.

b. Signal Switches: The strikes/bolts shall include signal switches to indicate to the system when the bolt is not engaged or the strike mechanism is unlocked. The signal switches shall report a forced entry to the system.

2.7.4.4 Electric Door Strikes/Bolts

Electric door strikes/bolts shall be designed to remain secure in case of power failure. These facility interface devices shall use dc power to energize the solenoids. Electric strikes/bolts shall incorporate end of line resistors to facilitate line supervision by the system. If not incorporated into the electric strike or local controller, metal-oxide veristors (MOVs) shall be installed to protect the controller from reverse

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 40


current surges. Electric strikes shall have a minimum forcing strength of 2300 lbs.

a. Solenoid: The actuating solenoid for the strikes/bolts furnished shall not dissipate more than 12 Watts and shall operate on 12 or 24 Volts dc. The inrush current shall not exceed 1 ampere and the holding current shall not be greater than 500 milliamperes. The actuating solenoid shall move from the fully secure to fully open positions in not more than 500 milliseconds.


c. Tamper Resistance: The electric strike/bolt mechanism shall be encased in hardened guard barriers to deter forced entry.

d. Size and Weight: Electric strikes/bolts shall be compatible with standard door frame preparations.

e. Mounting Method: The electric door strikes/bolts shall be suitable for use with single and double door with mortise or rim type hardware as shown, and shall be compatible with right or left hand mounting.

f. Astragals: Astragal lock guards shall be installed to prevent tampering with the latch bolt of the locking hardware or the latch bolt keeper of the electric strike. The astragals shall bolt through the door using tamper-resistant screws. The astragals shall be made of 1/8 inch thick brass and are 11-1/14 inch high by 1-5/8 inch wide, with a 5/32 inch wide offset, at a minimum. Finishes shall be as shown.

2.7.4.5 Electrified Mortise Lock

Electrified mortise door locks shall be designed to remain secure in case of power failure. These facility interface devices shall use dc power to energize the solenoids. The solenoids shall be rated for continuous duty. Electric mortise locks shall incorporate end-of-line resistors to facilitate line supervision by the system. If not incorporated into the electric strike or local controller, metal-oxide veristors (MOVs) shall be installed to protect the controller from reverse current surges.

a. Solenoid: The actuating solenoid for the locks furnished shall not dissipate more than 12 Watts and shall operate on 12 or 24 Volts dc. The inrush current shall not exceed 1 ampere and the holding current shall not be greater than 700 milliamperes. The actuating solenoid shall move from the fully secure to fully open positions in not more than 500 milliseconds.


c. Hinge: An electric transfer hinge shall be provided with each lock in order to get power and monitoring signals from the lockset to the door frame.

d. Size and Weight: Electric strikes/bolts shall be compatible with

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 41


standard door preparations.

e. Mounting Method: The electrified mortise locks shall be suitable for use with single and double door installations. In double door installations, the lock would be in the active leaf and the fixed leaf would be monitored.

2.8 ENTRY CONTROL SOFTWARE

2.8.1 Interface Device

The entry control software shall control passage. The decision to grant or deny passage shall be based upon identifier data to be input at a specific location. If all conditions are met, a signal shall be sent to the input device location to activate the appropriate electric strike, bolt, electromagnetic lock or other type of portal release or facility interface device.

2.8.2 Operator Interface

Entry control operation shall be entirely automatic under control of the central station and local processors except for simple operations required for map display, alarm acknowledgment, zone and portal status change operations, audible or visual alarm silencing and audio annunciation. The system shall immediately annunciate changes in zone and portal status. The alarm printer shall print a permanent record of each alarm and status change. The map displays or graphics screens shall display the current status of system zones and portals. The central station shall immediately display the current status of any zone or portal upon command. While the system is annunciating an unacknowledged zone or portal alarm, keyboard operations at the central station, other than alarm acknowledgment, shall not be possible. The system shall provide the capability to change zone and portal status from alarm (after alarm acknowledgment) or access to secure; from alarm (after alarm acknowledgment) or secure to access, or from access to secure by simple control operations. If the operator attempts to change zone status to secure while there is an alarm output for that zone or portal, the system shall immediately annunciate an alarm for that zone or portal.

2.8.3 Entry Control Functions

2.8.3.1 Multiple Security Levels

The system shall have multiple security levels. Each of the security levels shall be delineated by facility barriers. Access to each security level shall be through portals in the facility barriers using designated entry control procedures. The system shall provide at least 8 security levels. Any attempt to access an area beyond an individual's security level shall initiate an access denial alarm.

2.8.3.2 Two person rule

The system shall provide a 2 person rule feature. When a portal is designated as a 2 person rule portal, it shall not allow passage unless 2 valid identifiers are presented in the proper sequence. The scheme shall be designed so that only the first 2 valid identifiers and the last 2 valid identifiers pass together.

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 42


2.8.3.3 Anti-Passback

Portals as shown shall incorporate anti-passback functions. Anti-passback functions and identifier tracking shall be system-wide for portals incorporating anti-passback. Once an authorized, enrolled individual has passed through a portal using entry control procedures, the system shall not allow use of the same identifier to pass through any portal at the same security level until the individual has egressed through a portal at this same security level using entry control procedures. Any attempt to violate anti-passback procedures shall initiate an access denial alarm. Portals that do not incorporate anti-passback functions shall allow egress from the area by a push-button switch for activation of the facility interface device or normal egress that does not activate the alarm monitoring function. Portal egress switch shall be located as shown.

2.8.3.4 Immediate Access Change

The system shall provide functions to disenroll and deny access to any identifier or combination of identifiers without consent of the individual or recovery of a credential. The design of the system shall provide entry change capability to system operators and managers with appropriate passwords at the system operator or enrollment consoles.

2.8.3.5 Multiple Time Zones

The system shall provide multiple time zone entry control. Personnel enrolled in the system shall only be allowed access to a facility during the time of day they are authorized to access the facility. Time zone access control shall also include the ability to specify beginning and ending dates that an individual will be authorized to access a facility. The system shall provide automatic activation and deactivation of entry authorization. The design of the system shall provide at least four time zones with overlapping time zones. The system shall provide a means for system operators with proper password clearance, to define custom names for each time zone, and to change the time zone's beginning and ending times through the system operator and enrollment interfaces. The system shall automatically deactivate individuals at the end of their predefined facility access duration. Any attempt during a 24 hour period by an individual or an identifier to gain facility entry outside of the authorized time zone shall initiate an entry denial alarm.

2.8.4 Electronic Entry Control System Capacities

The system shall be designed and configured to provide the following capacities.

2.8.4.1 Enrollees

The system shall be configured for 800 enrollees. The system shall provide a facility-tailorable reference file database containing personal, access authorization, identifier and verification data for each enrollee as required.

2.8.4.2 Transaction History File Size

The system capacity shall be at least the amount of transactions for the system during 1 year without any loss of transaction data. Examples of transaction data that are to be retained are: each system alarm, event and status change including operator commands, and the time and date of each

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 43


occurrence.

2.8.5 Entry Control System Alarms

The system shall annunciate an alarm when the following conditions occur. Alarms shall be annunciated at the console both audibly and visually. An alarm report shall also be printed on the system printer. The alarm annunciation shall continue until acknowledged by the system operator. Only 1 control key shall be needed to acknowledge an alarm. The system shall control, monitor, differentiate, rank, annunciate, and allow operators to acknowledge, in real time, alarm signals generated by system equipment. The system shall also provide a means to define and customize the annunciation of each alarm type. The system shall use audio and visual information to differentiate the various types of alarms. Each alarm type shall be assigned an audio and a unique visual identifier.

2.8.5.1 Duress

The system shall annunciate a duress alarm when a duress code is entered at a keypad or a duress switch is activated. Duress alarms shall be annunciated in a manner that distinguishes them from all other system alarms. Duress alarms shall not be annunciated or otherwise indicated locally nor shall a duress alarm cause any special or unusual indications at the portal or area initiating the duress alarm. As an option through programming, individual privileges may have the ability to be carried out in the same as an authorized entry to the protected area. Duress alarms shall only be annunciated at the central station and remote displays. Alarms shall be annunciated on the monitor and shall be logged on the printer.

2.8.5.2 Entry Denial

The system shall annunciate an alarm when an attempt has been made to pass through a controlled portal and entry has been denied.

2.8.5.3 Portal Open

The system shall annunciate an alarm when an entry controlled portal has been open longer than a predefined time delay. The time delay shall be adjustable, under operator control, over a range of at least 1 second to 1 minute with a maximum resolution of 1 second. The system shall have the capability of resetting the door condition based upon the door monitoring position switch indicating opening and then close.

2.8.5.4 Bolt Not Engaged

The system shall annunciate an alarm when the bolt at an entry-controlled portal has been open longer than a predefined time delay and generate an entry control alarm. The time delay shall be adjustable, under operator control, over a range of at least 1 second to 1 minute with a maximum resolution of 1 second. The system shall have the capability of resetting the door condition based upon the door monitoring position switch indicating opening and then close.

2.8.5.5 Strike Not Secured

The system shall annunciate an alarm when the strike at an entry controlled portal has been left unsecured longer than a predefined time delay and generate an entry control alarm. The time delay shall be adjustable, under

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 44


operator control, over a range of at least 1 second to 1 minute with a maximum resolution of 1 second. The system shall have the capability of resetting the door condition based upon the door monitoring position switch indicating opening and then close.

2.8.5.6 Alarm Shunting/System Bypass

The system shall provide a means to ignore operator selected alarm types at operator selected portals in order to allow standard entry control procedures to be bypassed (shunted). Predefined alarm shunting shall only be available to system operators with the proper password. The system shall also provide for predefined alarm shunting based upon time zones. This capability shall only apply to the entry control alarm type.

2.9 WIRE AND CABLE

Provide all wire and cable not indicated as Government furnished equipment. Wiring shall meet NFPA 70 standards.

2.9.1 Above Ground Sensor Wiring

Sensor wiring shall be 20 AWG minimum, twisted and shielded, 2, 3, 4, or 6 pairs to match hardware. Multiconductor wire shall have an outer jacket of PVC.

2.9.2 Direct Burial Sensor Wiring

Sensor wiring shall be 20 AWG minimum, twisted and shielded, 2, 3, 4, or 6 pairs to match hardware.

2.9.3 Local Area Network (LAN) Cabling

LAN cabling shall be in accordance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1, category 5.

2.9.4 Cable Construction

All cable components shall withstand the environment in which the cable is installed for a minimum of 20 years.


Equipment connected to alternating current circuits shall be protected from power line surges. Equipment protection shall withstand surge test waveforms described in IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2. Fuses shall not be used for surge protection.

2.9.6 Sensor Device Wiring and Communication Circuit Surge Protection

Inputs shall be protected against surges induced on device wiring. Outputs shall be protected against surges induced on control and device wiring installed outdoors and as shown. Communications equipment shall be protected against surges induced on any communications circuit. Cables and conductors, except fiber optics, which serve as communications circuits from console to field equipment, and between field equipment, shall have surge protection circuits installed at each end. Protection shall be furnished at equipment, and additional triple electrode gas surge protectors rated for the application on each wireline circuit shall be installed within 3 feet of the building cable entrance. Fuses shall not be used for surge protection. The inputs and outputs shall be tested in both

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 45


normal mode and common mode using the following two waveforms:

a. A 10-microsecond rise time by 1000 microsecond pulse width waveform with a peak voltage of 1500 Volts and a peak current of 60 amperes.

b. An 8-microsecond rise time by 20-microsecond pulse width waveform with a peak voltage of 1000 Volts and a peak current of 500 amperes.

2.9.7 Power Line Conditioners

A power line conditioner shall be furnished for the console equipment. The power line conditioners shall be of the ferro-resonant design, with no moving parts and no tap switching, while electrically isolating the secondary from the power line side. The power line conditioners shall be sized for 125 percent of the actual connected kVA load. Characteristics of the power line conditioners shall be as follows:

a. At 85 percent load, the output voltage shall not deviate by more than plus or minus 1 percent of nominal when the input voltage fluctuates between minus 20 percent to plus 10 percent of nominal.

b. During load changes of zero to full load, the output voltage shall not deviate by more than plus or minus 3 percent of nominal. Full correction of load switching disturbances shall be accomplished within five cycles, and 95 percent correction shall be accomplished within two cycles of the onset of the disturbance.

c. Total harmonic distortion shall not exceed 3.5 percent at full load.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

Verify that site conditions are in agreement with the design package and report any changes in the site, or conditions that will affect performance of the system to the Government in a report as defined in paragraph Group II Technical Data Package. Do not take any corrective action without written permission from the Government.


Install all system components, including Government furnished equipment, and appurtenances in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, IEEE C2 and as shown. Furnish necessary interconnections, services, and adjustments required for a complete and operable system as specified and shown. Control signal, communications, and data transmission line grounding shall be installed as necessary to preclude ground loops, noise, and surges from adversely affecting system operation.

3.2.1 Installation

Install the system in accordance with the standards for safety, NFPA 70, UL 681, UL 1037 and UL 1076, and the appropriate installation manual for each equipment type. Components within the system shall be configured with appropriate service points to pinpoint system trouble in less than 20 minutes. Conduit shall be rigid galvanized steel or as shown and a minimum of 1/2 inch in diameter. DTS shall not be pulled into conduits or placed in raceways, compartments, outlet boxes, junction boxes, or similar fittings with other building wiring. Flexible cords or cord connections

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 46


shall not be used to supply power to any components of the system, except where specifically noted. All other electrical work shall be as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM and as shown.

3.2.2 Enclosure Penetrations

Enclosure penetrations shall be from the bottom unless the system design requires penetrations from other directions. Penetrations of interior enclosures involving transitions of conduit from interior to exterior, and penetrations on exterior enclosures shall be sealed with rubber silicone sealant to preclude the entry of water. The conduit riser shall terminate in a hot-dipped galvanized metal cable terminator. The terminator shall be filled with an approved sealant as recommended by the cable manufacturer, and in a manner that does not damage the cable.

3.2.3 Cold Galvanizing

Field welds and/or brazing on factory galvanized boxes, enclosures, conduits, etc., shall be coated with a cold galvanized paint containing at least 95 percent zinc by weight.

3.2.4 Installation Software

Load software as specified and required for an operational system, including data bases and specified programs. Upon successful completion of the endurance test, provide original and backup copies on CD-ROM of all accepted software, including diagnostics.

3.3 SYSTEM STARTUP

Satisfaction of the requirements below does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for incorrect installations, defective equipment items, or collateral damage as a result of Contractor work/equipment. Do not apply power to the system until after:

a. System equipment items and DTS have been set up in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

b. A visual inspection of the system has been conducted to ensure that defective equipment items have not been installed and that there are no loose connections.

c. System wiring has been tested and verified as correctly connected.

d. System grounding and transient protection systems have been verified as properly installed.

e. Power supplies to be connected to the system have been verified as the correct voltage, phasing, and frequency.

3.4 SUPPLEMENTAL CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL

Provide the services of technical representatives who are familiar with all components and installation procedures of the installed system; and are approved by the Contracting Officer. These representatives shall be present on the job site during the preparatory and initial phases of quality control to provide technical assistance. These representatives shall also be available on an as needed basis to provide assistance with follow-up phases of quality control. These technical representatives shall

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 47


participate in the testing and validation of the system and shall provide certification that their respective system portions meet the contractual requirements.

3.5 TRAINING

3.5.1 General

Deliver lesson plans and training manuals for the training phase, including type of training to be provided, and a list of reference material, for Government approval. Conduct training courses for designated personnel in the maintenance and operation of the system as specified. The training shall be oriented to the specific system being installed. Training manuals shall be delivered for each trainee with 2 additional copies delivered for archiving at the project site. The manuals shall include an agenda, defined objectives for each lesson, and a detailed description of the subject matter for each lesson. Furnish audio-visual equipment and other training materials and supplies. Where the Contractor presents portions of the course by audio-visual material, copies of the audio-visual material shall be delivered to the Government either as a part of the printed training manuals or on the same media as that used during the training sessions. A training day is defined as 8 hours of classroom instruction, including 2 15-minute breaks and excluding lunchtime, Monday through Friday, during the daytime shift in effect at the training facility. For guidance in planning the required instruction, assume that attendees will have a high school education or equivalent, and are familiar with ESS. Approval of the planned training schedule shall be obtained from the Government at least 30 days prior to the training.

3.5.2 System Manager Training

Up to four system managers shall be trained for at least one day. The system manager training shall consist of the operator's training and the following:

a. Enrollment/deactivation.

b. Assignments of identifier data.

c. Assign operator password/levels.

d. Change database configuration.

e. System network configuration and management.

f. Modify graphics.

g. Print special or custom reports.

h. System backup.

i. Any other functions necessary to manage the system.

3.6 TESTING

3.6.1 General Requirements for Testing

Provide personnel, equipment, instrumentation, and supplies necessary to perform site testing. The Government will witness all performance

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 48


verification and endurance testing. Written permission shall be obtained from the Government before proceeding with the next phase of testing. Original copies of all data produced during predelivery, performance verification and endurance testing, shall be turned over to the Government at the conclusion of each phase of testing, prior to Government approval of the test.

3.6.2 Contractor's Field Testing

Calibrate and test all equipment, verify DTS operation, place the integrated system in service, and test the integrated system. Ground rods installed by the Contractor shall be tested as specified in IEEE Std 142. Deliver a report describing results of functional tests, diagnostics, and calibrations, including written certification to the Government that the installed complete system has been calibrated, tested, and is ready to begin performance verification testing. It is recommended that the Contractor use the approved performance verification test as a guideline when the field test is conducted.

3.6.3 Performance Verification Test

Demonstrate that the completed system complies with the contract requirements. Using approved test procedures, all physical and functional requirements of the project shall be demonstrated and shown. The performance verification test, as specified, shall not be started until after receipt by the Contractor of written permission from the Government, based on the Contractor's written report. The report shall include certification of successful completion of testing as specified in paragraph Contractor's Field Testing, and upon successful completion of training as specified. The Government may terminate testing at any time when the system fails to perform as specified. Upon termination of testing by the Government or by the Contractor, commence an assessment period as described for Endurance Testing Phase II. Upon successful completion of the performance verification test, deliver test reports and other documentation as specified to the Government prior to commencing the endurance test.

3.6.4 Endurance Test

a. General: Demonstrate system reliability and operability at the specified throughput rates for each portal, and the Type I and Type II error rates specified for the completed system. Calculate false alarm rates and the system shall yield false alarm rates within the specified maximums at the specified probability of detection. The endurance test shall be conducted in phases as specified. The endurance test shall not be started until the Government notifies the Contractor, in writing, that the performance verification test is satisfactorily completed, training as specified has been completed, and correction of all outstanding deficiencies has been satisfactorily completed. Provide 1 operator to operate the system 24 hours per day, including weekends and holidays, during Phase I and Phase III endurance testing, in addition to any Government personnel that may be made available. The Government may terminate testing at any time the system fails to perform as specified. Upon termination of testing by the Government or by the Contractor, commence an assessment period as described for Phase II. Verify the operation of each terminal device during the last day of the test. Upon successful completion of the endurance test, deliver test reports and other documentation as specified to the Government prior to acceptance of the system.

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 49


b. Phase I Testing: The test shall be conducted 24 hours per day for 15 consecutive calendar days, including holidays, and the system shall operate as specified. Make no repairs during this phase of testing unless authorized by the Government in writing. If the system experiences no failures during Phase I testing, the Contractor may proceed directly to Phase III testing after receipt of written permission from the Government.

c. Phase II Assessment: After the conclusion of Phase I, identify all failures, determine causes of all failures, repair all failures, and deliver a written report to the Government. The report shall explain in detail the nature of each failure, corrective action taken, results of tests performed, and shall recommend the point at which testing should be resumed. After delivering the written report, convene a test review meeting at the jobsite to present the results and recommendations to the Government. The meeting shall not be scheduled earlier than 5 business days after receipt of the report by the Government. As a part of this test review meeting, demonstrate that all failures have been corrected by performing appropriate portions of the performance verification test. Based on the Contractor's report and the test review meeting, the Government will determine the restart date, or may require that Phase I be repeated. If the retest is completed without any failures, the Contractor may proceed directly to Phase III testing after receipt of written permission from the Government.

d. Phase III Testing: The test shall be conducted 24 hours per day for 15 consecutive calendar days, including holidays, and the system shall operate as specified. Make no repairs during this phase of testing unless authorized by the Government in writing.

e. Phase IV Assessment: After the conclusion of Phase III, identify all failures, determine causes of failures, repair failures, and deliver a written report to the Government. The report shall explain in detail the nature of each failure, corrective action taken, results of tests performed, and shall recommend the point at which testing should be resumed. After delivering the written report, convene a test review meeting at the jobsite to present the results and recommendations to the Government. The meeting shall not be scheduled earlier than 5 business days after receipt of the report by the Government. As a part of this test review meeting, demonstrate that all failures have been corrected by repeating appropriate portions of the performance verification test. Based on the Contractor's report and the test review meeting, the Government will determine the restart date, and may require that Phase III be repeated. Do not commence any required retesting until after receipt of written notification by Government. After the conclusion of any retesting which the Government may require, the Phase IV assessment shall be repeated as if Phase III had just been completed.

f. Exclusions: The Contractor will not be held responsible for failures in system performance resulting from the following:

(1) An outage of the main power in excess of the capability of any backup power source, provided that the automatic initiation of all backup sources was accomplished and that automatic shutdown and restart of the ESS performed as specified.

(2) Failure of a Government furnished communications circuit,

SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 50


provided that the failure was not due to Contractor furnished equipment, installation, or software.

(3) Failure of existing Government owned equipment, provided that the failure was not due to Contractor furnished equipment, installation, or software.

(4) The occurrence of specified nuisance alarms.

(5) The occurrence of specified environmental alarms.


SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 51


SECTION 28 31 76

INTERIOR FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM11/08

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, applies to this section, with the additions and modifications specified herein. In addition, refer to the following sections for related work and coordination:

Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMSSection 21 13 13.00 10 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, FIRE PROTECTION Section 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE for door release and additional work related to finish hardware.

Section 14 24 00 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS for additional work related to elevators.

Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING for additional work related to firestopping.

1.2 REFERENCES


ACOUSTICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA (ASA)

ASA S3.2 (1989; R 1999) Method for Measuring the Intelligibility of Speech Over Communication Systems (ASA 85)

ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)

ASME A17.1 (2007) Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators

FM GLOBAL (FM)

FM P7825a (2005) Approval Guide Fire Protection






INTERNATIONAL ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMISSION (IEC)

IEC 60268-16 (2003) Sound System Equipment - Part 16: Objective Rating Of Speech Intelligibility By Speech Transmission Index

INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION (ISO)

ISO 7240-16 (2007) Fire Detection And Alarm Systems — Part 16: Sound System Control And Indicating Equipment


NFPA 170 (2005) Fire Safety Symbols

NFPA 241 (2004) Safeguarding Construction,Alteration, and Demolition Operations


NFPA 72 (2006) National Fire Alarm Code

NFPA 90A (2008) Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems


UL 1480 (2003; Rev thru Dec 2006); Standard for Safety Speakers for Fire Alarm, Emergency, and Commercial and Professional Use

UL 1638 (2001; Rev thru Oct 2008) Visual Signaling Appliances - Private Mode Emergency and General Utility Signaling

UL 1971 (2002; Rev thru May 2006) Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired

UL 2017 (2000; Rev thru Aug 2005) Standard for Safety for General-Purpose Signaling Devices and Systems

UL 228 (2006) Door Closers-Holders, With or Without Integral Smoke Detectors

UL 268 (2006) Standard for Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Signaling Systems

UL 268A (1998; Rev thru Apr 2006) Smoke Detectors for Duct Application

UL 464 (2003; Rev thru Feb 2008) Standard for Audible Signal Appliances

UL 521 (1999; Rev thru Jul 2005) Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems



UL 864 (2003; Rev thru May 2007) Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems

UL Electrical Constructn (2008) Electrical Construction Equipment Directory

UL Fire Prot Dir (2008) Fire Protection Equipment Directory

1.3 DEFINITIONS

Wherever mentioned in this specification or on the drawings, the equipment, devices, and functions shall be defined as follows:

a. Analog/Addressable System: A system where multiple signals are transmitted via the same conduction path to a remote fire alarm control unit and fire alarm control panel, decoded and separated so that each signal will initiate the specified response.

b. Hard Wired System: A system where alarm and supervisory initiating devices are directly connected, through individual dedicated conductors, to a central control panel without the use of analog/addressable circuits or devices.

c. Interface Device: An addressable device that interconnects hard wired systems or devices to an analog/addressable system.

d. Remote Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Control Unit: A control panel, electronically remote from the fire alarm and mass notification control panel, that receives inputs from automatic and manual fire alarm devices; may supply power to detection devices and interface devices; may provide transfer of power to the notification appliances; may provide transfer of condition to relays or devices connected to the control unit; and reports to and receives signals from the fire alarm control panel.

e. Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Control Panel (FACP/FMCP): A master control panel having the features of a fire alarm and mass notification control unit and fire alarm and mass notification control units are interconnected. The panel has central processing, memory, input and output terminals, and printers.

f. Terminal Cabinet: A steel cabinet with locking, hinge-mounted door that terminal strips are securely mounted.


1.4.1 Scope

a. This work includes completion of design and providing a new, complete, analog/addressable fire alarm and mass notification system as described herein and on the contract drawings. Include in the system wiring, raceways, pull boxes, terminal cabinets, outlet and mounting boxes, control equipment, alarm, and supervisory signal initiating devices, alarm notification appliances, supervising station fire alarm system transmitter, and other accessories and miscellaneous items required for a complete operating system even though each item is not specifically mentioned or described. Provide systems complete and ready for operation.



b. Provide equipment, materials, installation, workmanship, inspection, and testing in strict accordance with the required and advisory provisions of NFPA 72, ISO 7240-16, IEC 60268-16, except as modified herein. The system layouts on the drawings show the intent of coverage and are shown in suggested locations. Final quantity, system layout, and coordination are the responsibility of the Contractor.

c. Where remote fire alarm control units are needed, they shall be provided at a terminal cabinet location. Each remote fire alarm control unit shall be powered from a wiring riser specifically for that use or from a local emergency power panel located on the same floor as the remote fire alarm control unit. Where remote fire control units are provided, equipment for notification appliances may be located in the remote fire alarm control units.

1.4.2 Technical Data and Computer Software

Technical data and computer software (meaning technical data that relates to computer software) that are specifically identified in this project, and may be defined/required in other specifications, shall be delivered, strictly in accordance with the CONTRACT CLAUSES. Identify data delivered by reference to the particular specification paragraph against which it is furnished. Data to be submitted shall include complete system, equipment, and software descriptions. Descriptions shall show how the equipment will operate as a system to meet the performance requirements of this contract. The data package shall also include the following:

a. Identification of programmable portions of system equipment and capabilities.

b. Description of system revision and expansion capabilities and methods of implementation detailing both equipment and software requirements.

c. Provision of operational software data on all modes of programmable portions of the fire alarm and detection system.

d. Description of Fire Alarm Control Panel equipment operation.

e. Description of auxiliary and remote equipment operations.

f. Library of application software.

g. Operation and maintenance manuals.

1.4.3 Keys

Keys and locks for equipment shall be identical. Provide not less than six keys of each type required. All keys and locks shall be mastered to a single key as required by the local AHJ.

1.5 SUBMITTALS




SD-02 Shop Drawings

Annotated catalog data, in table format on the drawings, showing manufacturer's name, model, voltage, and catalog numbers for equipment and components. Submitted shop drawings shall not be smaller than ISO A1.

Wiring Diagrams; G, AE

Point-to-point wiring diagrams showing the points of connection and terminals used for electrical field connections in the system, including interconnections between the equipment or systems that are supervised or controlled by the system. Diagrams shall show connections from field devices to the FACP and remote fire alarm control units, initiating circuits, switches, relays and terminals.

Complete riser diagrams indicating the wiring sequence of devices and their connections to the control equipment. Include a color code schedule for the wiring. Include floor plans showing the locations of devices and equipment.

System Layout; G, AE

Plan view drawing showing device locations, terminal cabinet locations, junction boxes, other related equipment, conduit routing, wire counts, circuit identification in each conduit, and circuit layouts for all floors. Drawings shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 170, Fire Safety Symbols.

System Operation; G, AE

A complete list of device addresses and corresponding messages.

Notification Appliances; G, AE

Data on each circuit to indicate that there is at least 25 percent spare capacity for notification appliances, 25 percent spare capacity for initiating devices. Annotate data for each circuit on the drawings.

Amplifiers; G, AE

Data to indicate that the amplifiers have sufficient capacity to simultaneously drive all notification speakers at the maximum rating plus 50 percent spare capacity. Annotate data for each circuit on the drawings.

As-Constructed Drawings

Prepare and submit to the contracting officer six sets of detailed as-constructed drawings. Furnish one set of CD or DVD discs containing software back-up and CAD based drawings in latest version of MicroStation and DXF format of as-constructed drawings and schematics. The drawings shall include complete wiring diagrams showing connections between devices and equipment, both factory and field wired. Include a riser diagram and drawings showing the as-constructed location of devices and equipment. The drawings shall show the system as installed, including deviations



from both the project drawings and the approved shop drawings. These drawings shall be submitted within two weeks after the final acceptance test of the system. At least one set of as-constructed (marked-up) drawings shall be provided at the time of, or prior to the final acceptance test.

SD-03 Product Data

UL or FM listing cards for equipment provided.

Technical Data And Computer Software; G, AEFire Alarm And Mass Notification Control Panel (FACP/FMCP); GPrinters; G, AETerminal cabinets/assemblies; G, AEManual stations; G, AEBatteries; G, AEBattery chargers; G, AESmoke sensors; G, AEThermal sensors; G, AEWiring and cable; G, AENotification appliances; G, AEAddressable interface devices; G, AEAmplifiers; G, AETone generators; G, AEDigitalized voice generators; G, AEWaterflow detectors; G, AETamper switches; G, AEElectromagnetic door holders; G, AERemote fire alarm control units; G, AEDigital alarm communicator transmitter (DACT); G, AE

SD-05 Design Data

System Operation; G, AE

A complete description of the system operation in matrix format on the drawings.

Battery power; G, AE

Battery calculations as required in paragraph Battery Power Calculations.

SD-06 Test Reports

Field Quality ControlTesting Procedures; G, AESmoke sensor testing procedures; G, AE

SD-07 Certificates

Installer


Mass Notification System

A unique identifier for each device, including the control panel and initiating and indicating devices, with an indication of test



results, and signature of the factory-trained technician of the control panel manufacturer and equipment installer. With reports on preliminary tests, include printer information. Include the NFPA 72 Record of Completion and NFPA 72 Inspection and Testing Form, with the appropriate test reports.


Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Instructions; G

Six copies of the Operation and Maintenance Instructions, indexed and in booklet form. The Operation and Maintenance Instructions shall be a single volume or in separate volumes, and may be submitted as a Technical Data Package. Manuals shall be approved prior to training.

Original and backup copies of all software delivered for this project, on each type of CD/DVD media utilized.

Instruction of Government Employees

The installers training history for the employees involved with this contract.


1.6.1 Qualifications

1.6.1.1 Design Services

Installations requiring completion of installation drawings and specification or modifications of fire detection, fire alarm, mass notification system, fire suppression systems or mass notification systems shall require the services and review of a qualified engineer. For the purposes of meeting this requirement, a qualified engineer is defined as an individual meeting one of the following conditions:

a. A registered professional engineer having a Bachelor of Science or Masters of Science Degree in Fire Protection Engineering from an accredited university engineering program, plus a minimum of four years work experience in fire protection engineering.

b. A registered professional engineer (P.E.) in fire protection engineering.

c. Registered Professional Engineer with verification of experience and at least four years of current experience in the design of the fire protection and detection systems.

d. A NICET Level 4 Fire Alarm Technicians.

1.6.1.2 Supervisor

The installing Contractor shall provide the following: NICET Fire Alarm Technicians to perform the installation of the system. A NICET Level 4 Fire Alarm Technician shall supervise the installation of the fire alarm system/mass notification system. The Fire Alarm technicians supervising the installation of equipment shall be factory trained in the installation, adjustment, testing, and operation of the equipment specified herein and on



the drawings.

1.6.1.3 Technician

The installing Contractor shall provide the following: Fire Alarm Technicians with a minimum of four years of experience utilized to assist in the installation and terminate fire alarm/mass notification devices, cabinets and panels. The Fire Alarm technicians installing the equipment shall be factory trained in the installation, adjustment, testing, and operation of the equipment specified herein and on the drawings.

1.6.1.4 Installer

The installing Contractor shall provide the following: Fire Alarm installer with a minimum of two years of experience utilized to assist in the installation of fire alarm/mass notification devices, cabinets and panels. An electrician shall be allowed to install wire or cable and to install conduit for the fire alarm system/mass notification system. The Fire Alarm installer shall be factory trained in the installation, adjustment, testing, and operation of the equipment specified herein and on the drawings.

1.6.1.5 Test Personnel

The installing Contractor shall provide the following: Fire Alarm Technicians with a minimum of eight years of experience utilized to test and certify the installation of the fire alarm/mass notification devices, cabinets and panels. The Fire Alarm technicians testing the equipment shall be factory trained in the installation, adjustment, testing, and operation of the equipment specified herein and on the drawings.

1.6.1.6 Manufacturer's Representative

The fire alarm and mass notification equipment manufacturer's representative shall be present for the connection of wiring to the control panel. The Manufacturer's Representative shall be an employee of the manufacturer with necessary technical training on the system being installed.

1.6.1.7 Manufacturer

Components shall be of current design and shall be in regular and recurrent production at the time of installation. Provide design, materials, and devices for a protected premises fire alarm system, complete, conforming to NFPA 72, except as otherwise or additionally specified herein.


1.6.2.1 Requirements for Fire Protection Service

Equipment and material shall have been tested by UL and listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or approved by FM and listed in FM P7825a. Where the terms "listed" or "approved" appear in this specification, they shall mean listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or FM P7825a. The omission of these terms under the description of any item of equipment described shall not be construed as waiving this requirement. All listings or approval by testing laboratories shall be from an existing ANSI or UL published standard.



1.6.2.2 Mass Notification System

The equipment furnished shall be compatible and be UL listed, FM approved, or approved or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory for the intended use. All listings or approval by testing laboratories shall be from an existing ANSI or UL published standard.

1.6.2.3 Testing Services or Laboratories

Fire alarm and fire detection equipment shall be constructed in accordance with UL Fire Prot Dir, UL Electrical Constructn, or FM P7825a.


Protect equipment delivered and placed in storage from the weather, humidity, and temperature variation, dirt and dust, and other contaminants.

1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) INSTRUCTIONS

The Interior Fire Alarm And Mass Notification System Operation and Maintenance Instructions shall include:

a. "Manufacturer Data Package 5" as specified in Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.

b. Operating manual outlining step-by-step procedures required for system startup, operation, and shutdown. The manual shall include the manufacturer's name, model number, service manual, parts list, and complete description of equipment and their basic operating features.

c. Maintenance manual listing routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and troubleshooting guide. The manuals shall include conduit layout, equipment layout and simplified wiring, and control diagrams of the system as installed.

d. The manuals shall include complete procedures for system revision and expansion, detailing both equipment and software requirements.

e. Software delivered for this project shall be provided, on each type of CD/DVD media utilized.

f. Printouts of configuration settings for all devices.

g. Routine maintenance checklist. The routine maintenance checklist shall be arranged in a columnar format. The first column shall list all installed devices, the second column shall state the maintenance activity or state no maintenance required, the third column shall state the frequency of the maintenance activity, and the fourth column for additional comments or reference.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

1.9.1 Repair Service/Replacement Parts

Repair services and replacement parts for the system shall be available for a period of 10 years after the date of final acceptance of this work by the Contracting Officer. During guarantee period, the service technician shall be on-site within 24 hours after notification. All repairs shall be completed within 24 hours of arrival on-site.



1.9.2 Interchangeable Parts

Spare parts furnished shall be directly interchangeable with the corresponding components of the installed system. Spare parts shall be suitably packaged and identified by nameplate, tagging, or stamping. Spare parts shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer at the time of the final acceptance testing.

1.9.3 Spare Parts

Furnish the following spare parts and accessories:

a. Four fuses for each fused circuit

b. Nine spare reams of paper for the system printer, plus sufficient paper for fire alarm acceptance tests

c. Three spare printer ribbons

1.9.4 Special Tools

Software, connecting cables and proprietary equipment, necessary for the maintenance, testing, and reprogramming of the equipment shall be furnished to the Contracting Officer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS



Provide materials, equipment, and devices that have been tested by a nationally recognized testing laboratory, such as UL or FM, and listed or approved for fire protection service when so required by NFPA 72 or this specification. Select material from one manufacturer, where possible, and not a combination of manufacturers, for any particular classification of materials. Material and equipment shall be the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products for at least two years prior to bid opening.

2.1.2 Nameplates

Major components of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address, type or style, model or serial number, catalog number, date of installation, installing Contractor's name and address, and the contract number provided on a new plate permanently affixed to the item or equipment. Major components include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. FACPs

b. Automatic transmitter

c. Printer

Furnish nameplates to obtain approval by the Contracting Officer before installation. Obtain approval by the Contracting Officer for installation locations. Nameplates shall be etched metal or plastic, permanently attached by screws to panels or adjacent walls.



2.2 GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENT

All fire alarm and mass notification equipment shall be listed for use under the applicable reference standards. Interfacing of Listed UL 864 or similar approved industry listing with Mass Notification Panels listed to UL 2017 or equal shall be done in a laboratory listed configuration, if the software programming features can not provide a listed interface control. If a field modification is needed, such as adding equipment like relays, the manufacturer of the panels being same or different brand from manufacturer shall provide the installing contractor for review and confirmation by the installing contractor. The installing contractor shall, as part of the submittal documents, provide this information.

2.3 SYSTEM OPERATION

The Addressable Interior Fire Alarm and Mass Notification System shall be a complete, supervised, noncoded, analog/addressable fire alarm and mass notification system conforming to NFPA 72, UL 864 Ninth Edition, and UL 2017. The system shall be activated into the alarm mode by actuation of any alarm initiating device. The system shall remain in the alarm mode until the initiating device is reset and the fire alarm control panel is reset and restored to normal. The system may be placed in the alert mode by local microphones or remotely from authorized locations/users.

2.3.1 Alarm Initiating Devices

Connect alarm initiating devices to signal line circuits (SLC), Style 6 and installed in accordance with NFPA 72. The system shall have an interconnected riser loop or network having Style 6 supervision for interconnection of other FA/MNS control panels.

a. Alarm notification appliances shall be connected to notification appliance circuits (NAC) and Voice Notification System, Style Z in accordance with NFPA 72. A looped conduit system shall be provided so that if the conduit and all conductors within are severed or exposed to fire at any point, all IDC, NAC and SLC will remain functional. Should the design or building layout preclude separation then a fire rated separation shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 72. The return portion of the loop shall be remote from the supply portion of the loop.

b. The system shall operate in the alarm mode upon actuation of any alarm initiating device. The system shall remain in the alarm mode until initiating device(s) are reset and the fire alarm control panel is manually reset and restored to normal. The conduit loop requirement is not applicable to the signal transmission link from the local panels (at the protected premises) to the Supervising Station (fire station, fire alarm central communication center). Audible, and visual appliances and systems shall comply with NFPA 72. Fire alarm system/mass notification system components requiring power, except for the control panel power supply, shall operate on 24 Volts dc.

2.3.2 Functions and Operating Features

The system shall provide the following functions and operating features:

a. The FACP/FMCP and fire alarm and mass notification control units, if used, shall provide power, annunciation, supervision, and control for the system. Addressable systems shall be microcomputer



(microprocessor or microcontroller) based with a minimum word size of eight bits with sufficient memory to perform as specified.

b. Provide Style 6 signaling line circuits for each floor.

c. Provide Style 6 signaling line circuits for the network.

d. Provide Style Z notification appliance circuits. The visual alarm notification appliances shall have the flash rates synchronized.

e. Provide electrical supervision of the primary power (AC) supply, presence of the battery, battery voltage, and placement of system modules within the control panel.

f. Provide an audible and visual trouble signal to activate upon a single break or open condition, or ground fault. The trouble signal shall also operate upon loss of primary power (AC) supply, absence of a battery supply, low battery voltage, or removal of alarm or supervisory panel modules. Provide a trouble alarm silence feature that shall silence the audible trouble signal, without affecting the visual indicator. After the system returns to normal operating conditions, the trouble signal shall again sound until the trouble is acknowledged. A smoke sensor in the process of being verified for the actual presence of smoke shall not initiate a trouble condition.

g. Provide a notification appliance silencing switch, that when activated, will silence the audible signal appliance, but will not affect the visual alarm indicator, the liquid crystal display, or the automatic notification of the central station service. This switch shall be overridden upon activation of a subsequent alarm.

h. Provide alarm verification capability for smoke sensors. Alarm verification shall initially be set for 30 seconds.

i. Provide program capability via switches in a locked portion of the FACP to bypass the automatic notification appliance circuits, fire reporting system, air handler shutdown, elevator recall, and door release features. Operation of this programming shall indicate this action on the FACP display and printer output.

j. Alarm, supervisory, and/or trouble signals shall be automatically transmitted to the a UL listed central station.

k. Alarm functions shall override trouble or supervisory functions. Supervisory functions shall override trouble functions.

l. The system shall be capable of being programmed from the panels keyboard. Programmed information shall be stored in non-volatile memory.

m. The system shall be capable of operating, supervising, and/or monitoring both addressable and non-addressable alarm and supervisory devices.

n. There shall be no limit, other than maximum system capacity, as to the number of addressable devices, that may be in alarm simultaneously.

o. Where the fire alarm system is responsible for initiating an action in another emergency control device or system, such as an HVAC system



or an elevator system, the addressable fire alarm relay shall be within 3 feet of the emergency control device.

p. An alarm signal shall automatically initiate the following functions:

(1) Transmission of an alarm signal to a UL listed central station.

(2) Visual indication of the device operated on the fire alarm control panel (FACP), and on the remote annunciator. Indication on the remote annunciator shall be by building, zone or circuit, and type of device.

(3) Continuous actuation of all alarm notification appliances in the building of origin, except those in stairs or in elevator cabs.

(4) Recording of the event via the system printer and electronically in the history log of the fire control system unit.

(5) Release of doors held open by electromagnetic devices.

(6) Operation of a smoke sensor in an elevator lobby or other location associated with the automatic recall of elevators, shall recall the elevators in addition to other requirements of this paragraph.

(7) Operation of a duct smoke sensor shall shut down the appropriate air handler in accordance with NFPA 90A in addition to other requirements of this paragraph.

(8) Operation of a sprinkler waterflow switch serving an elevator machinery room or elevator shaft shall operate shunt trip circuit breaker(s) to shut down power to the elevators in accordance with ASME A17.1.

q. A supervisory signal shall automatically initiate the following functions:

(1) Visual indication of the device operated on the FACP, and remote annunciator, and sound the audible alarm at the respective panel.

(2) Transmission of a supervisory signal to a UL listed central station.

(3) Recording of the event via the system printer and electronically in the history log of the fire control system unit.

r. A trouble condition shall automatically initiate the following functions:

(1) Visual indication of the system trouble on the FACP and remote annunciator, and sound the audible alarm at the respective panel.

(2) Transmission of a trouble signal to a UL listed central station.

(3) Recording of the event via the system printer.



s. The maximum permissible elapsed time between the actuation of an initiating device and its indication at the FACP shall be 10 seconds.

t. The maximum elapsed time between the occurrence of the trouble condition and its indication at the FACP shall not exceed 200 seconds.

2.4 SYSTEM MONITORING

2.4.1 Valves

Each valve affecting the proper operation of a fire protection system, including automatic sprinkler control valves, standpipe control valves, sprinkler service entrance valve, valves at fire pumps, isolating valves for pressure type waterflow or supervision switches, and valves at backflow preventers, whether supplied under this contract or existing, shall be electrically monitored to ensure its proper position. Each tamper switch shall be provided with a separate address, unless they are within the same room, then a maximum of five can use the same address.

2.4.2 Independent Fire Detection System

Each existing independent smoke detection subsystem, and kitchen fire extinguishing system shall be monitored both for the presence of an alarm condition and for a trouble condition. Each monitored condition shall be provided with a separate address.

2.5 MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM FUNCTIONS

2.5.1 Notification Appliance Network

The notification appliance network consists of audio speakers located to provide intelligible instructions at all locations in the building and exterior areas as indicated on the drawings. The Mass Notification System announcements shall take priority over all other function of the system including the audible and visual output of the fire alarm system in a normal or alarm state. All fire alarm system functions shall continue in an alarm state except for the output signals of the audible and visual notification appliances.

2.5.2 Strobes

Strobes are also provided to alert hearing-impaired occupants.

2.5.3 Text Displays

LED text displays for hearing impaired occupants.

2.5.4 Door Operation

Closure of doors held open by electromagnetic devices.

2.5.5 Voice Notification

An autonomous voice notification control unit is used to monitor and control the notification appliance network and provide consoles for local operation. Using a console, personnel in the building can initiate delivery of pre-recorded voice messages, provide live voice messages and instructions, and initiate visual strobe and (optional) textual message



notification appliances. The autonomous voice notification control unit will temporarily override audible fire alarm notification while delivering Mass Notification messages to ensure they are intelligible.

2.6 OVERVOLTAGE AND SURGE PROTECTION

2.6.1 Signaling Line Circuit Surge Protection

For systems having circuits located outdoors, communications equipment shall be protected against surges induced on any signaling line circuit and shall comply with the applicable requirements of IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2. Cables and conductors, that serve as communications links, shall have surge protection circuits installed at each end that meet the following waveform(s):

a. A 10 microsecond by 1000 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of 1500 volts and a peak current of 60 amperes.

b. An 8 microsecond by 20 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of 1000 volts and a peak current of 500 amperes. Protection shall be provided at the equipment. Additional triple electrode gas surge protectors, rated for the application, shall be installed on each wireline circuit within 3 feet of the building cable entrance. Fuses shall not be used for surge protection.

2.6.2 Sensor Wiring Surge Protection

Digital and analog inputs and outputs shall be protected against surges induced by sensor wiring installed outdoors and as shown. The inputs and outputs shall be tested with the following waveforms:

a. A 10 by 1000 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of 1500 volts and a peak current of 60 amperes.

b. An 8 by 20 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of 1000 volts and a peak current of 500 amperes. Fuses shall not be used for surge protection.

2.7 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICES

The initiating device being monitored shall be configured as a Style B initiating device circuits. The system shall be capable of defining any module as an alarm module and report alarm trouble, loss of polling, or as a supervisory module, and reporting supervisory short, supervisory open or loss of polling such as waterflow switches, valve supervisory switches, fire pump monitoring, independent smoke detection systems, relays for output function actuation, etc. The module shall be UL or FM listed as compatible with the control panel. The monitor module shall provide address setting means compatible with the control panel's SLC supervision and store an internal identifying code. Monitor module shall contain an integral LED that flashes each time the monitor module is polled. Pull stations with a monitor module in a common backbox are not required to have an LED.

2.8 ADDRESSABLE CONTROL MODULE

The control module shall be capable of operating as a relay (dry contact form C) for interfacing the control panel with other systems, and to control door holders or initiate elevator fire service. The module shall



be UL or FM listed as compatible with the control panel. The indicating device or the external load being controlled shall be configured as a Style Y notification appliance circuits. The system shall be capable of supervising, audible, visual and dry contact circuits. The control module shall have both an input and output address. The supervision shall detect a short on the supervised circuit and shall prevent power from being applied to the circuit. The control model shall provide address setting means compatible with the control panel's SLC supervision and store an internal identifying code. The control module shall contain an integral LED that flashes each time the control module is polled. Control Modules shall be located in environmental areas that reflect the conditions to which they were listed.

2.9 SMOKE SENSORS

2.9.1 Photoelectric Smoke Sensors

Provide addressable photoelectric smoke sensors as follows:

a. Provide analog/addressable photoelectric smoke sensors utilizing the photoelectric light scattering principle for operation in accordance with UL 268. Smoke sensors shall be listed for use with the fire alarm control panel.

b. Provide self-restoring type sensors that do not require any readjustment after actuation at the FACP to restore them to normal operation. Sensors shall be UL listed as smoke-automatic fire sensors.

c. Components shall be rust and corrosion resistant. Vibration shall have no effect on the sensor's operation. Protect the detection chamber with a fine mesh metallic screen that prevents the entrance of insects or airborne materials. The screen shall not inhibit the movement of smoke particles into the chamber.

d. Provide twist lock bases for the sensors. The sensors shall maintain contact with their bases without the use of springs. Provide companion mounting base with screw terminals for each conductor. Terminate field wiring on the screw terminals. The sensor shall have a visual indicator to show actuation.

e. The sensor address shall identify the particular unit, its location within the system, and its sensitivity setting. Sensors shall be of the low voltage type rated for use on a 24 VDC system.

f. An operator at the control panel, having a proper access level, shall have the capability to manually access the following information for each initiating device.

(1) Primary status

(2) Device type

(3) Present average value

(4) Present sensitivity selected

(5) Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.)



2.9.2 Duct Smoke Sensors

Duct-mounted photoelectric smoke detectors shall be furnished and installed where indicated and in accordance with NFPA 90A. Units shall consist of a smoke detector as specified in paragraph Photoelectric Detectors, mounted in a special housing fitted with duct sampling tubes. Detector circuitry shall be mounted in a metallic enclosure exterior to the duct. Detectors shall have a manual reset. Detectors shall be rated for air velocities that include air flows between 500 and 4000 fpm. Detectors shall be powered from the fire alarm panel.

a. Sampling tubes shall run the full width of the duct. The duct detector package shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 90A, UL 268A, and shall be UL listed for use in air-handling systems. The control functions, operation, reset, and bypass shall be controlled from the fire alarm control panel.

b. Lights to indicate the operation and alarm condition; and the test and reset buttons shall be visible and accessible with the unit installed and the cover in place. Detectors mounted above 6 feet and those mounted below 6 feet that cannot be easily accessed while standing on the floor, shall be provided with a remote detector indicator panel containing test and reset switches.

c. Remote lamps and switches as well as the affected fan units shall be properly identified in etched plastic placards. Detectors shall provide for control of auxiliary contacts that provide control, interlock, and shutdown functions specified in Section 23 09 23 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC AND OTHER LOCAL BUILDING SYSTEMS. Auxiliary contacts provide for this function shall be located within 3 feet of the controlled circuit or appliance. The detectors shall be supplied by the fire alarm system manufacturer to ensure complete system compatibility.

2.9.3 Smoke Sensor Testing

Smoke sensors shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 72 and manufacturer's recommended calibrated test method. Submit smoke sensor testing procedures for approval.

2.10 THERMAL SENSORS

2.10.1 Heat Detectors

Heat detectors shall be designed for detection of fire by combination fixed temperature and rate-of-rise principle. The alarm condition shall be determined by comparing sensor valve with the stored values. Heat detector spacing shall be rated in accordance with UL 521. Detectors located in areas subject to moisture, exterior atmospheric conditions, or hazardous locations as defined by NFPA 70 and as shown on drawings, shall be types approved for such locations.

2.10.1.1 Combination Fixed-Temperature and Rate-of-Rise Detectors

Detectors shall be designed for surface outlet box mounting and supported independently of wiring connections. Contacts shall be self-resetting after response to rate-of-rise principle. Under fixed temperature actuation, the detector shall have a permanent external indication that is readily visible. Detector units located in boiler rooms, showers, or other



areas subject to abnormal temperature changes shall operate on fixed temperature principle only. The UL 521 test rating for the fixed temperature portion shall be 135 degrees F. The UL 521 test rating for the Rate-of-Rise detectors shall be rated for 50 by 50 feet.

2.10.2 Heat Sensing

A moving average of the sensors heat sensing value to automatically compensate for conditions that could affect detection operations. System shall automatically maintain a constant heat sensing sensitivity from each sensor by compensating for environmental factors.

2.10.3 Self-Test Routines

Automatic self-test routines shall be performed on each sensor that will functionally check sensor sensitivity electronics and ensure the accuracy of the value being transmitted. Any sensor that fails this test shall indicate a trouble condition with the sensor location at the control panel.

2.10.4 Operator Access

An operator at the control panel, having the proper access level, shall have the capability to manually access the following information for each heat sensor:

a. Primary status

b. Device type

c. Present average value

d. Sensor range

2.10.5 Operator Control

An operator at the control panel, having the proper access level, shall have the capability to manually control the following information for each heat sensor:

a. Alarm detection sensitivity values

b. Enable or disable the point/device

c. Control sensors relay driver output

2.11 ELECTRIC POWER

2.11.1 Primary Power

Power shall be 120 VAC service for the FACP from the normal AC service to the building.

2.12 EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY

Provide for system operation in the event of primary power source failure. Transfer from normal to auxiliary (secondary) power or restoration from auxiliary to normal power shall be automatic and shall not cause transmission of a false alarm.



2.12.1 Batteries

Provide sealed, maintenance-free, sealed lead acid batteries as the source for emergency power to the FACP. Batteries shall contain suspended electrolyte. The battery system shall be maintained in a fully charged condition by means of a solid state battery charger. Provide an automatic transfer switch to transfer the load to the batteries in the event of the failure of primary power.

2.12.1.1 Capacity

Provide the batteries with sufficient capacity to operate the system under supervisory and trouble conditions, including audible trouble signal devices for 48 hours and audible and visual signal devices under alarm conditions for an additional 15 minutes.

2.12.1.2 Battery Power Calculations

a. Verify that battery capacity exceeds supervisory and alarm power requirements.

1). Substantiate the battery calculations for alarm, alert, and supervisory power requirements. Ampere-hour requirements for each system component and each panel component, and the battery-recharging period shall be included.

2). Provide complete battery calculations for both the alarm, alert, and supervisory power requirements. Ampere-hour requirements for each system component shall be submitted with the calculations.

3). A voltage drop calculation to indicate that sufficient voltage is available for proper operation of the system and all components, at the minimum rated voltage of the system operating on batteries.

b. For battery calculations use the following assumptions: Assume a starting voltage of 24 VDC for starting the calculations to size the batteries. Calculate the required Amp-Hours for the specified standby time, and then calculate the required Amp-Hours for the specified alarm time. Calculate the nominal battery voltage after operation on batteries for the specified time period. Using this voltage perform a voltage drop calculation for circuit containing device and/or appliances remote from the power sources.

2.12.2 Battery Chargers

Provide a solid state, fully automatic, variable charging rate battery charger. The charger shall be capable of providing 150 percent of the connected system load and shall maintain the batteries at full charge. In the event the batteries are fully discharged (18 Volts dc), the charger shall recharge the batteries back to 95 percent of full charge within 48 hours. Provide pilot light to indicate when batteries are manually placed on a high rate of charge as part of the unit assembly if a high rate switch is provided.

2.13 FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION CONTROL PANEL (FACP/FMCP)

Provide a complete control panel fully enclosed in a lockable steel



enclosure as specified herein. Operations required for testing or for normal care and maintenance of the systems shall be performed from the front of the enclosure.

a. Each control unit shall provide power, supervision, control, and logic for the entire system, utilizing solid state, modular components, internally mounted and arranged for easy access. Each control unit shall be suitable for operation on a 120 volt, 60 hertz, normal building power supply. Provide each panel with supervisory functions for power failure, internal component placement, and operation.

b. Visual indication of alarm, supervisory, or trouble initiation on the fire alarm control panel shall be by liquid crystal display or similar means with a minimum of 80 characters, that at least 32 are field changeable. The MNS Control panel shall have the capability of temporarily deactivate the fire alarm audible notification appliances while delivering voice messages. Provide conductor integrity monitoring for strobe, display, temporary deactivation of fire alarm audible notification appliances and speaker wiring.

c. Provide separate secure local operator consoles (LOC) where indicated for initiating recorded messages, strobes and displays; and for delivering live voice messages. Provide capacity for at least four pre-recorded messages. Provide the ability to automatically repeat pre-recorded messages. Provide a secure microphone for delivering live messages. Provide adequate discrete outputs to temporarily deactivate fire alarm audible notification, and initiate/synchronize strobes. Provide a complete set of self-diagnostics for controller and appliance network. Provide local diagnostic information display and local diagnostic information and system event log file.

2.13.1 Cabinet

Install control panel components in cabinets large enough to accommodate all components and also to allow ample gutter space for interconnection of panels as well as field wiring. The enclosure shall be identified by an engraved laminated phenolic resin nameplate. Lettering on the nameplate shall say "Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Control Panel" and shall not be less than one inch high. Provide prominent rigid plastic or metal identification plates for lamps, circuits, meters, fuses, and switches. The cabinet shall be provided in a sturdy steel housing, complete with back box, hinged steel door with cylinder lock, and surface mounting provisions.

2.13.2 Control Modules

Provide power and control modules to perform all functions of the FACP. Provide audible signals to indicate any alarm, supervisory, or trouble condition. The alarm signals shall be different from the trouble signal. Connect circuit conductors entering or leaving the panel to screw-type terminals with each terminal marked for identification. Locate diodes and relays, if any, on screw terminals in the FACP. Circuits operating at 24 VDC shall not operate at less than 21.6 volts. Circuits operating at any other voltage shall not have a voltage drop exceeding 10 percent of nominal voltage.

2.13.3 Silencing Switches

a. Alarm Silencing Switch: Provide an alarm silencing switch at the FACP that shall silence the audible signal but not affect the visual



alarm indicator. This switch shall be overridden upon activation of a subsequent alarm.

b. Supervisory/Trouble Silencing Switch: Provide supervisory and trouble silencing switch that shall silence the audible trouble and supervisory signal, but not extinguish the visual indicator. This switch shall be overridden upon activation of a subsequent alarm, supervision, or trouble condition. Audible trouble indication must resound automatically every 24 hours after the silencing feature has been operated.

2.13.4 Non-Interfering

Power and supervise each circuit such that a signal from one device does not prevent the receipt of signals from any other device. Circuits shall be manually reset by switch from the FACP after the initiating device or devices have been restored to normal.

2.13.5 Voice Notification System

The Voice Notification System shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 72 for Emergency Voice/Alarm Communications System requirements ISO 7240-16, IEC 60268-16, except as specified herein. The system shall be a one-way multi-channel voice notification system incorporating user selectability of a minimum 8 distinct sounds for tone signaling, and the incorporation of a voice module for delivery of prerecorded messages. Textual audible appliances shall produce a slow whoop tone for three cycles followed by a voice message that is repeated until the control panel is reset or silenced. Automatic messages shall be broadcast through speakers on appropriate floors, but not in stairs or elevator cabs. The visual strobes and audible message shall automatically be broadcast on the floor of fire alarm origin. A live voice message shall override the automatic audible output through use of a microphone input at the control panel.

a. When using the microphone, live messages shall be broadcast through speakers throughout the Training Center, OMS Building, Unheated Storage Building, covered Wash Bay, and exterior speakers. The system shall be capable of operating all speakers at the same time. The Voice Notification System shall support Public Address (PA) paging for the facility. The digitalized voice message shall consist of a non-volatile (EPROM) microprocessor based input to the amplifiers. The microprocessor shall actively interrogate circuitry, field wiring, and digital coding necessary for the immediate and accurate rebroadcasting of the stored voice data into the appropriate amplifier input. Loss of operating power, supervisory power, or any other malfunction that could render the digitalized voice module inoperative shall automatically cause the slow whoop tone to take over all functions assigned to the failed unit.

b. The Mass Notification functions shall override the manual or automatic fire alarm notification or Public Address (PA) functions. The system shall have the capability of utilizing a remote microphone station (Local Operating Console) with redundant controls of the notification system control panel. Class "A" Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) shall be provided for the activation of strobe appliances. The activation of the NAC Circuits shall follow the operation of the speaker NAC circuits. Audio output shall be selectable for line level (600 ohms), 25, 70.7 or 100 volt output. The audio amplifier outputs shall be not greater than 100 watts RMS



output. The strobe NAC Circuits shall provide at least 2 amps of 24 VDC power to operate strobes and have the ability to synchronize all strobes. A hand held microphone shall be provided and, upon activation, shall take priority over any tone signal, recorded message or PA microphone operation in progress, while maintaining the strobe NAC Circuits activation.

All outputs and operational modules shall be fully supervised with on-board diagnostics and trouble reporting circuits. Form "C" contacts shall be provided for system alarm and trouble conditions. Circuits shall be provided for operation of auxiliary appliance during trouble conditions. During a Mass Notification event the panel shall not generate nor cause any trouble alarms to be generated with the Fire Alarm system. The Control Panel for the Voice Notification System shall be independent of the Fire alarm system and shall be capable of autonomous operation. Mass Notification functions shall take precedence over all other function performed by the Voice Notification System. Messages shall utilize a male voice and shall be similar to the following:

1) 1000 Hz tones (1 sec on, 1/2 second off, 1 second on, 1/2 second off, 1 second on)

"May I have your attention, please. May I have your attention, please. A fire has been reported in the building. Please walk to the nearest exit and evacuate the building. Do not use the elevator." (Provide a 2 second pause.) "May I have your attention, please, (repeat the message)."


"Alert! This is the Mass Notification System.There is an emergency situation.DO NOT evacuate the building! Stay in your current location!Stay tuned for further instructions."(repeat message 2 times)


"Alert, This is the Mass Notification System.There is a chemical gas emergency.Turn off all HVAC equipment, seal all doors and windows with wet fabric, Don protective gear.DO NOT evacuate the building, Act now!Listen to the MNS system for further instructions".(repeat message 2 times)


"Alert, this is the Mass Notification System.There is a explosive blast risk along the South wall of your building.Quietly move towards the north side of the building, and exit from the north stairs.Move away from the building heading north to the north parking area.(repeat message 2 times).



a. The Remote Microphone station shall incorporate a Push-To-Talk (PTT) microphone, redundant controls and system status indicators of/for the system. The LOC (Local Operator Console) unit shall incorporate microphone override of any tone generation or prerecorded messages. The unit shall be fully supervised from the control panel. The housing shall contain a lock that is keyed identical to the fire alarm system for the building.

b. Auxiliary Input Module shall be designed to be an outboard expansion module to either expand the number of optional remote microphone stations, or allow a telephone interface.

c. Remote Microphone station (PA), part of each Local Operating Console (LOC), shall incorporate a Push-To-Talk (PTT) microphone, and controls to allow Public Address paging in the facility. The Public Address paging function shall not override any alarm or notification functions. The microphone shall be handheld style. Provide pushbuttons and indicating lights for a minimum of five pre-recorded messages, the same messages provide as part of par. 2.13.5 Voice Notification System. In addition, provide one button with indicating light for manual operation of the mass notification system using the local operating console push-to-talk microphone. Manual operation of the mass notification system also shall operate mass notification strobes. Provide one pushbutton and indicating light for general public address use of the mass notification voice system using the local operating console push-to-talk microphone. General paging shall not cause mass notification strobes to indicate and shall cause an alert tone different than mass notification or fire alarm system evacuation alert tones.

2.13.6 Memory

Provide each control unit with non-volatile memory and logic for all functions. The use of long life batteries, capacitors, or other age-dependent devices shall not be considered as equal to non-volatile processors, PROMS, or EPROMS.

2.13.7 Field Programmability

Provide control units and control panels that are fully field programmable for control, initiation, notification, supervisory, and trouble functions of both input and output. The system program configuration shall be menu driven. System changes shall be password protected and shall be accomplished using personal computer based equipment. Any proprietary equipment and proprietary software needed by qualified technicians to implement future changes to the fire alarm system shall be provided as part of this contract.

2.13.8 Input/Output Modifications

The FACP shall contain features that allow the bypassing of input devices from the system or the modification of system outputs. These control features shall consist of a panel mounted keypad. Any bypass or modification to the system shall indicate a trouble condition on the FACP and a printed output of the trouble condition.



2.13.9 Resetting

Provide the necessary controls to prevent the resetting of any alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal while the alarm, supervisory or trouble condition on the system still exists.

2.13.10 Instructions

Provide a typeset printed or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a Lexan plastic or glass cover in a stainless steel or aluminum frame. Install the instructions on the interior of the FACP. The card shall show those steps to be taken by an operator when a signal is received as well as the functional operation of the system under all conditions, normal, alarm, supervisory, and trouble. The instructions shall be approved by the Contracting Officer before being posted.

2.13.11 Walk Test

The FACP shall have a walk test feature. When using this feature, operation of initiating devices shall result in limited system outputs, so that the notification appliances operate for only a few seconds and the event is indicated on the system printer, but no other outputs occur.

2.13.12 History Logging

In addition to the required printer output, the control panel shall have the ability to store a minimum of 400 events in a log. These events shall be stored in a battery-protected memory and shall remain in the memory until the memory is downloaded or cleared manually. Resetting of the control panel shall not clear the memory.

2.13.13 RS-232-C Output

Each local control panel shall be capable of operating remote service type cathode ray tubes (CRTs), printers, and/or modems. The output shall be paralleled ASCII from an EIA RS-232-C connection with a baud rate of 1200 or 2400 to allow use of any commonly available CRT, printer, or modem.

2.13.14 Remote LED Text Display

An LED text display shall be provided at locations as shown on the drawings. The LED text display shall be at least 2 lines with a minimum of 20 characters per line. The size shall not exceed 16 inches length by 6 inches height by 3 inches deep. The text display shall as a minimum meet the following requirements:

a. Two lines of information for high priority messaging.

b. Minimum of 20 characters per line (40 total) displayed.

c. Text shall be no less than 1/2 inch in height and readable from 1 foot to 20 feet away.

d. 32K character memory.

e. RS232 or RS485 serial interface included.

f. Display shall be wall or ceiling mounted.



g. Mounting brackets for a convenient wall/cubicle mount.

h. During non-emergency periods, date and time shall be displayed.

i. All programming shall be accomplished from the Mass Notification network. No user programming shall be required.

An LED text display shall be provided at locations as shown on the drawings. The LED text display shall have minimum character size of 4-inches high and shall spell out the words "EVACUATE" and "ANNOUNCEMENT". The design of LED text display shall be such that it cannot be read when not illuminated. The LED text display shall be capable of being wall or ceiling mounted.

2.14 REMOTE FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNITS

Provide complete remote control units fully enclosed in a lockable steel enclosure as specified herein. Operations required for testing or for normal care and maintenance of the control units shall be performed from the front of the enclosure. If more than a single unit is required at a location to form a complete control panel, the unit enclosures shall match exactly. Each control unit shall provide power, supervision, control, and logic for its portion of the entire system, utilizing solid state, modular components, internally mounted and arranged for easy access. Each control unit shall be suitable for operation on a 120 volt, 60 hertz, normal building power supply. Provide each unit with supervisory functions for power failure, internal component placement, and operation.

2.14.1 Cabinet

Install remote control unit components in cabinets large enough to accommodate components and also to allow ample gutter space for interconnection of units as well as field wiring. The enclosure shall be identified by an engraved laminated phenolic resin nameplate. Lettering on the nameplate shall be labeled "Remote Fire Alarm Control Unit" and shall not be less than one inch high. Provide prominent rigid plastic or metal identification plates for lamps, circuits, meters, fuses, and switches. The cabinet shall be provided in a sturdy steel housing, complete with back box, hinged steel door with cylinder lock, and surface mounting provisions.

2.14.2 Control Modules

Provide power and control modules to perform all functions of the remote control unit. Provide audible signals to indicate any alarm or trouble condition. The alarm signals shall be different from the trouble signal. Connect circuit conductors entering or leaving the panel to screw-type terminals with each terminal marked for identification. Locate diodes and relays, if any, on screw terminals in the remote control unit. Circuits operating at 24 VDC shall not operate at less than 21.6 volts. Circuits operating at any other voltage shall not have a voltage drop exceeding 10 percent of nominal voltage. Circuits shall be arranged so that there is 25 percent spare capacity for any circuit.

2.14.3 Silencing Switches

Provide an alarm silencing switch at the remote control unit that shall silence the audible signal but not affect the visual alarm indicator. This switch shall be overridden upon activation of a subsequent alarm. Provide trouble and supervisory silencing switch that shall silence the audible



trouble and supervisory signal, but not extinguish the visual indicator. This switch shall be overridden upon activation of a subsequent trouble or supervisory signal. Audible trouble indication must resound automatically every 24 hours after the silencing feature has been operated.

2.14.4 Non-Interfering

Power and supervise each circuit such that a signal from one device does not prevent the receipt of signals from any other device. Circuits shall be manually resettable by switch from the remote control unit after the initiating device or devices have been restored to normal.

2.14.5 Memory

Provide each control unit with non-volatile memory and logic for all functions. The use of long life batteries, capacitors, or other age-dependent devices shall not be considered as equal to non-volatile processors, PROMS, or EPROMS.

2.14.6 Field Programmability

Provide control units that are fully field programmable for control, initiating, supervisory, and trouble functions of both input and output. The system program configuration shall be menu driven. System changes shall be password protected and shall be accomplished using personal computer based equipment. Any proprietary equipment and proprietary software needed by qualified technicians to implement future changes to the fire alarm system shall be provided as part of this contract.

2.14.7 Input/Output Modifications

Each remote control unit shall contain features that allow the elimination of input devices from the system or the modification of system outputs. Any such modifications shall indicate a trouble condition on the remote control unit, the FACP, and a printed output of the trouble condition.

2.14.8 Resetting

Provide the necessary controls to prevent the resetting of any alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal while the alarm, supervisory, or trouble condition on the system still exists.

2.14.9 Instructions

Provide a typeset printed or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a Lexan plastic or glass cover in a stainless steel or aluminum frame. Install the frame in a conspicuous location observable from the remote fire alarm control unit. The card shall show those steps to be taken by an operator when a signal is received as well as the functional operation of the system under all conditions, normal, alarm, supervisory, and trouble. The instructions shall be approved by the Contracting Officer before being posted.

2.14.10 Walk Test

Each remote control unit shall have a walk test feature. When using this feature, operation of initiating devices shall result in limited system outputs, so that the notification appliances operate for only a few seconds and the event is indicated on the system printer, but no other outputs



occur.

2.14.11 History Logging

In addition to the required printer output, the control panel shall have the ability to store a minimum of 400 events in a log. These events shall be stored in a battery-protected memory and shall remain in the memory until the memory is downloaded or cleared manually. Resetting of the control panel shall not clear the memory.

2.15 AMPLIFIERS, PREAMPLIFIERS, TONE GENERATORS

Any amplifiers, preamplifiers, tone generators, digitalized voice generators, and other hardware necessary for a complete, operational, textual audible circuit conforming to NFPA 72 shall be housed in a fire alarm control unit, terminal cabinet, or in the fire alarm control panel. The system shall automatically operate and control all building fire alarm speakers except those installed in the stairs and within elevator cabs. The speakers in the stairs and elevator cabs shall operate only when the microphone is used to deliver live messages. Each amplifier shall be single output channel.

2.15.1 Construction

Amplifiers shall utilize computer grade solid state components and shall be provided with output protection devices sufficient to protect the amplifier against any transient up to 10 times the highest rated voltage in the system.

2.15.2 Inputs

Each system shall be equipped with separate inputs from the tone generator, digitalized voice driver and panel mounted microphone. Microphone inputs shall be of the low impedance, balanced line type. Both microphone and tone generator input shall be operational on any amplifier.

2.15.3 Tone Generator

The tone generator shall be of the modular, plug-in type with securely attached labels to identify the component as a tone generator and to identify the specific tone it produces. The tone generator shall produce a slow whoop tone, that shall slowly ascend from low (500 hertz) to high (1200 hertz), and shall be constantly repeated until interrupted by either the digitalized voice message, the microphone input, or the alarm silence mode as specified. Each slow whoop cycle shall last approximately 4 seconds. The tone generator shall be single channel with an automatic backup generator per channel such that failure of the primary tone generator causes the backup generator to automatically take over the functions of the failed unit and also causes transfer of the common trouble relay.

2.15.4 Protection Circuits

Each amplifier shall be constantly supervised for any condition that could render the amplifier inoperable at its maximum output. Failure of any component shall cause automatic transfer to a designated backup amplifier, illumination of a visual "amplifier trouble" indicator on the control panel, appropriate logging of the condition on the system printer, and other actions for trouble conditions as specified.



2.16 SYSTEM PRINTERS

a. Provide a system printer to record alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions without loss of any signal or signals. Printout shall be by circuit, device, and function as provided in the FACP. Printer shall operate on a 120 VAC, 60 Hz power supply. The printer shall have at least 80 characters per line and have a 96 ASCII character set. The printer shall have a microprocessor-controlled, bi-directional, logic seeking head capable of printing 120 characters per second. Printer shall not contain internal software that is essential for proper operation.

b. When the FACP receives a signal, the alarm, supervisory, and trouble condition shall be printed. The printout shall include the type of signal, the circuit or device reporting, the date, and the time of the occurrence. The printer shall differentiate alarm signals from other printed indications. When the system is reset, this condition shall also be printed including the same information concerning device, location, date, and time. Provide a means to automatically print a list of existing alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions in the system. If a printer is off-line when an alarm is received, the system shall have a buffer to retain the data and it shall be printed when the printer is restored to service. The printer shall have an indicator to alert the operator that the paper has run out.

2.17 MANUAL STATIONS

Provide metal or plastic, semi-flush mounted, double action, addressable manual stations, that are not subject to operation by jarring or vibration. Stations shall be equipped with screw terminals for each conductor. Stations that require the replacement of any portion of the device after activation are not permitted. Stations shall be finished in fire-engine red with molded raised lettering operating instructions of contrasting color. The use of a key or wrench shall be required to reset the station. Stations shall have a separate screw terminal for each conductor.

2.18 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

2.18.1 Fire Alarm/Mass Notification Speakers

Audible appliances shall conform to the applicable requirements of UL 464. Appliances shall be connected into notification appliance circuits. Audible appliances shall generate a unique audible sound from other devices provided in the building and surrounding area. Surface mounted audible appliances shall be painted white. Recessed audible appliances shall be installed with a grill that is painted white.

a. Speakers shall conform to the applicable requirements of UL 1480. Speakers shall have six different sound output levels and operate with audio line input levels of 100 Vac, 70 Vac, 7 Vac, and 25 Vac, by means of selectable tap settings. Tap settings shall include taps of 1/4, 1/2, 1, 2, and 8 watt. Speakers shall incorporate a high efficiency speaker for maximum output at minimum power across a frequency range of 400Hz to 4000Hz, and shall have a sealed back construction. Speakers shall be capable of installation on standard 4 inch square electrical boxes. Where speakers and strobes are provided in the same location, they may be combined into a single wall mounted unit. All inputs shall be polarized for compatibility with standard reverse polarity



supervision of circuit wiring via the Fire Alarm Control Panel or Voice Notification System.

b. Provide speaker mounting plates constructed of cold rolled steel having a minimum thickness of 16 gauge and equipped with mounting holes and other openings as needed for a complete installation. Fabrication marks and holes shall be ground and finished to provide a smooth and neat appearance for each plate. Each plate shall be primed and painted.

2.18.2 Visual Notification Appliances

Visual notification appliances shall conform to the applicable requirements of UL 1971 and conform to the Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA). Colored lens such as amber, the notifications appliances shall comply with UL 1638. The manufacturer shall have the color lens tests to the full UL 1971 polar plotting criteria, voltage drop, and temperature rise as stated in 1971. Fire Alarm Notification Appliances shall have clear high intensity optic lens, xenon flash tubes, and output white light and be marked "Fire" in red letters. Fire Alarm/Mass Notification Appliances shall have amber high intensity optic lens, xenon flash tubes, and output white light and be marked "ALERT" in red letters. The light pattern shall be disbursed so that it is visible above and below the strobe and from a 90 degree angle on both sides of the strobe. Strobe flash rate shall be 1 flash per second and a minimum of 15 candela (actual output after derating for tinted lens) based on the UL 1971 test. Strobe shall be semi-flush mounted. Where more than two appliances are located in the same room or corridor, provide synchronized operation.

2.18.3 Fire Alarm Horns

Provide surface mounted electronic multi-tone horns that produce a minimum of four distinct sounds, suitable for use in an electrically supervised circuit. Horns shall have a rating of 90 dBA at 10 feet when tested in accordance with UL 464 while emitting a slow whoop tone. Output from the horn shall be three-pulse temporal pattern. Where horns and strobes are provided in the same location, they may be combined into a single unit. Horns used in exterior locations shall be specifically listed or approved for outdoor use and be provided with metal housing and protective grilles.

2.18.4 Fire Alarm Bells

Bells shall be surface mounted with the matching mounting back box surface mounted suitable for use in an electrically supervised circuit. Bells shall be suitable for use in an electrically supervised circuit. Bells shall be the underdome type producing a minimum output rating of 90 dBA at 10 feet. Bells used in exterior locations shall be specifically listed or approved for outdoor use and be provided with metal housing and protective grilles. Single stroke, electrically operated, supervised, solenoid bells shall be used for coded applications.

2.18.5 Connections

Provide screw terminals for each notification appliance. Terminals shall be designed to accept the size conductors used in this project without modification.

2.19 VALVE MONITOR SWITCHES (TAMPER SWITCHES)

Provide a tamper switch for each fire protection system control valve.



Tamper switches shall be UL listed as "Extinguishing System Attachment" for the location and type of valve supervised. The device shall contain double pole, double throw contacts. Operation of the switch shall cause a supervisory signal to be transmitted to the FACP upon not more than two complete turns of the valve wheel or a closure of 10 percent, whichever is less. Tamper switches shall be equipped with screw terminals for each conductor.

2.20 WATERFLOW DETECTORS

a. Provide vane type waterflow detectors for wet pipe sprinkler systems. The device shall contain double pole, double throw contacts. Equip the detector with a pneumatic time delay, field adjustable from 0 to 90 seconds. The time delay shall be set initially to 30 seconds. The device shall be a UL listed extinguishing system attachment rated for the particular pressure and location that it is installed. Flow switches shall be equipped with screw terminals for each conductor.

b. Provide pressure type waterflow detectors for dry pipe sprinkler systems, pre-action, and deluge systems. Switch shall be equipped with equipped to provide a time delay from 0 to 90 second. The device shall contain double pole, double throw contacts. The device shall be a UL listed extinguishing system attachment rated for the particular pressure and location that it is installed. Switch shall be equipped with screw terminals for each conductor.

2.21 ELECTROMAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS

Where indicated on the drawings, provide magnetic fire door hold open devices. The electromagnetic holding devices shall be designed to operate on 24 VDC, and require not more than 3 watts of power to develop 25 psi of holding force. Under normal conditions, the magnets shall attract and hold the doors open. The initiation of any fire alarm shall cause the release of the electromagnetic door holding device permitting the door to be closed by the door closer. Operation shall be fail safe with no moving parts. Electromagnetic door hold-open devices shall not be required to be held open during building power failure. The device shall be UL listed based on UL 228 tests.

2.22 INTERFACE

2.22.1 Fiber Optic

The fiber optic transceiver shall be fully compatible with EIA standards for RS-232, RS-422 and RS-485 at data rates from 0 (DC) to 2.1 mbps (200 kbps for RS-232) in the low speed mode or from 10 kbps to 10 mbps in the high-speed mode. The fiber optic transceiver shall be capable of simplex or full duplex asynchronous transmissions in both point-to-point systems and drop-and-repeat data networks. The fiber optic transceiver shall be user configurable for the protocol, speed and mode of operation required. The fiber optic transceiver shall be installed as a stand-alone or card-cage unit. The fiber optic transceiver shall operate on Single-mode fiber optic cable. The fiber optic transceiver shall be supplied with ST or FCPC type optical connectors. Cabling: as specified in Section 27 10 00 BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM.

2.22.2 Telephone

A modem shall be provide for communication with the Central



Control/Monitoring System. The modem shall be 56k, compatible with data mode V.90, utilizing Hayes compatible command codes. The modem shall be capable of Auto dialing a preset number based on preprogrammed events. The modem shall auto answer and provide a secure password protection system. Cabling: as specified in Section 27 10 00 BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM.

2.22.3 RS-232/RS-485

The panel shall support a direct connect via RS-232 or RS-485 connections.

2.23 AUTOMATIC FIRE TRANSMITTERS

2.23.1 Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter (DACT)

Provide DACT that is compatible with the existing supervising station fire alarm system. Transmitter shall have a means to transmit alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions via a single transmitter. Transmitter shall have a source of power for operation that conforms to NFPA 72. Transmitter shall be capable of initiating a test signal daily at any selected time. Transmitter shall be arranged to seize telephone circuits in accordance with NFPA 72.

2.23.2 Signals to Be Transmitted to the Central Monitoring Agency

The following signals shall be sent to the central monitoring agency:

a. Sprinkler water flow

b. Manual pull stations

c. Smoke detectors

d. Duct smoke detectors

e. Heat detectors

f. Sprinkler valve supervision

g. Fire pump running

h. Fire pump supervision

i. Water supply level and temperature

j. Combustion Engine Drive Fire Pump Running

(1) Selector Switch in position than automatic

(2) Engine Over-speed

(3) Low Fuel

(4) Low Battery

(5) Engine Trouble (Low Oil, Over temp, etc)



2.24 WIRING

Provide wiring materials under this section as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM with the additions and modifications specified herein.

2.24.1 Alarm Wiring

The SLC wiring shall be copper cable in accordance with the manufacturers requirements. Copper signaling line circuits and initiating device circuit field wiring shall be No. 16 AWG size conductors at a minimum. Notification appliance circuit conductors, that contain audible alarm devices, shall be solid copper No. 14 AWG size conductors at a minimum. Speaker circuits shall be copper No. 16 AWG size conductors at a minimum. Wire size shall be sufficient to prevent voltage drop problems. Circuits operating at 24 VDC shall not operate at less than 21.6 volts. Circuits operating at any other voltage shall not have a voltage drop exceeding 10 percent of nominal voltage. Power wiring, operating at 120 VAC minimum, shall be a minimum No. 12 AWG solid copper having similar insulation.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF FIRE ALARM INITIATING AND INDICATING DEVICES

a. FACP/FMCP: Locate one FACP/FMCP in the Training Center building and one FACP/FMCP in the OMS Building where indicated on the drawings. Surface mount the enclosure with the top of the cabinet 6 feet above the finished floor. Conductor terminations shall be labeled and a drawing containing conductors, their labels, their circuits, and their interconnection shall be permanently mounted in the FACP.

b. Manual Stations: Locate manual stations where shown on the drawings. Mount stations so they are located no farther than 5 feet from the exit door they serve, measured horizontally.

c. Notification Appliance Devices: Locate notification appliance devices where shown on the drawings. Mount assemblies on walls 90 inches above the finished floor or 6 inches below the ceiling whichever is lower. Ceiling mounted speakers shall conform to NFPA 72.

d. Smoke and Heat Sensors: Locate sensors as shown on the drawings on a 4 inch mounting box. Sensors located on the ceiling shall be installed not less than 4 inches from a side wall to the near edge. Those located on the wall shall have the top of the sensor at least 4 inches below the ceiling, but not more than 12 inches below the ceiling.

e. Remote Annunciator: Locate the remote annunciator as shown on the drawings. Recess mount the panel, with the top of the panel 6 feet above the finished floor or center the panel at 5 feet, whichever is lower.

f. Water Flow Detectors and Tamper Switches: Locate water flow detectors and tamper switches where shown on the drawings.

g. Locate the Local Operating Console (LOC) where indicated on plans.

h. The modification of any fire alarm system and the procedures shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 241.



3.2 SYSTEM FIELD WIRING

3.2.1 Wiring within Cabinets, Enclosures, and Boxes

Provide wiring installed in a neat and workmanlike manner and installed parallel with or at right angles to the sides and back of any box, enclosure, or cabinet. Conductors that are terminated, spliced, or otherwise interrupted in any enclosure, cabinet, mounting, or junction box shall be connected to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal in accordance with the wiring diagrams of the system. Make connections with approved pressure type terminal blocks, that are securely mounted. The use of wire nuts or similar devices shall be prohibited. Wiring shall conform to NFPA 70.

3.2.2 Terminal Cabinets

Provide a terminal cabinet at the base of any circuit riser, on each floor at each riser, and where indicated on the drawings. Terminal size shall be appropriate for the size of the wiring to be connected. Conductor terminations shall be labeled and a drawing containing conductors, their labels, their circuits, and their interconnection shall be permanently mounted in the terminal cabinet. Minimum size is 8 inches by 8 inches.

3.2.3 Alarm Wiring

Provide all wiring in rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit. Voltages shall not be mixed in any junction box, housing, or device, except those containing power supplies and control relays. Electrical metallic tubing conduit is acceptable in dry locations not enclosed in concrete or where not subject to mechanical damage. Conceal conduit in finished areas of new construction and wherever practicable in existing construction. The use of flexible conduit not exceeding a 6 foot length shall be permitted in initiating device circuits. Run conduit or tubing concealed unless specifically shown otherwise on the drawings. Shielded wiring shall be utilized where recommended by the manufacturer. For shielded wiring, the shield shall be grounded at only one point, that shall be in or adjacent to the FACP. Pigtail or T-tap connections to signal line circuits, initiating device circuits, supervisory alarm circuits, and notification appliance circuits are prohibited. Color coding is required for circuits and shall be maintained throughout the circuit. Conductors used for the same functions shall be similarly color coded. Wiring shall conform to NFPA 70.

3.2.4 Conductor Terminations

Labeling of conductors at terminal blocks in terminal cabinets, FACP, and remote fire alarm control units shall be provided at each conductor connection. Each conductor or cable shall have a shrink-wrap label to provide a unique and specific designation. Each terminal cabinet, FACP, and fire alarm control unit shall contain a laminated drawing that indicates each conductor, its label, circuit, and terminal. The laminated drawing shall be neat, using 12 point lettering minimum size, and mounted within each cabinet, panel, or unit so that it does not interfere with the wiring or terminals. Maintain existing color code scheme where connecting to existing equipment.

3.3 FIRESTOPPING

Provide firestopping for holes at conduit penetrations through floor slabs, fire rated walls, partitions with fire rated doors, corridor walls, and



vertical service shafts in accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.

3.4 PAINTING

Paint exposed electrical, fire alarm conduit, and surface metal raceway to match adjacent finishes in exposed areas. Paint junction boxes red in unfinished areas. Painting shall comply with Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.


3.5.1 Testing Procedures

Detailed test procedures, prepared and signed by a Registered Professional Engineer or a NICET Level 4 Fire Alarm Technician, and signed by representative of the installing company, for the fire detection and alarm system 60 days prior to performing system tests. Detailed test procedures shall list all components of the installed system such as initiating devices and circuits, notification appliances and circuits, signaling line devices and circuits, control devices/equipment, batteries, transmitting and receiving equipment, power sources/supply, annunciators, special hazard equipment, emergency communication equipment, interface equipment, and transient (surge) suppressors. Test procedures shall include sequence of testing, time estimate for each test, and sample test data forms. The test data forms shall be in a check-off format (pass/fail with space to add applicable test data) and shall be used for the preliminary testing and the acceptance testing. The test data forms shall record the test results and shall:

a. Identify the NFPA Class and Style of all Initiating Device Circuits (IDC), Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC), Voice Notification System, and Signaling Line Circuits (SLC).

b. Identify each test required by NFPA 72 Test Methods and required test herein to be performed on each component, and describe how this test shall be performed.

c. Identify each component and circuit as to type, location within the facility, and unique identity within the installed system. Provide necessary floor plan sheets showing each component location, test location, and alphanumeric identity.

d. Identify all test equipment and personnel required to perform each test (including equipment necessary for testing smoke detectors using real smoke).

e. Provide space to identify the date and time of each test. Provide space to identify the names and signatures of the individuals conducting and witnessing each test.

3.5.2 Tests Stages

a. Preliminary Testing: Conduct preliminary tests to ensure that devices and circuits are functioning properly. Tests shall meet the requirements of paragraph entitled "Minimum System Tests." After preliminary testing is complete, provide a letter certifying that the installation is complete and fully operable. The letter shall state that each initiating and indicating device was tested in place and functioned properly. The letter shall also state that panel functions



were tested and operated properly. The letter shall include the names and titles of the witnesses to the preliminary tests. The Contractor and an authorized representative from each supplier of equipment shall be in attendance at the preliminary testing to make necessary adjustments.

b. Request for Formal Inspection and Tests: When tests have been completed and corrections made, submit a signed, dated certificate with a request for formal inspection and tests to the Contracting Offices Designated Representative (COR).

c. Final Testing: Notify the Contracting Officer in writing when the system is ready for final acceptance testing. Submit request for test at least 15 calendar days prior to the test date. The tests shall be performed in accordance with the approved test procedures in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Furnish instruments and personnel required for the tests. A final acceptance test will not be scheduled until the operation and maintenance (O&M) manuals are furnished to the Contracting Officer and the following are provided at the job site:

(1) The systems manufacturer's technical representative

(2) Marked-up red line drawings of the system as actually installed

(3) Megger test results

(4) Loop resistance test results

(5) Complete program printout including input/output addresses

The final tests shall be witnessed by the Contracting Offices Designated Representative (COR). At this time, any and all required tests shall be repeated at their discretion. Following acceptance of the system, as-constructed drawings and O&M manuals shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer for review and acceptance.

3.5.3 Minimum System Tests

Test the system in accordance with the procedures outlined in NFPA 72, ISO 7240-16, IEC 60268-16. The required tests are as follows:

a. Megger Tests: After wiring has been installed, and prior to making any connections to panels or devices, wiring shall be megger tested for insulation resistance, grounds, and/or shorts. Conductors with 300 volt rated insulation shall be tested at a minimum of 250 VDC. Conductors with 600 volt rated insulation shall be tested at a minimum of 500 VDC. The tests shall be witnessed by the Contracting Officer and test results recorded for use at the final acceptance test.

b. Loop Resistance Tests: Measure and record the resistance of each circuit with each pair of conductors in the circuit short-circuited at the farthest point from the circuit origin. The tests shall be witnessed by the Contracting Officer and test results recorded for use at the final acceptance test.

c. Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and ground. The tests shall be accomplished at the preliminary test with results available at the final system test.



d. Verify that the control unit is in the normal condition as detailed in the manufacturer's O&M manual.

e. Test each initiating and indicating device and circuit for proper operation and response at the control unit. Smoke sensors shall be tested in accordance with manufacturer's recommended calibrated test method. Use of magnets is prohibited. Testing of duct smoke detectors shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 72.

f. Test the system for specified functions in accordance with the contract drawings and specifications and the manufacturer's O&M manual.

g. Test both primary power and secondary power. Verify, by test, the secondary power system is capable of operating the system for the time period and in the manner specified.

h. Determine that the system is operable under trouble conditions as specified.

i. Visually inspect wiring.

j. Test the battery charger and batteries.

k. Verify that software control and data files have been entered or programmed into the FACP. Hard copy records of the software shall be provided to the Contracting Officer.

l. Verify that red-line drawings are accurate.

m. Measure the current in circuits to ensure there is the calculated spare capacity for the circuits.

n. Measure voltage readings for circuits to ensure that voltage drop is not excessive.

o. Disconnect the verification feature for smoke sensors during tests to minimize the amount of smoke needed to activate the sensor. Testing of smoke sensors shall be conducted using real smoke. The use of canned smoke is prohibited.

p. Measure the voltage drop at the most remote appliance (based on wire length) on each notification appliance circuit.

q. Audibility Intelligibility testing of the Voice Evacuation Notification System shall be accomplished iaw NFPA 72 for Voice Evacuation Systems, IEC 60268-16, and ASA S3.2.

r. Opening the circuit at not less than all alarm initiating devices and notification appliances to test the wiring supervisory feature.

s. Demonstrate modem communications with remote sites as specified by the COR. Dial in capability shall also, be demonstrated, using specified security.

t. Demonstrate fiber optic communications with remote sites as specified by the COR. Dial in capability shall also, be demonstrated, using specified security.



3.6 INSTRUCTION OF GOVERNMENT EMPLOYEES

Equipment manufacturer shall provide 1 day of technical training to the Government. Training shall allow for classroom instruction as well as individual hands on programming, troubleshooting and diagnostics exercises.

3.6.1 Instructor

Include in the project the services of an instructor, who has received specific training from the manufacturer for the training of other persons regarding the inspection, testing, and maintenance of the system provided. The instructor shall train the Government employees designated by the Contracting Officer, in the care, adjustment, maintenance, and operation of the fire alarm system. Each instructor shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of this installation. The instructor shall be trained in operating theory as well as in practical O&M work.

3.6.2 Required Instruction Time

Provide 8 hours of instruction after final acceptance of the system. The instruction shall be given during regular working hours on such dates and times as are selected by the Contracting Officer. The instruction may be divided into two or more periods at the discretion of the Contracting Officer. The training shall allow for rescheduling for unforeseen maintenance and/or fire department responses.

3.6.3 Technical Data and Computer Software

Provide, in manual format, lesson plans, operating instructions, maintenance procedures, and training data for the training courses. The operations training shall familiarize designated government personnel with proper operation of the installed system. The maintenance training course shall provide the designated government personnel adequate knowledge required to diagnose, repair, maintain, and expand functions inherent to the system.




SECTION 31 00 00.00 06

EARTHWORK11/05

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



AASHTO T 180 (2001) Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54-kg (10-lb) Rammer and an 457-mm (18-in) Drop

AASHTO T 224 (2001) Correction for Coarse Particles in the Soil Compaction Test

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

ASTM C 136 (2001) Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates

ASTM C 33 (2003) Concrete Aggregates

AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION(AWWA)

AWWA C600 (1999) Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances


ASTM D 1140 (2000) Amount of Material in Soils Finer than the No. 200 (75-micrometer) Sieve

ASTM D 1556 (2000) Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method

ASTM D 1557 (2002) Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/cu. ft. (2,700 kN-m/cu.m.))

ASTM D 2487 (2000) Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System)

ASTM D 2922 (2001) Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)

ASTM D 3017 (2001) Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)



ASTM D 422 (1963; R 2002) Particle-Size Analysis of Soils

ASTM D 4318 (2000) Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils

1.1.1 State Specification

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION, adopted January 1, 2007, Illinois Department of Transportation. Hereafter referred to as the "ILDOT Specifications".

1.2 DEFINITIONS

1.2.1 Satisfactory Materials

Satisfactory materials shall comprise any materials classified by ASTM D 2487 as GW, GP, GM, GP-GM, GW-GM, GC, GP-GC, GM-GC, SW, SP, SW-SM, SC, SW-SC, SP-SM, SP-SC, CL, ML. Satisfactory materials for grading shall be comprised of stones less than 8 inches, except for fill material for pavements which shall be comprised of stones less than 3 inches in any dimension.

1.2.2 Unsatisfactory Materials

Materials which do not comply with the requirements for satisfactory materials are unsatisfactory. Unsatisfactory materials also include man-made fills; trash; refuse; backfills from previous construction; and material classified as satisfactory which contains root and other organic matter or frozen material. The Contracting Officer shall be notified of any contaminated materials.

1.2.3 Cohesionless and Cohesive Materials

Cohesionless materials include materials classified in ASTM D 2487 as GW, GP, SW, and SP. Cohesive materials include materials classified as GC, SC, ML, CL, MH, and CH. Materials classified as GM and SM will be identified as cohesionless only when the fines are nonplastic. Testing required for classifying materials shall be in accordance with ASTM D 4318, ASTM C 136, ASTM D 422, and ASTM D 1140.

1.2.4 Degree of Compaction

Degree of compaction required, except as noted in the second sentence, is expressed as a percentage of the maximum density obtained by the test procedure presented in ASTM D 1557 abbreviated as a percent of laboratory maximum density. Since ASTM D 1557 applies only to soils that have 30 percent or less by weight of their particles retained on the 3/4 inch sieve, the degree of compaction for material having more than 30 percent by weight of their particles retained on the 3/4 inch sieve shall be expressed as a percentage of the maximum density in accordance with AASHTO T 180 Method D and corrected with AASHTO T 224. To maintain the same percentage of coarse material, the "remove and replace" procedure as described in the NOTE 8 in Paragraph 7.2 of AASHTO T 180 shall be used.

1.2.5 Topsoil

Material suitable for topsoils obtained from offsite areas and excavations shall conform to the topsoil requirement as given in Section 32 92 12



SEEDING.

1.2.6 Unstable Material

Unstable material shall consist of materials too wet to properly support the utility pipe, conduit, or appurtenant structure.

1.2.7 Select Granular Material

1.2.7.1 General Requirements

Select granular material shall consist of materials classified as GW, GP, SW, SP, by ASTM D 2487 where indicated. The liquid limit of such material shall not exceed 35 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318. The plasticity index shall not be greater than 12 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318, and not more than 35 percent by weight shall be finer than No. 200 sieve when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1140. Place this material where indicated according to specified placement and compaction requirements for applied use when as given in Part 3 of this Section.

1.2.8 Initial Backfill Material

Initial backfill shall consist of select granular material or satisfactory materials free from rocks 3 inches or larger in any dimension or free from rocks of such size as recommended by the pipe manufacturer, whichever is smaller. When the pipe is coated or wrapped for corrosion protection, the initial backfill material shall be free of stones larger than 3 inches in any dimension or as recommended by the pipe manufacturer, whichever is smaller.

1.2.9 Expansive Soils

Expansive soils are defined as soils that have a plasticity index equal to or greater than 12 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318.

1.2.10 Nonfrost Susceptible (NFS) Material

Nonfrost susceptible material shall be a uniformly graded washed sand with a maximum particle size of 1 1/2 inch and less than 5 percent passing the No. 200 size sieve, and with not more than 3 percent by weight finer than 0.02 mm grain size. Place this material where radicated and according to the placement and compaction requirements for its applied use as given in Part 3 of this Section.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00.00 06 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals

Shoring

Dewatering Work Plan



Submit 15 days prior to starting work.

SD-03 Product Data

Utilization of Excavated Materials

Procedure and location for disposal of unused satisfactory material. Proposed source of borrow material. Notification of encountering rock in the project. Advance notice on the opening of excavation or borrow areas. Advance notice on shoulder construction for rigid pavements.

SD-06 Test Reports

TestingMaterial Source Testing

Within 24 hours of conclusion of physical tests, 4 copies of test results, including calibration curves and results of calibration tests. Results of testing at the borrow site.

SD-07 Certificates

Testing

Qualifications of the Corps' validated commercial testing laboratory or the Contractor's validated testing facilities.

1.4 SUBSURFACE DATA

Subsurface soil boring logs are appended to the SPECIAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS. The subsoil investigation report and samples of materials taken from subsurface investigations may be examined at G2 Consulting Group LLC, 830 Seton Court, No. 5, Wheeling, IL 60090, (847) 353-8740, G2 Project Number: 082425. These data represent the best subsurface information available; however, variations may exist in the subsurface between boring locations.

1.5 CLASSIFICATION OF EXCAVATION

No consideration will be given to the nature of the materials, and all excavation will be designated as unclassified excavation.

1.5.1 BLASTING

Blasting will not be permitted.

1.6 CRITERIA FOR BIDDING

Base bids on the following criteria:

a. Surface elevations are as indicated.

b. Pipes or other artificial obstructions, except those indicated, will not be encountered.

c. Ground water elevations indicated by the boring log were those existing at the time subsurface investigations were made and do not necessarily represent ground water elevation at the time of



construction.

d. Material character is indicated by the boring logs.

1.7 DEWATERING WORK PLAN

Submit procedures for accomplishing dewatering work. The Contractor is responsible to design the dewatering. The system and present calculations and plans to the Government supporting its construction. The Contractor is responsible to obtain required Local, State and Federal permits for the dewatering system, provide required plans and calculations and pay associated fees. The Contractor is responsible to comply with regulatory requirements for installation, operating, disposal of groundwater,

Submit procedures for accomplishing dewatering work.

1.8 CONTRACTOR'S PROFESSIONAL GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER

The Contractor is required to hire a Professional Geotechnical Engineer to provide inspection of excavations and soil/groundwater conditions and compliance with geotechnical and soil materials and placement requirements throughout construction. The Geotechnical Engineer shall be responsible implementing the Contractor's Geotechnical QC Plan and for performing pre-construction and periodic site visits throughout construction to conduct the geotechnical materials sampling and testing program and to assess site conditions. The Geotechnical Engineer shall provide updates to the soil materials and placement testing data and excavation, sheeting and dewatering plans as construction progresses to reflect changing conditions and shall submit plans if necessary. A writen report shall be submitted, at least monthly, informing the Contractor and Contracting Officer of the status of the plans and an accounting of the Contractor's adherence to the plans addresing any present or potential problems. The Geotechnical Engineer shall be available to meet with the Contracting Officer at any time throughout the contract duration. Reference made to sampling, testing and geotechnical observation in this Section shall be coordinated under the direct supervision of the Contractor's Professional Geotechnical Engineer. Subgrade suitability (via proof rolling), fill placement and compaction operations shall be observed and tested on a full time basis by a qualified independent testing agency as directed by the Contractor's Project Geotechnical Engineer. Foundation preparation shall be inspected and approved when compliant with the specifications by the contractors geotechnical engineer. The Geotechnical Engineer will also manage the sampling testing and geotechnical and pavement material quality control of the Contractor.

1.9 DISPOSAL

Off site disposal as applied herein requires loading, transportation, off loading and disposal at a site licensed or permitted according to Local, State and Federal regulations to dispose off or recycle or reuse materials being deposited at such facility. The Contractor is responsible for paying fees and complying with regulatory requirements associated with such disposal. Comply with the Waste Management Plan of requirements of Section 01 57 20.00 10 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR OFFSITE SOILS

Offsite soils brought in for use as backfill shall be free of contaminants, hazardous substances and deterious materials as defined by Federal, State and Local agency in addition to any such items as identified in these Specifications.

2.2 BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE

Polyethylene plastic and metallic core or metallic-faced, acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene plastic warning tape manufactured specifically for warning and identification of buried utility lines. Provide tape on rolls, 3 inch minimum width, color coded as specified below for the intended utility with warning and identification imprinted in bold black letters continuously over the entire tape length. Warning and identification to read, "CAUTION, BURIED (intended service) LINE BELOW" or similar wording. Color and printing shall be permanent, unaffected by moisture or soil.

Warning Tape Color Codes

Red: Electric Yellow: Natural Gas Orange: Telephone and Other Communications Blue: Water Systems Green: Sewer Systems

2.2.1 Warning Tape for Metallic Piping

Acid and alkali-resistant polyethylene plastic tape conforming to the width, color, and printing requirements specified above. Minimum thickness of tape shall be 0.003 inch. Tape shall have a minimum strength of 1500 psi lengthwise, and 1250 psi crosswise, with a maximum 350 percent elongation.

2.2.2 Detectable Warning Tape for Non-Metallic Piping

Polyethylene plastic tape conforming to the width, color, and printing requirements specified above. Minimum thickness of the tape shall be 0.004 inch. Tape shall have a minimum strength of 1500 psi lengthwise and 1250 psi crosswise. Tape shall be manufactured with integral wires, foil backing, or other means of enabling detection by a metal detector when tape is buried up to 3 feet deep. Encase metallic element of the tape in a protective jacket or provide with other means of corrosion protection.

2.3 DETECTION WIRE FOR NON-METALLIC PIPING

Detection wire shall be insulated single strand, solid copper with a minimum of 12 AWG.

2.4 MATERIAL FOR RIP-RAP

Provide Bedding material and rock conforming to Section 1005 "Stone and Broken Concrete for Erosion Protection Sediment Control; and Rockfill" of the ILDOT Specifications. Riprap and bedding shall be stone conforming to Paragraph 1005.01 and gradations RR1 for bedding and RR3 for rip-rap.



2.5 CAPILLARY WATER BARRIER

Capillary Water Barrier shall consist of clean, poorly graded crushed rock, crushed gravel, or uncrushed gravel placed beneath a building slab with or without a vapor barrier to cut off the capillary flow of pore water to the area immediately below. Fine aggregate grading shall conform to ASTM C 33 with a maximum of 3 percent by weight passing ASTM D 1140, No. 200 sieve, or 1-1/2 inches and no more than 2 percent by weight passing the No. 4 size sieve or coarse aggregate Size 57, 67, or 77.

2.6 PAVEMENT UNDERDRAINS

2.6.1 Aggregate

Conform to the requirements for materials and gradation CA-18 as given in Section 1004 "Coarse Aggregates" of the ILDOT Specifications.

2.6.2 Geotextile

Conform to the requirement of Paragraph 1080.05 of Section 1080 "Fabric Materials" of the ILDOT Specifications.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 STRIPPING OF TOPSOIL

Area of the site to be occupied by buildings, parking lots, roadways, and site surface features shall be stripped of topsoil to be full depth of its thickness. Topsoil that complies with the specified requirements for topsoil provided in these specifications shall be spread on areas already graded and prepared for topsoil, or transported and deposited in stockpiles convenient to areas that are to receive application of the topsoil later. Topsoil shall be kept from other excavated materials, brush, litter, objectionable weeds, roots, stones larger than 2 inches in diameter, and other materials that would interfere with planting and maintenance operations. Surplus of topsoil from excavations and grading shall be removed from the site or may be applied on site in set back areas that will not be subject to improvement consisting of facilities construction under this contract or future projects. Subject for approval by the Government.

3.2 GENERAL EXCAVATION

The Contractor shall perform excavation of every type of material encountered within the limits of the project to the lines, grades, and elevations indicated and as specified. Grading shall be in conformity with the typical sections shown and the tolerances specified in paragraph FINISHING. Satisfactory excavated materials shall be transported to and placed in fill or embankment within the limits of the work. Unsatisfactory materials encountered within the limits of the work shall be excavated below grade and replaced with satisfactory materials as directed. Such excavated material and the satisfactory material ordered as replacement shall be included in excavation. Surplus satisfactory excavated material not required for fill or embankment shall be disposed of in areas approved for surplus material storage or designated waste areas. Unsatisfactory excavated material shall be disposed of in designated waste or spoil areas. During construction, excavation and fill shall be performed in a manner and sequence that will provide proper drainage at all times. Material required for fill or embankment in excess of that produced by



excavation within the grading limits shall be excavated from the borrow areas indicated or from other approved areas selected by the Contractor as specified.

3.2.1 Ditches, Gutters, and Channel Changes

Excavation of ditches, gutters, and channel changes shall be accomplished by cutting accurately to the cross sections, grades, and elevations shown. Ditches and gutters shall not be excavated below grades shown. Excessive open ditch or gutter excavation shall be backfilled with satisfactory, thoroughly compacted, material or with suitable stone or cobble to grades shown. Material excavated shall be disposed of as shown or as directed, except that in no case shall material be deposited less than 4 feet from the edge of a ditch. The Contractor shall maintain excavations free from detrimental quantities of leaves, brush, sticks, trash, and other debris until final acceptance of the work.

3.2.2 Drainage Structures

Excavations shall be made to the lines, grades, and elevations shown, or as directed. Trenches and foundation pits shall be of sufficient size to permit the placement and removal of forms for the full length and width of structure footings and foundations as shown. Rock or other hard foundation material shall be cleaned of loose debris and cut to a firm, level, stepped, or serrated surface. Loose disintegrated rock and thin strata shall be removed. When concrete or masonry is to be placed in an excavated area, the bottom of the excavation shall not be disturbed. Excavation to the final grade level shall not be made until just before the concrete or masonry is to be placed. Where pile foundations are to be used, the excavation of each pit shall be stopped at an elevation 1 foot above the base of the footing, as specified, before piles are driven. After the pile driving has been completed, loose and displaced material shall be removed and excavation completed, leaving a smooth, solid, undisturbed surface to receive the concrete or masonry.

3.2.3 Drainage

Provide for the collection and disposal of surface and subsurface water encountered during construction. Completely drain construction site during periods of construction to keep soil materials sufficiently dry. The Contractor shall establish/construct storm drainage features (ponds/basins) at the earliest stages of site development, and throughout construction grade the construction area to provide positive surface water runoff away from the construction activity and/or provide temporary ditches, swales, and other drainage features and equipment as required to maintain dry soils. When unsuitable working platforms for equipment operation and unsuitable soil support for subsequent construction features develop, remove unsuitable material and provide new soil material as specified herein. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to assess the soil and ground water conditions presented by the plans and specifications and to employ necessary measures to permit construction to proceed.

3.2.4 Dewatering

Groundwater flowing toward or into excavations shall be controlled to prevent sloughing of excavation slopes and walls, boils, uplift and heave in the excavation and to eliminate interference with orderly progress of construction. French drains, sumps, ditches or trenches will not be permitted within 3 feet of the foundation of any structure, except with



specific written approval, and after specific contractual provisions for restoration of the foundation area have been made. Control measures shall be taken by the time the excavation reaches the water level in order to maintain the integrity of the in situ material. While the excavation is open, the water level shall be maintained continuously, at least 3 feet below the working level.

3.2.5 Trench Excavation Requirements

The trench shall be excavated as recommended by the manufacturer of the pipe to be installed. Trench walls below the top of the pipe shall be sloped, or made vertical, and of such width as recommended in the manufacturer's installation manual. Where no manufacturer's installation manual is available, trench walls shall be made vertical subject to the requirements herein. The Contractor is responsible for designing, constructing, and maintaining stable and safe trench wall slopes, sheeting, shoring and bracing as required by site soil, ground water, weather and trench size requirements in compliance with Local, State and Federal regulations. This work shall be accomplished by qualified professionals experienced in the design and construction of trenches.Special attention shall be given to slopes which may be adversely affected by weather or moisture content. The trench width below the top of pipe shall not exceed 24 inches plus pipe outside diameter (O.D.) for pipes of less than 24 inches inside diameter and shall not exceed 36 inches plus pipe outside diameter for sizes larger than 24 inches inside diameter. Where recommended trench widths are exceededm redesign, stronger pipe, or special installation procedures shall be utilized by the Contractor. the cost of redesign, stronger pipe, or special installation procedures shall be borne by the Contractor without any additional cost to the Government.

3.2.5.1 Bottom Preparation

The bottoms of trenches shall be accurately graded to provide uniform bearing and support for the bottom quadrant of each section of the pipe. Bell holes shall be excavated to the necessary size at each joint or coupling to eliminate point bearing. Stones of 3 inches or greater in any dimension, or as recommended by the pipe manufacturer, whichever is smaller, shall be removed to avoid point bearing.

3.2.5.2 Removal of Unstable Material

Where unstable material is encountered in the bottom of the trench, such material shall be removed to the depth directed and replaced to the proper grade with select granular material as provided in paragraph BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION. When removal of unstable material is required due to the Contractor's fault or neglect in performing the work, the resulting material shall be excavated and replaced by the Contractor without additional cost to the Government.

3.2.5.3 Excavation for Appurtenances

Excavation for manholes, catch-basins, inlets, or similar structures shall be of sufficient size to permit the placement and removal of forms for the full length and width of structure footings and foundations as shown. Rock shall be cleaned of loose debris and cut to a firm surface either level, stepped, or serrated, as shown or as directed. Loose disintegrated rock and thin strata shall be removed. Removal of unstable material shall be as specified above. When concrete or masonry is to be placed in an excavated area, special care shall be taken not to disturb the bottom of the



excavation. Excavation to the final grade level shall not be made until just before the concrete or masonry is to be placed.

3.2.5.4 Jacking, Boring, and Tunneling

Unless otherwise indicated, excavation shall be by open cut except that sections of a trench may be jacked, bored, or tunneled if, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer, the pipe, cable, or duct can be safely and properly installed and backfill can be properly compacted in such sections.

3.2.6 Underground Utilities

Movement of construction machinery and equipment over pipes and utilities during construction shall be at the Contractor's risk. Perform work adjacent to non-Government utilities as indicated in accordance with procedures outlined by utility company. Excavation made with power-driven equipment is not permitted within two feet of known Government-owned utility or subsurface construction. For work immediately adjacent to or for excavations exposing a utility or other buried obstruction, excavate by hand. Start hand excavation on each side of the indicated obstruction and continue until the obstruction is uncovered or until clearance for the new grade is assured. Support uncovered lines or other existing work affected by the contract excavation until approval for backfill is granted by the Contracting Officer. Report damage to utility lines or subsurface construction immediately to the Contracting Officer.

3.2.7 Structural Excavation

Ensure that footing subgrades have been inspected and approved by the Contractors professional geotechnical engineer prior to concrete placement.

3.3 SELECTION OF BORROW MATERIAL

Borrow material shall be selected to meet the requirements and conditions of the particular fill or embankment for which it is to be used. Borrow material shall be obtained from the borrow areas from approved off site commercial private sources. Unless otherwise provided in the contract, the Contractor shall obtain from the owners the right to procure material, pay royalties and other charges involved, and bear the expense of developing the sources, including rights-of-way for hauling.

3.4 SHORING


The Contractor shall submit a Shoring and Sheeting plan for approval 15 days prior to starting work. Submit drawings and calculations, certified by a registered professional engineer, describing the methods for shoring and sheeting of excavations. Shoring, including sheet piling, shall be furnished and installed as necessary to protect workmen, banks, adjacent paving, structures, and utilities. Shoring, bracing, and sheeting shall be removed as excavations are backfilled, in a manner to prevent caving.

3.4.2 Geotechnical Engineer

See Geotechnical Engineer Paragraph in Part 1 of this Section.



3.5 FINAL GRADE OF SURFACES TO SUPPORT CONCRETE

Excavation to final grade shall not be made until just before concrete is to be placed. Surface to support concrete shall be inspectioned and evaluated for compliance to the Specification by the Contractor's Professional Geotechnical Engineer prior to placing concrete.

3.6 GROUND SURFACE PREPARATION


Unsatisfactory material in surfaces to receive fill or in excavated areas shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory materials as directed by the Contracting Officer. The surface shall be scarified to a depth of 6 inches before the fill is started. Sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal shall be plowed, stepped, benched, or broken up so that the fill material will bond with the existing material. When subgrades are less than the specified density, the ground surface shall be broken up to a minimum depth of 6 inches, pulverized, and compacted to the specified density. When the subgrade is part fill and part excavation or natural ground, the excavated or natural ground portion shall be scarified to a depth of 12 inches and compacted as specified for the adjacent fill.

3.6.2 Frozen Material

Material shall not be placed on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost.

3.7 UTILIZATION OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS

Unsatisfactory materials removed from excavations shall be disposed of off site and the Government installation, according to the Waste Management plan. Satisfactory materials shall be reused if possible and palced and compacted in compliance with its applied use according to the provision herein.

3.8 BURIED TAPE AND DETECTION WIRE

3.8.1 Buried Warning and Identification Tape

Provide buried utility lines with utility identification tape. Bury tape 12 inches below finished grade; under pavements and slabs, bury tape 6 inches below top of subgrade.

3.8.2 Buried Detection Wire

Bury detection wire directly above non-metallic piping at a distance not to exceed 12 inches above the top of pipe. The wire shall extend continuously and unbroken, from manhole to manhole. The ends of the wire shall terminate inside the manholes at each end of the pipe, with a minimum of 3 feet of wire, coiled, remaining accessible in each manhole. The wire shall remain insulated over it's entire length. The wire shall enter manholes between the top of the corbel and the frame, and extend up through the chimney seal between the frame and the chimney seal. For force mains, the wire shall terminate in the valve pit at the pump station end of the pipe.

3.9 BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION

Backfill adjacent to any and all types of structures shall be placed and compacted between 85 and 90 percent laboratory maximum density for



cohesionless materials to prevent wedging action or eccentric loading upon or against the structure unless otherwise specified herein based on the applied service condition. Ground surface on which backfill is to be placed shall be prepared as specified in paragraph GROUND SURFACE PREPARATION. Compaction requirements for backfill materials shall also conform to the applicable portions of paragraphs EMBANKMENTS AND STRUCTURAL FILLS, and SUBGRADE PREPARATION, and Section 33 40 01 STORM DRAINAGE; and Section 31 00 00.00 06 EARTHWORK. Compaction shall be accomplished by sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic-tired rollers, steel-wheeled rollers, vibratory compactors, or other approved equipment.

3.9.1 Trench Backfill

Trenches shall be backfilled to the grade shown. The trench shall be backfilled to 4 feet above the top of pipe prior to performing the required pressure tests. The joints and couplings shall be left uncovered during the pressure test.

3.9.1.1 Replacement of Unstable Material

Unstable material removed from the bottom of the trench or excavation shall be replaced with select granular material placed in layers not exceeding 6 inches loose thickness.

3.9.1.2 Bedding and Initial Backfill

Bedding shall be of the thickness shown and conform to requirement of Paragraph 1004.05 of Section 1004 "Coarse Aggregates" of the ILDOT Specifications. Initial backfill material shall be placed and compacted with approved tampers to a height of at least one foot above the utility pipe or conduit. The backfill shall be brought up evenly on both sides of the pipe for the full length of the pipe. Care shall be taken to ensure thorough compaction of the fill under the haunches of the pipe. Except as specified otherwise in the individual piping section, provide bedding for buried piping in accordance with AWWA C600, Type 4, except as specified herein. Backfill to top of pipe shall be compacted to 95 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum density. Plastic piping shall have bedding to spring line of pipe.

3.9.1.3 Final Backfill

The remainder of the trench, except for special materials for roadways, railroads and airfields, shall be filled with satisfactory material unless otherwise indicated. Backfill material shall be placed and compacted as follows:

a. Roadways: Backfill shall be placed up to the required elevation as specified. Water flooding or jetting methods of compaction will not be permitted.

b. Sidewalks, Turfed or Seeded Areas and Miscellaneous Areas: Backfill shall be deposited in layers of a maximum of 12 inch loose thickness, and compacted to 85 percent maximum density for cohesive soils and 90 percent maximum density for cohesionless soils. Compaction by water flooding or jetting will not be permitted. This requirement shall also apply to all other areas not specifically designated above.



3.9.2 Backfill for Appurtenances

After the manhole, catchbasin, inlet, or similar structure has been constructed and the concrete has been allowed to cure for 7 days, backfill shall be placed in such a manner that the structure will not be damaged by the shock of falling earth. The backfill material shall be deposited and compacted as specified for final backfill, and shall be brought up evenly on all sides of the structure to prevent eccentric loading and excessive stress.

3.10 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

Special requirements for both excavation and backfill relating to the specific utilities are as follows:

3.10.1 Gas Distribution

Trenches shall be excavated to a depth that will provide not less than 24 inches of cover in other excavation. Trenches shall be graded as specified for pipe-laying requirements in Section 33 63 14 GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

3.10.2 Water Lines

Trenches shall be of a depth to provide a minimum cover of 5-1/2 feet from the existing ground surface, or from the indicated finished grade, whichever is lower, to the top of the pipe.

3.10.3 Electrical Distribution System

Direct burial cable and conduit or duct line shall have a minimum cover of 24 inches from the finished grade, unless otherwise indicated. Special trenching requirements for direct-burial electrical cables and conduits are specified in Section 33 71 02.00 20 UNDERGROUND TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION.

3.10.4 Rip-Rap Construction

Construct rip-rap in the areas indicated. Trim and dress indicated areas to conform to cross sections, lines and grades shown within a tolerance of 0.1 foot.

3.10.4.1 Bedding Placement

Spread bedding material uniformly to a thickness of at least 12 inches on prepared subgrade as indicated. Compaction of bedding is not required. Finish bedding to present even surface free from mounds and windrows.

3.10.4.2 Stone Placement

Place rock for rip-rap on prepared bedding material to produce a well graded mass with the minimum practicable percentage of voids in conformance with lines and grades indicated. Distribute larger rock fragments, with dimensions extending the full depth of the rip-rap throughout the entire mass and eliminate "pockets" of small rock fragments. Rearrange individual pieces by mechanical equipment or by hand as necessary to obtain the distribution of fragment sizes specified above.



3.11 EMBANKMENTS AND STRUCTURAL FILL

3.11.1 Earth Embankments

Earth embankments shall be constructed from satisfactory materials free of organic or frozen material and rocks with any dimension greater than 3 inches. The material shall be placed in successive horizontal layers of loose material not more than 8 inches in depth. Each layer shall be spread uniformly on a soil surface that has been moistened or aerated as necessary, and scarified or otherwise broken up so that the fill will bond with the surface on which it is placed. After spreading, each layer shall be plowed, disked, or otherwise broken up; moistened or aerated as necessary; thoroughly mixed; and compacted to at least 95 percent laboratory maximum density. Compaction requirements for the upper portion of earth embankments forming subgrade for pavements shall be identical with those requirements specified in paragraph SUBGRADE PREPARATION. Compaction shall be accomplished by sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic-tired rollers, steel-wheeled rollers, vibratory compactors, or other approved equipment.

3.11.2 Structural Fill

All structural fill placed to facilitate desired site grades shall be constructed from satisfactory material free of organic or frozen material and rocks with any dimension greater than 3 inches. The fill shall be placed in maximum 8 inch loose lifts and compacted to the following criteria. Beneath foundations: at least 95 percent laboratory maximum density as determined by the project geotechnical engineer; beneath concrete slabs and roads: at least 95 percent laboratory maximum density as determined by the geotechnical engineer; beneath landscape areas: at least 85 percent laboratory maximum density as determined by the geotechnical engineer.

3.12 SUBGRADE PREPARATION

3.12.1 Proof Rolling

Proof rolling shall be done on an exposed subgrade free of surface water (wet conditions resulting from rainfall) which would promote degradation of an otherwise acceptable subgrade. Proof roll the existing subgrade of the pavements and buildings with six passes of a dump truck loaded with 4 cubic yards of soil or 15 ton, pneumatic-tired roller. Operate the roller or truck in a systematic manner to ensure the number of passes over all areas, and at speeds between 2 1/2 to 3 1/2 mph. When proof rolling, one-half of the passes made with the roller shall be in a direction perpendicular to the other passes. Notify the Contracting Officer a minimum of 3 days prior to proof rolling. Proof rolling shall be performed in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Rutting or pumping of material shall be undercut to a depth of 24 inches and replaced with select granular material.

3.12.2 Construction

Subgrade shall be shaped to line, grade, and cross section, and compacted as specified. This operation shall include plowing, disking, and any moistening or aerating required to obtain specified compaction. Soft or otherwise unsatisfactory material shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory excavated material or other approved material as directed. Rock encountered in the cut section shall be excavated to a depth of 6 inches below finished grade for the subgrade. Low areas resulting from removal of unsatisfactory material or excavation of rock shall be brought



up to required grade with satisfactory materials, and the entire subgrade shall be shaped to line, grade, and cross section and compacted as specified. The elevation of the finish subgrade shall not vary more than 0.05 foot from the established grade and cross section.

3.12.3 Compaction

Compaction shall be accomplished by sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic-tired rollers, steel-wheeled rollers, vibratory compactors, or other approved equipment. Except for paved areas each layer of the embankment shall be compacted to the percent of laboratory maximum density according to its applied use as specified herein.

3.12.3.1 Subgrade for Pavements

Subgrade for pavements shall be compacted to at least 95 percentage laboratory maximum density for the depth below the surface of the pavement shown. When more than one soil classification is present in the subgrade, the top 12 inches of subgrade shall be scarified, windrowed, thoroughly blended, reshaped, and compacted.

3.13 FINISHING

The surface of excavations, embankments, and subgrades shall be finished to a smooth and compact surface in accordance with the lines, grades, and cross sections or elevations shown. The degree of finish for graded areas shall be within 0.1 foot of the grades and elevations indicated except that the degree of finish for subgrades shall be specified in paragraph SUBGRADE PREPARATION. Gutters and ditches shall be finished in a manner that will result in effective drainage. The surface of areas to be turfed shall be finished to a smoothness suitable for the application of turfing materials. Settlement or washing that occurs in graded, topsoiled, or backfilled areas prior to acceptance of the work, shall be repaired and grades re-established to the required elevations and slopes.

3.13.1 Subgrade and Embankments

During construction, embankments and excavations shall be kept shaped and drained. Ditches and drains along subgrade shall be maintained to drain effectively at all times. The finished subgrade shall not be disturbed by traffic or other operation and shall be protected and maintained by the Contractor in a satisfactory condition until ballast, subbase, base, or pavement is placed. The storage or stockpiling of materials on the finished subgrade will not be permitted. No subbase, base course, ballast, or pavement shall be laid until the subgrade has been checked and approved, and in no case shall subbase, base, surfacing, pavement, or ballast be placed on a muddy, spongy, or frozen subgrade.

3.13.2 Capillary Water Barrier

Capillary water barrier under concrete floor and area-way slabs on grade shall be placed directly on the subgrade and shall be compacted with a minimum of two passes of a hand-operated plate-type vibratory compactor.

3.13.3 Grading Around Structures

Areas within 5 feet outside of each building and structure line shall be constructed true-to-grade, shaped to drain, and shall be maintained free of trash and debris until final inspection has been completed and the work has



been accepted.

3.14 PLACING TOPSOIL

On areas to receive topsoil place according to the requirements of Section 32 92 19 SEEDING.

3.15 TESTING

Testing shall be performed by a Corps validated commercial testing laboratory or by the Contractor's validated testing facility. If the Contractor elects to establish testing facilities, no work requiring testing will be permitted until the Contractor's facilities have been inspected, Corps validated, and approved by the Contracting Officer. Field in-place density shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D 1556 or ASTM D 2922]. [When ASTM D 2922 is used, the calibration curves shall be checked and adjusted using only the sand cone method as described in ASTM D 1556. ASTM D 2922results in a wet unit weight of soil and when using this method ASTM D 3017 shall be used to determine the moisture content of the soil. The calibration curves furnished with the moisture gauges shall also be checked along with density calibration checks as described in ASTM D 3017; the calibration checks of both the density and moisture gauges shall be made at the beginning of a job on each different type of material encountered and at intervals as directed by the Contracting Officer. Representative Optium Moisture and Laboratory Maximum Density Tests shall be made for each type of material or source of material. Upon completion of all earthwork, the Contractor's Geotechnical Engineer shall certify in writing that the fill was placed in accordance with the requirements and provide the backup data including but not limited to: Proctor curves (moisture/density relationship), moisture contents, Attenberg limits, field density checks, sieve analysis, etc... Testing locations and elevations for all results shall be documented so that their posittion can be substantiated and relocation if necessary. The Contractor's QC plan shall detail these testing requirements and outline his plan to report the testing results. When test results indicate, as determined by the Contracting Officer, that compaction is not as specified, the material shall be removed, replaced and recompacted to meet specification requirements. Tests on recompacted areas shall be performed to determine conformance with specification requirements. Inspections and test results shall be certified by a registered professional geotechnical engineer. These certifications shall state that the tests and observations were performed by or under the direct supervision of the engineer and that the results are representative of the materials or conditions being certified by the tests. The following number of tests, if performed at the appropriate time, will be the minimum acceptable for each type operation.

3.15.1 Fill and Backfill Material Gradation

One test per 200 cubic yards stockpiled or in-place source material. Gradation of fill and backfill material shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C 136 ASTM D 422.

3.15.2 In-Place Densities

a. One test per 1000 square feet, or fraction thereof, of each lift of fill or backfill areas compacted by other than hand-operated machines.

b. One test per 500 square feet, or fraction thereof, of each lift of



fill or backfill areas compacted by hand-operated machines.

c. One test per 100 linear feet, or fraction thereof, of each lift of embankment or backfill for roads.

3.15.3 Check Tests on In-Place Densities

If ASTM D 2922 is used, in-place densities shall be checked by ASTM D 1556 as follows:

a. One check test per lift for each 2500 square feet, or fraction thereof, of each lift of fill or backfill compacted by other than hand-operated machines.

b. One check test per lift for each 1000 square feet, of fill or backfill areas compacted by hand-operated machines.

c. One check test per lift for each 500 linear feet, or fraction thereof, of embankment or backfill for roads.

3.15.4 Moisture Contents

In the stockpile, excavation, or borrow areas, a minimum of two tests per day per type of material or source of material being placed during stable weather conditions shall be performed. During unstable weather, tests shall be made as dictated by local conditions and approved by the Contracting Officer.

3.15.5 Optimum Moisture and Laboratory Maximum Density

Tests shall be made for each type material or source of material including borrow material to determine the optimum moisture and laboratory maximum density values. One representative test per 500 cubic yards of fill and backfill, or when any change in material occurs which may affect the optimum moisture content or laboratory maximum density.

3.15.6 Tolerance Tests for Subgrades

Continuous checks on the degree of finish specified in paragraph SUBGRADE PREPARATION shall be made during construction of the subgrades.

3.15.7 Displacement of Sewers

After other required tests have been performed and the trench backfill compacted to the finished grade surface, the pipe shall be inspected to determine whether significant displacement has occurred. This inspection shall be conducted in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Pipe sizes larger than 36 inches shall be entered and examined, while smaller diameter pipe shall be inspected by shining a light or laser between manholes or manhole locations, or by the use of television cameras passed through the pipe. If, in the judgement of the Contracting Officer, the interior of the pipe shows poor alignment or any other defects that would cause improper functioning of the system, the defects shall be remedied as directed at no additional cost to the Government.

3.16 DISPOSITION OF SURPLUS MATERIAL

Surplus material or other soil material not required or suitable for filling or backfilling, and brush, refuse, stumps, roots, and timber shall



be removed from Government property and disposed of according to the Waste Management plan. Also see the DISPOSAL paragraph in Part 1 of this Section.




SECTION 31 11 00

CLEARING AND GRUBBING08/08

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Nonsaleable Materials

Written permission to dispose of such products on private property shall be filed with the Contracting Officer.


Deliver materials to store at the site, and handle in a manner which will maintain the materials in their original manufactured or fabricated condition until ready for use.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 TREE WOUND PAINT

Bituminous based paint of standard manufacture specially formulated for tree wounds.

2.2 HERBICIDE

Comply with Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act (Title 7 U.S.C. Section 136) for requirements on Contractor's licensing, certification and record keeping. Contact the command Pest Control Coordinator prior to starting work.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTION

3.1.1 Roads and Walks

Keep roads and walks free of dirt and debris at all times.

3.1.2 Trees, Shrubs, and Existing Facilities

Trees and vegetation to be left standing shall be protected from damage incident to clearing, grubbing, and construction operations by the erection of barriers or by such other means as the circumstances require.



3.1.3 Utility Lines

Protect existing utility lines that are indicated to remain from damage. Notify the Contracting Officer immediately of damage to or an encounter with an unknown existing utility line. The Contractor shall be responsible for the repairs of damage to existing utility lines that are indicated or made known to the Contractor prior to start of clearing and grubbing operations. When utility lines which are to be removed are encountered within the area of operations, notify the Contracting Officer in ample time to minimize interruption of the service.

3.2 CLEARING

Clearing shall consist of the felling, trimming, and cutting of trees into sections and the satisfactory disposal of the trees and other vegetation designated for removal, including downed timber, snags, brush, and rubbish occurring within the areas to be cleared. Clearing shall also include the removal and disposal of structures that obtrude, encroach upon, or otherwise obstruct the work. Trees, stumps, roots, brush, and other vegetation in areas to be cleared shall be cut off flush with or below the original ground surface, except such trees and vegetation as may be indicated or directed to be left standing.

3.3 TREE REMOVAL

Where indicated or directed, trees and stumps that are designated as trees shall be removed from areas outside those areas designated for clearing and grubbing. This work shall include the felling of such trees and the removal of their stumps and roots as specified in paragraph GRUBBING. Trees shall be disposed of as specified in paragraph DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS.

3.4 GRUBBING

Grubbing shall consist of the removal and disposal of stumps, roots larger than 3 inches in diameter, and matted roots from the designated grubbing areas. Material to be grubbed, together with logs and other organic or metallic debris not suitable for foundation purposes, shall be removed to a depth of not less than 18 inches below the original surface level of the ground in areas indicated to be grubbed and in areas indicated as construction areas under this contract, such as areas for buildings, and areas to be paved. Depressions made by grubbing shall be filled with suitable material and compacted to make the surface conform with the original adjacent surface of the ground.

3.5 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS

3.5.1 Saleable Timber

All timber on the project site noted for clearing and grubbing shall become the property of the Contractor, and shall be removed from the project site and disposed of off Government property.

3.5.2 Nonsaleable Materials

Logs, stumps, roots, brush, rotten wood, and other refuse from the clearing and grubbing operations, except for salable timber, shall be disposed of outside the limits of Government-controlled land at the Contractor's responsibility.



SECTION 31 21 13

RADON MITIGATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

Install a passive mitigation system with the capibility of conversion to an active mitigation system after performing testing and monitoring for radon.Testing of the passive is also included in the scope of work.

1.2 REFERENCES


AIR MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSOCIATION INTERNATIONAL (AMCA)

AMCA 210 (2007) Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating


ASTM C 920 (2008) Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants

ASTM D 2665 (2008b) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings

INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC)

ICC IMC (2006; Supplement 2007) International Mechanical Code

INTERNATIONAL CONFERENCE OF BUILDING OFFICIALS (ICBO)

ICBO UMC (1997) Uniform Mechanical Code


NEMA MG 1 (2007; Errata 2008) Standard for Motors and Generators



SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS' NATIONAL ASSOCIATION (SMACNA)

SMACNA 1378 (1995, 2nd Ed) Thermoplastic Duct (PVC) Construction Manual




EPA 402-R-92-004 (1992) Indoor Radon and Radon Decay Product Measurement Device Protocols

EPA 402-R-93-078 (1993; R 1994) Radon Mitigation Standards

EPA 625-R-92-016 (1993; Am 1994) Radon Prevention in Design and Construction of Schools and Other Large Buildings

EPA 625-R-93-011 (1993) Radon Reduction Technique for Existing Detached Houses: Technical Guidance for Active Soil Depressurization Systems

1.3 DEFINITIONS

1.3.1 Short Term Radon Detectors

Charcoal, electret ion chamber, or approved equivalent. Devices capable of sensing and recording the presences of radon during a time period of 48 hours to 90 days which when analyzed provide a numeric value, measured in pCi/L, for radon concentrations during the time exposed.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND REQUIREMENTS

1.4.1 Performance Requirements

Radon mitigation systems shall reduce and maintain radon concentration levels below 4.0 pCi/L. Test and construct radon mitigation systems in accordance with EPA 402-R-93-078, EPA 402-R-93-003, EPA 402-R-92-004 and as specified herein. Additional guidance for testing, designing and constructing radon mitigation systems is contained in EPA 625-R-92-016 and EPA 625-R-93-011.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Radon mitigation systems

SD-03 Product Data

Radon mitigation systems components

Radon diagnostic testing devices

SD-06 Test Reports

Active system testing

SD-07 Certificates



Contractor qualifications

Contractor experience

Worker protection plan


Radon mitigation systems components


Radon Mitigation Systems; G


Radon Detector Location Log

Testing laboratory certification

1.6 RADON DETECTOR LOCATION LOG

Prepare and provide to the Contracting Officer a Radon Detector Location Log for each building detailing the identity and location of each short term radon detector. Prepare the log using copies of the "Device Placement Log" contained in EPA 402-R-92-014, and provide the appropriate information as line items. In addition to the log, locate and identify each short term detector on a copy of the building floor plans.


1.7.1 Contractor Qualifications and Experience

Within 90 days after award, submit written evidence or data demonstrating that the Contractor and/or one or more subcontractors employed by the Contractor possess the qualifications and experience specified below.

1.7.1.1 Contractor Qualifications

The person responsible for diagnostic testing, construction and on-site supervision, as required by the specifications, shall have successfully completed the requirements of and shall be maintaining a current listing in the USEPA RCP Program. Alternatively, in a State with legislation requiring mandatory credentialling for this work, compliance with the State legislation is acceptable. Evidence showing successful completion of the requirements of the USEPA National RCP Program shall include copy of current, valid USEPA RCP photo identification card or equivalent documentation issued by the State.

1.7.1.2 Contractor Experience

Submit written evidence demonstrating that the Contractor has successfully installed at least two radon mitigation systems of the same or similar to the type required herein. Experience proof shall include but not be limited to:

a. The contract name and number, completion dates of the project and the total cost of the project;



b. The names, telephone numbers and fax number of the facility or installation for whom the radon mitigation system construction and/or testing were performed;

c. The name, telephone number and fax number of a supervisory level point of contact at each facility or installation who has knowledge of the Contractor's performance.

1.7.2 Testing Laboratory

Submit testing laboratory certification as proof that the testing laboratory performing radon detector analysis has successfully completed the requirements of the USEPA Radon Measurement Proficiency (RMP) Program and is qualified and authorized to perform such analysis. Alternatively, in a State with legislation requiring mandatory credentialling for this work, compliance with the State legislation is acceptable.

1.7.3 Diagnostic Testing Equipment

Submit proof of current calibration for testing devices used in performing diagnostic testing.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

1.8.1 Delivery of Products

Deliver materials to the site in an undamaged condition. Deliver proprietary items in manufacture's original unopened and undamaged containers of packages with manufacture's name and brand and other pertinent data such as specification number, type, and class, date of manufacture. Schedule deliveries of materials to coincide with scheduled installation.

1.8.2 Storage and Handling

Carefully store materials off the ground to provide proper ventilation, drainage and protection against weather and dampness. Protect materials from marring, staining, rust, damage and overload and from contaminants such as grease, oil and dirt. Store materials at temperatures recommended by the manufacturer. Handle material to avoid damage such as chipping and breaking. Replace damaged material.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 RADON MITIGATION SYSTEMS

2.1.1 Radon Mitigation Systems Components

Mechanical and electrical materials, fabrication, construction and installation shall conform to the following industry standards:

a. Poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC) Piping: ASTM D 2665, Schedule 40.

b. In-line Tubular Centrifugal Fans: AMCA 210 and UL listed.

c. Electrical Work: NFPA 70, NEMA MG 1 and EPA 402-R-93-078, No. 12 AWG minimum wire size, solid copper installed in EMT or surface



metal raceway.

d. Mechanical Work: ICC IMC, ICBO UMC, SMACNA 1378 and EPA 402-R-93-078.

e. Sealants: ASTM C 920, polyurethane, Type S, Grade P for horizontal application, Grade NS for vertical application, Class 25, Use T.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 RADON MITIGATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION

3.1.1 Installation

Provide radon mitigation systems as indicated in the design drawings, as specified in EPA 402-R-93-078 and as required by the specifications and standards referenced herein for the respective materials using workmen skilled in the trades involved.

Insure that all floor slab penetrations in accordance with EPA 402-R-93-078 to prevent entry of soil gas into the building and exhausting of conditioned air via the radon mitigation system. Correct any cracks and openings around floor slab penetrations with polyurethane sealant and backer rod or comparable filler material as required. Insure that all penetrations to the building exterior are weathertight.

Coordinate all work with the Contracting Officer.

3.1.2 Mechanical Work

ICC IMC, ICBO UMC, SMACNA 1378 and EPA 402-R-93-078.

3.1.3 System Identification

Label all components of the radon mitigation systems including, but not limited to, piping (every ten feet), enclosures, fans (if required), electrical conduit (every ten feet) and circuit breakers, as indicated on the drawings.

3.2 RADON TESTING

Perform radon testing in accordance with EPA 402-R-93-003 and EPA 402-R-92-004. The Contractor shall arrange that all laboratory test results are sent from the testing laboratory directly to the Contracting Officer with one copy to the Contractor.

3.2.1 Passive System Testing

After the installation of the passive system, test areas of buildings where the underside of the floor comes in direct contact with the soil as well as areas that can pull ground floor air or soil gas, such as, elevator shafts, stairwells, and pipe chases.

Diagnostic testing shall determine the relative radon concentration levels in the building.




3.3.1 Radon Mitigation System Inspection

Each system shall be inspected and approved in writing by the installer. Verify the presence of fire stops. Deficiencies shall be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Government.

3.3.2 Testing and Monitoring

Perform post mitigation radon testing in the buildings as specified in EPA 402-R-93-078 and herein.

3.3.2.1 Short Term Testing

Test each radon mitigation system for effectiveness no sooner than 24 hours nor later than 15 days after activation of the radon mitigation system. Provide short term radon detectors (charcoal, electret ion chamber or approved equivalent) at the rate of one detector per 2,000 square feet but not less than one detector per enclosed space, except for closets. On copies of the building floor plans, locate and identify each short term detector and provide short term detector data on copies of the "Device Placement Log" contained in EPA 402-R-92-014.

At the end of the testing period, the Contractor shall collect the detectors and send the detectors to the testing laboratory for analysis. Provide radon test results of the effectiveness of the mitigation systems not later than 30 days after collecting the detectors. Radon test results shall be sent from the testing laboratory directly to the Contracting Officer with one copy to the Contractor. Complete the line item information on the "Device Placement Log."




SECTION 31 31 16

SOIL TREATMENT FOR SUBTERRANEAN TERMITE CONTROL08/08

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



7 USC Section 136 Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Termiticide Application Plan

Termiticide application plan with proposed sequence of treatment work with dates and times. Include the termiticide trade name, EPA registration number, chemical composition, formulation, concentration of original and diluted material, application rate of active ingredients, method of application, area/volume treated, amount applied; and the name and state license number of the state certified applicator.

Termiticides

Manufacturer's label and Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for termiticides proposed for use.

Foundation Exterior

Written verification that other site work will not disturb the treatment.

Utilities and Vents

Written verification that utilities and vents have been located.

Crawl and Plenum Air Spaces

Written verification that crawl spaces and plenum air spaces have been located.



Verification of Measurement

Written verification that the volume of termiticide used meets the application rate.

Application Equipment

A listing of equipment to be used.

Warranty

Copy of Contractor's warrany.

SD-04 Samples

Termiticides

Samples of the pesticides used in this work. The Contracting Officer may draw, at any time and without prior notice, from stocks at the job site; should analysis, performed by the Government, indicate such samples to contain less than the amount of active ingredient specified on the label, work performed with such products shall be repeated, with pesticides conforming to this specification, at no additional cost to the Government.

SD-06 Test Reports

Equipment Calibration and Tank Measurement

Certification of calibration tests conducted on the equipment used in the termiticide application.

Soil Moisture

Soil moisture test result.

Quality Assurance

Pest Management Report and copies of daily records signed by an officer of the Contractor.

SD-07 Certificates

Qualifications

Qualifications and state license number of the termiticide applicator.


Comply with 7 USC Section 136 for requirements on Contractor's licensing, certification, and record keeping. Maintain daily records using Pest Management Maintenance Record, DD Form 1532-1 and submit copies of records when requested by the Contracting Officer. These forms may be obtained from the main web site:

http://www.dtic.mil/whs/directives/infomgt/forms/ddforms1500-1999.htm

Upon completion of this work, submit Pest Management Report DD Form 1532



identifying target pest, type of operation, brand name and manufacturer of pesticide, formulation, concentration or rate of application used.


For the application of pesticides, use the services of a subcontractor whose principal business is pest control. The subcontractor shall be licensed and certified in the state where the work is to be performed. Termiticide applicators shall also be certified in the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) pesticide applicator category which includes structural pest control.

1.3.2 Safety Requirements

Formulate, treat, and dispose of termiticides and their containers in accordance with label directions. Draw water for formulating only from sites designated by the Contracting Officer, and fit the filling hose with a backflow preventer meeting local plumbing codes or standards. The filling operation shall be under the direct and continuous observation of a contractor's representative to prevent overflow. Secure pesticides and related materials under lock and key when unattended. Ensure that proper protective clothing and equipment are worn and used during all phases of termiticide application. Dispose of used pesticide containers off Government property.


1.4.1 Delivery

Deliver termiticide material to the site in the original unopened containers bearing legible labels indicating the EPA registration number and manufacturer's registered uses. All other materials, to be used on site for the purpose of termite control, shall be delivered in new or otherwise good condition as supplied by the manufacturer or formulator.

1.4.2 Inspection

Inspect termiticides upon arrival at the job site for conformity to type and quality in accordance with paragraph TERMITICIDES. Each label shall bear evidence of registration under the Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act (FIFRA), as amended or under appropriate regulations of the host county. Other materials shall be inspected for conformance with specified requirements. Remove unacceptable materials from the job site.

1.4.3 Storage

Store materials in designated areas and in accordance with manufacturer's labels. Termiticides and related materials shall be kept under lock and key when unattended.

1.4.4 Handling

Observe manufacturer's warnings and precautions. Termiticides shall be handled in accordance with manufacturer's labels, preventing contamination by dirt, water, and organic material. Protect termiticides from sunlight as recommended by the manufacturer.



1.5 SITE CONDITIONS

The following conditions will determine the time of application.

1.5.1 Soil Moisture

Soils to be treated shall be tested immediately before application. Test soil moisture content to a minimum depth of 3 inches. The soil moisture shall be as recommended by the termiticide manufacturer. The termiticide will not be applied when soil moisture exceeds manufacturer's recommendations because termiticides do not adhere to the soil particles in saturated soils.

1.5.2 Runoff and Wind Drift

Do not apply termiticide during or immediately following heavy rains. Applications shall not be performed when conditions may cause runoff or create an environmental hazard. Applications shall not be performed when average wind speed exceeds 10 miles per hour. The termiticide shall not be allowed to enter water systems, aquifers, or endanger humans or animals.

1.5.2.1 Vapor Barriers and Waterproof Membranes

Termiticide shall be applied prior to placement of a vapor barrier or waterproof membrane.

1.5.2.2 Utilities and Vents

Prior to application, HVAC ducts and vents located in treatment area shall be turned off and blocked to protect people and animals from termiticide.

1.5.3 Placement of Concrete

Place concrete covering treated soils as soon as the termiticide has reached maximum penetration into the soil. Time for maximum penetration shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.

1.6 WARRANTY

The Contractor shall provide a 5-year written warranty against infestations or reinfestations by subterranean termites of the buildings or building additions constructed under this contract. Warranty shall include annual inspections of the buildings or building additions. If live subterranean termite infestation or subterranean termite damage is discovered during the warranty period, and the soil and building conditions have not been altered in the interim, the Contractor shall:

a. Retreat the soil and perform other treatment as may be necessary for elimination of subterranean termite infestation;

b. Repair damage caused by termite infestation; and

c. Reinspect the building approximately 180 days after the retreatment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 TERMITICIDES

Provide termiticides currently registered by the EPA or approved for such



use by the appropriate agency of the host county. Select non-repellant termiticide for maximum effectiveness and duration after application. The selected termiticide shall be suitable for the soil and climatic conditions at the project site.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 VERIFICATION OF MEASUREMENT

Once termiticide application has been completed, measure tank contents to determine the remaining volume. The total volume measurement of used contents for the application shall equal the established application rate for the project site conditions. Provide written verification of the measurements.

3.2 TECHNICAL REPRESENTATIVE

The certified installation pest management coordinator shall be the technical representative, shall be present at all meetings concerning treatment measures for subterranean termites, and may be present during treatment application. The command Pest Control Coordinator shall be contacted prior to starting work.

3.3 SITE PREPARATION

Site preparation shall be in accordance with Sections 31 11 00 CLEARING AND GRUBBING, 31 00 00 EARTHWORK, 32 92 19 SEEDING. Work related to final grades, landscape plantings, foundations, or any other alterations to finished construction which might alter the condition of treated soils, shall be coordinated with this specification.

3.3.1 Ground Preparation

Food sources shall be eliminated by removing debris from clearing and grubbing and post construction wood scraps such as ground stakes, form boards, and scrap lumber from the site, before termiticide application begins.

3.3.2 Verification

Before work starts, verify that final grades are as indicated and smooth grading has been completed in accordance with Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK. Soil particles shall be finely graded with particles no larger than 1 inch and compacted to eliminate soil movement to the greatest degree.

3.3.3 Foundation Exterior

Provide written verification that final grading and landscape planting operations will not disturb treatment of the soil on the exterior sides of foundation walls, grade beams, and similar structures.

3.3.4 Utilities and Vents

Provide written verification that the location and identity of HVAC ducts and vents, water and sewer lines, and plumbing have been accomplished prior to the termiticide application.



3.3.5 Crawl and Plenum Air Spaces

Provide written verification that the location and identity of crawl and plenum air spaces have been accomplished prior to the termiticide application.

3.3.6 Application Plan

Submit a Termiticide Application Plan for approval before starting the specified treatment.

3.4 TERMITICIDE TREATMENT

3.4.1 Equipment Calibration and Tank Measurement

Immediately prior to commencement of termiticide application, calibration tests shall be conducted on the application equipment to be used and the application tank shall be measured to determine the volume and contents. These tests shall confirm that the application equipment is operating within the manufacturer's specifications and will meet the specified requirements. Provide written certification of the equipment calibration test results within 1 week of testing.

3.4.2 Mixing and Application

Formulating, mixing, and application shall be performed in the presence of the Contracting Officer or the technical representative. A closed system is recommended as it prevents the termiticide from coming into contact with the applicator or other persons. Water for formulating shall only come from designated locations. Filling hoses shall be fitted with a backflow preventer meeting local plumbing codes or standards. Overflow shall be prevented during the filling operation. Prior to each day of use, the equipment used for applying termiticides shall be inspected for leaks, clogging, wear, or damage. Any repairs are to be performed immediately.

3.4.3 Treatment Method

For areas to be treated, establish complete and unbroken vertical and/or horizontal soil poison barriers between the soil and all portions of the intended structure which may allow termite access to wood and wood related products. Application shall not be made to areas which serve as crawl spaces or for use as a plenum air space.

3.4.3.1 Surface Application

Use surface application for establishing horizontal barriers. Surface applicants shall be applied as a coarse spray and provide uniform distribution over the soil surface. Termiticide shall penetrate a minimum of 1 inch into the soil, or as recommended by the manufacturer.

3.4.3.2 Rodding and Trenching

Use rodding and trenching for establishing vertical soil barriers. Trenching shall be to the depth of the foundation footing. Width of trench shall be as recommended by the manufacturer, or as indicated. Rodding or other approved method may be implemented for saturating the base of the trench with termiticide. Immediately after termiticide has reached maximum penetration as recommended by the manufacturer, backfilling of the trench shall commence. Backfilling shall be in 6 inch rises or layers. Each rise



shall be treated with termiticide.

3.4.4 Sampling

The Contracting Officer may draw from stocks at the job site, at any time and without prior notice, take samples of the termiticides used to determine if the amount of active ingredient specified on the label is being applied.

3.5 CLEAN UP, DISPOSAL, AND PROTECTION

Once application has been completed, proceed with clean up and protection of the site without delay.

3.5.1 Clean Up

The site shall be cleaned of all material associated with the treatment measures, according to label instructions, and as indicated. Excess and waste material shall be removed and disposed off site.

3.5.2 Disposal of Termiticide

Dispose of residual termiticides and containers off Government property, and in accordance with label instructions and EPA criteria.

3.5.3 Protection of Treated Area

Immediately after the application, the area shall be protected from other use by erecting barricades and providing signage as required or directed. Signage shall be in accordance with Section 10 14 01 EXTERIOR SIGNAGE. Signage shall be placed inside the entrances to crawl spaces and shall identify the space as treated with termiticide and not safe for children and animals.

3.6 CONDITIONS FOR SATISFACTORY TREATMENT

3.6.1 Equipment Calibrations and Measurements

Where results from the equipment calibration and tank measurements tests are unsatisfactory, re-treatment will be required.

3.6.2 Testing

Should an analysis, performed by a third party, indicate that the samples of the applied termiticide contain less than the amount of active ingredient specified on the label, and/or if soils are treated to a depth less than specified or approved, re-treatment will be required.

3.6.3 Disturbance of Treated Soils

Soil and fill material disturbed after treatment shall be re-treated before placement of slabs or other covering structures.

3.6.4 Termites Found Within the Warranty Period

If live subterranean termite infestation or termite damage is discovered during the warranty period, re-treat the site.



3.7 RE-TREATMENT

Where re-treatment is required, comply with the requirements specified in paragraph WARRANTY.




SECTION 32 11 23

AGGREGATE AND/OR GRADED-CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE08/08

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.


AASHTO T 180 (2001; R 2004) Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54-kg (10-lb) Rammer and an 457-mm (18-in) Drop

AASHTO T 224 (2001; R 2004) Correction for Coarse Particles in the Soil Compaction Test


ASTM C 117 (2004) Standard Test Method for Materials Finer than 75-um (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing

ASTM C 1260 (2007) Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Aggregates (Mortar-Bar Method)

ASTM C 131 (2006)Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine

ASTM C 136 (2006) Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates

ASTM C 29/C 29M (2007) Standard Test Method for Bulk Density ("Unit Weight") and Voids in Aggregate

ASTM C 88 (2005) Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate

ASTM D 1556 (2007) Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method

ASTM D 1557 (2007) Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3) (2700 kN-m/m3)



ASTM D 2167 (2008) Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method

ASTM D 2487 (2006e1) Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System)

ASTM D 422 (1963; R 2007) Particle-Size Analysis of Soils

ASTM D 4318 (2005) Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils

ASTM D 6938 (2007a) Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)

ASTM D 75 (2003) Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates

ASTM E 11 (2004) Wire Cloth and Sieves for Testing Purposes



1.2 DEFINITIONS

For the purposes of this specification, the following definitions apply.

1.2.1 Aggregate Base Course

Aggregate base course (ABC) is well graded, durable aggregate uniformly moistened and mechanically stabilized by compaction.

1.2.2 Graded-Crushed Aggregate Base Course

Graded-crushed aggregate (GCA) base course is well graded, crushed, durable aggregate uniformly moistened and mechanically stabilized by compaction. GCA is similar to ABC, but it has more stringent requirements and it produces a base course with higher strength and stability.

1.2.3 Degree of Compaction

Degree of compaction required, except as noted in the second sentence, is expressed as a percentage of the maximum laboratory dry density obtained by the test procedure presented in ASTM D 1557 abbreviated as a percent of laboratory maximum dry density. Since ASTM D 1557 applies only to soils that have 30 percent or less by weight of their particles retained on the 3/4 inch sieve, the degree of compaction for material having more than 30 percent by weight of their particles retained on the 3/4 inch sieve are expressed as a percentage of the laboratory maximum dry density in accordance with AASHTO T 180 Method D and corrected with AASHTO T 224.




All plant, equipment, and tools used in the performance of the work will be subject to approval before the work is started and shall be maintained in satisfactory working condition at all times. Provide adequate equipment having the capability of producing the required compaction, meeting grade controls, thickness control, and smoothness requirements as set forth herein.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Plant, Equipment, and Tools

List of proposed equipment to be used in performance of construction work, including descriptive data.

Waybills and Delivery Tickets

Copies of waybills and delivery tickets during the progress of the work.

SD-06 Test Reports

Sampling and TestingField Density Tests

Certified copies of test results for approval not less than 30 days before material is required for the work.

Calibration curves and related test results prior to using the device or equipment being calibrated.

Copies of field test results within 24 hours after the tests are performed.


Sampling and testing are the responsibility of the Contractor and performed by a testing laboratory approved in accordance with Section 01 45 01 USACE QUALITY CONTROL. Work requiring testing will not be permitted until the testing laboratory has been inspected and approved. Test the materials to establish compliance with the specified requirements; perform testing at the specified frequency. The Contracting Officer may specify the time and location of the tests. Furnish copies of test results to the Contracting Officer within 24 hours of completion of the tests.

1.5.1 Sampling

Take samples for laboratory testing in conformance with ASTM D 75. When deemed necessary, the sampling will be observed by the Contracting Officer.



1.5.2 Tests

Perform the following tests in conformance with the applicable standards listed.

1.5.2.1 Sieve Analysis

Make sieve analysis in conformance with ASTM C 117 and ASTM C 136. Sieves shall conform to ASTM E 11. Particle-size analysis of the soils shall also be completed in conformance with ASTM D 422.

1.5.2.2 Liquid Limit and Plasticity Index

Determine liquid limit and plasticity index in accordance with ASTM D 4318.

1.5.2.3 Moisture-Density Determinations

Determine the laboratory maximum dry density and optimum moisture content in accordance with ASTM D 1557.

1.5.2.4 Field Density Tests

Measure field density in accordance with ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167 or ASTM D 6938. For the method presented in ASTM D 6938 check the calibration curves and adjust them, if necessary, using only the sand cone method as described in paragraph Calibration, of the ASTM publication. Tests performed in accordance with ASTM D 6938 result in a wet unit weight of soil, and ASTM D 6938 shall be used to determine the moisture content of the soil. The calibration curves furnished with the moisture gauges shall also be checked along with density calibration checks as described in ASTM D 6938. The calibration checks of both the density and moisture gauges shall be made by the prepared containers of material method, as described in paragraph Calibration of ASTM D 6938, on each different type of material being tested at the beginning of a job and at intervals as directed.

1.5.2.5 Wear Test

Perform wear tests on ABC and GCA course material in conformance with ASTM C 131.

1.5.2.6 Soundness

Perform soundness tests on GCA in accordance with ASTM C 88.

1.5.2.7 Weight of Slag

Determine weight per cubic foot of slag in accordance with ASTM C 29/C 29M on the ABC and GCA course material.

1.5.3 Testing Frequency

1.5.3.1 Initial Tests

Perform one of each of the following tests, on the proposed material prior to commencing construction, to demonstrate that the proposed material meets all specified requirements when furnished. If materials from more than one source are going to be utilized, this testing shall be completed for each source.



a. Sieve Analysis including the No. 635 sieve.

b. Liquid limit and plasticity index.

c. Moisture-density relationship.

d. Wear.

e. Soundness.

f. Weight per cubic foot of Slag (if applicable).

1.5.3.2 In Place Tests

Perform each of the following tests on samples taken from the placed and compacted ABC and GCA. Samples shall be taken and tested at the rates indicated. Perform sampling and testing of recycled concrete aggregate at twice the specified frequency until the material uniformity is established.

a. Perform density tests on every lift of material placed and at a frequency of one set of tests for every 250 square yards, or portion thereof, of completed area.

b. Perform sieve analysis including the No. 635 sieve] on every lift of material placed and at a frequency of one sieve analysis for every500 square yards, or portion thereof, of material placed.

c. Perform liquid limit and plasticity index tests at the same frequency as the sieve analysis.

d. Measure the total thickness of the base course at intervals, in such a manner as to ensure one measurement for each 500 square yards of base course. Measurements shall be made in 3 inch diameter test holes penetrating the base course.

1.5.4 Approval of Material

Select the source of the material 30 days prior to the time the material will be required in the work. Tentative approval of material will be based on initial test results. Final approval of the materials will be based on sieve analysis, liquid limit, and plasticity index tests performed on samples taken from the completed and fully compacted course(s).

1.6 ENVIROMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

Perform construction when the atmospheric temperature is above 35 degrees F. When the temperature falls below 35 degrees F, protect all completed areas by approved methods against detrimental effects of freezing. Correct completed areas damaged by freezing, rainfall, or other weather conditions to meet specified requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 AGGREGATES

Provide ABC and GCA shall conform to the requirements of Section 1004 "Coarse Aggregates" of the ILDOT Specification using gradation CA-6 in Paragraph 1004.01CC) except as may be modified herein.



2.1.1 Coarse Recycling Concrete Requirement

Crushed Recycled Concrete: Provide crushed recycled concrete consisting of previously hardened portland cement concrete or other concrete containing pozzolanic binder material. The recycled material shall be free of all reinforcing steel, bituminous concrete surfacing, and any other foreign material and shall be crushed and processed to meet the required gradations for coarse aggregate. The recycled concrete aggregate shall have a percent of expansion not to exceed 0.08 percent, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1260. Reject recycled concrete aggregate exceeding this value. Crushed recycled concrete shall meet all other applicable requirements specified below.

PART 3 EXECUTION


When the ABC or GCA is constructed in more than one layer, clean the previously constructed layer of loose and foreign matter by sweeping with power sweepers or power brooms, except that hand brooms may be used in areas where power cleaning is not practicable. Provide adequate drainage during the entire period of construction to prevent water from collecting or standing on the working area. Provide line and grade stakes as necessary for control. Grade stakes shall be in lines parallel to the centerline of the area under construction and suitably spaced for string lining.

3.2 OPERATION OF AGGREGATE SOURCES

Clearing, stripping, and excavating are the responsibility of the Contractor. Operate the aggregate sources to produce the quantity and quality of materials meeting the specified requirements in the specified time limit. Aggregate sources on private lands shall be conditioned in agreement with local laws or authorities.

3.3 STOCKPILING MATERIAL

Clear and level storage sites prior to stockpiling of material. Stockpile all materials, including approved material available from excavation and grading, in the manner and at the locations designated. Aggregates shall be stockpiled on the cleared and leveled areas designated by the Contracting Officer to prevent segregation. Materials obtained from different sources shall be stockpiled separately.

3.4 PREPARATION OF UNDERLYING COURSE

Prior to constructing the base course(s), the underlying course or subgrade shall be cleaned of all foreign substances. At the time of construction of the base course(s), the underlying course shall contain no frozen material. The surface of the underlying course or subgrade shall meet specified compaction and surface tolerances. The underlying course shall conform to Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK. Ruts or soft yielding spots in the underlying courses, areas having inadequate compaction, and deviations of the surface from the requirements set forth herein shall be corrected by loosening and removing soft or unsatisfactory material and by adding approved material, reshaping to line and grade, and recompacting to specified density requirements. For cohesionless underlying courses containing sands or gravels, as defined in ASTM D 2487, the surface shall



be stabilized prior to placement of the base course(s). Stabilization shall be accomplished by mixing ABC or GCA into the underlying course and compacting by approved methods. The stabilized material shall be considered as part of the underlying course and shall meet all requirements of the underlying course. The finished underlying course shall not be disturbed by traffic or other operations and shall be maintained in a satisfactory condition until the base course is placed.

3.5 INSTALLATION

3.5.1 Mixing the Materials

Mix the coarse and fine aggregates in a stationary plant. Make adjustments in mixing procedures or in equipment, as directed, to obtain true grades, to minimize segregation or degradation, to obtain the required water content, and to insure a satisfactory base course meeting all requirements of this specification.

3.5.2 Placing

Place the mixed material on the prepared subgrade or subbase in layers of uniform thickness with an approved spreader. When a compacted layer 6 inches or less in thickness is required, place the material in a single layer. When a compacted layer in excess of 6 inches is required, place the material in layers of equal thickness. No layer shall be thicker than 6 inches or thinner than 3 inches when compacted. The layers shall be so placed that when compacted they will be true to the grades or levels required with the least possible surface disturbance. Where the base course is placed in more than one layer, the previously constructed layers shall be cleaned of loose and foreign matter by sweeping with power sweepers, power brooms, or hand brooms, as directed. Such adjustments in placing procedures or equipment shall be made as may be directed to obtain true grades, to minimize segregation and degradation, to adjust the water content, and to insure an acceptable base course.

3.5.3 Grade Control

The finished and completed base course shall conform to the lines, grades, and cross sections shown. Underlying material(s) shall be excavated and prepared at sufficient depth for the required base course thickness so that the finished base course and the subsequent surface course will meet the designated grades.

3.5.4 Edges of Base Course

The base course(s) shall be placed so that the completed section will be a minimum of 2 feet wider, on all sides, than the next layer that will be placed above it. Additionally, place approved fill material along the outer edges of the base course in sufficient quantities to compact to the thickness of the course being constructed, or to the thickness of each layer in a multiple layer course, allowing in each operation at least a 2 foot width of this material to be rolled and compacted simultaneously with rolling and compacting of each layer of base course. If this base course material is to be placed adjacent to another pavement section, then the layers for both of these sections shall be placed and compacted along this edge at the same time.



3.5.5 Compaction

Compact each layer of the base course to 95% maximum laboratory density according ASTM D1557, as specified, with compaction equipment meet Section 1101 of the ILDOT Specifications. Maintain water content during the compaction procedure to within plus or minus 2 percent of the optimum water content determined from laboratory tests as specified in paragraph SAMPLING AND TESTING. Begin rolling at the outside edge of the surface and proceed to the center, overlapping on successive trips at least one-half the width of the roller. Alternate trips of the roller shall be slightly different lengths. Speed of the roller shall be such that displacement of the aggregate does not occur. In all places not accessible to the rollers, the mixture shall be compacted with hand-operated power tampers. Continue compaction until each layer has a degree of compaction that is at least 95 percent of laboratory maximum density through the full depth of the layer. Make such adjustments in compacting or finishing procedures as may be directed to obtain true grades, to minimize segregation and degradation, to reduce or increase water content, and to ensure a satisfactory base course. Any materials that are found to be unsatisfactory shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory material or reworked, as directed, to meet the requirements of this specification.

3.5.6 Thickness

Construct the compacted thickness of the base course as indicated. No individual layer shall be thicker than 6 inches nor be thinner than 3 inches in compacted thickness. The total compacted thickness of the base course(s) shall be within 1/2 inch of the thickness indicated. Where the measured thickness is more than 1/2 inch deficient, correct such areas by scarifying, adding new material of proper gradation, reblading, and recompacting as directed. Where the measured thickness is more than 1/2 inch thicker than indicated, the course shall be considered as conforming to the specified thickness requirements. Average job thickness shall be the average of all thickness measurements taken for the job, but shall be within 1/4 inch of the thickness indicated. The total thickness of the base course shall be measured at intervals in such a manner as to ensure one measurement for each 500 square yards of base course. Measurements shall be made in 3 inch diameter test holes penetrating the base course.

3.5.7 Proof Rolling

Proof rolling of the areas indicated shall be in addition to the compaction specified and shall consist of the application of 6 coverages with a heavy pneumatic-tired roller having four or more tires, each loaded to a minimum of 30,000 pounds and inflated to a minimum of 125 psi. In areas designated, apply proof rolling to the top of the completed ABC GCA course. Maintain water content of the underlying material at optimum or at the percentage directed from start of compaction to completion of proof rolling of that layer. Water content of each layer of the base course shall be maintained at the optimum percentage directed from start of compaction to completion of proof rolling. Any base course materials or any underlying materials that produce unsatisfactory results by proof rolling shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory materials, recompacted and proof rolled to meet these specifications.

3.5.8 Finishing

The surface of the top layer of base course shall be finished after final compaction and proof rolling by cutting any overbuild to grade and rolling



with a steel-wheeled roller. Thin layers of material shall not be added to the top layer of base course to meet grade. If the elevation of the top layer of base course is 1/2 inch or more below grade, then the top layer should be scarified to a depth of at least 3 inches and new material shall be blended in and compacted to bring to grade. Adjustments to rolling and finishing procedures shall be made as directed to minimize segregation and degradation, obtain grades, maintain moisture content, and insure an acceptable base course. Should the surface become rough, corrugated, uneven in texture, or traffic marked prior to completion, the unsatisfactory portion shall be scarified, reworked and recompacted or it shall be replaced as directed.

3.5.9 Smoothness

The surface of the top layer shall show no deviations in excess of 3/8 inch when tested with a 12 foot straightedge. Take measurements in successive positions parallel to the centerline of the area to be paved. Measurements shall also be taken perpendicular to the centerline at 50 foot intervals. Deviations exceeding this amount shall be corrected by removing material and replacing with new material, or by reworking existing material and compacting it to meet these specifications.

3.6 TRAFFIC

Completed portions of the base course may be opened to limited traffic, provided there is no marring or distorting of the surface by the traffic. Heavy equipment shall not be permitted except when necessary to construction, and then the area shall be protected against marring or damage to the completed work.

3.7 MAINTENANCE

Maintain the base course in a satisfactory condition until the full pavement section is completed and accepted. Maintenance shall include immediate repairs to any defects and shall be repeated as often as necessary to keep the area intact. Any base course that is not paved over prior to the onset of winter, shall be retested to verify that it still complies with the requirements of this specification. Any area of base course that is damaged shall be reworked or replaced as necessary to comply with this specification.

3.8 DISPOSAL OF UNSATISFACTORY MATERIALS

Any unsuitable materials that must be removed shall be disposed of [outside the limits of Government-controlled land according to the Waste Disposal Plan. No additional payments will be made for materials that must be replaced.




SECTION 32 12 16

HOT-MIX ASPHALT (HMA) FOR ROADS08/08

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



AASHTO M 320 (2005) Performance-Graded Asphalt Binder


ASTM C 136 (2006) Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates

ASTM C 566 (1997; R 2004) Standard Test Method for Total Evaporable Moisture Content of Aggregate by Drying

ASTM D 1461 (1985; R 2006) Moisture or Volatile Distillates in Bituminous Paving Mixtures

ASTM D 2172 (2005) Quantitative Extraction of Bitumen from Bituminous Paving Mixtures

ASTM D 2489/D 2489M (2008) Estimating Degree of Particle Coating of Bituminous-Aggregate Mixtures

ASTM D 2950 (2005) Density of Bituminous Concrete in Place by Nuclear Methods

ASTM D 3666 (2007e1) Minimum Requirements for Agencies Testing and Inspecting Road and Paving Materials

ASTM D 4125 (2005) Asphalt Content of Bituminous Mixtures by the Nuclear Method

ASTM D 5444 (2008) Mechanical Size Analysis of Extracted Aggregate

ASTM D 6307 (2005) Asphalt Content of Hot Mix Asphalt by Ignition Method

ASTM D 995 (1995b; R 2002) Mixing Plants for Hot-Mixed, Hot-Laid Bituminous Paving Mixtures



1.1.1 State Specifiation



The work shall consist of pavement courses composed of mineral aggregate and asphalt material heated and mixed in a central mixing plant and placed on a prepared course. HMA designed and constructed in accordance with this section shall conform to the lines, grades, thicknesses, and typical cross sections shown on the drawings. Each course shall be constructed to the depth, section, or elevation required by the drawings and shall be rolled, finished, and approved before the placement of the next course.

1.2.1 Asphalt Mixing Plant

Plants used for the preparation of hot-mix asphalt shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D 995 with the following changes:

a. Truck Scales. The asphalt mixture shall be weighed on approved certified scales at the Contractor's expense. Scales shall be inspected and sealed at least annually by an approved calibration laboratory.

b. Testing Facilities. The Contractor shall provide laboratory facilities at the plant for the use of the Government's acceptance testing and the Contractor's quality control testing.

c. Inspection of Plant. The Contracting Officer shall have access at all times, to all areas of the plant for checking adequacy of equipment; inspecting operation of the plant; verifying weights, proportions, and material properties; checking the temperatures maintained in the preparation of the mixtures and for taking samples. The Contractor shall provide assistance as requested, for the Government to procure any desired samples.

d. Storage Bins. Use of storage bins for temporary storage of hot-mix asphalt will be permitted as follows:

(1) The asphalt mixture may be stored in non-insulated storage bins for a period of time not exceeding 3 hours.

(2) The asphalt mixture may be stored in insulated storage bins for a period of time not exceeding 8 hours. The mix drawn from bins shall meet the same requirements as mix loaded directly into trucks.

1.2.2 Hauling Equipment

Trucks used for hauling hot-mix asphalt shall have tight, clean, and smooth metal beds. To prevent the mixture from adhering to them, the truck beds shall be lightly coated with a minimum amount of paraffin oil, lime solution, or other approved material. Petroleum based products shall not be used as a release agent. Each truck shall have a suitable cover to protect the mixture from adverse weather. When necessary to ensure that the mixture will be delivered to the site at the specified temperature, truck beds shall be insulated or heated and covers (tarps) shall be



securely fastened.

1.2.3 Asphalt Pavers

Asphalt pavers shall be self-propelled, with an activated screed, heated as necessary, and shall be capable of spreading and finishing courses of hot-mix asphalt which will meet the specified thickness, smoothness, and grade. The paver shall have sufficient power to propel itself and the hauling equipment without adversely affecting the finished surface.

1.2.3.1 Receiving Hopper

The paver shall have a receiving hopper of sufficient capacity to permit a uniform spreading operation. The hopper shall be equipped with a distribution system to place the mixture uniformly in front of the screed without segregation. The screed shall effectively produce a finished surface of the required evenness and texture without tearing, shoving, or gouging the mixture.

1.2.3.2 Automatic Grade Controls

If an automatic grade control device is used, the paver shall be equipped with a control system capable of automatically maintaining the specified screed elevation. The control system shall be automatically actuated from either a reference line and/or through a system of mechanical sensors or sensor-directed mechanisms or devices which will maintain the paver screed at a predetermined transverse slope and at the proper elevation to obtain the required surface. The transverse slope controller shall be capable of maintaining the screed at the desired slope within plus or minus 0.1 percent. A transverse slope controller shall not be used to control grade. The controls shall be capable of working in conjunction with any of the following attachments:

a. Ski-type device of not less than 30 feet in length.

b. Taut stringline set to grade.

c. Short ski or shoe for joint matching.

d. Laser control.

1.2.4 Rollers

Rollers shall be in good condition and shall be operated at slow speeds to avoid displacement of the asphalt mixture. The number, type, and weight of rollers shall be sufficient to compact the mixture to the required density while it is still in a workable condition. Equipment which causes excessive crushing of the aggregate shall not be used.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data



Mix Design

Proposed JMF.

Contractor Quality Control

Quality control plan.

Material Acceptance

Acceptance test results.

SD-06 Test Reports

Aggregates

QC Monitoring

Aggregate and QC test results.

In place density asphalt content.

SD-07 Certificates

Asphalt Cement Binder

Copies of certified test data.

Amount, type and description of any modifiers blended into the asphalt cement binder

Testing Laboratory

Certification of compliance.

Plant Scale Calibration Certification

1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIRENMENTS

The hot-mix asphalt shall not be placed upon a wet surface or when the surface temperature of the underlying course is less than specified in Table 3. The temperature requirements may be waived by the Contracting Officer, if requested; however, all other requirements, including compaction, shall be met.

Table 3. Surface Temperature Limitations of Underlying Course

Mat Thickness, inches Degrees F

3 or greater 40

Less than 3 45

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 HMA

HMA mix and material to mix IL-19.0 for binder course and IL-9.5 for surface course according to Section 103 "Hot-Mix Asphalt" of the ILDOT



Specifications.

2.2 ASPHALT CEMENT BINDER

Asphalt cement binder shall conform to AASHTO M 320 Performance Grade (PG) 64-28.

2.3 RECLAIMED ASPHALT PAVEMENT (RAP)

RAP to conform to Section 1031 "RECLAIMED ASPHALT PAVEMENT" of the ILDOT Specifications.

2.4 MIX DESIGN

Comply with Paragraph 103.04 of Section 1030 of the ILDOT Specifications.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

Comply with Paragraph 406.05 through 406.07 of Section 406 "Hot Mix Asphalt Binder and Surface Course" of the ILDOT Specifications except as modified herein. Where ILDOT specifications and the contents noted herein differ, the more stringent shall apply.

3.2 PREPARATION OF MINERAL AGGREGATE

The aggregate for the mixture shall be heated and dried prior to mixing. No damage shall occur to the aggregates due to the maximum temperature and rate of heating used. The temperature of the aggregate and mineral filler shall not exceed 350 degrees F when the asphalt cement is added. The temperature shall not be lower than is required to obtain complete coating and uniform distribution on the aggregate particles and to provide a mixture of satisfactory workability.

3.3 PREPARATION OF HOT-MIX ASPHALT MIXTURE

The aggregates and the asphalt cement shall be weighed or metered and introduced into the mixer in the amount specified by the JMF. The combined materials shall be mixed until the aggregate obtains a uniform coating of asphalt binder and is thoroughly distributed throughout the mixture. Wet mixing time shall be the shortest time that will produce a satisfactory mixture, but no less than 25 seconds for batch plants. The wet mixing time for all plants shall be established by the Contractor, based on the procedure for determining the percentage of coated particles described in ASTM D 2489/D 2489M, for each individual plant and for each type of aggregate used. The wet mixing time will be set to at least achieve 95 percent of coated particles. The moisture content of all hot-mix asphalt upon discharge from the plant shall not exceed 0.5 percent by total weight of mixture as measured by ASTM D 1461.

3.4 PREPARATION OF THE UNDERLYING SURFACE

Immediately before placing the hot mix asphalt, the underlying course shall be cleaned of dust and debris. A tack coat shall be applied in accordance with the contract specifications.



3.5 TESTING LABORATORY

The laboratory used to develop the JMF shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 3666. The Government will inspect the laboratory equipment and test procedures prior to the start of hot mix operations for conformance to ASTM D 3666. The laboratory shall maintain the Corps certification for the duration of the project. A statement signed by the manager of the laboratory stating that it meets these requirements or clearly listing all deficiencies shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer prior to the start of construction. The statement shall contain as a minimum:

a. Qualifications of personnel; laboratory manager, supervising technician, and testing technicians.

b. A listing of equipment to be used in developing the job mix.

c. A copy of the laboratory's quality control system.

d. Evidence of participation in the AASHTO Materials Reference Laboratory (AMRL) program.

3.6 TRANSPORTING AND PLACING

3.6.1 Transporting

The hot-mix asphalt shall be transported from the mixing plant to the site in clean, tight vehicles. Deliveries shall be scheduled so that placing and compacting of mixture is uniform with minimum stopping and starting of the paver. Adequate artificial lighting shall be provided for night placements. Hauling over freshly placed material will not be permitted until the material has been compacted as specified, and allowed to cool to 140 degrees F. To deliver mix to the paver, the Contractor shall use a material transfer vehicle which shall be operated to produce continuous forward motion of the paver.

3.6.2 Placing

The mix shall be placed and compacted at a temperature suitable for obtaining density, surface smoothness, and other specified requirements. Upon arrival, the mixture shall be placed to the full width by an asphalt paver; it shall be struck off in a uniform layer of such depth that, when the work is completed, it shall have the required thickness and conform to the grade and contour indicated. The speed of the paver shall be regulated to eliminate pulling and tearing of the asphalt mat. Unless otherwise permitted, placement of the mixture shall begin along the centerline of a crowned section or on the high side of areas with a one-way slope. The mixture shall be placed in consecutive adjacent strips having a minimum width of 10 feet. The longitudinal joint in one course shall offset the longitudinal joint in the course immediately below by at least 1 foot; however, the joint in the surface course shall be at the centerline of the pavement. Transverse joints in one course shall be offset by at least 10 feet from transverse joints in the previous course. Transverse joints in adjacent lanes shall be offset a minimum of 10 feet. On isolated areas where irregularities or unavoidable obstacles make the use of mechanical spreading and finishing equipment impractical, the mixture may be spread and luted by hand tools.



3.7 COMPACTION OF MIXTURE

After placing, the mixture shall be thoroughly and uniformly compacted by rolling. The surface shall be compacted as soon as possible without causing displacement, cracking or shoving. The sequence of rolling operations and the type of rollers used shall be at the discretion of the Contractor. The speed of the roller shall, at all times, be sufficiently slow to avoid displacement of the hot mixture and be effective in compaction. Any displacement occurring as a result of reversing the direction of the roller, or from any other cause, shall be corrected at once. Sufficient rollers shall be furnished to handle the output of the plant. Rolling shall continue until the surface is of uniform texture, true to grade and cross section, and the required field density is obtained. To prevent adhesion of the mixture to the roller, the wheels shall be kept properly moistened but excessive water will not be permitted. In areas not accessible to the roller, the mixture shall be thoroughly compacted with hand tampers. Any mixture that becomes loose and broken, mixed with dirt, contains check-cracking, or is in any way defective shall be removed full depth, replaced with fresh hot mixture and immediately compacted to conform to the surrounding area. This work shall be done at the Contractor's expense. Skin patching will not be allowed.

3.8 JOINTS

The formation of joints shall be made ensuring a continuous bond between the courses and to obtain the required density. All joints shall have the same texture as other sections of the course and meet the requirements for smoothness and grade.

3.8.1 Transverse Joints

The roller shall not pass over the unprotected end of the freshly laid mixture, except when necessary to form a transverse joint. When necessary to form a transverse joint, it shall be made by means of placing a bulkhead or by tapering the course. The tapered edge shall be cut back to its full depth and width on a straight line to expose a vertical face prior to placing material at the joint . The cutback material shall be removed from the project. In both methods, all contact surfaces shall be given a light tack coat of asphalt material before placing any fresh mixture against the joint.

3.8.2 Longitudinal Joints

Longitudinal joints which are irregular, damaged, uncompacted, cold (less than 175 degrees F at the time of placing adjacent lanes), or otherwise defective, shall be cut back a maximum of 3 inches from the top of the course with a cutting wheel to expose a clean, sound vertical surface for the full depth of the course. All cutback material shall be removed from the project. All contact surfaces shall be given a light tack coat of asphalt material prior to placing any fresh mixture against the joint. The Contractor will be allowed to use an alternate method if it can be demonstrated that density, smoothness, and texture can be met.

3.9 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL

3.9.1 General Quality Control Requirements

The Contractor shall develop an approved Quality Control Plan. Hot-mix asphalt for payment shall not be produced until the quality control plan



has been approved. The plan shall address all elements which affect the quality of the pavement including, but not limited to:

a. Mix Design

b. Aggregate Grading

c. Quality of Materials

e. Proportioning

f. Mixing and Transportation

g. Mixture Volumetrics

h. Moisture Content of Mixtures

i. Placing and Finishing

j. Joints

k. Compaction

l. Surface Smoothness

3.9.2 Testing Laboratory

The Contractor shall provide a fully equipped asphalt laboratory located at the plant site. The laboratory shall meet the requirements as required in ILDOT Specifications. Laboratory facilities shall be kept clean and all equipment maintained in proper working condition. The Contracting Officer shall be permitted unrestricted access to inspect the Contractor's laboratory facility, to witness quality control activities, and to perform any check testing desired. The Contracting Officer will advise the Contractor in writing of any noted deficiencies concerning the laboratory facility, equipment, supplies, or testing personnel and procedures. When the deficiencies are serious enough to adversely affect test results, the incorporation of the materials into the work shall be suspended immediately and will not be permitted to resume until the deficiencies are corrected.

3.9.3 Quality Control Testing

The Contractor shall perform all quality control tests applicable to these specifications and as set forth in the Quality Control Program. The testing program shall include, but shall not be limited to, tests for the control of asphalt content, aggregate gradation, temperatures, aggregate moisture, moisture in the asphalt mixture, laboratory air voids, stability, flow, in-place density, grade and smoothness. A Quality Control Testing Plan shall be developed as part of the Quality Control Program.

3.9.3.1 Asphalt Content

A minimum of two tests to determine asphalt content will be performed per lot (a lot is defined as the entire HMA paved portion of the project) by one of the following methods: the extraction method in accordance with ASTM D 2172, Method A or B, the ignition method in accordance with ASTM D 6307, or the nuclear method in accordance with ASTM D 4125. Calibrate the ignition oven or the nuclear gauge for the specific mix being used. For the extraction method, the weight of ash, as described in



ASTM D 2172, shall be determined as part of the first extraction test performed at the beginning of plant production; and as part of every tenth extraction test performed thereafter, for the duration of plant production. The last weight of ash value obtained shall be used in the calculation of the asphalt content for the mixture.

3.9.3.2 Gradation

Aggregate gradations shall be determined a minimum of twice per lot from mechanical analysis of recovered aggregate in accordance with ASTM D 5444. When asphalt content is determined by the ignition oven or nuclear method, aggregate gradation shall be determined from hot bin samples on batch plants, or from the cold feed on drum mix plants. For batch plants, aggregates shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C 136 using actual batch weights to determine the combined aggregate gradation of the mixture.

3.9.3.3 Temperatures

Temperatures shall be checked at least four times per lot, at necessary locations, to determine the temperature at the dryer, the asphalt cement in the storage tank, the asphalt mixture at the plant, and the asphalt mixture at the job site.

3.9.3.4 Aggregate Moisture

The moisture content of aggregate used for production shall be determined a minimum of once per lot in accordance with ASTM C 566.

3.9.3.5 Moisture Content of Mixture

The moisture content of the mixture shall be determined at least once per lot in accordance with ASTM D 1461 or an approved alternate procedure.

3.9.3.6 In-Place Density

The Contractor shall conduct any necessary testing to ensure the specified density is achieved. A nuclear gauge may be used to monitor pavement density in accordance with ASTM D 2950.

3.9.3.7 Grade and Smoothness

The Contractor shall conduct the necessary checks to ensure the grade and smoothness requirements are met in accordance with paragraphs MATERIAL ACCEPTANCE.

3.9.3.8 Additional Testing

Any additional testing, which the Contractor deems necessary to control the process, may be performed at the Contractor's option.

3.9.3.9 QC Monitoring

The Contractor shall submit all QC test results to the Contracting Officer on a daily basis as the tests are performed. The Contracting Officer reserves the right to monitor any of the Contractor's quality control testing and to perform duplicate testing as a check to the Contractor's quality control testing.



3.9.4 Sampling

When directed by the Contracting Officer, the Contractor shall sample and test any material which appears inconsistent with similar material being produced, unless such material is voluntarily removed and replaced or deficiencies corrected by the Contractor. All sampling shall be in accordance with standard procedures specified.

3.10 MATERIAL ACCEPTANCE

No price adjustments will be made for non conforming materials, mixes, or placement. Non conforming pavement shall be removed and replaced with conforming materials, mix and placement at no cost to the Government. The sampling and testing required to define the limits of non conforming pavement shall be conducted by the Contractor to the satisfaction of and at no cost to the Government.

3.10.1 Grade

The final wearing surface of pavement shall conform to the elevations and cross sections shown and shall vary not more than 0.05 foot from the plan grade established and approved at site of work. Finished surfaces at juncture with other pavements shall coincide with finished surfaces of abutting pavements. Deviation from the plan elevation will not be permitted in areas of pavements where closer conformance with planned elevation is required for the proper functioning of drainage and other appurtenant structures involved. The grade will be determined by running lines of levels at intervals of 25 feet, or less, longitudinally and transversely, to determine the elevation of the completed pavement surface. Within 5 working days, after the completion of a particular lot incorporating the final wearing surface, the Contractor shall test the final wearing surface of the pavement for conformance with the specified plan grade. Diamond grinding may be used to remove high spots to meet grade requirements. Skin patching for correcting low areas or planing or milling for correcting high areas will not be permitted.

3.10.2 Surface Smoothness

The Contractor shall use one of the following methods to test and evaluate surface smoothness of the pavement. All testing shall be performed in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Detailed notes of the results of the testing shall be kept and a copy furnished to the Government immediately after each day's testing. Where drawings show required deviations from a plane surface (crowns, drainage inlets, etc.), the surface shall be finished to meet the approval of the Contracting Officer.

3.10.2.1 Smoothness Requirements

a. Straightedge Testing: The finished surfaces of the pavements shall have no abrupt change of 1/4 inch or more, and all pavements shall be within the tolerances of 1/4 inch in both the longitudinal and transverse directions, when tested with an approved 12 feet straightedge.

3.10.2.2 Testing Method

After the final rolling, but not later than 24 hours after placement, the surface of the pavement in each entire lot shall be tested by the Contractor in such a manner as to reveal all surface irregularities



exceeding the tolerances specified above. Separate testing of individual sublots is not required. If any pavement areas are ground, these areas shall be retested immediately after grinding. Each lot of the pavement shall be tested in both a longitudinal and a transverse direction on parallel lines. The transverse lines shall be 15 feet or less apart, as directed. The longitudinal lines shall be at the centerline of each paving lane for lanes less than 20 feet wide and at the third points for lanes 20 feet or wider. Other areas having obvious deviations shall also be tested. Longitudinal testing lines shall be continuous across all joints.

a. Straightedge Testing. The straightedge shall be held in contact with the surface and moved ahead one-half the length of the straightedge for each successive measurement. The amount of surface irregularity shall be determined by placing the freestanding (unleveled) straightedge on the pavement surface and allowing it to rest upon the two highest spots covered by its length, and measuring the maximum gap between the straightedge and the pavement surface in the area between these two high points.




SECTION 32 13 13.06

PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT FOR ROADS AND SITE FACILITIES08/08

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


ACI INTERNATIONAL (ACI)

ACI 211.1 (1991; R 2002) Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete

ACI 301 (2005; Errata 2008) Specifications for Structural Concrete

ACI 305R (1999; Errata 2006) Hot Weather Concreting

ACI 306.1 (1990; R 2002) Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting


ASTM A 184/A 184M (2006) Standard Specification for Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats for Concrete Reinforcement

ASTM A 615/A 615M (2008b) Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

ASTM A 775/A 775M (2007b) Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars

ASTM A 966/A 966M (2008) Standard Test Method for Magnetic Particle Examination of Steel Forgings Using Alternating Current

ASTM C 1077 (2008) Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation

ASTM C 1260 (2007) Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Aggregates (Mortar-Bar Method)

ASTM C 143/C 143M (2008) Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete

ASTM C 150 (2007) Standard Specification for Portland Cement

SECTION 32 13 13.06 Page 1


ASTM C 171 (2007) Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete

ASTM C 172 (2008) Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete

ASTM C 231 (2008c) Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method

ASTM C 260 (2006) Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete

ASTM C 309 (2007) Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete

ASTM C 31/C 31M (2008a) Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field

ASTM C 494/C 494M (2008a) Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete

ASTM C 618 (2008a) Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete

ASTM C 94/C 94M (2007) Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete

ASTM C 989 (2006) Standard Specification for Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag for Use in Concrete and Mortars

U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)

FS L-C-530 (Rev C) Coating, Pipe, Thermoplastic Resin



1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

Pervious pavement systems shall use PAVING 32 11 23 AGGREGATE AND/OR CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE in addition to this section.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data



Curing materials

Admixtures

Dowel

Reinforcement

Submit a complete list of materials including type, brand and applicable reference specifications.

Cementitious Materials;

Aggregate;

Submit documentation indicating percentage of post-industrial and post-consumer recycled content per unit of product. Indicate relative dollar value of recycled content products to total dollar value of products included in project.

SD-05 Design Data

Concrete mix design

Thirty days minimum prior to concrete placement, submit a mix design, with applicable tests, for each strength and type of concrete for approval. Submit a complete list of materials including type; brand; source and amount of cement, fly ash, slag, and admixtures; and applicable reference specifications. Provide mix proportion data using at least three different water-cement ratios for each type of mixture, which will produce a range of strength encompassing those required for each class and type of concrete required. Submittal shall clearly indicate where each mix design will be used when more than one mix design is submitted. Obtain acknowledgement of approvals prior to concrete placement. Submit a new mix design for each material source change.

SD-06 Test Reports

Aggregate tests

Concrete slump tests

Air content tests

Flexural strength tests

Cementitious materials

SD-07 Certificates

Ready-mixed concrete plant

Batch tickets

Cementitious materials




ASTM C 94/C 94M.


1.5.1 Ready-mixed Concrete Plant Certification

Provide documentation that the ready-mix plant is certified by the National Ready-Mix Concrete Association (NRMCA).

1.5.2 Required Information

Submit copies of laboratory test reports showing that the mix has been successfully tested to produce concrete with the properties specified and that mix will be suitable for the job conditions. The laboratory test reports shall include mill test and all other test for cementitious materials, aggregates, and admixtures. Provide maximum nominal aggregate size, gradation analysis, percentage retained and passing sieve, and a graph of percentage retained verses sieve size. Test reports shall be submitted along with the concrete mix design. Sampling and testing of materials, concrete mix design, sampling and testing in the field shall be performed by a commercial testing laboratory which conforms to ASTM C 1077. The laboratory shall be approved in writing by the Government.

1.5.3 Batch Tickets

ASTM C 94/C 94M. Submit mandatory batch ticket information for each load of ready-mixed concrete.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

2.1.1 Cementitious Materials

Cementitious materials in concrete mix shall be 50 percent non-portland cement pozzolanic materials by weight.

2.1.1.1 Cement

ASTM C 150, Type I or II with maximum alkali content of 0.60%. Cement certificate shall include test results in accordance with ASTM C 150, including equivalent alkalies indicated in the Supplementary Optional Chemical Requirements.

2.1.1.2 Fly Ash and Pozzolan

ASTM C 618, Type F, except that the maximum allowable loss on ignition shall be 6%, maximum available alkalies content shall be 1.5%, and maximum calcium oxide (CaO) content 8%. Fly ash certificates shall include test results in accordance with ASTM C 618, including available alkalies indicated in the Supplementary Optional Chemical Requirements.

2.1.1.3 Slag

ASTM C 989, Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag (GGBFS), Grade 100 or 120. Certificates shall include test results in accordance with ASTM C 989.



2.1.2 Water

ASTM C 94/C 94M, fresh, clean, and potable.

2.1.3 Aggregate

Aggregate may contain post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content.

2.1.3.1 Alkali Reactivity Test

Aggregates to be used in all concrete shall be evaluated and tested by the Contractor for alkali-aggregate reactivity in accordance with ASTM C 1260. The types of aggregates shall be evaluated in a combination which matches the contractors' proposed mix design (including Class F fly ash or GGBF slag), utilizing the modified version of ASTM C 1260. Test results of the combination shall have a measured expansion of less than 0.08 percent at 16 days. Should the test data indicate an expansion of greater than 0.08%, the aggregate(s) shall be rejected and the contractor shall submit new aggregate sources for retesting or may submit additional test results incorporating Lithium Nitrate for consideration.

ASTM C 1260 shall be modified as follows to include one of the following options:

a. Utilize the contractor's proposed low alkali Portland cement and Class F fly ash in combination for the test proportioning. The laboratory shall use the contractor's proposed percentage of cement and fly ash.

b. Utilize the contractor's proposed low alkali Portland cement and ground granulated blast furnace (GGBF) slag in combination for the test proportioning. The laboratory shall use the contractor's proposed percentage of cement and GGBF.

c. Utilize the contractor's proposed low alkali Portland cement and Class F fly ash and ground granulated blast furnace (GGBF) slag in combination for the test proportioning. The laboratory shall use the contractor's proposed percentage of cement, fly ash and GGBF.

2.1.3.2 Fine Aggregates

Section 1003 "Fine Aggregates" of the ILDOT Specifications..

2.1.3.3 Coarse Aggregates

Section 1004 "Coarse Aggregates" of the ILDOT Specifications.

2.1.4 Admixtures

ASTM C 494/C 494M: Type A, water reducing; Type B, retarding; Type C, accelerating; Type D, water-reducing and retarding; and Type E, water-reducing and accelerating admixture. Do not use calcium chloride admixtures. Where not shown or specified, the use of admixtures is subject to written approval of the Contracting Officer.

ASTM C 260: Air-entraining.



2.1.5 Reinforcement

2.1.5.1 Dowel Bars

Bars shall conform to ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 for plain billet-steel bars of the size and length indicated. Remove all burrs and projections from the bars.

2.1.5.2 Coated Dowel Bars

Bars shall conform to ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 for plain billet-steel bars of the size and length indicated. Remove all burrs or projections from the dowel bars. Coating system shall conform to FS L-C-530, Type 2. Coat the bars with a double coat system or an epoxy coating system for resistance to penetration of oil and salt solutions. The systems shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation for coatings which are not bondable to concrete. Bond the coating to the dowel bar to resist laps or folds during movement of the joint. Coating thickness shall be 7 mils minimum and 20 mils maximum.

2.1.5.3 Tie Bars

Bars shall be billet or axle steel deformed bars and conform to ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 966/A 966M Grade 60. Epoxy coated in accordance with ASTM A 775/A 775M.

2.1.5.4 Reinforcement

Deformed steel bar mats shall conform to ASTM A 184/A 184M. Bar reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 60.

]2.1.6 Curing Materials

2.1.6.1 White-Burlap-Polyethylene Sheet

ASTM C 171, 0.004 inch thick white opaque polyethylene bonded to 10 oz/linear yard (40 inch) wide burlap.

2.1.6.2 Liquid Membrane-Forming Compound

ASTM C 309, white pigmented, Type 2, Class B, free of paraffin or petroleum.

2.1.7 Joint Fillers and Sealants

Conform to Sections 1050 "Poured Joint Sealers" and Section 1052 "Performed Expansion Joint Fillers" of the ILDOT Specifications. Use Hot Pour Sealants.

2.2 CONTRACTOR-FURNISHED MIX DESIGN

Contractor-furnished mix design concrete shall be designed in accordance with ACI 211.1 except as modified herein, and the mix design shall be as specified herein under paragraph entitled "Submittals." Conform to Class PV concrete for PCC pavement as given in Table 1 of Paragraph 1020.04 of Section 1020 "Portland Cement Concrete" of the ILDOT Specifications, except as modified herein. The concrete shall have a minimum compression strength of 4000 pounds per square inch at 28 days. The concrete may be air entrained. If air entrainment is used the air content shall be 6.0 plus or minus 1.5 percent. Maximum size aggregate shall be 3/4 inches.



If the cementitious material is not sufficient to produce concrete of the flexural strength required it shall be increased as necessary, without additional compensation under the contract. The cementitious factor shall be calculated using cement, Class F fly ash, and or GGBF slag. The mix shall use a cement replacement (by weight) of 25%-35% Class F fly ash, or 40%-50% GGBF slag, or a combination of the two. In the combination, each 5% of Class F fly ash shall be replaced by 8% GGBF slag.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 FORMS

3.1.1 Construction

Construct forms to be removeable without damaging the concrete.

3.1.2 Coating

Before placing the concrete, coat the contact surfaces of forms except existing pavement sections where bonding is required, with a non-staining mineral oil, non-staining form coating compound, or two coats of nitro-cellulose lacquer. When using existing pavement as a form, clean existing concrete and then coat with asphalt emulsion bondbreaker before concrete is placed.

3.1.3 Grade and Alignment

Check and correct grade elevations and alignment of the forms immediately before placing the concrete.

3.2 REINFORCEMENT

3.2.1 Dowel Bars

Install bars accurately aligned, vertically and horizontally, at indicated locations and to the dimensions and tolerances indicated. Before installation thoroughly grease the sliding portion of each dowel. Dowels must remain in position during concrete placement and curing.

3.2.2 Coated Dowel Bars

Install bars, accurately aligned vertically and horizontally, at indicated locations and to the dimensions and tolerances indicated. Reject coatings which are perforated, cracked or otherwise damaged. While handling avoid scuffing or gouging of the coatings.

3.2.3 Tie Bars

Install bars, accurately aligned horizontally and vertically, at indicated locations.

3.2.4 Setting Slab Reinforcement

Reinforcement shall be positioned on suitable chairs prior to concrete placement. At expansion, contraction and construction joints, place the reinforcement as indicated. Reinforcement, when placed in concrete, shall be free of mud, oil, scale or other foreign materials. Place reinforcement accurately and wire securely. The laps at splices shall be 12 inches minimum and the distances from ends and sides of slabs and joints shall be



as indicated.

3.3 MEASURING, MIXING, CONVEYING, AND PLACING CONCRETE

3.3.1 Measuring

ASTM C 94/C 94M.

3.3.2 Mixing

ASTM C 94/C 94M, except as modified herein. Begin mixing within 30 minutes after cement has been added to aggregates. When the air temperature is greater than 85 degrees F, reduce mixing time and place concrete within 60 minutes. Additional water may be added to bring slump within required limits as specified in Section 11.7 of ASTM C 94/C 94M, provided that the specified water-cement ratio is not exceeded.

3.3.3 Conveying

ASTM C 94/C 94M.

3.3.4 Placing

Follow guidance of ACI 301, except as modified herein. Do not exceed a free vertical drop of 3 feet from the point of discharge. Place concrete continuosly at a uniform rate, with minimum amount of segregation, without damage to the grade and without unscheduled stops except for equipment failure or other emegencies. If this occurs within 10 feet of a previously placed expansion joint, remove concrete back to joint, repair any damage to grade, install a construction joint and continue placing concrete only after cause of the stop has been corrected.

3.3.5 Vibration

Immediately after spreading concrete, consolidate concrete with internal type vibrating equipment along the boundaries of all slabs regardless of slab thickness, and interior of all concrete slabs 6 inches or more in thickness. Limit duration of vibration to that necessary to produce consolidation of concrete. Excessive vibration will not be permitted. Vibrators shall not be operated in concrete at one location for more than 15 seconds. At the option of the Contractor, vibrating equipment of a type approved by the Contracting Officer may be used to consolidate concrete in unreinforced pavement slabs less than 6 inches thick.

3.3.5.1 Vibrating Equipment

Operate equipment, except hand-manipulated equipment, ahead of the finishing machine. Select the number of vibrating units and power of each unit to properly consolidate the concrete. Mount units on a frame that is capable of vertical movement and, when necessary, radial movement, so vibrators may be operated at any desired depth within the slab or be completely withdrawn from the concrete. Clear distance between frame-mounted vibrating units that have spuds that extend into the slab at intervals across the paving lane shall not exceed 30 inches. Distance between end of vibrating tube and side form shall not exceed 2 inches. For pavements less than 10 inches thick, operate vibrators at mid-depth parallel with or at a slight angle to the subbase. For thicker pavements, angle vibrators toward the vertical, with vibrator tip preferably about 2 inches from subbase, and top of vibrator a few inches below pavement



surface. Vibrators may be pneumatic, gas driven, or electric, and shall be operated at frequencies within the concrete of not less than 8,000 vibrations per minute. Amplitude of vibration shall be such that noticeable vibrations occur at 1.5 foot radius when the vibrator is inserted in the concrete to the depth specified.

3.3.6 Cold Weather

Except with authorization, do not place concrete when ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F or when concrete is likely to be subjected to freezing temperatures within 24 hours. When authorized, when concrete is likely to be subjected to freezing within 24 hours after placing, heat concrete materials so that temperature of concrete when deposited is between 65 and 80 degrees F. Methods of heating materials are subject to approval of the Contracting Officer. Do not heat mixing water above 165 degrees F. Remove lumps of frozen material and ice from aggregates before placing aggregates in mixer. Follow practices found in ACI 306.1.

3.3.7 Hot Weather

Maintain required concrete temperature in accordance with Figure 2.1.5 in ACI 305R to prevent evaporation rate from exceeding 0.2 pound of water per square foot of exposed concrete per hour. Cool ingredients before mixing or use other suitable means to control concrete temperature and prevent rapid drying of newly placed concrete. After placement, use fog spray, apply monomolecular film, or use other suitable means to reduce the evaporation rate. Start curing when surface of fresh concrete is sufficiently hard to permit curing without damage. Cool underlying material by sprinkling lightly with water before placing concrete. Follow practices found in ACI 305R.

3.4 PAVING

Pavement shall be constructed with paving and finishing equipment utilizing fixed forms.

3.4.1 Consolidation

The paver vibrators shall be inserted into the concrete not closer to the underlying material than 2 inches. The vibrators or any tamping units in front of the paver shall be automatically controlled so that they shall be stopped immediately as forward motion ceases. Excessive vibration shall not be permitted. Concrete in small, odd-shaped slabs or in locations inaccessible to the paver mounted vibration equipment shall be vibrated with a hand-operated immersion vibrator. Vibrators shall not be used to transport or spread the concrete.

3.4.2 Operation

When the paver is operated between or adjacent to previously constructed pavement (fill-in lanes), provisions shall be made to prevent damage to the previously constructed pavement, including keeping the existing pavement surface free of any debris, and placing rubber mats beneath the paver tracks. Transversely oscillating screeds and extrusion plates shall overlap the existing pavement the minimum possible, but in no case more than 8 inches.



3.4.3 Required Results

The paver-finisher shall be operated to produce a thoroughly consolidated slab throughout, true to line and grade within specified tolerances. The paver-finishing operation shall produce a surface finish free of irregularities, tears, voids of any kind, and any other discontinuities. It shall produce only a very minimum of paste at the surface. Multiple passes of the paver-finisher shall not be permitted. The equipment and its operation shall produce a finished surface requiring no hand finishing, other than the use of cutting straightedges, except in very infrequent instances. No water, other than true fog sprays (mist), shall be applied to the concrete surface during paving and finishing.

3.4.4 Fixed Form Paving

Forms shall be steel, except that wood forms may be used for curves having a radius of 150 feet or less, and for fillets. Forms may be built up with metal or wood, added only to the base, to provide an increase in depth of not more than 25 percent. The base width of the form shall be not less than eight-tenths of the vertical height of the form, except that forms 8 inches or less in vertical height shall have a base width not less than the vertical height of the form. Wood forms for curves and fillets shall be adequate in strength and rigidly braced. Forms shall be set on firm material cut true to grade so that each form section when placed will be firmly in contact with the underlying layer for its entire base. Forms shall not be set on blocks or on built-up spots of underlying material. [Forms for overlay pavements and for other locations where forms must be set on existing pavements shall be held securely in place with stakes or by other approved methods. Holes in existing pavements for form stakes shall be carefully drilled without cracking or spalling the existing pavement. Prior to setting forms for paving operations, the Contractor shall demonstrate the proposed form setting procedures at an approved location and shall not proceed further until the proposed method is approved.] Forms shall remain in place at least 12 hours after the concrete has been placed. Forms shall be removed without injuring the concrete.

3.4.5 Placing Reinforcing Steel

Reinforcement shall be positioned on suitable chairs securely fastened to the subgrade prior to concrete placement.

3.4.6 Placing Dowels and Tie Bars

Dowels shall be installed with alignment not greater than 1/8 inch per ft. Except as otherwise specified below, location of dowels shall be within a horizontal tolerance of plus or minus 5/8 inch and a vertical tolerance of plus or minus 3/16 inch. The portion of each dowel intended to move within the concrete or expansion cap shall be painted with one coat of rust inhibiting primer paint, and then oiled just prior to placement. Dowels and tie bars in joints shall be omitted when the center of the dowel tie bar is located within a horizontal distance from an intersecting joint equal to or less than 9 inches.

3.4.6.1 Contraction Joints

Dowels and tie bars in longitudinal and transverse contraction joints within the paving lane shall be held securely in place by means of rigid metal basket assemblies. The dowels and tie bars shall be welded to the assembly or held firmly by mechanical locking arrangements that will



prevent them from becoming distorted during paving operations. The basket assemblies shall be held securely in the proper location by means of suitable anchors.

3.4.6.2 Construction Joints-Fixed Form Paving

Installation of dowels and tie bars shall be by the bonded-in-place method, supported by means of devices fastened to the forms. Installation by removing and replacing in preformed holes will not be permitted.

3.4.6.3 Expansion Joints

Dowels in expansion joints shall be installed by the bonded-in-place method or by bonding into holes drilled in hardened concrete, using procedures specified above.

3.5 FINISHING CONCRETE

Start finishing operations immediately after placement of concrete. Use finishing machine, except hand finishing may be used in emergencies and for concrete slabs in inaccessible locations or of such shapes or sizes that machine finishing is impracticable. Finish pavement surface on both sides of a joint to the same grade. Finish formed joints from a securely supported transverse bridge. Provide hand finishing equipment for use at all times. Transverse and longitudinal surface tolerances shall be 1/4 inch in 10 feet.

3.5.1 Side Form Finishing

Strike off and screed concrete to the required slope and cross-section by a power-driven transverse finishing machine. Transverse rotating tube or pipe shall not be permitted unless approved by the Contracting Officer. Elevation of concrete shall be such that, when consolidated and finished, pavement surface will be adequately consolidated and at the required grade. Equip finishing machine with two screeds which are readily and accurately adjustable for changes in pavement slope and compensation for wear and other causes. Make as many passes over each area of pavement and at such intervals as necessary to give proper compaction, retention of coarse aggregate near the finished surface, and a surface of uniform texture, true to grade and slope. Do not permit excessive operation over an area, which will result in an excess of mortar and water being brought to the surface.

3.5.1.1 Equipment Operation

Maintain the travel of machine on the forms without lifting, wobbling, or other variation of the machine which tend to affect the precision of concrete finish. Keep the tops of the forms clean by a device attached to the machine. During the first pass of the finishing machine, maintain a uniform ridge of concrete ahead of the front screed for its entire length.

3.5.1.2 Joint Finish

Before concrete is hardened, correct edge slump of pavement, exclusive of edge rounding, in excess of 0.02 foot. Finish concrete surface on each side of construction joints to the same plane, and correct deviations before newly placed concrete has hardened.



3.5.1.3 Hand Finishing

Strike-off and screed surface of concrete to elevations slightly above finish grade so that when concrete is consolidated and finished pavement surface is at the indicated elevation. Vibrate entire surface until required compaction and reduction of surface voids is secured with a strike-off template.

3.5.1.4 Longitudinal Floating

After initial finishing, further smooth and consolidate concrete by means of hand-operated longitudinal floats. Use floats that are not less than 12 feet long and 6 inches wide and stiffened to prevent flexing and warping.

3.5.2 Texturing

Before the surface sheen has disappeared and before the concrete hardens, the surface of the pavement shall be given a texture as described herein. Following initial texturing on the first day of placement, the Placing Foreman, Contracting Officer representative, and a representative of the Using Agency shall inspect the texturing for compliance with design requirements. After curing is complete, all textured surfaces shall be thoroughly power broomed to remove all debris. The concrete in areas of recesses for tie-down anchors, lighting fixtures, and other outlets in the pavement shall be finished to provide a surface of the same texture as the surrounding area.

3.5.2.1 Brooming

Finish the surface of the slab by brooming the surface with a new stiff synthetic bristle or soft wire broom at least 18 inches wide. Gently pull the broom over the surface of the pavement from edge to edge just before the concrete becomes non-plastic. Slightly overlap adjacent strokes of the broom. Broom perpendicular to centerline of pavement so that corrugations produced will be uniform in character and width, and not more than 1/16 inch in depth. Broomed surface shall be free from porous spots, irregularities, depressions, and small pockets or rough spots such as may be caused by accidentally disturbing particles of coarse aggregate embedded near the surface.

3.5.3 Edging

At the time the concrete has attained a degree of hardness suitable for edging, carefully finish slab edges, including edges at formed joints, with an edge having a maximum radius of one-eighth inch. When brooming is specified for the final surface finish, edge transverse joints before starting brooming, then operate broom to obliterate as much as possible the mark left by the edging tool without disturbing the rounded corner left by the edger. Clean by removing loose fragments and soupy mortar from corners or edges of slabs which have crumbled and areas which lack sufficient mortar for proper finishing. Refill voids solidly with a mixture of suitable proportions and consistency and refinish. Remove unnecessary tool marks and edges. Remaining edges shall be smooth and true to line.

3.5.4 Repair of Surface Defects

Follow guidance of ACI 301.



3.6 CURING AND PROTECTION

Protect concrete adequately from injurious action by sun, rain, flowing water, frost, mechanical injury, tire marks and oil stains, and do not allow it to dry out from the time it is placed until the expiration of the minimum curing periods specified herein. Use White-Burlap-Polyethylene Sheet or liquid membrane-forming compound, except as specified otherwise herein. Do not use membrane-forming compound on surfaces where its appearance would be objectionable, on surfaces to be painted, where coverings are to be bonded to concrete, or on concrete to which other concrete is to be bonded. Maintain temperature of air next to concrete above 40 degrees F for the full curing periods.

3.6.1 White-Burlap-Polyethylene Sheet

Wet entire exposed surface thoroughly with a fine spray of water, saturate burlap but do not have excessive water dripping off the burlap and then cover concrete with White-Burlap-Polyethylene Sheet, burlap side down. Lay sheets directly on concrete surface and overlap 12 inches. Make sheeting not less than 18 inches wider than concrete surface to be cured, and weight down on the edges and over the transverse laps to form closed joints. Repair or replace sheets when damaged during curing. Check daily to assure burlap has not lost all moisture. If moisture evaporates, resaturate burlap and re-place on pavement (re-saturation and re-placing shall take no longer than 10 minutes per sheet). Leave sheeting on concrete surface to be cured for at least 7 days.

3.6.2 Liquid Membrane-Forming Compound Curing

Apply compound immediately after surface loses its water sheen and has a dull appearance and before joints are sawed. Agitate curing compound thoroughly by mechanical means during use and apply uniformly in a two-coat continuous operation by suitable power-spraying equipment. Total coverage for the two coats shall be at least one gallon of undiluted compound per 200 square feet. Compound shall form a uniform, continuous, coherent film that will not check, crack, or peel and shall be free from pinholes or other imperfections. Apply an additional coat of compound immediately to areas where film is defective. Respray concrete surfaces that are subject to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after curing compound has been applied in the same manner.


3.7.1 Sampling

The Contractor's approved laboratory shall collect samples of fresh concrete in accordance with ASTM C 172 during each working day as required to perform tests specified herein. Make test specimens in accordance with ASTM C 31/C 31M.

3.7.2 Consistency Tests

The Contractor's approved laboratory shall perform concrete slump tests in accordance with ASTM C 143/C 143M. Take samples for slump determination from concrete during placement. Perform tests at the beginning of a concrete placement operation and and for each batch (minimum) or every 20 cubic yards (maximum) of concrete to ensure that specification requirements are met. In addition, perform tests each time test beams and cylinders are made.



3.7.3 Compressive Strength Tests

The Contractor's approved laboratory shall test for strength. Make four test specimens for each set of tests. Test two specimens one at 7 and one at 28 days, and keep the other and two as spares. Retest if needed. Concrete strength will be considered satisfactory when the minimum of the 28-day test results equals or exceeds the specified 28-day compression strengt. Frequency of tests on concrete shall be not less than four cylinders for each 50 cubic yards of concrete, or fraction thereof, placed or a minimum of one set for each day of placement. Concrete which is determined to be defective, based on the strength acceptance criteria therein, shall be removed and replaced with acceptable concrete.

3.7.4 Air Content Tests

Test air-entrained concrete for air content at the same frequency as specified for slump tests. Determine percentage of air in accordance with ASTM C 231 on samples taken during placement of concrete in forms.

3.7.5 Surface Testing

Surface testing for surface smoothness and plan grade shall be performed as indicated below by the Testing Laboratory. The measurements shall be properly referenced in accordance with paving lane identification and stationing, and a report given to the Government within 24 hours after measurement is made. A final report of surface testing, signed by a Registered Engineer, containing all surface measurements and a description of all actions taken to correct deficiencies, shall be provided to the Government upon conclusion of surface testing.

3.7.5.1 Surface Smoothness Requirements

The finished surfaces of the pavements shall have no abrupt change of 1/8 inch or more, and variations in final pervious surface shall not be more than 3/8 inch under a 10 foot straightedge.

3.7.5.2 Surface Smoothness Testing Method

The surface of the pavement shall be tested with the straightedge to identify all surface irregularities exceeding the tolerances specified above. The entire area of the pavement shall be tested in both a longitudinal and a transverse direction on parallel lines approximately 15 feet apart. The straightedge shall be held in contact with the surface and moved ahead one-half the length of the straightedge for each successive measurement. The amount of surface irregularity shall be determined by placing the straightedge on the pavement surface and allowing it to rest upon the two highest spots covered by its length and measuring the maximum gap between the straightedge and the pavement surface, in the area between these two high points.

3.7.6 Plan Grade Testing and Conformance

The surfaces shall vary not more than 0.06 foot above or below the plan grade line or elevation indicated. Each pavement category shall be checked by the Contractor for conformance with plan grade requirements by running lines of levels at intervals to determine the elevation at each joint intersection.



3.7.7 Test for Pavement Thickness

Measure during concrete placement to determine in-place thickness of concrete pavement.

3.7.8 Reinforcement

Inspect reinforcement prior to installation to assure it is free of loose flaky rust, loose scale, oil, mud, or other objectionable material.

3.7.9 Dowels

Inspect dowel placement prior to placing concrete to assure that dowels are of the size indicated, and are spaced, aligned and painted and oiled as specified. Dowels shall not deviate from vertical or horizontal alignment after concrete has been placed by more than 1/8 inch per foot.

3.8 WASTE MANAGEMENT

In accordance with the Waste Management Plan.




SECTION 32 16 13

CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND CURBS AND GUTTERS04/08

PART 1 GENERAL1.1 REFERENCES



AASHTO M 182 (2005) Standard Specification for Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf and Cotton Mats


ASTM A 185/A 185M (2007) Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete

ASTM A 615/A 615M (2008b) Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

ASTM C 143/C 143M (2008) Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete

ASTM C 171 (2007) Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete

ASTM C 309 (2007) Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete

ASTM C 920 (2008) Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants

ASTM D 1751 (2004; R 2008) Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types)

ASTM D 1752 (2004a; R 2008) Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion

ASTM D 5893 (2004) Cold Applied, Single Component, Chemically Curing Silicone Joint Sealant for Portland Cement Concrete Pavements





Provide plant, equipment, machines, and tools used in the work subject to approval and maintained in a satisfactory working condition at all times. The equipment shall have the capability of producing the required product, meeting grade controls, thickness control and smoothness requirements as specified. Use of the equipment shall be discontinued if it produces unsatisfactory results. The Contracting Officer shall have access at all times to the plant and equipment to ensure proper operation and compliance with specifications.

1.2.2 Slip Form Equipment

Slip form paver or curb forming machine, will be approved based on trial use on the job and shall be self-propelled, automatically controlled, crawler mounted, and capable of spreading, consolidating, and shaping the plastic concrete to the desired cross section in 1 pass.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Concrete

Copies of certified delivery tickets for all concrete used in the construction.

SD-04 Samples

Cast-in-place colored concrete

Color samples from the manufacturer's standard line to be used in approving colors for the project.

SD-06 Test Reports

Field Quality Control

Copies of all test reports within 24 hours of completion of the test.


1.4.1 Placing During Cold Weather

Do not place concrete when the air temperature reaches 40 degrees F and is falling, or is already below that point. Placement may begin when the air temperature reaches 35 degrees F and is rising, or is already above 40 degrees F. Make provisions to protect the concrete from freezing during the specified curing period. If necessary to place concrete when the temperature of the air, aggregates, or water is below 35 degrees F, placement and protection shall be approved in writing. Approval will be



contingent upon full conformance with the following provisions. The underlying material shall be prepared and protected so that it is entirely free of frost when the concrete is deposited. [Mixing water and aggregates] [Mixing water] [Aggregates] shall be heated as necessary to result in the temperature of the in-place concrete being between 50 and 85 degrees F. Methods and equipment for heating shall be approved. The aggregates shall be free of ice, snow, and frozen lumps before entering the mixer. Covering and other means shall be provided for maintaining the concrete at a temperature of at least 50 degrees F for not less than 72 hours after placing, and at a temperature above freezing for the remainder of the curing period.

1.4.2 Placing During Warm Weather

The temperature of the concrete as placed shall not exceed85 degrees F except where an approved retarder is used. The mixing water and/or aggregates shall be cooled, if necessary, to maintain a satisfactory placing temperature. The placing temperature shall not exceed95 degrees F at any time.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE

Provide concrete conforming to the applicable requirements of Section 32 13 13.06 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT FOR ROADS AND SITE FACILITIES.

2.1.1 Color Additive

Integral Colored Concrete: Colored sidewalk areas. Use concrete materials for colored concrete as specified above. Refer to Drawings for size and location of colored concrete areas.

Color as scheduled in Section 09 06 90.00 48 Color Schedule

Acceptable Manufacturers of Concrete Color Pigments:L. M. Scofield Company4155 Scofield Rd.Douglasville, GA 30134800-800-9900.

Davis Colors3700 East Olympic Blvd.Los Angeles, CA 90023800-356-4848

Prism Pigments 1251 Arundel StreetSt. Paul, Minnesota 55117 651-488-4250

2.1.2 Air Content

Mixtures shall have air content by volume of concrete of 5 to 7 percent, based on measurements made immediately after discharge from the mixer.



2.1.3 Slump

The concrete slump shall be 2 inches plus or minus 1 inch where determined in accordance with ASTM C 143/C 143M.

2.1.4 Reinforcement Steel

Reinforcement bars shall conform to ASTM A 615/A 615M. Wire mesh reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A 185/A 185M.

2.2 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS

2.2.1 Impervious Sheet Materials

Impervious sheet materials shall conform to ASTM C 171, type optional, except that polyethylene film, if used, shall be white opaque.

2.2.2 Burlap

Burlap shall conform to AASHTO M 182.

2.2.3 White Pigmented Membrane-Forming Curing Compound

White pigmented membrane-forming curing compound shall conform to ASTM C 309, Type 2.

2.3 JOINT FILLER STRIPS

2.3.1 Contraction Joint Filler for Curb and Gutter

Contraction joint filler for curb and gutter shall consist of hard-pressed fiberboard.

2.3.2 Expansion Joint Filler, Premolded

Expansion joint filler, premolded, shall conform to ASTM D 1751 or ASTM D 1752, 1/2 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 JOINT SEALANTS

Joint sealant, cold-applied shall conform to ASTM C 920 or ASTM D 5893.

2.5 FORM WORK

Design and construct form work to ensure that the finished concrete will conform accurately to the indicated dimensions, lines, and elevations, and within the tolerances specified. Forms shall be of wood or steel, straight, of sufficient strength to resist springing during depositing and consolidating concrete. Wood forms shall be surfaced plank, 2 inches nominal thickness, straight and free from warp, twist, loose knots, splits or other defects. Wood forms shall have a nominal length of 10 feet. Radius bends may be formed with 3/4 inch boards, laminated to the required thickness. Steel forms shall be channel-formed sections with a flat top surface and with welded braces at each end and at not less than two intermediate points. Ends of steel forms shall be interlocking and self-aligning. Steel forms shall include flexible forms for radius forming, corner forms, form spreaders, and fillers. Steel forms shall have a nominal length of 10 feet with a minimum of 3 welded stake pockets per form. Stake pins shall be solid steel rods with chamfered heads and



pointed tips designed for use with steel forms.

2.5.1 Sidewalk Forms

Sidewalk forms shall be of a height equal to the full depth of the finished sidewalk.

2.5.2 Curb and Gutter Forms

Curb and gutter outside forms shall have a height equal to the full depth of the curb or gutter. The inside form of curb shall have batter as indicated and shall be securely fastened to and supported by the outside form. Rigid forms shall be provided for curb returns, except that benders or thin plank forms may be used for curb or curb returns with a radius of 10 feet or more, where grade changes occur in the return, or where the central angle is such that a rigid form with a central angle of 90 degrees cannot be used. Back forms for curb returns may be made of 1-1/2 inch benders, for the full height of the curb, cleated together. In lieu of inside forms for curbs, a curb "mule" may be used for forming and finishing this surface, provided the results are approved.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 SUBGRADE PREPARATION

The subgrade shall be constructed to the specified grade and cross section prior to concrete placement. Subgrade shall be placed and compacted in conformance with Section 31 00 00 and Section 31 11 23.

3.1.1 Sidewalk Subgrade

The subgrade shall be tested for grade and cross section with a template extending the full width of the sidewalk and supported between side forms.

3.1.2 Curb and Gutter Subgrade

The subgrade shall be tested for grade and cross section by means of a template extending the full width of the curb and gutter. The subgrade shall be of materials equal in bearing quality to the subgrade under the adjacent pavement.

3.1.3 Maintenance of Subgrade

The subgrade shall be maintained in a smooth, compacted condition in conformity with the required section and established grade until the concrete is placed. The subgrade shall be in a moist condition when concrete is placed. The subgrade shall be prepared and protected to produce a subgrade free from frost when the concrete is deposited.

3.2 FORM SETTING

Set forms to the indicated alignment, grade and dimensions. Hold forms rigidly in place by a minimum of 3 stakes per form placed at intervals not to exceed 4 feet. Corners, deep sections, and radius bends shall have additional stakes and braces, as required. Clamps, spreaders, and braces shall be used where required to ensure rigidity in the forms. Forms shall be removed without injuring the concrete. Bars or heavy tools shall not be used against the concrete in removing the forms. Any concrete found defective after form removal shall be promptly and satisfactorily



repaired. Forms shall be cleaned and coated with form oil each time before concrete is placed. Wood forms may, instead, be thoroughly wetted with water before concrete is placed, except that with probable freezing temperatures, oiling is mandatory.

3.2.1 Sidewalks

Set forms for sidewalks with the upper edge true to line and grade with an allowable tolerance of 1/8 inch in any 10 foot long section. After forms are set, grade and alignment shall be checked with a 10 foot straightedge. Forms shall have a transverse slope of 1/4 inch per foot with the low side adjacent to the down slope area grade. Side forms shall not be removed for 12 hours after finishing has been completed.

3.2.2 Curbs and Gutters

The forms of the front of the curb shall be removed not less than 2 hours nor more than 6 hours after the concrete has been placed. Forms back of curb shall remain in place until the face and top of the curb have been finished, as specified for concrete finishing. Gutter forms shall not be removed while the concrete is sufficiently plastic to slump in any direction.

3.3 SIDEWALK CONCRETE PLACEMENT AND FINISHING

3.3.1 Formed Sidewalks

Place concrete in the forms in one layer. When consolidated and finished, the sidewalks shall be of the thickness indicated. After concrete has been placed in the forms, a strike-off guided by side forms shall be used to bring the surface to proper section to be compacted. The concrete shall be consolidated with an approved vibrator, and the surface shall be finished to grade with a strike off.

3.3.2 Concrete Finishing

After straightedging, when most of the water sheen has disappeared, and just before the concrete hardens, finish the surface with a wood float or darby to a smooth and uniformly fine granular or sandy texture free of waves, irregularities, or tool marks. A scored surface shall be produced by brooming with a fiber-bristle brush in a direction transverse to that of the traffic, followed by edging.

3.3.3 Edge and Joint Finishing

All slab edges, including those at formed joints, shall be finished with an edger having a radius of 1/8 inch. Transverse joint shall be edged before brooming, and the brooming shall eliminate the flat surface left by the surface face of the edger. Corners and edges which have crumbled and areas which lack sufficient mortar for proper finishing shall be cleaned and filled solidly with a properly proportioned mortar mixture and then finished.

3.3.4 Surface and Thickness Tolerances

Finished surfaces shall not vary more than 5/16 inch from the testing edge of a 10-foot straightedge. Permissible deficiency in section thickness will be up to 1/4 inch.



3.4 CURB AND GUTTER CONCRETE PLACEMENT AND FINISHING

3.4.1 Formed Curb and Gutter

Concrete shall be placed to the section required in a single lift. Consolidation shall be achieved by using approved mechanical vibrators. Curve shaped gutters shall be finished with a standard curb "mule".

3.4.2 Curb and Gutter Finishing

Approved slipformed curb and gutter machines may be used in lieu of hand placement.

3.4.3 Concrete Finishing

Exposed surfaces shall be floated and finished with a smooth wood float until true to grade and section and uniform in texture. Floated surfaces shall then be brushed with a fine-hair brush with longitudinal strokes. The edges of the gutter and top of the curb shall be rounded with an edging tool to a radius of 1/2 inch. Immediately after removing the front curb form, the face of the curb shall be rubbed with a wood or concrete rubbing block and water until blemishes, form marks, and tool marks have been removed. The front curb surface, while still wet, shall be brushed in the same manner as the gutter and curb top. The top surface of gutter and entrance shall be finished to grade with a wood float.

3.4.4 Joint Finishing

Curb edges at formed joints shall be finished as indicated.

3.4.5 Surface and Thickness Tolerances

Finished surfaces shall not vary more than 1/4 inch from the testing edge of a 10-foot straightedge. Permissible deficiency in section thickness will be up to 1/4 inch.

3.5 SIDEWALK JOINTS

Sidewalk joints shall be constructed to divide the surface into rectangular areas. Transverse contraction joints shall be spaced at a distance equal to the sidewalk width or 5 feet on centers, whichever is less, and shall be continuous across the slab. Longitudinal contraction joints shall be constructed along the centerline of all sidewalks 10 feet or more in width. Transverse expansion joints shall be installed at sidewalk returns and opposite expansion joints in adjoining curbs. Where the sidewalk is not in contact with the curb, transverse expansion joints shall be installed as indicated. Expansion joints shall be formed about structures and features which project through or into the sidewalk pavement, using joint filler of the type, thickness, and width indicated. Expansion joints are not required between sidewalks and curb that abut the sidewalk longitudinally.

3.5.1 Sidewalk Contraction Joints

The contraction joints shall be formed in the fresh concrete by cutting a groove in the top portion of the slab to a depth of at least one-fourth of the sidewalk slab thickness, using a jointer to cut the groove, or by sawing a groove in the hardened concrete with a power-driven saw, unless otherwise approved. Sawed joints shall be constructed by sawing a groove



in the concrete with a 1/8 inch blade to the depth indicated. An ample supply of saw blades shall be available on the job before concrete placement is started, and at least one standby sawing unit in good working order shall be available at the jobsite at all times during the sawing operations.

3.5.2 Sidewalk Expansion Joints

Expansion joints shall be formed with 1/2 inch joint filler strips. Joint filler in expansion joints surrounding structures and features within the sidewalk may consist of preformed filler material conforming to ASTM D 1752 or building paper. Joint filler shall be held in place with steel pins or other devices to prevent warping of the filler during floating and finishing. Immediately after finishing operations are completed, joint edges shall be rounded with an edging tool having a radius of 1/8 inch, and concrete over the joint filler shall be removed. At the end of the curing period, expansion joints shall be cleaned and filled with cold-applied joint sealant. Joint sealant shall be gray or stone in color. The joint opening shall be thoroughly cleaned before the sealing material is placed. Sealing material shall not be spilled on exposed surfaces of the concrete. Concrete at the joint shall be surface dry and atmospheric and concrete temperatures shall be above 50 degrees F at the time of application of joint sealing material. Excess material on exposed surfaces of the concrete shall be removed immediately and concrete surfaces cleaned.

3.5.3 Reinforcement Steel Placement

Reinforcement steel shall be accurately and securely fastened in place with suitable supports and ties before the concrete is placed.

3.6 CURB AND GUTTER JOINTS

Curb and gutter joints shall be constructed at right angles to the line of curb and gutter.

3.6.1 Contraction Joints

Contraction joints shall be constructed directly opposite contraction joints in abutting portland cement concrete pavements and spaced so that monolithic sections between curb returns will not be less than 5 feet nor greater than 15 feet in length.

a. Contraction joints (except for slip forming) shall be constructed by means of 1/8 inch thick separators and of a section conforming to the cross section of the curb and gutter. Separators shall be removed as soon as practicable after concrete has set sufficiently to preserve the width and shape of the joint and prior to finishing.

b. When slip forming is used, the contraction joints shall be cut in the top portion of the gutter/curb hardened concrete in a continuous cut across the curb and gutter, using a power-driven saw. The depth of cut shall be at least one-fourth of the gutter/curb depth and 1/8 inch in width.

3.6.2 Expansion Joints

Expansion joints shall be formed by means of preformed expansion joint filler material cut and shaped to the cross section of curb and gutter. Expansion joints shall be provided in curb and gutter directly opposite



expansion joints of abutting portland cement concrete pavement, and shall be of the same type and thickness as joints in the pavement. Where curb and gutter do not abut portland cement concrete pavement, expansion joints at least 1/2 inch in width shall be provided at intervals not less than 30 feet nor greater than 120 feet. Expansion joints shall be provided in nonreinforced concrete gutter at locations indicated. Expansion joints shall be sealed immediately following curing of the concrete or as soon thereafter as weather conditions permit. Expansion joints and the top 1 inch depth of curb and gutter contraction-joints shall be sealed with joint sealant. The joint opening shall be thoroughly cleaned before the sealing material is placed. Sealing material shall not be spilled on exposed surfaces of the concrete. Concrete at the joint shall be surface dry and atmospheric and concrete temperatures shall be above 50 degrees F at the time of application of joint sealing material. Excess material on exposed surfaces of the concrete shall be removed immediately and concrete surfaces cleaned.

3.7 CURING AND PROTECTION


Protect concrete against loss of moisture and rapid temperature changes for at least 7 days from the beginning of the curing operation. Protect unhardened concrete from rain and flowing water. All equipment needed for adequate curing and protection of the concrete shall be on hand and ready for use before actual concrete placement begins. Protection shall be provided as necessary to prevent cracking of the pavement due to temperature changes during the curing period.

3.7.1.1 Mat Method

The entire exposed surface shall be covered with 2 or more layers of burlap. Mats shall overlap each other at least 6 inches. The mat shall be thoroughly wetted with water prior to placing on concrete surface and shall be kept continuously in a saturated condition and in intimate contact with concrete for not less than 7 days.

3.7.1.2 Impervious Sheeting Method

The entire exposed surface shall be wetted with a fine spray of water and then covered with impervious sheeting material. Sheets shall be laid directly on the concrete surface with the light-colored side up and overlapped 12 inches when a continuous sheet is not used. The curing medium shall not be less than 18-inches wider than the concrete surface to be cured, and shall be securely weighted down by heavy wood planks, or a bank of moist earth placed along edges and laps in the sheets. Sheets shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced if torn or otherwise damaged during curing. The curing medium shall remain on the concrete surface to be cured for not less than 7 days.

3.7.1.3 Membrane Curing Method

A uniform coating of white-pigmented membrane-curing compound shall be applied to the entire exposed surface of the concrete as soon after finishing as the free water has disappeared from the finished surface. Formed surfaces shall be coated immediately after the forms are removed and in no case longer than 1 hour after the removal of forms. Concrete shall not be allowed to dry before the application of the membrane. If any drying has occurred, the surface of the concrete shall be moistened with a



fine spray of water and the curing compound applied as soon as the free water disappears. Curing compound shall be applied in two coats by hand-operated pressure sprayers at a coverage of approximately 200 square feet/gallon for the total of both coats. The second coat shall be applied in a direction approximately at right angles to the direction of application of the first coat. The compound shall form a uniform, continuous, coherent film that will not check, crack, or peel and shall be free from pinholes or other imperfections. If pinholes, abrasion, or other discontinuities exist, an additional coat shall be applied to the affected areas within 30 minutes. Concrete surfaces that are subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after the curing compound has been applied shall be resprayed by the method and at the coverage specified above. Areas where the curing compound is damaged by subsequent construction operations within the curing period shall be resprayed. Necessary precautions shall be taken to insure that the concrete is properly cured at sawed joints, and that no curing compound enters the joints. The top of the joint opening and the joint groove at exposed edges shall be tightly sealed before the concrete in the region of the joint is resprayed with curing compound. The method used for sealing the joint groove shall prevent loss of moisture from the joint during the entire specified curing period. Approved standby facilities for curing concrete pavement shall be provided at a location accessible to the jobsite for use in the event of mechanical failure of the spraying equipment or other conditions that might prevent correct application of the membrane-curing compound at the proper time. Concrete surfaces to which membrane-curing compounds have been applied shall be adequately protected during the entire curing period from pedestrian and vehicular traffic, except as required for joint-sawing operations and surface tests, and from any other possible damage to the continuity of the membrane.

3.7.2 Backfilling

After curing, debris shall be removed and the area adjoining the concrete shall be backfilled, graded, and compacted to conform to the surrounding area in accordance with lines and grades indicated.

3.7.3 Protection

Completed concrete shall be protected from damage until accepted. Repair damaged concrete and clean concrete discolored during construction. Concrete that is damaged shall be removed and reconstructed for the entire length between regularly scheduled joints. Refinishing the damaged portion will not be acceptable. Removed damaged portions shall be disposed of as directed.



Perform the inspection and tests described and meet the specified requirements for inspection details and frequency of testing. Based upon the results of these inspections and tests, take the action and submit reports as required below, and any additional tests to insure that the requirements of these specifications are met.



3.8.2 Concrete Testing

3.8.2.1 Strength Testing

Comply with Section 32 13 13.06.

3.9 SURFACE DEFICIENCIES AND CORRECTIONS

3.9.1 Thickness Deficiency

When measurements indicate that the completed concrete section is deficient in thickness by more than 1/4 inch the deficient section will be removed, between regularly scheduled joints, and replaced.

3.9.2 High Areas

In areas not meeting surface smoothness and plan grade requirements, concrete shall be removed and replaced with conforming construction.

3.9.3 Appearance

Exposed surfaces of the finished work will be inspected by the Government and any deficiencies in appearance will be identified. Areas which exhibit excessive cracking, discoloration, form marks, or tool marks or which are otherwise inconsistent with the overall appearances of the work shall be removed and replaced.




SECTION 32 17 24.00 10

PAVEMENT MARKINGS04/08

PART 1 GENERAL


All machines, tools and equipment used in the performance of the work shall be approved and maintained in satisfactory operating condition. Equipment operating on roads and runways shall display low speed traffic markings and traffic warning lights.

1.1.1 Paint Application Equipment

1.1.1.1 Self-Propelled or Mobile-Drawn Pneumatic Spraying Machines

The equipment to apply paint to pavements shall be a self-propelled or mobile-drawn pneumatic spraying machine with suitable arrangements of atomizing nozzles and controls to obtain the specified results. The machine shall have a speed during application not less than 5 mph, and shall be capable of applying the stripe widths indicated, at the paint coverage rate specified in paragraph APPLICATION, and of even uniform thickness with clear-cut edges. The paint applicator shall have paint reservoirs or tanks of sufficient capacity and suitable gauges to apply paint in accordance with requirements specified. Tanks shall be equipped with suitable air-driven mechanical agitators. The spray mechanism shall be equipped with quick-action valves conveniently located, and shall include necessary pressure regulators and gauges in full view and reach of the operator. Paint strainers shall be installed in paint supply lines to ensure freedom from residue and foreign matter that may cause malfunction of the spray guns. The paint applicator shall be readily adaptable for attachment of an air-actuated dispenser for the reflective media approved for use. Pneumatic spray guns shall be provided for hand application of paint in areas where the mobile paint applicator cannot be used.

1.1.1.2 Hand-Operated, Push-Type Machines

All machines, tools, and equipment used in performance of the work shall be approved and maintained in satisfactory operating condition. Hand-operated push-type machines of a type commonly used for application of paint to pavement surfaces will be acceptable for marking small streets and parking areas. Applicator machine shall be equipped with the necessary paint tanks and spraying nozzles, and shall be capable of applying paint uniformly at coverage specified. Sandblasting equipment shall be provided as required for cleaning surfaces to be painted. Hand-operated spray guns shall be provided for use in areas where push-type machines cannot be used.

1.1.2 Reflective Media Dispenser

The dispenser for applying the reflective media shall be attached to the paint dispenser and shall operate automatically and simultaneously with the applicator through the same control mechanism. The dispenser shall be capable of adjustment and designed to provide uniform flow of reflective media over the full length and width of the stripe at the rate of coverage specified in paragraph APPLICATION, at all operating speeds of the

SECTION 32 17 24.00 10 Page 1


applicator to which it is attached.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Equipment

Lists of proposed equipment, including descriptive data, and notifications of proposed Contractor actions as specified in this section. List of removal equipment shall include descriptive data indicating area of coverage per pass, pressure adjustment range, tank and flow capacities, and safety precautions required for the equipment operation.

Composition Requirements

Manufacturer's current printed product description and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for each type paint/color proposed for use.

Qualifications

Documentation on personnel qualifications, as specified.

SD-06 Test Reports

Testing

Certified copies of the test reports from material suppliers, prior to the use of the materials at the jobsite. Testing shall be performed in an approved independent laboratory.

SD-07 Certificates

Volatile Organic Compound (VOC)

Certificate stating that the proposed pavement marking paint meets the VOC regulations of the local Air Pollution Control District having jurisdiction over the geographical area in which the project is located.



Submit documentation certifying that pertinent personnel are qualified for equipment operation and handling of chemicals.

1.3.2 Traffic Controls

Suitable warning signs shall be placed near the beginning of the worksite and well ahead of the worksite for alerting approaching traffic from both

SECTION 32 17 24.00 10 Page 2


directions. Small markers shall be placed along newly painted lines or freshly placed raised markers to control traffic and prevent damage to newly painted surfaces or displacement of raised pavement markers. Painting equipment shall be marked with large warning signs indicating slow-moving painting equipment in operation.

1.3.3 Maintenance of Traffic

1.3.3.1 Roads, Streets, and Parking Areas

When traffic must be rerouted or controlled to accomplish the work, the necessary warning signs, flagpersons, and related equipment for the safe passage of vehicles shall be provided.


All materials shall be delivered and stored in sealed containers that plainly show the designated name, formula or specification number, batch number, color, date of manufacture, manufacturer's name, and directions, all of which shall be plainly legible at time of use.


Pavement surface shall be free of snow, ice, or slush. Surface temperature shall be at least 40 degrees F and rising at the beginning of operations, except those involving shot or sand blasting. Operation shall cease during thunderstorms. Operation shall cease during rainfall, except for waterblasting and removal of previously applied chemicals. Waterblasting shall cease where surface water accumulation alters the effectiveness of material removal.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PAINT

Conform to Paragraph 1095.02 "Paint Pavement Markings" of Section 1095 "Pavement Markings" of the ILDOT Specifications except as modified herein. Pavement marking paints shall comply with applicable state and local laws enacted to ensure compliance with Federal Clean Air Standards. Paint materials shall conform to the restrictions of the local Air Pollution Control District.

2.1.1 Color

The color shall be as indicated.

2.2 REFLECTIVE MEDIA

Conform to Paragraph 1095.07 for Type A of Section 1095 of the ILDOT Specifications.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION

Thoroughly clean surfaces to be marked before application of the pavement marking material. Dust, dirt, and other granular surface deposits shall be removed by sweeping, blowing with compressed air, rinsing with water or a combination of these methods as required. Rubber deposits, surface

SECTION 32 17 24.00 10 Page 3


laitance, existing paint markings, and other coatings adhering to the pavement shall be completely removed with scrapers, wire brushes, sandblasting, approved chemicals, or mechanical abrasion as directed. Areas of old pavement affected with oil or grease shall be scrubbed with several applications of trisodium phosphate solution or other approved detergent or degreaser, and rinsed thoroughly after each application. After cleaning, oil-soaked areas shall be sealed with cut shellac to prevent bleeding through the new paint. Pavement surfaces shall be allowed to dry, when water is used for cleaning, prior to striping or marking. Surfaces shall be recleaned, when work has been stopped due to rain.

3.1.1 Cleaning Concrete Curing Compounds

On new portland cement concrete pavements, cleaning operations shall not begin until a minimum of 30 days after the placement of concrete.

3.2 APPLICATION

All pavement markings and patterns shall be placed as shown on the plans.

3.2.1 Paint

Paint shall be applied to clean, dry surfaces, and only when air and pavement temperatures are above 40 degrees F and less than 95 degrees F. Paint temperature shall be maintained within these same limits. New asphalt pavement surfaces and new Portland concrete cement shall be allowed to cure for a period of not less than 30 days before applications of paint. Paint shall be applied pneumatically with approved equipment at rate of coverage specified . Provide guide lines and templates as necessary to control paint application. Special precautions shall be taken in marking numbers, letters, and symbols. Edges of markings shall be sharply outlined.

3.2.1.1 Rate of Application

a. Reflective Markings: Pigmented binder shall be applied evenly to the pavement area to be coated at a rate of 105 plus or minus 5 square feet/gallon. Glass spheres shall be applied uniformly to the wet paint on road and street pavement at a rate of 6 plus or minus 0.5 pounds of glass spheres per gallon of paint.

b. Nonreflective Markings: Paint shall be applied evenly to the pavement surface to be coated at a rate of 105 plus or minus 5 square feet/gallon.

3.2.1.2 Drying

The maximum drying time requirements of the paint specifications will be strictly enforced to prevent undue softening of bitumen, and pickup, displacement, or discoloration by tires of traffic. If there is a delay in drying of the markings, painting operations shall be discontinued until cause of the slow drying is determined and corrected.


SECTION 32 17 24.00 10 Page 4


SECTION 32 31 13

CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES01/08

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASTM A 116 (2005) Standard Specification for Metallic-Coated, Steel Woven Wire Fence Fabric


ASTM A 702 (1989; R 2006) Standard Specification for Steel Fence Posts and Assemblies, Hot Wrought

ASTM A 780 (2001; R 2006) Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings

ASTM A 90/A 90M (2007) Standard Test Method for Weight (Mass) of Coating on Iron and Steel Articles with Zinc or Zinc-Alloy Coatings

ASTM C 94/C 94M (2007) Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete

ASTM F 1043 (2008) Strength and Protective Coatings on Metal Industrial Chain-Link Fence Framework

ASTM F 1083 (2008) Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Welded, for Fence Structures

ASTM F 567 (2007) Standard Practice for Installation of Chain Link Fence

ASTM F 626 (2008) Standard Specification for Fence Fittings

ASTM F 883 (2004) Padlocks


FS RR-F-191/3 (Rev D) Fencing, Wire and Post, Metal (Chain-Link Fence Posts, Top Rails and Braces)



1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Submit Erection/Installation Drawings for the following items in accordance with paragraph entitled, "Assembly and Installations Instructions," of this section.

Fence AssemblyLocation of Gate, Corner, End, and Pull PostsGate AssemblyGate Hardware and Accessories

SD-03 Product Data

Submit Manufacturer's catalog data for the following items:

Fence AssemblyGate AssemblyGate Hardware and Accessories

SD-04 Samples

Contractor must submit the following samples described within this section:

FabricPostsBracesLine PostsSleevesTop RailBottom RailTension WireStretcher BarsGate PostsGate Hardware and AccessoriesPadlocksWire Ties

SD-07 Certificates

Submit Certificates of compliance in accordance with the applicable reference standards and descriptions of this section for the following items:

Zinc CoatingPVC coatingaluminum alloy coatingFabricStretcher BarsGate Hardware and Accessories



Concrete


Submit Manufacturer's instructions for the following items:

Fence AssemblyGate AssemblyHardware AssemblyAccessories

1.3 ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

Contractor must provide manufacturer's instructions that detail proper assembly and materials in the design for fence, gate, hardware and accessories.

Submit Erection/Installation drawings along with manufacturer's catalog data for Complete fence assembly, gate assembly, hardware assembly and accessories.


Deliver materials to site in an undamaged condition. Store materials off the ground to provide protection against oxidation caused by ground contact.


1.5.1 Required Report Data

Submit reports of listing of chain-link fencing and accessories regarding weight in ounces for zinc coating.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

Provide fencing materials that conform to the requirements of ASTM A 116, ASTM A 702, ASTM F 626, and as specified.

2.2 ZINC COATING

Ferrous-metal components and accessories, except as otherwise specified, must be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

Provide zinc coating of weight not less than 1.94 ounces per square foot, as determined from the average result of two specimens, when tested in accordance with ASTM A 90/A 90M.

Provide zinc coating that conforms to the requirements of the following:

Pipe: FS RR-F-191/3 Class 1 Grade A in accordance with ASTM F 1083 .

Hardware and accessories: ASTM A 153/A 153M, Table 1

Surface (ASTM F 1043):

External: Type B-B surface zinc with organic coating, 0.97 ounce per square foot minimum thickness of acrylated polymer.



Internal: Surface zinc coating of 0.97 ounce per square foot minimum.

Provide galvanizing repair material that is cold-applied zinc-rich coating conforming to ASTM A 780.

2.3 FABRIC

Fabric must consist of No. 9-gage wires woven into a 2-inch diamond mesh, with dimensions of fabric and wire conforming to ASTM A 116, ASTM A 702 and ASTM F 626, with 1.29 ounces per square foot zinc galvanizing.

Fence heights to 12 feet must have one-piece fabric widths.

2.4 TOP AND BOTTOM SELVAGES

Fabric with 2 inch mesh and up to 60 inches high must be knuckled on both top and bottom selvages, over if 60 inches high, it must be twisted and barbed on the top selvage and knuckled on the bottom selvage.

Knuckle top and bottom selvages for 1-3/4-inch and 1-inch mesh fabric.

2.5 LINE POSTS

Minimum acceptable line posts must be as follows:

Up to 6-feet high:

Grade A: 1.900 inch O.D. pipe weighing 2.72 pounds per linear foot.

Grade B: 2.375 inch O.D. pipe weighing 3.12 pounds per linear foot.

Over 6-feet high:

2.0 inch O.D. pipe weighing 3.65 pounds per linear foot.

2.6 END, CORNER, AND PULL POSTS

Provide minimally acceptable end, corner, and pull posts as follows:

Up to 6 feet high:



Over 6 feet high:



2.7 SLEEVES

Provide sleeves for setting into concrete construction of the same material as post sections. Size must be 1-inch greater than the diameter or dimension of the post. Weld flat plates to each sleeve base to provide anchorage and prevent intrusion of concrete.



2.8 TOP RAIL

Rails must be a minimum of 1.660 inches O.D. pipe Grade A weighing 2.27 pounds per linear foot. Provide expansion couplings 6-inches long at each joint in top rails.

2.9 CENTER RAILS BETWEEN LINE POSTS

For fencing over 6-feet high, center rails must be 1.660 inches O.D. pipe Grade A weighing 2.27 pounds per linear foot

2.10 POST-BRACE ASSEMBLY

Bracing must consist of 1.660 inches O.D. pipe Grade A weighing 2.27 pounds per linear foot and 3/8 inch adjustable truss rods and turnbuckles.

2.11 TENSION WIRE

Wire must be galvanized, No. 7-gage, coiled spring wire, provided at the bottom of the fabric only. Provide Zinc Coating that weighs not less than 1.6 ounces per square foot.

2.12 STRETCHER BARS

Provide bars that have one-piece lengths equal to the full height of the fabric with a minimum cross section of 3/16 by 3/4 inch, in accordance with ASTM A 116, ASTM A 702 and ASTM F 626.

2.13 POST TOPS

Provide tops that are steel, wrought iron, or malleable iron designed as a weathertight closure cap. Provide one cap for each post, unless equal protection is provided by a combination post-cap and barbed-wire supporting arm. Caps must have an opening to permit through passage of the top rail.

2.14 STRETCHER BAR BANDS

Provide bar bands for securing stretcher bars to posts that are steel, wrought iron, or malleable iron spaced not over 15 inches on center. Bands may also be used in conjunction with special fittings for securing rails to posts. Provide bands with projecting edges chamfered or eased.

2.15 GATE POSTS

Provide a gate post for supporting each gate leaf as follows:

Up to 6-feet wide:

2.875 inch O.D. pipe Grade A weighing 5.79 pounds per linear foot.

Over 6 feet wide and up to 13 feet wide:

2.875 inch O.D. pipe Grade A weighing 5.79 pounds per linear foot.

Over 13-feet and up to 18-feet wide:

Provide 6.625 inch O.D. pipe weighing 18.97 pounds per linear foot.

Over 18-feet wide:



Provide 8.625 inch O.D. pipe weighing 24.70 pounds per linear foot.

2.16 GATES

For gate leaves up to 6-feet high or 6-feet wide, perimeter gate frames must be 1.66 inch O.D. pipe Grade A weighing 2.27 pounds per linear foot.

For gate leaves over 6 feet high or 6 feet wide, perimeter gate frames must be 1.90 inch O.D. pipe Grade A weighing 2.72 pounds per linear foot.

Provide gate frame assembly that is welded or assembled with special malleable or pressed-steel fittings and rivets to provide rigid connections. Install fabric with stretcher bars at vertical edges; stretcher bars may also be used at top and bottom edges. Attach stretcher bars and fabric to gate frames on all sides at intervals not exceeding 15 inches. Attach hardware with rivets or by other means which provides equal security against breakage or removal.

Diagonal cross-bracing, consisting of 3/8-inch diameter adjustable-length truss rods on welded gate frames, must be provided where necessary to obtain frame rigidity without sag or twist. Provide nonwelded gate frames with diagonal bracing.

2.17 GATE HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

Provide gate hardware and accessories that conforms to ASTM A 116, ASTM A 702, ASTM F 626, and be as specified:

Provide pressed steel hinges to suit gate size, non-lift-off type, offset to permit 180-degree opening.

Provide latch that permits operation from either side of the gate, with a padlock eye provided as an integral part of the latch.

Provide stops and holders of malleable iron for vehicular gates. Provide stops that automatically engage the gate and hold it in the open position until manually released.

Provide manufacturer's standard heavy-duty track ball bearing hanger sheaves, overhead framing and supports, guides, stays, bracing, and accessories as required for easy operation of manual sliding gates.

2.13 ORNAMENTAL STEEL FENCE SYSTEM

Manufacturers names, model numbers, and colors are given to clarify the designers intent and are not intended to limit selection of similar products from acceptable manufacturers

The industrial ornamental steel fence system shall conform to Ameristar® Aegis II™, Classic™ 2-Rail style manufactured by Ameristar Fence Products, Inc., in Tulsa, Oklahoma or equal.

2.18 Framework

Steel material for fence framework (i.e., tubular pickets, rails, and posts), when galvanized prior to forming, shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A924/924M, with a minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi (344 MPa).



The steel shall be hot-dip galvanized to meet the requirements of ASTM A653/A653M with a minimum zinc coating weight of 0.90 oz/ft2 (276 g/m2), Coating Designation G-90.

2.19 Finish

finish shall be an electrostatic spray application of an epoxy base, and a separate electrostatic spray application of a polyester finish. The base coat shall be a zinc-rich thermosetting epoxy powder coating with a minimum thickness of 2 mils. The topcoat shall be a "no-mar" TGIC polyester powder coat finish with a minimum thickness of 2 mils. The color shall be black. The coated framework shall be capable of meeting the following performance requirements:

Adhesion ASTM D3359 - Method BCorrosion Resistance ASTM B117 & ASTM D1654Impact Resistance ASTM D2794Weathering Resistance ASTM D822, ASTM D2244, ASTM D523 (60° Method)

2.20 Fence Pickets

Fence pickets shall be 1" square x 14ga. tubing. The cross-sectional shape of the rails shall have outside cross-section dimensions of 1.75" square and a minimum thickness of 14ga. Picket holes in the rail shall be spaced approx. 4.98" o.c. Picket retaining rods shall be 0.125" diameter galvanized steel. Posts shall be a minimum of 2-1/2" square x 12ga. High quality PVC grommets shall be supplied to seal all picket-to-rail intersections

2.21 Fabrication

Pickets, rails, and posts shall be precut to specified lengths. Rails shall be pre-punched to accept pickets. Grommets shall be inserted into the pre-punched holes in the rails and pickets shall be inserted through the grommets so that pre-drilled picket holes align with the internal upper raceway of the rails. Retaining rods shall be inserted into each rail so that they pass through the predrilled holes in each picket, thus completing the panel assembly. Completed panels shall be capable of supporting a 600 lb. load (applied at midspan) without permanent deformation.

2.22 Gates

Gates shall be fabricated using the same framework and fence material as the fence panels. All rail and upright intersections shall be joined by welding. All picket and rail intersections shall also be joined either by welding or by the same retaining rod process used for panel assembly

2.23 MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE

Provide miscellaneous hot-dip galvanized hardware as required.

2.24 WIRE TIES

Wires for tying fabric to line posts must be 16-gage galvanized steel wire spaced 12 inches on center. For tying fabric to rails and braces, wire ties must be spaced 24 inches on center. For tying fabric to tension wire, 0.105-inch hog rings must be spaced 24 inches on center.



Manufacturer's standard procedure will be accepted if of equal strength and durability.

. Provide wire ties constructed of the same material as the fencing fabric.

2.25 CONCRETE

Provide concrete conforming to ASTM C 94/C 94M. Concrete mix must obtain a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3,000 psi.

2.26 GROUT

Provide grout of proportions one part portland cement to three parts clean, well-graded sand and a minimum amount of water to produce a workable mix.

2.27 PADLOCKS

Provide padlocks conforming to ASTM F 883, with chain.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Completed installation must conform to ASTM F 567.

3.1 GENERAL

Final grading and established elevations must be complete prior to commencing fence installation.

3.2 EXCAVATION

Excavations for post footings must be in virgin or compacted soil, of minimum sizes as indicated.

Space footings for line posts 10 feet on center maximum and at closer intervals when indicated.

Bottoms of the holes must be approximately 3-inches below the bottoms of the posts. Set bottom of each post not less than 36-inches below finished grade when in firm, undisturbed soil. Set posts deeper, as required, in soft and problem soils and for heavy, lateral loads.

Soil from excavations must be spread uniformly adjacent to the fence line or on areas of Government property, as directed.

When solid rock is encountered near the surface, the Contractor must drill into the rock at least 12 inches for line posts and at least 18 inches for end, pull, corner, and gate posts. Drill holes at least 1 inch greater in diameter than the largest dimension of the placed post.

If solid rock is below the soil overburden, Contractor must drill to the full depth required except that penetration into rock need not exceed the minimum depths specified above.

3.3 SETTING POSTS

Remove loose and foreign materials from holes and the soil moistened prior to placing concrete.



Provide tops of footings that are trowel finished and sloped or domed to shed water away from posts. Set hold-open devices, sleeves, and other accessories in concrete.

Keep exposed concrete moist for at least 7 calendar days after placement or cured with a membrane curing material, as approved.

3.3.1 Earth and Bedrock

Provide concrete bases of dimensions indicated . Compact concrete to eliminate voids, and finish to a dome shape.

3.3.2 Bracing

Brace gate, corner, end, and pull posts to nearest post with a horizontal brace used as a compression member, placed at least 12 inches below top of fence, and a diagonal truss rod and truss tightener used as a tension member .

3.4 CONCRETE STRENGTH

Provide Concrete that has attained at least 75 percent of its minimum 28-day compressive strength, but in no case sooner than 7 calendar days after placement, before rails, tension wire, or fabric are installed. Fabric and wires must not be stretched or gates hung until the concrete has attained its full design strength.

Samples and test concrete must be taken to determine strength as specified.

3.5 TOP RAILS

Provide top rails that run continuously through post caps or extension arms, bending to radius for curved runs. Provide expansion couplings as recommended by the fencing manufacturer.

3.6 BRACE ASSEMBLY

Contractor must provide bracing assemblies at end and gate posts and at both sides of corner and pull posts, with the horizontal brace located at midheight of the fabric.

Install brace assemblies so posts are plumb when the diagonal rod is under proper tension.

Provide two complete brace assemblies at corner and pull posts where required for stiffness and as indicated.

3.7 TENSION WIRE INSTALLATION

Install tension wire by weaving them through the fabric and tying them to each post with not less than 7-gage galvanized wire or by securing the wire to the fabric with 10-gage ties or clips spaced 24 inches on center.

3.8 FABRIC INSTALLATION

Provide Fabric in single lengths between stretch bars with bottom barbs placed approximately 1-1/2-inches above the ground line. Pull fabric taut and tied to posts, rails, and tension wire with wire ties and bands.



Install fabric on the security side of fence, unless otherwise directed.

Fabric must remain under tension after the pulling force is released.

3.9 STRETCHER BAR INSTALLATION

Thread stretcher bars through or clamped to fabric 4 inches on center and secured to posts with metal bands spaced 15 inches on center.

3.10 GATE INSTALLATION

Install gates plumb, level, and secure, with full opening without interference. Install ground set items in concrete for anchorage as recommended by the fence manufacturer. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricated where necessary.

3.11 TIE WIRES

Provide tie wires that are U-shaped to the pipe diameters to which attached. Twist ends of tie wires not less than two full turns and bent so as not to present a hazard.

3.12 FASTENERS

Install nuts for tension bands and hardware on the side of the fence opposite the fabric side. Peen ends of bolts to prevent removal of nuts.

3.13 ZINC-COATING REPAIR

Clean and repair galvanized surfaces damaged by welding or abrasion, and cut ends of fabric, or other cut sections with specified galvanizing repair material applied in strict conformance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.

3.14 TOLERANCES

Provide posts that are straight and plumb within a vertical tolerance of 1/4 inch after the fabric has been stretched. Provide fencing and gates that are true to line with no more than 1/2 inch deviation from the established centerline between line posts. Repair defects as directed.

3.15 SITE PREPARATION

3.15.1 Clearing and Grading

Clear fence line of trees, brush, and other obstacles to install fencing. Establish a graded, compacted fence line prior to fencing installation.

3.16 FENCE INSTALLATION

Install fence on prepared surfaces to line and grade indicated. Install fence in accordance with fence manufacturer's written installation instructions except as modified herein.

3.16.1 Post Spacing

Provide line posts spaced equidistantly apart, not exceeding 10 feeton center. Provide gate posts spaced as necessary for size of gate openings. Do not exceed 500 feet on straight runs between braced posts. Provide



corner or pull posts, with bracing in both directions, for changes in direction of 15 degrees or more, or for abrupt changes in grade. Provide drawings showing location of gate, corner, end, and pull posts.

3.16.2 Top and Bottom Tension Wire

Install tension wires before installing chain-link fabric, and pull wires taut. Place top and bottom tension wires within 8 inches of respective fabric line.

3.17 ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION

3.17.1 Post Caps

Design post caps to accommodate top rail. Install post caps as recommended by the manufacturer.

3.17.2 Padlocks

Provide padlocks for gate openings and provide chains that are securely attached to gate or gate posts. Provide padlocks keyed alike, and provide two keys for each padlock.

3.18 GROUNDING

Ground fencing as indicated on drawingsand specified.

Ground fences on each side of all gates, at each corner, at the closest approach to each building located within 50 feet of the fence, and where the fence alignment changes more than 15 degrees. Grounding locations must not exceed 650 feet. Bond each gate panel with a flexible bond strap to its gate post. Ground fences crossed by powerlines of 600 volts or more at or near the point of crossing and at distances not exceeding 150 feet on each side of crossing. Ground conductor must consist of No. 8 AWG solid copper wire. Grounding electrodes must be 3/4 inch by 10 foot long copper-clad steel rod. Drive electrodes into the earth so that the top of the electrode is at least 6 inches below the grade. Where driving is impracticable, electrodes must be buried a minimum of 12 inches deep and radially from the fence. The top of the electrode must be not less than 2 feet or more than 8 feet from the fence. Clamp ground conductor to the fence and electrodes with bronze grounding clamps to create electrical continuity between fence posts, fence fabric, and ground rods. Total resistance of the fence to ground must not be greater than 25 ohms.

3.19 SECURITY

Install new security fencing, remove existing security fencing, and perform related work to provide continuous security for facility. Schedule and fully coordinate work with Contracting Officer and cognizant Security Officer.

3.20 CLEANUP

Remove waste fencing materials and other debris from the work site.




SECTION 33 11 00

WATER DISTRIBUTION10/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)

AWWA B300 (2004) Hypochlorites

AWWA B301 (2004) Liquid Chlorine

AWWA C104/A21.4 (2003) Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water

AWWA C110/A21.10 (2008) Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings for Water

AWWA C111/A21.11 (2000) Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings

AWWA C153/A21.53 (2006) Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service

AWWA C500 (2002; R 2003) Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service

AWWA C502 (2005) Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants

AWWA C508 (2001) Swing-Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2 In. (50 mm) Through 24 In. (600 mm) NPS

AWWA C509 (2001) Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service


AWWA C605 (2005) Underground Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fittings for Water

AWWA C651 (2005; Errata 2005) Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains

AWWA C800 (2005) Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings

AWWA C900 (2007; Errata 2008) Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, and Fabricated



Fittings, 4 In. Through 12 In. (100 mm Through 300 mm), for Water Distribution

AWWA M23 (2002) Manual: PVC Pipe - Design and Installation


ASME B16.18 (2001; R 2005) Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings

ASME B16.22 (2001; R 2005) Standard for Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings

ASME B16.26 (2006) Standard for Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes


ASTM B 61 (2008) Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings

ASTM B 62 (2002) Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings

ASTM B 88 (2003) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube

ASTM D 1785 (2006) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC), Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120

ASTM D 2241 (2005) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series)

ASTM D 2774 (2008) Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pressure Piping

ASTM D 2855 (1996; R 2002) Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings

ASTM D 3139 (1998; R 2005) Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals

ASTM F 402 (2005) Safe Handling of Solvent Cements, Primers, and Cleaners Used for Joining Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings

ASTM F 477 (2008) Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe



MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS INDUSTRY (MSS)

MSS SP-80 (2008) Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves


NFPA 325 (1994) Fire Hazard Properties of Flammable Liquids, Gases, and Volatile Solids

NFPA 49 (2003) Hazardous Chemicals Data

NFPA 704 (2006) Identification of the Hazards of Materials for Emergency Response


UL 246 (1993; Rev thru Dec 1998) Hydrants for Fire-Protection Service

UL 262 (2004) Standard for Gate Valves for Fire-Protection Service

UL 312 (2004) Check Valves for Fire-Protection Service

UL 789 (2004; Rev thru Aug 2008) Indicator Posts for Fire-Protection Service

UNI-BELL PVC PIPE ASSOCIATION (UBPPA)

UBPPA UNI-B-3 (1992) Recommended Practice for the Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe (Nominal Diameters 4-36 Inch)

UBPPA UNI-B-8 (2000) Recommended Practice for the Direct Tapping of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Water Pipe (Nominal Diameters 6-12 Inch)

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Piping Materials

Water distribution main piping, fittings, joints, valves, and coupling

Water service line piping, fittings, joints, valves, and coupling

Hydrants



Indicator posts

Corporation stops

Valve boxes

Submit manufacturer's standard drawings or catalog cuts, except submit both drawings and cuts for push-on joints. Include information concerning gaskets with submittal for joints and couplings.

SD-05 Design Data

Design calculations of water piping

SD-06 Test Reports

Bacteriological Disinfection;

Test results from commercial laboratory verifying disinfection

SD-07 Certificates

Water distribution main piping, fittings, joints, valves, and coupling

Water service line piping, fittings, joints, valves, and coupling

Shop-applied lining and coating

Lining

Fire hydrants

Displacement Type Meters

Compound Type Meters

Certificates shall attest that tests set forth in each applicable referenced publication have been performed, whether specified in that publication to be mandatory or otherwise and that production control tests have been performed at the intervals or frequency specified in the publication. Other tests shall have been performed within 3 years of the date of submittal of certificates on the same type, class, grade, and size of material as is being provided for the project.


Delivery, storage, and handling

Installation procedures for water piping


1.3.1 Delivery and Storage

Inspect materials delivered to site for damage. Unload and store with



minimum handling. Store materials on site in enclosures or under protective covering. Store [plastic piping, jointing materials and] rubber gaskets under cover out of direct sunlight. Do not store materials directly on the ground. Keep inside of pipes, fittings, valves and hydrants free of dirt and debris.

1.3.2 Handling

Handle pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants, and other accessories in a manner to ensure delivery to the trench in sound undamaged condition. Take special care to avoid injury to coatings and linings on pipe and fittings; make repairs if coatings or linings are damaged. Do not place any other material or pipe inside a pipe or fitting after the coating has been applied. Carry, do not drag pipe to the trench. Use of pinch bars and tongs for aligning or turning pipe will be permitted only on the bare ends of the pipe. The interior of pipe and accessories shall be thoroughly cleaned of foreign matter before being lowered into the trench and shall be kept clean during laying operations by plugging or other approved method. Before installation, the pipe shall be inspected for defects. Material found to be defective before or after laying shall be replaced with sound material without additional expense to the Government. Store rubber gaskets that are not to be installed immediately, under cover out of direct sunlight.

1.3.2.1 Miscellaneous Plastic Pipe and Fittings

Handle Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) pipe and fittings in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Store plastic piping and jointing materials that are not to be installed immediately under cover out of direct sunlight.

Storage facilities shall be classified and marked in accordance with NFPA 704, with classification as indicated in NFPA 49 and NFPA 325.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 WATER DISTRIBUTION MAIN MATERIALS

2.1.1 Piping Materials

2.1.1.1 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Piping

a. Pipe and Fittings: Pipe, AWWA C900, shall be plain end or gasket bell end, Pressure Class 150 (DR 18) with cast-iron-pipe-equivalent OD.

c. Fittings for PVC pipe: Fittings shall be gray iron or ductile iron, AWWA C110/A21.10 or AWWA C153/A21.53, and have cement-mortar lining, AWWA C104/A21.4, standard thickness. Fittings with push-on joint ends shall conform to the same requirements as fittings with mechanical-joint ends, except that bell design shall be modified, as approved, for push-on joint suitable for use with PVC plastic pipe specified in this paragraph. Iron fittings and specials shall be cement-mortar lined in accordance with AWWA C104/A21.4.

d. Joints and Jointing Material: Joints for pipe shall be push-on joints, ASTM D 3139. Joints between pipe and metal fittings, valves, and other accessories shall be push-on joints ASTM D 3139,



or compression-type joints/mechanical joints, ASTM D 3139 and AWWA C111/A21.11. Provide each joint connection with an elastomeric gasket suitable for the bell or coupling with which it is to be used. Gaskets for push-on joints for pipe, ASTM F 477. Gaskets for push-on joints and compression-type joints/mechanical joints for joint connections between pipe and metal fittings, valves, and other accessories, AWWA C111/A21.11, respectively, for push-on joints and mechanical joints. Mechanically coupled joints using a sleeve-type mechanical coupling, as specified in paragraph entitled "Sleeve-Type Mechanical Couplings," may be used as an optional jointing method in lieu of push-on joints on plain-end PVC plastic pipe, subject to the limitations specified for mechanically coupled joints using a sleeve-type mechanical coupling and to the use of internal stiffeners as specified for compression-type joints in ASTM D 3139.

2.1.2 Valves, Hydrants, and Other Water Main Accessories

2.1.2.1 Gate Valves on Buried Piping

AWWA C500, AWWA C509, or UL 262. Unless otherwise specified, valves conforming to: (1) AWWA C500 shall be nonrising stem type with double-disc gates and mechanical-joint ends or push-on joint ends as appropriate for the adjoining pipe, (2) AWWA C509 shall be nonrising stem type with mechanical-joint ends or resilient-seated gate valves 3 to 12 inches in size, and (3) UL 262 shall be inside-screw type with operating nut, double-disc or split-wedge type gate, designed for a hydraulic working pressure of 150 psi, and shall have mechanical-joint ends or push-on joint ends as appropriate for the pipe to which it is joined. Materials for UL 262 valves shall conform to the reference standards specified in AWWA C500. Valves shall open by counterclockwise rotation of the valve stem. Stuffing boxes shall have 0-ring stem seals. Stuffing boxes shall be bolted and constructed so as to permit easy removal of parts for repair. Where a post indicator is shown, the valve shall have an indicator post flange; indicator post flange for AWWA C500 valve shall conform to the applicable requirements of UL 262.

2.1.2.2 Gate Valves in Valve Pit

AWWA C500, AWWA C509, or UL 262. Unless otherwise specified, valves conforming to: (1) AWWA C500 shall be nonrising stem type with double-disc gates and flanged ends, (2) AWWA C509 shall be nonrising stem type with flanged ends, and (3) UL 262 shall be inside-screw type, shall have double-disc or split-wedge type gate and flanged ends, and shall be designed for a hydraulic working pressure of 150 psi. Materials for UL 262 valves shall conform to the reference standards specified in AWWA C500. Provide valves with handwheels that open by counterclockwise rotation of the valve stem. Stuffing boxes shall be bolted and constructed so as to permit easy removal of parts for repair.

2.1.2.3 Check Valves

Swing-check type, AWWA C508 or UL 312. Valves conforming to: (1) AWWA C508 shall have iron or steel body and cover and flanged ends, and (2) UL 312 shall have cast iron or steel body and cover, flanged ends, and designed for a working pressure of 150 psi. Materials for UL 312 valves shall conform to the reference standards specified in AWWA C508. Valves shall have clear port opening. Valves shall be spring-loaded. Flanges shall be Class 125 conforming to ASME B16.1.



2.1.2.4 Fire Hydrants

Dry-barrel type. Paint hydrants with at least one coat of primer and two coats of yellow enamel paint, except use red enamel paint for tops of hydrants in non-potable water systems. Stencil hydrant number and main size on the hydrant barrel using black stencil paint.

a. Dry-Barrel Type Fire Hydrants: Dry-barrel type hydrants, AWWA C502 or UL 246, "Base Valve" design, shall have 6 inch inlet, 5 1/4 inch valve opening, one 4 1/2 inch pumper connection, and two 2 1/2 inch hose connections. Inlet shall have mechanical-joint end only; end shall conform to the applicable requirements as specified for the joint. Size and shape of operating nut, cap nuts, and threads on hose and pumper connections shall be as specified in AWWA C502.

2.1.2.5 Indicator Posts

UL 789. Provide for gate valves where indicated.

2.1.2.6 Valve Boxes

Provide a valve box for each gate valve on buried piping, except where indicator post is shown. Valve boxes shall be of cast iron or precast concrete of a size suitable for the valve on which it is to be used and shall be adjustable. Cast-iron boxes shall have a minimum cover and wall thickness of 3/16 inch. Provide a round head. Cast the word "WATER" on the lid. The least diameter of the shaft of the box shall be 5 1/4 inches. Cast-iron box shall have a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

2.1.2.7 Valve Pits

Valve pits shall be constructed at locations indicated or as required above and in accordance with the details shown.

2.1.2.8 Tracer Wire for Nonmetallic Piping

Provide bare copper or aluminum wire not less than 0.10 inch in diameter in sufficient length to be continuous over each separate run of nonmetallic pipe.

2.2 WATER SERVICE LINE MATERIALS

2.2.1 Piping Materials

2.2.1.1 Copper Tubing and Associated Fittings

Tubing, ASTM B 88, Type K. Fittings for solder-type joint, ASME B16.18 or ASME B16.22; fittings for compression-type joint, ASME B16.26, flared tube type.

2.2.1.2 Plastic Piping

Plastic pipe and fittings shall bear the seal of the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) for potable water service. Plastic pipe and fittings shall be supplied from the same manufacturer.

a. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Piping with Elastomeric-Gasket Joints:



Pipe shall conform to dimensional requirements of ASTM D 1785 Schedule 40, with joints meeting the requirements of 150 psi working pressure, 200 psi hydrostatic test pressure, unless otherwise shown or specified.

b. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Piping with Solvent Cement Joints:

Pipe shall conform to dimensional requirements of ASTM D 1785 or ASTM D 2241 with joints meeting the requirements of 150 psi working pressure and 200 psi hydrostatic test pressure.

2.2.2 Water Service Line Appurtenances

2.2.2.1 Corporation Stops

Ground key type; bronze, ASTM B 61 or ASTM B 62; and suitable for the working pressure of the system. Ends shall be suitable for solder-joint, or flared tube compression type joint. Threaded ends for inlet and outlet of corporation stops, AWWA C800; coupling nut for connection to flared copper tubing, ASME B16.26.

2.2.2.2 Curb or Service Stops

Ground key, round way, inverted key type; made of bronze, ASTM B 61 or ASTM B 62; and suitable for the working pressure of the system. Ends shall be as appropriate for connection to the service piping. Arrow shall be cast into body of the curb or service stop indicating direction of flow.

2.2.2.3 Goosenecks

Type K copper tubing. Joint ends for goosenecks shall be appropriate for connecting to corporation stop and service line. Length of goosenecks shall be in accordance with standard practice.

2.2.2.4 Gate Valves Smaller than 3 Inch in Size on Buried Piping

Gate valves smaller than 3 inch size on Buried Piping MSS SP-80, Class 150, solid wedge, nonrising stem. Valves shall have flanged or threaded end connections, with a union on one side of the valve. Provide handwheel operators.

2.2.2.5 Gate Valves Smaller Than 3 Inch Size in Valve Pits

MSS SP-80, Class 150, solid wedge, inside screw, rising stem. Valves shall have flanged or threaded end connections, with a union on one side of the valve and a handwheel operator.

2.2.2.6 Curb Boxes

Provide a curb box for each curb or service stop. Curb boxes shall be of cast iron of a size suitable for the stop on which it is to be used. Provide a round head. Cast the word "WATER" on the lid. Each box shall have a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

2.2.2.7 Valve Boxes

Provide a valve box for each gate valve on buried piping. Valve boxes shall be of cast iron of a size suitable for the valve on which it is to be



used and shall be adjustable. Provide a round head. Cast the word "WATER" on the lid. The least diameter of the shaft of the box shall be 5 1/4 inches. Cast-iron box shall have a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

2.2.2.8 Meters

See Section 20 00 00 for meter requirements.

2.2.2.9 Disinfection

Chlorinating materials shall conform to the following:

Chlorine, Liquid: AWWA B301.

Hypochlorite, Calcium and Sodium: AWWA B300.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPELINES

3.1.1 General Requirements for Installation of Pipelines

These requirements shall apply to all pipeline installation except where specific exception is made in the "Special Requirements..." paragraphs.

3.1.1.1 Location of Water Lines

Terminate the work covered by this section at a point approximately 5 feet from the building, unless otherwise indicated. Where the location of the water line is not clearly defined by dimensions on the drawings, do not lay water line closer horizontally than 10 feet from any sewer line. Where water lines cross under gravity sewer lines, encase sewer line fully in concrete for a distance of at least 10 feet on each side of the crossing, unless sewer line is made of pressure pipe with rubber-gasketed joints and no joint is located within 3 feet horizontally of the crossing. Lay water lines which cross sewer force mains and inverted siphons at least 2 feet above these sewer lines; when joints in the sewer line are closer than 3 feet horizontally from the water line, encase these joints in concrete. Do not lay water lines in the same trench with gas lines electric wiring. Copper tubing shall not be installed in the same trench with ferrous piping materials.

Where water piping is required to be installed within 3 feet of existing structures, the water pipe shall be sleeved as required in Paragraph "Casting Pipe". The Contractor shall install the water pipe and sleeve ensuring that there will be no damage to the structures and no settlement or movement of foundations or footings.

a. Water Piping Installation Parallel With Sewer Piping

(1) Normal Conditions: Lay water piping at least 10 feet horizontally from a sewer or sewer manhole whenever possible. Measure the distance edge-to-edge.

(2) Unusual Conditions: When local conditions prevent a horizontal separation of 10 feet, the water piping may be laid closer to a sewer or sewer manhole provided that:



(a) The bottom (invert) of the water piping shall be at least 18 inches above the top (crown) of the sewer piping.

(b) Where this vertical separation cannot be obtained, the sewer piping shall be constructed of AWWA-approved water pipe and pressure tested in place without leakage prior to backfilling. Approved waste water disposal method shall be utilized.

(c) The sewer manhole shall be of watertight construction and tested in place.

b. Installation of Water Piping Crossing Sewer Piping

(1) Normal Conditions: Water piping crossing above sewer piping shall be laid to provide a separation of at least 18 inches between the bottom of the water piping and the top of the sewer piping.

(2) Unusual Conditions: When local conditions prevent a vertical separation described above, use the following construction:

(a) Sewer piping passing over or under water piping shall be constructed of AWWA-approved ductile iron water piping, pressure tested in place without leakage prior to backfilling.

(b) Water piping passing under sewer piping shall, in addition, be protected by providing a vertical separation of at least 18 inches between the bottom of the sewer piping and the top of the water piping; adequate structural support for the sewer piping to prevent excessive deflection of the joints and the settling on and breaking of the water piping; and that the length, minimum 20 feet, of the water piping be centered at the point of the crossing so that joints shall be equidistant and as far as possible from the sewer piping.

c. Sewer Piping or Sewer Manholes: No water piping shall pass through or come in contact with any part of a sewer manhole.

3.1.1.2 Earthwork

Perform earthwork operations in accordance with Section 31 00 00.

3.1.1.3 Pipe Laying and Jointing

Remove fins and burrs from pipe and fittings. Before placing in position, clean pipe, fittings, valves, and accessories, and maintain in a clean condition. Provide proper facilities for lowering sections of pipe into trenches. Do not under any circumstances drop or dump pipe, fittings, valves, or any other water line material into trenches. Cut pipe in a neat workmanlike manner accurately to length established at the site and work into place without springing or forcing. Replace by one of the proper length any pipe or fitting that does not allow sufficient space for proper installation of jointing material. Blocking or wedging between bells and spigots will not be permitted. Lay bell-and-spigot pipe with the bell end pointing in the direction of laying. Grade the pipeline in straight lines; avoid the formation of dips and low points. Support pipe at proper elevation and grade. Secure firm, uniform support. Wood support blocking will not be permitted. Lay pipe so that the full length of each section of pipe and each fitting will rest solidly on the pipe bedding; excavate



recesses to accommodate bells, joints, and couplings. Provide anchors and supports where necessary for fastening work into place. Make proper provision for expansion and contraction of pipelines. Keep trenches free of water until joints have been properly made. At the end of each work day, close open ends of pipe temporarily with wood blocks or bulkheads. Do not lay pipe when conditions of trench or weather prevent installation. Depth of cover over top of pipe shall not be less than 5-1/2 feet.

3.1.1.4 Installation of Tracer Wire

Install a continuous length of tracer wire for the full length of each run of nonmetallic pipe. Attach wire to top of pipe in such manner that it will not be displaced during construction operations.

3.1.1.5 Connections to Existing Water Lines

Make connections to existing water lines after approval is obtained and with a minimum interruption of service on the existing line. Make connections to existing lines under pressure in accordance with the recommended procedures of the manufacturer of the pipe being tapped.

3.1.1.6 Penetrations

Pipe passing through walls of valve pits and structures shall be provided with ductile-iron or Schedule 40 steel wall sleeves. Annular space between walls and sleeves shall be filled with rich cement mortar. Annular space between pipe and sleeves shall be filled with mastic.

3.1.1.7 Flanged Pipe

Flanged pipe shall only be installed above ground or with the flanges in valve pits.

3.1.2 Special Requirements for Installation of Water Mains

3.1.2.1 Installation of PVC Plastic Water Main Pipe

Installation of PVC Plastic Water Main Pipe and Associated Fittings: Unless otherwise specified, install pipe and fittings in accordance with paragraph entitled "General Requirements for Installation of Pipelines"; with the requirements of UBPPA UNI-B-3 for laying of pipe, joining PVC pipe to fittings and accessories, and setting of hydrants, valves, and fittings; and with the recommendations for pipe joint assembly and appurtenance installation in AWWA M23, Chapter 7, "Installation."

a. Jointing: Make push-on joints with the elastomeric gaskets specified for this type joint, using either elastomeric-gasket bell-end pipe or elastomeric-gasket couplings. For pipe-to-pipe push-on joint connections, use only pipe with push-on joint ends having factory-made bevel; for push-on joint connections to metal fittings, valves, and other accessories, cut spigot end of pipe off square and re-bevel pipe end to a bevel approximately the same as that on ductile-iron pipe used for the same type of joint. Use an approved lubricant recommended by the pipe manufacturer for push-on joints. Assemble push-on joints for pipe-to-pipe joint connections in accordance with the requirements of UBPPA UNI-B-3 for laying the pipe and the recommendations in AWWA M23, Chapter 7, "Installation," for pipe joint assembly. Assemble push-on joints for connection to fittings, valves, and other accessories



in accordance with the requirements of UBPPA UNI-B-3 for joining PVC pipe to fittings and accessories and with the applicable requirements of AWWA C600 for joint assembly. Make compression-type joints/mechanical joints with the gaskets, glands, bolts, nuts, and internal stiffeners previously specified for this type joint; assemble in accordance with the requirements of UBPPA UNI-B-3 for joining PVC pipe to fittings and accessories, with the applicable requirements of AWWA C600 for joint assembly, and with the recommendations of Appendix A to AWWA C111/A21.11. Cut off spigot end of pipe for compression-type joint/mechanical-joint connections and do not re-bevel. Assemble joints made with sleeve-type mechanical couplings in accordance with the recommendations of the coupling manufacturer using internal stiffeners as previously specified for compression-type joints.

b. Offset: Maximum offset in alignment between adjacent pipe joints shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Contracting Officer, but shall not exceed 5 degrees.

c. Pipe Anchorage: Provide concrete thrust blocks (reaction backing) for pipe anchorage, except where metal harness is indicated. Thrust blocks shall be in accordance with the requirements of UBPPA UNI-B-3 for reaction or thrust blocking and plugging of dead ends, except that size and positioning of thrust blocks shall be as indicated. Use concrete, conforming to Section 32 13 13.06 or equivalent. Metal harness shall be as indicated.

d. Fittings: Install in accordance with AWWA C605.

3.1.2.2 Installation of Valves and Hydrants

a. Installation of Valves: Install gate valves, AWWA C500 and UL 262, in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C600 for valve-and-fitting installation and with the recommendations of the Appendix ("Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Gate Valves") to AWWA C500. Install gate valves, AWWA C509, in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C600 for valve-and-fitting installation and with the recommendations of the Appendix ("Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Gate Valves") to AWWA C509. Install gate valves on PVC water mains in accordance with the recommendations for appurtenance installation in AWWA M23, Chapter 7, "Installation." Install check valves in accordance with the applicable requirements of AWWA C600 for valve-and-fitting installation. Make and assemble joints to gate valves and check valves as specified for making and assembling the same type joints between pipe and fittings.

b. Installation of Hydrants: Install hydrants in accordance with AWWA C600 for hydrant installation and as indicated. Make and assemble joints as specified for making and assembling the same type joints between pipe and fittings. Provide metal harness as specified under pipe anchorage requirements for the respective pipeline material to which hydrant is attached. Install hydrants with the 4 1/2 inch connections facing the adjacent paved surface. If there are two paved adjacent surfaces, contact the Contracting Officer for further instructions.



3.1.3 Installation of Water Service Piping

3.1.3.1 Location

Connect water service piping to the building service where the building service has been installed. Where building service has not been installed, terminate water service lines approximately 5 feet from the building line at or at the point[s] indicated; such water service lines shall be closed with plugs or caps.

3.1.3.2 Service Line Connections to Water Mains

Connect service lines 1 1/2 inch size to the main by a corporation stop and gooseneck and install a service stop below the frostline. Connect service lines 2 inch size to the main with a rigid connection or a corporation stop and gooseneck and install a gate valve on service line below the frostline as indicated. Connect service lines to PVC plastic water mains in accordance with UBPPA UNI-B-8 and the recommendations of AWWA M23, Chapter 9, "Service Connections."

3.1.4 Special Requirements for Installation of Water Service Piping

3.1.4.1 Installation of Plastic Piping

Install pipe and fittings in accordance with paragraph entitled "General Requirements for Installation of Pipelines" and with the applicable requirements of ASTM D 2774 and ASTM D 2855, unless otherwise specified. Handle solvent cements used to join plastic piping in accordance with ASTM F 402.

a. Jointing: Make plastic pipe joints to other pipe materials in accordance with the recommendations of the plastic pipe manufacturer.

b. Plastic Pipe Connections to Appurtenances: Connect plastic pipe service lines to corporation stops and gate valves in accordance with the recommendations of the plastic pipe manufacturer.

3.1.5 Disinfection

Prior to disinfection, obtain Contracting Officer approval of the proposed method for disposal of waste water from disinfection procedures. Disinfect new water piping and existing water piping affected by Contractor's operations in accordance with AWWA C651. Fill piping systems with solution containing minimum of 50 parts per million of available chlorine and allow solution to stand for minimum of 24 hours. Flush solution from the systems with domestic water until maximum residual chlorine content is within the range of 0.2 and 0.5 parts per million, or the residual chlorine content of domestic water supply. Obtain at least two consecutive satisfactory bacteriological samples from new water piping, analyze by a certified laboratory, and submit the results prior to the new water piping being placed into service. Disinfection of systems supplying nonpotable water is not required.


3.2.1 Field Tests and Inspections

Prior to hydrostatic testing, obtain Contracting Officer approval of the



proposed method for disposal of waste water from hydrostatic testing. The Contracting Officer will conduct field inspections and witness field tests specified in this section. The Contractor shall perform field tests, and provide labor, equipment, and incidentals required for testing. The Contractor shall produce evidence, when required, that any item of work has been constructed in accordance with the drawings and specifications. Do not begin testing on any section of a pipeline where concrete thrust blocks have been provided until at least 5 days after placing of the concrete.

3.2.2 Testing Procedure

Test water mains and water service lines in accordance with the applicable specified standard, except for the special testing requirements given in paragraph entitled "Special Testing Requirements." Test PVC plastic water mains and water service lines made with PVC plastic water main pipe in accordance with the requirements of UBPPA UNI-B-3 for pressure and leakage tests. The amount of leakage on pipelines made of PVC plastic water main pipe shall not exceed the amounts given in UBPPA UNI-B-3, except that at joints made with sleeve-type mechanical couplings, no leakage will be allowed. Test water service lines in accordance with applicable requirements of AWWA C600 for hydrostatic testing. No leakage will be allowed at copper tubing joints (soldered, compression type, brazed) plastic pipe joints and joints.

3.2.3 Special Testing Requirements

For pressure test, use a hydrostatic pressure 50 psi greater than the maximum working pressure of the system, except that for those portions of the system having pipe size larger than 2 inches in diameter, hydrostatic test pressure shall be not less than 200 psi. Hold this pressure for not less than 2 hours. Prior to the pressure test, fill that portion of the pipeline being tested with water for a soaking period of not less than 24 hours. For leakage test, use a hydrostatic pressure not less than the maximum working pressure of the system. Leakage test may be performed at the same time and at the same test pressure as the pressure test.

3.3 CLEANUP

Upon completion of the installation of water lines, and appurtenances, all debris and surplus materials resulting from the work shall be removed.




SECTION 33 16 15

WATER STORAGE STEEL TANKS04/08

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)

AWWA C104/A21.4 (2008) Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water

AWWA C110/A21.10 (2008) Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings for Water

AWWA C111/A21.11 (2000) Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings

AWWA C115/A21.15 (2005) Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe With Ductile-Iron or Gray-Iron Threaded Flanges

AWWA C150/A21.50 (2002; Errata 2003) Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe

AWWA C151/A21.51 (2002; Errata 2002) Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water

AWWA C500 (2002; R 2003) Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service

AWWA C508 (2001) Swing-Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2 In. (50 mm) Through 24 In. (600 mm) NPS


AWWA C652 (2002) Disinfection of Water-Storage Facilities

AWWA D100 (2007) Welded Steel Tanks for Water Storage

AWWA D103 (1997) Factory-Coated Bolted Steel Tanks for Water Storage


ASME B16.3 (2006) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Classes 150 and 300

ASME B40.100 (2005) Pressure Gauges and Gauge



Attachments


ASTM A 197/A 197M (2000; R 2006) Standard Specification for Cupola Malleable Iron

ASTM A 53/A 53M (2007) Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless

MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS INDUSTRY (MSS)

MSS SP-80 (2008) Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves

NSF INTERNATIONAL (NSF)

NSF 61 (2008) Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects

THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC)

SSPC Paint 104 (1982; E 2004) Paint Specification No. 104 White or Tinted Alkyd Paint

SSPC Paint 21 (1982; E 2004) Paint Specification No. 21 White or Colored Silicone Alkyd Paint (Type I, High Gloss and Type II, Medium Gloss)

SSPC Paint 25 (1997; E 2004) Paint Specification No. 25Zinc Oxide, Alkyd, Linseed Oil Primer for Use Over Hand Cleaned Steel Type I and Type II

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)

MIL-PRF-23236 (Rev C) Coating Systems for Ship Structures

U.S. FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION (FAA)

FAA AC 150/5345-43 (Rev F) Obstruction Lighting Equipment


1.2.1 Design and Construction Standards

The design, fabrication, and erection of 2 ground level steel reservoir tanks shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements of AWWA D100 or AWWA D103 except as modified herein. Earthquake design shall conform to Seismic Design according to Category B (IBC.) No additional thickness for corrosion allowance will be required. Design metal temperature shall be 50 degrees F. The reservoir shall be designed for a peak wind speed of 90 mph, Exposure C and snow load of 25 psi.



1.2.2 Welding

Qualification of welding procedures, welders, and welding operators shall be in accordance with Section 8.2 of AWWA D100.

1.2.3 Design Requirements

1.2.4 Sizing and Design

Sizing and design of elevated tank shall be in accordance with Section 4 of AWWA D100. Submit a certificate signed by a registered professional engineer providing: (1) description of the entire tank and foundation structural design loading conditions, (2) description of structural design methods and codes used in establishing allowable stresses and safety factors, (3) statement that the structural design has been checked by experienced engineers specializing in hydraulic structures to ensure that design calculations for member sizes, dimensions, and fabrication processes are as prescribed by ACI and AWWA standards, and (4) certification that the completed work was inspected in accordance with AWWA D100 or AWWA D103 as applicable.

1.2.5 Reservoir

The on ground reservoir tanks shall have a storage capacity of 50,000 gallons each. The high-water level of reservoir shall be at elevation 652.0 with the top of foundation approximately at elevation 632.0. The range between high and low water levels will be approximately 10 feet. Existing grade at proposed location is approximately elevation 631. The reservoir shall have such standard shell height and such diameter as will meet the requirements for the selected standard capacity and for the high-water level specified above. The reservoir may have supported toriconical roof, self-supporting umbrella roof, self-supporting dome roof, or ellipsoidal roof, as approved. The reservoir shall be of welded construction.

1.2.6 Sizing Reservoir

Section 6 of AWWA D100.

1.2.7 Coatings Certification

Coating materials for interior applications and all other materials which will be in normal contact with potable water shall conform to NSF 61. Certification by an independent third-party organization that all interior coatings and materials, that come in contact with potable water, comply with NSF 61 shall be provided.

1.2.8 Cathodic Protection

AWWA D104

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings



Tank Installation

Detail and erection drawings, before proceeding with any fabrication. Complete drawings with details of steel, pipe, and concrete work, and of the assembling of items required for the total installation. Use standard welding symbols as recommended by the American Welding Society. Details of welded joints referenced on the drawings shall be included.

SD-03 Product Data

System DescriptionFoundations

Design Analyses and Calculations.

SD-06 Test Reports

Tank InstallationTesting of Valves and Piping

Each coating manufacturer's technical data, application instructions, Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS), and certificate for compliance for VOC content.

Copies of the following test results:

a. Manufacturer's mill test reports for plate material.

b. Mill and shop inspections by a commercial inspection agency.

c. After acceptance of the structure, the radiographic film and test segments.

d. At the conclusion of the work, a written report prepared by the Contractor covering the hydrostatic test and certifying that the work was inspected in accordance with Section 11.2.1 of AWWA D100.

SD-07 Certificates

System DescriptionFoundations

Certification by an independent third-party organization that all interior coating and materials that come in contact with the potable water comply with NSF 61.

A certificate signed by a registered professional engineer, providing the following information:

a. Description of the structural design loading conditions used for the design of entire tank including the foundation.

b. Description of the structural design method and codes used in establishing the allowable stresses and safety factors applied in the design.



c. A statement verifying that the structural design has been checked by experienced engineers specializing in hydraulic structures.

d. A statement verifying that the detail drawings have been checked by experienced engineers specializing in hydraulic structures to determine that they agree with the design calculations in member sizes, dimensions, and fabricating process as prescribed by applicable ACI and AWWA standards.


Deliver paint in unopened containers with unbroken seals and labels showing designated name, specification number, color, directions for use, manufacturer, and date of manufacture, legible and intact at time of use. Handle and store water storage tank systems, components, and parts to prevent distortions and other damage that could affect their structural, mechanical, or electrical integrity. Replace damaged items that cannot be restored to original condition. Store items subject to deterioration by exposure to elements, in a well-drained location, protected from weather, and accessible for inspection and handling.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

Provide materials conforming to the following requirements:

2.1.1 Steel

Section 2 of AWWA D100 or Section 2 of AWWA D103.

2.1.2 Shop Fabrication


2.1.3 Ductile-Iron Pipe

Pipe for fluid conductors, except for overflow pipe, shall be ductile-iron pipe and shall be either of the following:

2.1.3.1 Bell-and-Plain End Pipe

AWWA C150/A21.50 and AWWA C151/A21.51, for not less than 150 psi working pressure, unless otherwise shown or specified. Joints shall be push-on or mechanical-joint conforming to AWWA C111/A21.11. Pipe shall be cement mortar lined in accordance with AWWA C104/A21.4. Linings shall be standard thickness.

2.1.3.2 Flanged Pipe

Flanged pipes shall conform to the applicable portions of AWWA C110/A21.10, AWWA C115/A21.15 and AWWA C151/A21.51, for not less than 150 psi working pressure, unless otherwise shown or specified. Pipe shall have flanged ends in accordance with AWWA C115/A21.15. Pipe shall be cement mortar lined in accordance with AWWA C104/A21.4. Linings shall be standard thickness.



2.1.4 Specials and Fittings (except for overflow pipe)

2.1.4.1 Ductile-Iron with Bell-and-Plain End

AWWA C110/A21.10 and AWWA C151/A21.51 for not less than 150 psi working pressure, unless otherwise shown or specified. Specials and fittings shall be cement mortar lined in accordance with AWWA C104/A21.4. Linings shall be standard thickness.

2.1.4.2 Ductile-Iron with Flanged Ends

AWWA C110/A21.10 and AWWA C151/A21.51 for not less than 150 psi working pressure unless otherwise shown or specified. Fittings shall have flanged ends in accordance with AWWA C110/A21.10. Specials and fittings shall be cement mortar lined in accordance with AWWA C104/A21.4. Linings shall be standard thickness.

2.1.4.3 Fittings for Screw-Joint Pipe

Malleable-iron, galvanized, 150 psi, ASTM A 197/A 197M, threaded ends, ASME B16.3.

2.1.4.4 Joints Inside Valve Chamber

All joints inside the valve chamber shall be flanged.

2.1.5 Valves

2.1.5.1 Gate Valves

Gate valves shall be opened by turning counterclockwise. Valves 3 inches and larger shall be iron body, brass mounted, conforming to AWWA C500. Valves smaller than 3 inches shall be all bronze and shall conform to MSS SP-80, Type 1, class 150. Valves 3 inches or larger located in valve chambers shall be equipped with hand-operating wheels and shall be flanged.

2.1.5.2 Check Valves

Check valves shall be of the horizontal swing-check type, suitable for the purpose and the operating conditions. The body shall be iron and shall have a removable gate assembly and a cover removable for inspection. The gate, gate seat, shaft, gate studs, and nuts shall be bronze or other suitable alloy. Valves shall conform to AWWA C508 or as indicated on the mechanical drawings or in the mechanical specification for the pumphouse component.

2.1.5.3 Altitude Valve

The supply to the reservoir shall be controlled by an altitude valve size as indicated, automatic in operation and accurately set to prevent overflow of the reservoirs. The valve shall have flanged ends and a heavy cast iron body, shall be bronze fitted with renewable cups and seats, and shall be designed without metal-to-metal seats. The valve shall be cushioned when opening and closing to prevent water hammer or shock. Valves shall be provided with a travel indicator.

2.1.6 Pressure Gauge

Pressure gauge of the direct-reading type, equipped with a shutoff cock,



shall be provided, in the valve chamber, on the tank side and on the discharge side of the check or altitude valve. Gauges shall have 6 inch dials, shall be stem mounted, and shall conform to ASME B40.100. Accuracy of gauges shall be Grade A or better. Gauges shall be calibrated in psi in not more than 2 psi increments from 0 to 50 psi in excess of the normal operating pressure at the tank.

2.2 ASSEMBLIES

2.2.1 Tank Accessories

Section 7 of AWWA D100 or Section 5 of AWWA D103 and as specified. Additional requirements for accessories are as follows:

2.2.1.1 Manholes and Pipe Connections

Section 7 of AWWA D100 and Section 5 of AWWA D103 represent the minimum requirements. Number, type, location, and size of manholes and pipe connections shall be as shown on the drawings. Inlet pipe connections to extend 24 inches above tank bottom and shall be provided with deflectors as shown on the drawings. Outlet pipe connections to extend 12 inches above tank bottom and shall be provided with vortex breakers as shown on the drawings.

2.2.1.2 Overflow

The overflow for the tank shall consist of an overflow weir and outside drop pipe, adequately supported and capable of discharging at a rate of 1500 gpm without the water level exceeding 6515 (8 inch minimum size). The weir shall be located as indicated. The stub overflow shall be steel, ASTM A 53/A 53M or equal, and shall be fitted with a screen overflow pipe shall be steel, ASTM A 53/A 53M or equal, and shall terminate 1 to 2 feet above grade and shall be fitted with a flapper valve or screen to prevent ingress of animals and insects.

2.2.1.3 Vent

Vent shall be welded to the cover plate of the center manhole on the roof. Vent will be tank manufacturer's standard type mushroom vent with aluminum bird screen. The free area of the vent shall be sized 50 percent in excess of the 1500 gpm pump-in rate and 2000 gpm pump-out rate. Screening for vent shall conform to Section 5.7.2 of AWWA D100 or Section 5.7.2 of AWWA D103which ensures fail-safe operation in the event that screen frosts over and the bottom of the screen shall be sufficiently elevated for snow consideration in the area.

2.2.1.4 Ladders and Safety Devices

Ladders and safety devices shall be provided in accordance with Sections 7.4 and 7.5 of AWWA D100 or Sections 5.4 and 5.5 of AWWA D103. Location of ladders shall be as shown on the drawings. Sections 7.4 and 7.5 of AWWA D100 and Secions 5.4 and 5.5 of AWWA D103 represent the minimum requirement. In addition, safety cage, rest platforms, roof ladder handrails, and other safety devices shall be provided as required by federal or local laws or regulations.

2.2.1.5 Scaffold Cable Support

Provision shall be made for the attachment of a scaffold cable support at



the top of the roof on welded tanks.

2.2.1.6 Coating for Welded Tanks

Provide exterior coating systems conforming to Section 09 97 13.27, "Exterior Coating of Steel Structures," and interior coating systems conforming to Section 09 97 13.16, "Interior Coating of Welded Steel Water Tanks."

2.2.1.7 Coating for Bolted Tanks

As supplied by the manufacturer.

2.2.2 Pumphouse

See plans for pumphouse building pump, valve and pipe requirements.

2.2.3 Anchors for Reservoirs

The following requirements shall be met:

a. An adequate number of anchors designed to prevent overturning of the reservoir when empty shall be installed. If anchor bolts are used, the nominal diameter shall not be less than one inch, plus a corrosion allowance of at least 1/4 inch on the diameter. If anchor straps are used, they shall be pre-tensioned before welding to the tank shell.

b. The anchor bolts shall be a right angle bend, hook, or plate washer, while anchor straps shall have only a plate welded to the bottom. The anchors shall be inserted into the foundation to resist the computed uplift.

c. Attachment of anchors to the shell shall not add significant localized stresses to the shell. The method of attachment shall consider the effects of deflection and rotation of the tank shell. Anchors shall not be attached to the tank bottom. Attachment of the anchor bolts to the shell shall be through stiffened chair-type assemblies or anchor rings of adequate size and height.

2.3 CONCRETE WORK

Concrete work shall conform to Section 03 31 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 FOUNDATIONS

Foundations for the reservoir shall be constructed of concrete, reinforced where necessary, and designed in accordance with Section 12 of AWWA D100 or Sections 11 and 8.5 of AWWA D103 for earth with a bearing value of 2000 psf, at elevation 626, and constructed in conformance with the applicable requirements of Section 03 31 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE, except as shown or specified herein. Over excavate tank foundation and base area to elevation 626 and backfill with select granular material to plan grade. Place soil according to Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK. An AWWA D100 Type 1 Type 2 or an AWWA D103 Type 1 or Type 2 foundation shall be provided for the reservoir. Factor of safety on overturning of reservoir under design wind load shall be 1.33 minimum. When a footing is required,



an inverted truncated pyramid of earth with 2 on 1 side slopes above top of footing may be used in determining overturning stability.

3.2 EXCAVATING, FILLING, AND GRADING

Excavating, filling, and grading shall conform to the applicable requirements of Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.

3.3 CATHODIC PROTECTION

Cathodic protection shall be provided, conforming to Section 26 42 15.00 10 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM (STEEL WATER TANKS).

3.4 OBSTRUCTION LIGHTINGObstruction lighting shall be provided and installed as shown, and shall conform to Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM or FAA AC 150/5345-43.

3.5 BEACON

Beacon shall be provided and installed as shown, and shall conform to Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

3.6 TANK INSTALLATION

Tank installation shall be in accordance with the following requirements:

3.6.1 Welding


3.6.2 Erection


3.6.3 Inspections and Testing

Tank inspection and testing shall be in accordance with Section 11 of AWWA D100 or Section 9 of AWWA D103. Mill and shop inspections are required and shall be performed by an approved commercial inspection agency. Perform the radiographic inspections of the welded tank shell, the hydrostatic test and the vacuum box leak test of the tank bottom. Final hydrostatic and leak tests shall be performed before painting of welded tanks.

3.7 PIPING INSTALLATION (EXCEPT FOR OVERFLOW PIPING)

3.7.1 General Guidelines

Where details of fabrication or installation are not shown on the drawings, installation shall conform to Section 1 and 3 of AWWA C600.

3.7.2 Testing of Valves and Piping

After the reservoir are been erected and the valves and piping installed, and before field painting is begun, the valves and piping shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with Section 4 of AWWA C600. Replace with sound material any defective material disclosed by the pressure test; the test shall be repeated until the test results are satisfactory.



3.7.3 Plugging Ends

Pipe ends left for future connections shall be capped or plugged as directed.

3.8 PAINTING AND COATING OF TANK

Each coating manufacturer's technical data, application instructions, Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS), and certificate for compliance for VOC content shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer. Application, curing time, mixing and thinning of the coating materials shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturers instructions except as modified herein. The use of thinners shall not alter the required minimum dry thickness or adversely affect the VOC content. The stell surface shall be prepared to a white metal sand blast standard.

3.8.1 Exterior Surfaces (Welded Tanks)

A prime coat, minimum of 2.0 mil thick followed by two coats of alkyd enamel, each a minimum of 1.5 mil thick shall be applied. The prime coat shall be rust inhibitive red iron oxide, zinc oxide, oil and alkyd primer without lead or chromate pigments, in accordance with SSPC Paint 25. The finish coats shall be gray alkyd enamel in accordance with Type I of SSPC Paint 104 high gloss alkyd enamel in accordance with SSPC Paint 21. The Contractor shall submit color samples to Government for selection to be used for the finish coats.

3.8.2 Interior Surfaces (Welded Tanks)

A prime coat at least 3.0 mil thick and a white final coat at least 5.0 mil thick shall be applied. Each coat shall be a two-component catalyzed epoxy in accordance with MIL-PRF-23236. The primer shall contrast with the color of the finish coat.

3.8.3 Bolted Tanks

The tanks shall have a coating applied to both the interior and exterior surfaces in accordance with Section 10 of AWWA D103. Color shall be a sample of gray as approved, submitt color samples to the Government for final selection of the sample of gray to be used for the finish coats.

3.9 DISINFECTION

The reservoir and connecting lines thereto shall be disinfected with chlorine before being placed in operation.

3.9.1 Tank

After coating system has been inspected, approved, and cured, rinse tank with potable water. Disinfect tank and connecting lines in accordance with AWWA C652, Method 2 or Method 3.

3.9.2 Piping

The valves and piping shall be disinfected in accordance with Section 33 11 00 WATER DISTRIBUTION.



3.10 INSPECTION AND REPAIR

Prior to tank repair job, perform a detailed inspection of the structure and submit report by a certified inspector.

3.11 FILLING

Upon completion of work outlined herein, the Contractor shall fill both reservoirs to capacity prior to acceptance of the project by the Government or it may be required for interior fire protection during construction and prior to acceptance.




SECTION 33 30 00

SANITARY SEWERS04/08

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASTM A 74 (2008a) Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings

ASTM C 150 (2007) Standard Specification for Portland Cement

ASTM C 270 (2008a) Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry

ASTM C 443 (2005a) Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets

ASTM C 478 (2008) Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections

ASTM C 564 (2008) Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings

ASTM C 923 (2008) Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures, Pipes and Laterals

ASTM C 969 (2002) Standard Practice for Infiltration and Exfiltration Acceptance Testing of Installed Precast Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines

ASTM C 972 (2000; R 2006) Compression-Recovery of Tape Sealant

ASTM C 990 (2008) Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes and Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants

ASTM D 2321 (2005) Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications

ASTM D 2412 (2002; R 2008) Determination of External



Loading Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by Parallel-Plate Loading

ASTM D 2680 (2001) Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) and Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Composite Sewer Piping

ASTM D 2751 (2005) Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Sewer Pipe and Fittings

ASTM D 3034 (2008) Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings

ASTM D 3212 (2007) Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals

ASTM D 412 (2006ae1e2) Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension

ASTM D 624 (2000; R 2007) Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers

ASTM F 477 (2008) Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe

ASTM F 949 (2006a) Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Corrugated Sewer Pipe with a Smooth Interior and Fittings

CAST IRON SOIL PIPE INSTITUTE (CISPI)

CISPI 301 (2004) Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications

CISPI 310 (2004) Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications


FS A-A-60005 (Basic) Frames.Covers, Gratings, Steps, Sump and Catch Basin, Manhole

UNI-BELL PVC PIPE ASSOCIATION (UBPPA)

UBPPA UNI-B-6 (1998) Recommended Practice for Low-Pressure Air Testing of Installed Sewer Pipe




1.2.1 Sanitary Sewer Gravity Pipeline

Provide laterals and building service connections of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe. The exterior sanitary gravity sewer system includes equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship as specified herein more than 5 feet outside of building walls.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Precast concrete manholeMetal itemsFrames, covers, and gratings

Details, as specified.

SD-03 Product Data

Pipeline materials

Submit manufacturer's standard drawings or catalog cuts.

SD-06 Test Reports

Reports

Test and inspection reports, as specified.

SD-07 Certificates

Portland Cement

Certificates of compliance stating the type of cement used in manufacture of concrete pipe, fittings and precast manholes.


1.4.1 Installer Qualifications

Install specified materials by a licensed underground utility Contractor licensed for such work in the state where the work is to be performed. Installing Contractor's License shall be current and be state certified or state registered.





1.5.1.1 Piping

Inspect materials delivered to site for damage; store with minimum of handling. Store materials on site in enclosures or under protective coverings. Store plastic piping and jointing materials and rubber gaskets under cover out of direct sunlight. Do not store materials directly on the ground. Keep inside of pipes and fittings free of dirt and debris.

1.5.1.2 Metal Items

Check upon arrival; identify and segregate as to types, functions, and sizes. Store off the ground in a manner affording easy accessibility and not causing excessive rusting or coating with grease or other objectionable materials.

1.5.1.3 Cement, Aggregate, and Reinforcement

As specified in Section 03 31 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE, USE TYPE II CEMENT.

1.5.2 Handling

Handle pipe, fittings, and other accessories in such manner as to ensure delivery to the trench in sound undamaged condition. Carry, do not drag, pipe to trench.

1.6 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

Submit drawings of existing conditions, after a thorough inspection of the area in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Details shall include the environmental conditions of the site and adjacent areas. Submit copies of the records for verification before starting work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPELINE MATERIALS

Pipe shall conform to the respective specifications and other requirements specified below.

2.1.1 Cast-Iron Soil Piping(If needed to connect to building sewer)

2.1.1.1 Cast-Iron Hub and Spigot Soil Pipe and Fittings

ASTM A 74, service , with ASTM C 564 compression-type rubber gaskets.

2.1.1.2 Cast-Iron Hubless Soil Pipe and Fittings

CISPI 301 with CISPI 310 coupling joints.

2.1.2 PVC Plastic Gravity Sewer Piping

2.1.2.1 PVC Plastic Gravity Pipe and Fittings

ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, or ASTM F 949 with ends suitable for elastomeric



gasket joints.

2.1.2.2 PVC Plastic Gravity Joints and Jointing Material

Joints shall conform to ASTM D 3212. Gaskets shall conform to ASTM F 477.

2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS

2.2.1 Cement Mortar

Cement mortar shall conform to ASTM C 270, Type M with Type II cement.

2.2.2 Portland Cement

Portland cement shall conform to ASTM C 150, Type II for concrete used in concrete pipe, concrete pipe fittings, and manholes and type optional with the Contractor for cement used in concrete cradle, concrete encasement, and thrust blocking.

2.2.3 Portland Cement Concrete

See paragraph 1.5.1.3 of this section.


2.3.1 Precast Concrete Manholes & Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Polyester Manholes

Precast concrete manhole risers, base sections, and tops shall conform to ASTM C 478.

2.3.2 Gaskets and Connectors

Gaskets for joints between manhole sections shall conform to ASTM C 443. Resilient connectors for making joints between manhole and pipes entering manhole shall conform to ASTM C 923 or ASTM C 990.

2.3.3 External Preformed Rubber Joint Seals

An external preformed rubber joint seal shall be an accepted method of sealing cast iron covers to precast concrete sections to prevent ground water infiltration into sewer systems. All finished and sealed manholes constructed in accordance with paragraph entitled "Manhole Construction" shall be tested for leakage in the same manner as pipelines as described in paragraph entitled "Leakage Tests." The seal shall be multi-section with a neoprene rubber top section and all lower sections made of Ethylene Proplene Di Monomer (EPDM) rubber with a minimum thickness of 60 mils. Each unit shall consist of a top and bottom section and shall have mastic on the bottom of the bottom section and mastic on the top and bottom of the top section. The mastic shall be a non-hardening butyl rubber sealant and shall seal to the cone/top slab of the manhole/catch basin and over the lip of the casting. Extension sections shall cover up to two more adjusting rings. Properties and values are listed in the following tables:

Properties, Test Methods and Minimum Values forRubber used in Preformed Joint Seals

Physical Properties Test Methods EPDM Neoprene Butyl mastic

Tensile, psi ASTM D 412 1840 2195 -



Properties, Test Methods and Minimum Values forRubber used in Preformed Joint Seals

Physical Properties Test Methods EPDM Neoprene Butyl mastic

Elogation percent ASTM D 412 553 295 350

Tear Resistance, ppi ASTM D 624 280 160 - (Die B)

Rebound, percent, ASTM C 972 - - 11 5 minutes (mod.)

Rebound, percent, ASTM C 972 - - 12] 2 hours

2.3.4 Metal Items

2.3.4.1 Frames, Covers, and Gratings for Manholes

FS A-A-60005, cast iron; details shall be as indicated:

Frames and covers shall be cast iron, ductile iron or reinforced concrete. Cast iron frames and covers shall be as indicated or shall be of type suitable for the application, circular, without vent holes. The frames and covers shall have a combined weight of not less than 400 pounds. Reinforced concrete frames and covers shall be as indicated or shall conform to ASTM C 478. The word "Sanitary Sewer" shall be stamped or cast into covers so that it is plainly visible.

2.3.4.2 Manhole Steps

Plastic or rubber coating pressure-molded to the steel. Plastic coating shall conform to ASTM D 4101, copolymer polypropylene. Rubber shall conform to ASTM C 443, except shore A durometer hardness shall be 70 plus or minus 5. Steps are not required in manholes less than 4 feet deep.

2.4 REPORTS

Submit Test Reports. Compaction and density test shall be in accordance with Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK. Submit Inspection Reports for daily activities during the installation of the sanitary system. Information in the report shall be detailed enough to describe location of work and amount of pipe laid in place, measured in linear feet.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPELINES AND APPURTENANT CONSTRUCTION

3.1.1 General Requirements for Installation of Pipelines

These general requirements apply except where specific exception is made in the following paragraphs entitled "Special Requirements."

3.1.1.1 Location

The work covered by this section shall terminate at a point approximately 5 feet from the building, unless otherwise indicated. Where the location of



the sewer is not clearly defined by dimensions on the drawings, do not lay sewer line closer horizontally than 10 feet to a water main or service line. Install pressure sewer lines beneath water lines only, with the top of the sewer line being at least 2 feet below bottom of water line. Where sanitary sewer lines pass above water lines, encase sewer in concrete for a distance of 10 feet on each side of the crossing, or substitute rubber-gasketed pressure pipe for the pipe being used for the same distance. Where sanitary sewer lines pass below water lines, lay pipe so that no joint in the sewer line will be closer than 3 feet, horizontal distance, to the water line.

a. Sanitary piping installation parallel with water line:

1 Normal conditions: Sanitary piping or manholes shall be laid at least 10 feet horizontally from a water line whenever possible. The distance shall be measured edge-to-edge.

2 Unusual conditions: When local conditions prevent a horizontal separation of 10 feet, the sanitary piping or manhole may be laid closer to a water line provided that:

(aa) The top (crown) of the sanitary piping shall be at least 18 inches below the bottom (invert) of the water main.

(bb) Where this vertical separation cannot be obtained, the sanitary piping shall be constructed of AWWA-approved ductile iron water pipe pressure tested in place without leakage prior to backfilling.

(cc) The sewer manhole shall be of watertight construction and tested in place.

b. Installation of sanitary piping crossing a water line:

1 Normal conditions: Lay sanitary sewer piping by crossing under water lines to provide a separation of at least 18 inches between the top of the sanitary piping and the bottom of the water line whenever possible.

(2 Unusual conditions: When local conditions prevent a vertical separation described above, use the following construction:

(aa) Sanitary piping passing over or under water lines shall be constructed of AWWA-approved ductile iron water pipe, pressure tested in place without leakage prior to backfilling.

(bb) Sanitary piping passing over water lines shall, in addition, be protected by providing:

(1). A vertical separation of at least 18 inches between the bottom of the sanitary piping and the top of the water line.

(2). Adequate structural support for the sanitary piping to prevent excessive deflection of the joints and the settling on and breaking of the water line.

(3). That the length, minimum 20 feet, of the sanitary piping be centered at the point of the crossing so that joints shall be equidistant and as far as possible from the water line.



c. Sanitary sewer manholes: No water piping shall pass through or come in contact with any part of a sanitary sewer manhole.

3.1.1.2 Earthwork

Perform earthwork operations in accordance with Section 31 00 00.

3.1.1.3 Pipe Laying and Jointing

Inspect each pipe and fitting before and after installation; replace those found defective and remove from site. Provide proper facilities for lowering sections of pipe into trenches. Lay nonpressure pipe with the bell ends in the upgrade direction. Adjust spigots in bells to give a uniform space all around. Blocking or wedging between bells and spigots will not be permitted. Replace by one of the proper dimensions, pipe or fittings that do not allow sufficient space for installation of joint material. At the end of each work day, close open ends of pipe temporarily with wood blocks or bulkheads. Provide batterboards not more than 25 feet apart in trenches for checking and ensuring that pipe invert elevations are as indicated. Laser beam method may be used in lieu of batterboards for the same purpose. Branch connections shall be made by use of regular fittings or solvent cemented saddles as approved. Saddles for ABS and PVC composite pipe shall conform to Figure 2 of ASTM D 2680; saddles for ABS pipe shall comply with Table 3 of ASTM D 2751; and saddles for PVC pipe shall conform to Table 4 of ASTM D 3034.

3.1.1.4 Connections to Existing Lines

Obtain approval from the Contracting Officer before making connection to existing line. Conduct work so that there is minimum interruption of service on existing line.

3.1.2 Special Requirements

3.1.2.1 Installation of Cast Iron Soil Piping

Unless otherwise specified, install pipe and fittings in accordance with paragraph entitled "General Requirements for Installation of Pipelines" of this section and with the recommendations of the pipe manufacturer. Make joints with the rubber gaskets specified for cast iron soil pipe joints and assemble in accordance with the recommendations of the pipe manufacturer.

3.1.2.2 Installation of PVC Plastic Piping

Install pipe and fittings in accordance with paragraph entitled "General Requirements for Installation of Pipelines" of this section and with the requirements of ASTM D 2321 for laying and joining pipe and fittings. Make joints with the gaskets specified for joints with this piping and assemble in accordance with the requirements of ASTM D 2321 for assembly of joints. Make joints to other pipe materials in accordance with the recommendations of the plastic pipe manufacturer.

3.1.3 Concrete Work

Cast-in-place concrete is included in Section 03 31 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE. The pipe shall be supported on a concrete cradle, or encased in concrete where indicated or directed.



3.1.4 Manhole Construction

Construct base slab of cast-in-place concrete or use precast concrete base sections. Make inverts in cast-in-place concrete and precast concrete bases with a smooth-surfaced semi-circular bottom conforming to the inside contour of the adjacent sewer sections. For changes in direction of the sewer and entering branches into the manhole, make a circular curve in the manhole invert of as large a radius as manhole size will permit. For cast-in-place concrete construction, either pour bottom slabs and walls integrally or key and bond walls to bottom slab. No parging will be permitted on interior manhole walls. For precast concrete construction, make joints between manhole sections with the gaskets specified for this purpose; install in the manner specified for installing joints in concrete piping. Parging will not be required for precast concrete manholes. Cast-in-place concrete work shall be in accordance with the requirements specified under paragraph entitled "Concrete Work" of this section. Make joints between concrete manholes and pipes entering manholes with the resilient connectors specified for this purpose; install in accordance with the recommendations of the connector manufacturer. Where a new manhole is constructed on an existing line, remove existing pipe as necessary to construct the manhole. Cut existing pipe so that pipe ends are approximately flush with the interior face of manhole wall, but not protruding into the manhole. Use resilient connectors as previously specified for pipe connectors to concrete manholes.

3.1.5 Miscellaneous Construction and Installation

3.1.5.1 Connecting to Existing Manholes

Pipe connections to existing manholes shall be made so that finish work will conform as nearly as practicable to the applicable requirements specified for new manholes, including all necessary concrete work, cutting, and shaping. The connection shall be centered on the manhole. Holes for the new pipe shall be core drilled and of sufficient diameter to allow packing cement mortar around the entire periphery of the pipe but no larger than 1.5 times the diameter of the pipe. Cutting the manhole shall be done in a manner that will cause the least damage to the walls.

3.1.5.2 Metal Work

a. Workmanship and finish: Perform metal work so that workmanship and finish will be equal to the best practice in modern structural shops and foundries. Form iron to shape and size with sharp lines and angles. Do shearing and punching so that clean true lines and surfaces are produced. Make castings sound and free from warp, cold shuts, and blow holes that may impair their strength or appearance. Give exposed surfaces a smooth finish with sharp well-defined lines and arises. Provide necessary rabbets, lugs, and brackets wherever necessary for fitting and support.

b. Field painting: After installation, clean cast-iron frames, covers, gratings, and steps not buried in concrete to bare metal of mortar, rust, grease, dirt, and other deleterious materials and apply a coat of bituminous paint. Do not paint surfaces subject to abrasion.




3.2.1 Field Tests and Inspections

The Contracting Officer will conduct field inspections and witness field tests specified in this section. Perform field tests and provide labor, equipment, and incidentals required for testing. Be able to produce evidence, when required, that each item of work has been constructed in accordance with the drawings and specifications.

3.2.2 Tests for Nonpressure Lines

Check each straight run of pipeline for gross deficiencies by holding a light in a manhole; it shall show a practically full circle of light through the pipeline when viewed from the adjoining end of line. When pressure piping is used in a nonpressure line for nonpressure use, test this piping as specified for nonpressure pipe.

3.2.2.1 Leakage Tests

Test lines for leakage by either infiltration tests or exfiltration tests, or by low-pressure air tests. Prior to testing for leakage, backfill trench up to at least lower half of pipe. When necessary to prevent pipeline movement during testing, place additional backfill around pipe sufficient to prevent movement, but leaving joints uncovered to permit inspection. When leakage or pressure drop exceeds the allowable amount specified, make satisfactory correction and retest pipeline section in the same manner. Correct visible leaks regardless of leakage test results.

a. Infiltration tests and exfiltration tests: Perform these tests for sewer lines made of the specified materials, not only concrete, in accordance with ASTM C 969. Make calculations in accordance with the Appendix to ASTM C 969.

b. Low-pressure air tests: Perform tests as follows:

1 PVC plastic pipelines: Test in accordance with UBPPA UNI-B-6. Allowable pressure drop shall be as given in UBPPA UNI-B-6. Make calculations in accordance with the Appendix to UBPPA UNI-B-6.

3.2.2.2 Deflection Testing

Perform a deflection test on entire length of installed plastic pipeline on completion of work adjacent to and over the pipeline, including leakage tests, backfilling, placement of fill, grading, paving, concreting, and any other superimposed loads determined in accordance with ASTM D 2412. Deflection of pipe in the installed pipeline under external loads shall not exceed 4.5 percent of the average inside diameter of pipe. Determine whether the allowable deflection has been exceeded by use of a pull-through device or a deflection measuring device.

a. Pull-through device: This device shall be a spherical, spheroidal, or elliptical ball, a cylinder, or circular sections fused to a common shaft. Circular sections shall be so spaced on the shaft that distance from external faces of front and back sections will equal or exceed diameter of the circular section. Pull-through device may also be of a design promulgated by the Uni-Bell Plastic Pipe Association, provided the device meets the applicable requirements specified in this paragraph, including those for diameter of the device, and that the



mandrel has a minimum of 9 arms. Ball, cylinder, or circular sections shall conform to the following:

1 A diameter, or minor diameter as applicable, of 95 percent of the average inside diameter of the pipe; tolerance of plus 0.5 percent will be permitted.

2 Homogeneous material throughout, shall have a density greater than 1.0 as related to water at 39.2 degrees F, and shall have a surface Brinell hardness of not less than 150.

3 Center bored and through-bolted with a 1/4 inch minimum diameter steel shaft having a yield strength of not less than 70,000 psi, with eyes or loops at each end for attaching pulling cables.

4 Each eye or loop shall be suitably backed with a flange or heavy washer such that a pull exerted on opposite end of shaft will produce compression throughout remote end.

b. Deflection measuring device: Sensitive to 1.0 percent of the diameter of the pipe being tested and shall be accurate to 1.0 percent of the indicated dimension. Deflection measuring device shall be approved prior to use.

c. Pull-through device procedure: Pass the pull-through device through each run of pipe, either by pulling it through or flushing it through with water. If the device fails to pass freely through a pipe run, replace pipe which has the excessive deflection and completely retest in same manner and under same conditions.

d. Deflection measuring device procedure: Measure deflections through each run of installed pipe. If deflection readings in excess of 4.5 percent of average inside diameter of pipe are obtained, retest pipe by a run from the opposite direction. If retest continues to show a deflection in excess of 4.5 percent of average inside diameter of pipe, replace pipe which has excessive deflection and completely retest in same manner and under same conditions.

3.2.3 Field Tests for Concrete

Field testing requirements are covered in Section 03 31 00.00 10




SECTION 33 40 00

STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES02/09

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



AASHTO M 198 (2008) Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes and Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants


ASTM A 48/A 48M (2003; R 2008) Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings

ASTM A 536 (1984e1; R 2004) Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings

ASTM B 26/B 26M (2005) Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings

ASTM C 1103 (2003) Standard Practice for Joint Acceptance Testing of Installed Precast Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines

ASTM C 270 (2008a) Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry

ASTM C 425 (2004) Standard Specification for Compression Joints for Vitrified Clay Pipe and Fittings

ASTM C 443 (2005a) Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets

ASTM C 478 (2008) Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections

ASTM C 76 (2008a) Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe

ASTM C 828 (2006) Low-Pressure Air Test of Vitrified Clay Pipe Lines



ASTM C 923 (2008) Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures, Pipes and Laterals

ASTM C 924 (2002) Testing Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines by Low-Pressure Air Test Method

ASTM F 1417 (1992; R 2005) Standard Test Method for Installation Acceptance of Plastic Gravity Sewer Lines Using Low Pressure Air

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Placing Pipe

Printed copies of the manufacturer's recommendations for installation procedures of the material being placed, prior to installation.

SD-07 Certificates

Pipeline TestingHydrostatic Test on Watertight JointsDetermination of DensityFrame and Cover for Gratings

Certified copies of test reports demonstrating conformance to applicable pipe specifications, before pipe is installed. Certification on the ability of frame and cover or gratings to carry the imposed live load.



Materials delivered to site shall be inspected for damage, unloaded, and stored with a minimum of handling. Materials shall not be stored directly on the ground. The inside of pipes and fittings shall be kept free of dirt and debris. Before, during, and after installation, plastic pipe and fittings shall be protected from any environment that would result in damage or deterioration to the material. Keep a copy of the manufacturer's instructions available at the construction site at all times and follow these instructions unless directed otherwise by the Contracting Officer. Solvents, solvent compounds, lubricants, elastomeric gaskets, and any similar materials required to install plastic pipe shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and shall be discarded if the storage period exceeds the recommended shelf life. Solvents in use shall be discarded when the recommended pot life is exceeded.



1.3.2 Handling

Materials shall be handled in a manner that ensures delivery to the trench in sound, undamaged condition. Pipe shall be carried to the trench, not dragged.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE FOR CULVERTS AND STORM DRAINS

Pipe for culverts and storm drains shall be of the sizes indicated and shall conform to the requirements specified.

2.1.1 Concrete Pipe

Manufactured in accordance with and conform to ASTM C 76, Class III.

2.2 DRAINAGE STRUCTURES

2.2.1 Flared End Sections

Sections shall be precast reinforced concrete as indicated on the plans.


2.3.1 Concrete

Unless otherwise specified, concrete and reinforced concrete shall conform to the requirements of 03 31 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE.

2.3.2 Mortar

Mortar for connections to other drainage structures shall conform to ASTM C 270, Type M.

2.3.3 Precast Reinforced Concrete Manholes

Conform to ASTM C 478. Joints between precast concrete risers and tops shall be full-bedded in cement mortar and shall be smoothed to a uniform surface on both interior and exterior of the structure or made with flexible watertight, rubber-type gaskets meeting the requirements of paragraph JOINTS.

2.3.4 Frame and Cover for Gratings

Frame and cover for gratings shall be cast gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 35B; cast ductile iron, ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12; or cast aluminum, ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 356.OT6. Weight, shape, size, and waterway openings for grates and curb inlets shall be as indicated on the plans.

2.3.5 Joints

2.3.5.1 Flexible Watertight Joints

a. Materials: Flexible watertight joints shall be made with plastic or rubber-type gaskets for concrete pipe and with factory-fabricated resilient materials for clay pipe. The design of joints and the physical requirements for plastic gaskets shall conform to AASHTO M 198, and rubber-type gaskets shall conform to ASTM C 443.



Factory-fabricated resilient joint materials shall conform to ASTM C 425. Gaskets shall have not more than one factory-fabricated splice, except that two factory-fabricated splices of the rubber-type gasket are permitted if the nominal diameter of the pipe being gasketed exceeds 54 inches.

b. Test Requirements: Watertight joints shall be tested and shall meet test requirements of paragraph HYDROSTATIC TEST ON WATERTIGHT JOINTS. Rubber gaskets shall comply with the oil resistant gasket requirements of ASTM C 443. Certified copies of test results shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer before gaskets or jointing materials are installed. Alternate types of watertight joint may be furnished, if specifically approved.

2.4 RESILIENT CONNECTORS

Flexible, watertight connectors used for connecting pipe to manholes and inlets shall conform to ASTM C 923.

2.5 HYDROSTATIC TEST ON WATERTIGHT JOINTS

2.5.1 Concrete Pipe

A hydrostatic test shall be made on the watertight joint types as proposed. Only one sample joint of each type needs testing; however, if the sample joint fails because of faulty design or workmanship, an additional sample joint may be tested. During the test period, gaskets or other jointing material shall be protected from extreme temperatures which might adversely affect the performance of such materials. Performance requirements for joints in reinforced and nonreinforced concrete pipe shall conform to AASHTO M 198 or ASTM C 443.

2.6 EROSION CONTROL RIPRAP

Conform to requirements for Rip Rap in Section 31 00 00.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION FOR PIPE CULVERTS, STORM DRAINS, AND DRAINAGE STRUCTURES

Excavation of trenches, and for appurtenances and backfilling for culverts and storm drains, shall be in accordance with the applicable portions of Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK and the requirements specified below.

3.1.1 Trenching

The width of trenches at any point below the top of the pipe shall be not greater than the outside diameter of the pipe plus clearance to permit satisfactory jointing and thorough tamping of the bedding material under and around the pipe. Sheeting and bracing, where required, shall be placed within the trench width as specified, without any overexcavation. Where trench widths are exceeded, redesign with a resultant increase in cost of stronger pipe or special installation procedures will be necessary. Cost of this redesign and increased cost of pipe or installation shall be borne by the Contractor without additional cost to the Government.

3.1.2 Removal of Unstable Material

Where wet or otherwise unstable soil incapable of properly supporting the



pipe, as determined by the Contracting Officer, is unexpectedly encountered in the bottom of a trench, such material shall be removed to the depth required and replaced to the proper grade with select granular material, compacted as provided in paragraph BACKFILLING. When removal of unstable material is due to the fault or neglect of the Contractor while performing shoring and sheeting, water removal, or other specified requirements, such removal and replacement shall be performed at no additional cost to the Government.

3.2 BEDDING

The bedding surface for the pipe shall provide a firm foundation of uniform density throughout the entire length of the pipe.

3.2.1 Concrete Pipe Requirements

When no bedding class is specified or detailed on the drawings, concrete pipe shall be bedded in a soil foundation accurately shaped and rounded to conform to the lowest one-fourth of the outside portion of circular pipe or to the lower curved portion of pipe arch for the entire length of the pipe or pipe arch. When necessary, the bedding shall be tamped. Bell holes and depressions for joints shall be not more than the length, depth, and width required for properly making the particular type of joint.

3.3 PLACING PIPE

Each pipe shall be thoroughly examined before being laid; defective or damaged pipe shall not be used. Plastic pipe shall be protected from exposure to direct sunlight prior to laying, if necessary to maintain adequate pipe stiffness and meet installation deflection requirements. Pipelines shall be laid to the grades and alignment indicated. Proper facilities shall be provided for lowering sections of pipe into trenches. Lifting lugs in vertically elongated metal pipe shall be placed in the same vertical plane as the major axis of the pipe. Pipe shall not be laid in water, and pipe shall not be laid when trench conditions or weather are unsuitable for such work. Diversion of drainage or dewatering of trenches during construction shall be provided as necessary.

3.3.1 Concrete Pipe

Laying shall proceed upgrade with spigot ends of bell-and-spigot pipe and tongue ends of tongue-and-groove pipe pointing in the direction of the flow.

3.4 JOINTING

3.4.1 Concrete Pipe

3.4.1.1 Flexible Watertight Joints

Gaskets and jointing materials shall be as recommended by the particular manufacturer in regard to use of lubricants, cements, adhesives, and other special installation requirements. Surfaces to receive lubricants, cements, or adhesives shall be clean and dry. Gaskets and jointing materials shall be affixed to the pipe not more than 24 hours prior to the installation of the pipe, and shall be protected from the sun, blowing dust, and other deleterious agents at all times. Gaskets and jointing materials shall be inspected before installing the pipe; any loose or improperly affixed gaskets and jointing materials shall be removed and replaced. The pipe shall be aligned with the previously installed pipe,



and the joint pushed home. If, while the joint is being made the gasket becomes visibly dislocated the pipe shall be removed and the joint remade.

3.5 DRAINAGE STRUCTURES

3.5.1 Manholes and Inlets

Construction shall be of reinforced concrete, plain concrete, brick, precast reinforced concrete, precast concrete segmental blocks, prefabricated corrugated metal, or bituminous coated corrugated metal; complete with frames and covers or gratings; and with fixed galvanized steel ladders where indicated. Pipe studs and junction chambers of prefabricated corrugated metal manholes shall be fully bituminous-coated and paved when the connecting branch lines are so treated. Pipe connections to concrete manholes and inlets shall be made with flexible, watertight connectors.

3.5.2 Walls and Headwalls

Construction shall be as indicated.

3.6 BACKFILLING

3.6.1 Backfilling Pipe in Trenches

After the pipe has been properly bedded, selected material from excavation or borrow, at a moisture content that will facilitate compaction, shall be placed along both sides of pipe in layers not exceeding 6 inches in compacted depth. The backfill shall be brought up evenly on both sides of pipe for the full length of pipe. The fill shall be thoroughly compacted under the haunches of the pipe. Each layer shall be thoroughly compacted with mechanical tampers or rammers. This method of filling and compacting shall continue until the fill has reached an elevation of at least 12 inches above the top of the pipe. The remainder of the trench shall be backfilled and compacted by spreading and rolling or compacted by mechanical rammers or tampers in layers not exceeding 8 inches. Tests for density shall be made as necessary to ensure conformance to the compaction requirements specified below. Where it is necessary, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer, that sheeting or portions of bracing used be left in place, the contract will be adjusted accordingly. Untreated sheeting shall not be left in place beneath structures or pavements.

3.6.2 Backfilling Pipe in Fill Sections

For pipe placed in fill sections, backfill material and the placement and compaction procedures shall be as specified below. The fill material shall be uniformly spread in layers longitudinally on both sides of the pipe, not exceeding 6 inches in compacted depth, and shall be compacted by rolling parallel with pipe or by mechanical tamping or ramming. Prior to commencing normal filling operations, the crown width of the fill at a height of 12 inches above the top of the pipe shall extend a distance of not less than twice the outside pipe diameter on each side of the pipe or 12 feet, whichever is less. After the backfill has reached at least 12 inches above the top of the pipe, the remainder of the fill shall be placed and thoroughly compacted in layers not exceeding 8 inches.

3.6.3 Movement of Construction Machinery

When compacting by rolling or operating heavy equipment parallel with the



pipe, displacement of or injury to the pipe shall be avoided. Movement of construction machinery over a culvert or storm drain at any stage of construction shall be at the Contractor's risk. Any damaged pipe shall be repaired or replaced.

3.6.4 Compaction

3.6.4.1 General Requirements

Conform to Section 31 00 00.

3.7 PIPELINE TESTING

3.7.1 Leakage Tests

Lines shall be tested for leakage by low pressure air or water testing or exfiltration tests, as appropriate. Low pressure air testing for vitrified clay pipes shall conform to ASTM C 828. Low pressure air testing for concrete pipes shall conform to ASTM C 924. Low pressure air testing for plastic pipe shall conform to ASTM F 1417. Low pressure air testing procedures for other pipe materials shall use the pressures and testing times prescribed in ASTM C 828 or ASTM C 924, after consultation with the pipe manufacturer. Testing of individual joints for leakage by low pressure air or water shall conform to ASTM C 1103. Prior to exfiltration tests, the trench shall be backfilled up to at least the lower half of the pipe. If required, sufficient additional backfill shall be placed to prevent pipe movement during testing, leaving the joints uncovered to permit inspection. Visible leaks encountered shall be corrected regardless of leakage test results. When the water table is 2 feet or more above the top of the pipe at the upper end of the pipeline section to be tested, infiltration shall be measured using a suitable weir or other device acceptable to the Contracting Officer. An exfiltration test shall be made by filling the line to be tested with water so that a head of at least 2 feet is provided above both the water table and the top of the pipe at the upper end of the pipeline to be tested. The filled line shall be allowed to stand until the pipe has reached its maximum absorption, but not less than 4 hours. After absorption, the head shall be reestablished. The amount of water required to maintain this water level during a 2-hour test period shall be measured. Leakage as measured by the exfiltration test shall not exceed 0.2 gallons per inch in diameter per 100 feet of pipeline per hour. When leakage exceeds the maximum amount specified, satisfactory correction shall be made and retesting accomplished.

3.8 FIELD PAINTING

After installation, clean cast-iron frames, covers, gratings, and steps not buried in masonry or concrete to bare metal of mortar, rust, grease, dirt, and other deleterious materials and apply a coat of bituminous paint. Do not paint surfaces subject to abrasion.




SECTION 33 46 13

FOUNDATION DRAINAGE SYSTEM04/08

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



AASHTO M 252 (2008) Corrugated Polyethylene Drainage Pipe

AASHTO M 294 (2008) Standard Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe, 300- to 1500-mm Diameter


ASTM F 405 (2005) Corrugated Polyethylene (PE) Tubing and Fittings

ASTM F 667 (2006) Large Diameter Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings

1.1.1 State Specifications

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION, adopted January 1, 2007, Illinois Department of Transportation. Hereafter referred to as the “ILDOT Specifications”.


1.2.1 Extent

Furnish and install foundation drainage as a complete system as shown.

1.2.2 Outlet Connections

Foundation pipe shall be connected to the storm drainage system as shown and specified in Section 33 40 00 STORM DRAINAGE or terminated as shown.

1.2.3 Drainage Lines

Construct drainage lines of drain tile, perforated pipe, or porous pipe.

1.2.4 Outlet Lines

Construct outlet lines of closed-joint nonperforated, nonporous pipe.



1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-04 Samples

Materials.

Two randomly selected samples of each type of pipe and fitting, prior to delivery of materials to the site.

SD-07 Certificates

Materials.

Certifications from the manufacturers attesting that materials meet specification requirements.


Protect materials placed in storage from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. Do not expose plastic pipe to direct sunlight for more than 6 months from time of manufacturer to installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

Pipe for foundation drainage system shall be of the type and size indicated. Appropriate transitions, adapters, or joint details shall be used where pipes of different types or materials are connected.

2.1.1 Plastic Pipe

Plastic pipe shall contain ultraviolet inhibitor to provide protection from exposure to direct sunlight.

2.1.1.1 Corrugated Polyethylene (PE) Drainage Pipe

Furnish ASTM F 405 heavy duty for pipe 3 to 6 inches in diameter inclusive, ASTM F 667 for pipe 8 to 24 inches in diameter; or AASHTO M 252 for pipe 3 to 10 inches in diameter or AASHTO M 294 for pipe 12 to 24 inches in diameter. Fittings shall be pipe manufacturer's standard type and shall conform to the indicated specification.

2.1.1.2 Slotted Perforations in Plastic Pipe

Circumferential slots shall be cleanly cut so as not to restrict the inflow of water and uniformly spaced along the length and circumference of the tubing. Width of slots shall not exceed 1/8 inch or be less than 1/32 inch. The length of individual slots shall not exceed 1-1/4 inches on 3 inch diameter tubing; 10 percent of the tubing inside nominal circumference on 4 to 8 inch diameter tubing; and 2-1/2 inches on 10 inch diameter tubing. Rows of slots shall be symmetrically spaced so that they are fully



contained in quadrants of the pipe. Slots shall be centered in the valleys of the corrugations of profile wall pipe. The water inlet area shall be a minimum of 0.5 square inch/linear foot of tubing. Manufacturer's standard perforated pipe which essentially meets these requirements may be used with prior approval of the Contracting Officer.

2.1.2 Fittings

Fittings shall be of compatible materials for pipe, of corresponding weight and quality, and as specified herein.

2.1.3 Cleanouts and Piping Through Walls

Cleanout pipe and fittings and piping through walls and footings shall be cast-iron soil pipe. Each cleanout shall have a brass ferrule and a cast-brass screw-jointed plug with socket or raised head for wrench.

2.1.4 Pervious Backfill for Foundation Drains

Bedding and pervious backfill shall be Gradation CA-18 according to Section 1004 "Coarse Aggregate" of the IL DOT Specifications..

2.1.5 Geotextile

Conform to the requirements of 1080.05 of Section 1080 "Fabric Material" of the IL DOT Specifications..

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

3.1.1 Trenching and Excavation

Perform required trenching and excavation in accordance with Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK. Keep trenches dry during installation of drainage system. Changes in direction of drain lines shall be made with 1/8 bends. Use wye fittings at intersections.

3.1.2 Bedding

Place graded bedding as indicated.

3.1.3 Pipe Laying

Lay drain lines to true grades and alignment with a continuous fall in the direction of flow. Clean interior of pipe thoroughly before being laid. When drain lines are left open for connection to discharge lines, the open ends shall be temporarily closed and the location marked with wooden stakes. Perforated pipe shall be laid with perforations facing down. Any length that has had its grade or joints disturbed shall be removed and relaid at no additional cost to the Government. Perforated corrugated polyethylene drainage tubing and plastic piping shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and as specified herein. Tubing and piping with physical imperfections shall not be installed.



3.1.4 Jointing

3.1.4.1 Perforated and Porous Pipes

Perforated and porous types of drain pipes shall be laid with closed joints.

3.1.4.2 Corrugated Polyethylene

Corrugated polyethylene (PE) pipe joints shall be in accordance with ASTM F 405 or ASTM F 667.

3.1.5 Outlet Lines

The outlet end of drain lines connecting with an open gutter or outfall shall be covered with a removable wire basket of 16-mesh copper or bronze wire cloth fastened with brass or wire straps.

3.1.6 Cleanouts

Provide cleanouts in locations indicated. Cleanouts in unpaved areas shall be set in 12 by 12 by 4 inch concrete blocks.

3.2 Backfilling

After joints and connections have been inspected and approved, place the specified pervious backfill material for the full width of the trench and full width between pipe and adjacent walls and 12 inches above the top of the pipe. Place the backfill preventing displacement of or injury to the pipe or tile. Place a protective covering, as specified, over the pervious backfill for the full width of the trench before regular backfill is placed. Compact backfill as specified in Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.




SECTION 33 51 15

NATURAL-GAS / LIQUID PETROLEUM GAS DISTRIBUTION11/08

PART 1 GENERAL


The gas distribution system includes natural gas piping and appurtenances.The natural gas utility provider will tap the main and furnish and install the service line and meter. The contractor shall provide trenching and backfill of the service. Coordinate with the gas utility provider - utility contact information is noted on the plans.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-05 Design Data

Gas utility design and plan information.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 VALVES

Valves shall be suitable for shutoff or isolation service and shall conform to the following: Steel valves 1-1/2 inches and smaller installed aboveground shall conform to ASME B16.34, carbon steel, socket weld or threaded ends with handwheel or wrench operator. Steel valves 2 inches and larger installed aboveground shall conform to API Spec 6D, carbon steel, buttweld or flanged ends, with handwheel or wrench operator.

2.2 PRESSURE REGULATORS

Provide ferrous bodied regulators with backflow protection, designed to meet the pressure, load and other service conditions.

2.2.1 Service Line Regulators

Pressure regulators for individual service lines shall have ferrous bodies. Regulator shall be capable of reducing distribution line pressure to pressures required for users. Regulators shall be provided where gas will be distributed at pressures in excess of 10 inches of water column. Pressure relief shall be set at a lower pressure than would cause unsafe operation of any connected user. Regulator shall have single port with orifice diameter no greater than that recommended by the manufacturer for the maximum gas pressure at the regulator inlet. Regulator valve vent shall be of resilient materials designed to withstand flow conditions when pressed against the valve port. Regulator shall be capable of regulating downstream pressure within limits of accuracy and shall be capable of limiting the buildup of pressure under no-flow conditions to 50 percent or



less of the discharge pressure maintained under flow conditions. Regulator shall have a self contained service regulator. Regulator pipe connections shall not exceed 2 inch size.

2.3 METERS


Quantity Measured: Cubic Feet of Natural Gas

Measurement Configuration: Natural Gas service to a building. For buildings that already have a gas meter with a pulse output, ensure that the pulse output is connected to a data gathering device (i.e. electric meter). For buildings where a natural gas meter already exists but does not have a pulse output, add a pulse kit to the existing meter and tie the output to a data gathering device. If the existing gas meter will not accept a pulse kit or if no meter exists a new natural gas meter will be installed, also requiring a pulse output to a data gathering device. Ensure the pulse frequency and electronic characteristics are compatible with the existing data gathering device, if any.

Operating Temperatures: -40 degrees F to +150 degrees F.

Humidity Operating Range: 5% to 90% RH (non-condensing)

Accuracy: + 1% of scale.

Pulse Frequency: Not less than two pulses per revolution. Meter pulser shall be coupled to the meter dial to provide a pulse rate of not less than one pulse for every 100 cubic feet of gas.

For non-LonWorks meter applications

Digital Output Only: Pulse Output

For LonWorks meter applications

Digital Output Only: Pulse Output

Provide gas meters for the natural gas service line to the building. Diaphragm Gas Meters with flow rates less than 500 cubic feet per hour shall conform to AGA B109.1. Diaphragm Gas Meters with flow rates of 500 cubic feet per hour and higher shall conform to AGA B109.2. Rotary Type Gas Meters shall conform to AGA B109.3. Turbine Type Gas Meters shall conform to ASME MFC-4M. Meters shall be pipe or pedestal mounted and be provided with a strainer immediately upstream. Meters shall be provided with over-pressure protection as specified in ASME B31.8. Include tamper-proof protection, frost protection and fungus-proof protection as applicable. Meters shall be suitable for accurately measuring and handling gas at pressures, temperatures, and flow rates present. Meters shall have a pulse switch initiator capable of operating up to speeds of 500 pulses per minute with no false pulses and shall require no field adjustments or calibration. Initiators shall provide the maximum number of pulses up to 500 per minute that is obtainable from the manufacturer. The minimum pulse rate shall not be less than one pulse per 100 cubic feet of gas.



PART 3 EXECUTION3.1 3.1 GENERAL

A shutoff valve, meter set assembly, and service regulator shall be installed on the service line outside the building, 18 inches above the ground on the riser. An insulating joint (dielectric connection) shall be installed on the inlet side of the meter set assembly and service regulator and shall be constructed to prevent flow of electrical current. A 3/8 inch tapped fitting equipped with a plug shall be provided on both sides of the service regulator for installation of pressure gauges for adjusting the regulator. All service regulator vents and relief vents shall terminate in the outside air in rain and insect resistant fittings. The open end of the vent shall be located where gas can escape freely into the atmosphere, away from any openings into the building and above areas subject to flooding.

Meters shall be installed in accordance with ASME B31.8. Permanent gas meters shall be installed with provisions for isolation and removal for calibration and maintenance, and shall be suitable for operation in conjunction with an energy monitoring and control system.

3.2 CONNECTIONS TO PUBLICLY OR PRIVATELY OPERATED GAS UTILITY LINES

Contractor shall provide materials for the connections to the existing gas lines. Final connections and the turning on of gas shall be made by the utility. The Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer, in writing, 10 days before final connections and turning on of gas lines. The Contractor shall make necessary arrangements with the Utility for tie in and activation of new gas lines. Only the Operating Agency/Utility Company may reactivate the system after tie in. The Contractor shall furnish a certification by the Operating Agency/Utility Company that all Utility work has been satisfactorily completed.

3.3 PRESSURE AND LEAK TESTS

Prior to returning the gas line back to service it shall be tested in accordance with ASME B31.8. Test pressures should recognize the weakest component of each system tested for the actual pressure, the maximum allowable operating pressure, and the gas supplier's maximum operating pressure. The test pressure will be 150 percent of the maximum operating pressure or 50 psig, whichever is greater. However, the maximum test pressure must not be more than three times the design pressure of the pipe. The service lines shall be tested after modifications and before being placed in service using air as the test medium. Prior to testing the system, the interior shall be blown out, cleaned and cleared of all foreign materials. All meters, regulators, and controls shall be removed before blowing out and cleaning and reinstalled after clearing of all foreign materials. Testing of gasservice lines shall be done with due regard for the safety of employees and the public during the test. Persons not working on the test operations shall be kept out of the testing area while testing is proceeding. The test shall be made on the system as a whole or on sections that can be isolated. The test shall continue for at least 24 hours from the time of the initial readings to the final readings of pressure and temperature. The initial test readings of the instrument shall not be made for at least 1 hour after the pipe has been subjected to the full test pressure, and neither the initial nor final readings shall be made at times of rapid changes in atmospheric conditions. The temperatures shall be representative of the



actual trench conditions. There shall be no indication of reduction of pressure during the test after corrections have been made for changes in atmospheric conditions in conformity with the relationship T(1)P(2)=T(2)P(1), in which T and P denote absolute temperature and pressure, respectively, and the numbers denote initial and final readings. During the test, the entire system shall be completely isolated from all compressors and other sources of air pressure. Each joint shall be tested by means of soap and water or an equivalent nonflammable solution prior to backfilling or concealing any work. The testing instruments shall be approved by the Contracting Officer. All labor, materials and equipment for conducting the tests shall be furnished by the Contractor and shall be subject to inspection at all times during the tests. The Contractor shall maintain safety precautions for air pressure testing at all times during the tests.

Gas distribution equipment shall be installed in accordance with all applicable federal, state and local codes and regulations. Gas distribution equipment shall be installed in conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations and applicable sections of ASME B31.8, AGA XR0104 and 49 CFR 192. Gas distribution equipment installed in areas where they will be subject to damage will be protected by appropriate physical barriers (i.e. bollards). The Contractor shall provide installation details including catalog cuts and installation drawings for each gas service to be modified for approval by the Contracting Officer or the Contracting Officer's Representative.

3.4 EXAMINATION

After becoming familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing the work.




SECTION 33 82 00

TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTSIDE PLANT (OSP)04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASTM B 1 (2001; R 2007) Standard Specification for Hard-Drawn Copper Wire

ASTM B 8 (2004) Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft

ASTM D 1557 (2007) Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3) (2700 kN-m/m3)



IEEE C2 (2007; Errata 2006; Errata 2007; INT 44-56 2007; INT 47, 49, 50, 52-56 2008; INT 57, 58, 51, 48 2009) National Electrical Safety Code


INSULATED CABLE ENGINEERS ASSOCIATION (ICEA)

ICEA S-87-640 (2006) Fiber Optic Outside Plant Communications Cable

ICEA S-98-688 (2006) Broadband Twisted Pair, Telecommunications Cable Aircore, Polyolefin Insulated Copper Conductors

ICEA S-99-689 (2006) Broadband Twisted Pair Telecommunications Cable Filled, Polyolefin Insulated Copper Conductors


NEMA C62.61 (1993) Gas Tube Surge Arresters on Wire Line Telephone Circuits







TIA TIA/EIA-455-204 (2000) Standard for Measurement of Bandwidth on Multimode Fiber

TIA-455-46A (1990) FOTP-46 Spectral Attenuation Measurement for Long-Length, Graded-Index Optical Fibers

TIA-455-78 (2002B) FOTP-78 Optical Fibres - Part 1-40: Measurement Methods and Test Procedures - Attenuation

TIA-472D000-A (1993) Fiber Optic Communications Cable for Outside Plant Use

TIA-492CAAA (1998; R 2002) Class IVA Dispersion-Unshifted Single-Mode Optical Fibers

TIA-526-14-A (1998) OFSTP-14A Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant

TIA-526-7 (2002; R 2008) Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single-Mode Fiber Cable Plant OFSTP-7

TIA-568-C.1 (2009) Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard

TIA-568-C.3 (2008e1) Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard

TIA-569-B (2004) Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces

TIA-590-A (1997) Standard for Physical Location and Protection of Below Ground Fiber Optic Cable Plant

TIA-758-A (2004) Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling Standard

TIA/EIA-455-B (1998) Standard Test Procedure for Fiber Optic Fibers, Cables, Transducers, Sensors, Connecting and Terminating Devices, and other Fiber Optic Components

TIA/EIA-568-B.2 (2001) Commercial Building



Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 2: Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components

TIA/EIA-598-B (2001) Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding

TIA/EIA-606-A (2002) Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure

THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC)

SSPC SP 6 (2007) Commercial Blast Cleaning

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE (USDA)

RUS 1755 Telecommunications Standards and Specifications for Materials, Equipment and Construction

RUS Bull 1751F-630 (1996) Design of Aerial Plant

RUS Bull 1751F-640 (1995) Design of Buried Plant, Physical Considerations

RUS Bull 1751F-643 (2002) Underground Plant Design

RUS Bull 1751F-815 (1979) Electrical Protection of Outside Plant

RUS Bull 1753F-201 (1997) Acceptance Tests of Telecommunications Plant (PC-4)

RUS Bull 345-83 (1979; Rev Oct 1982) Gas Tube Surge Arrestors (PE-80)


UL 497 (2001; Rev thru Apr 2009) Protectors for Paired Conductor Communication Circuits

UL 510 (2005; Rev thru Aug 2005) Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape

UL 83 (20086) Standard for Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables


Section 27 10 00, BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM, and Section 26 20 00, INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

1.3 DEFINITIONS

Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in this specification shall be as defined in TIA-568-C.1, TIA/EIA-568-B.2, TIA-568-C.3, TIA-569-B, TIA/EIA-606-A, and IEEE Std 100 and herein.



1.3.1 Entrance Facility (EF) (Telecommunications)

An entrance to the building for both private and public network service cables (including antennae) including the entrance point at the building wall and continuing to the entrance room or space.

1.3.2 Entrance Room (ER) (Telecommunications)

A centralized space for telecommunications equipment that serves the occupants of a building. Equipment housed therein is considered distinct from a telecommunications room because of the nature of its complexity.

1.3.3 Pathway

A physical infrastructure utilized for the placement and routing of telecommunications cable.


The telecommunications outside plant consists of cable, conduit, manholes, poles, etc. required to provide signal paths from the closest point of presence to the new facility, including free standing frames or backboards, interconnecting hardware, terminating cables, lightning and surge protection modules at the entrance facility. The work consists of providing, testing and making operational cabling, interconnecting hardware and lightning and surge protection necessary to form a complete outside plant telecommunications system for continuous use.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Telecommunications Outside Plant; G

Telecommunications Entrance Facility Drawings; G

In addition to Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, provide shop drawings in accordance with paragraph SHOP DRAWINGS.

SD-03 Product Data

Wire and cable; G

Cable splices, and connectors; G

Closures; G

Building protector assemblies; G

Protector modules; G

Cross-connect terminal cabinets; G; G



Spare Parts; G

Submittals shall include the manufacturer's name, trade name, place of manufacture, and catalog model or number. Submittals shall also include applicable federal, military, industry, and technical society publication references. Should manufacturer's data require supplemental information for clarification, the supplemental information shall be submitted as specified in paragraph REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS and as required for certificates in Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.

SD-06 Test Reports

Pre-installation tests; G

Acceptance tests; G

Outside Plant Test Plan; G

SD-07 Certificates

Telecommunications Contractor Qualifications; G

Key Personnel Qualifications; G

Minimum Manufacturer's Qualifications; G


Building protector assembly installation; G

Cable tensions; G

Fiber Optic Splices; G



Factory Reel Test Data; G


Telecommunications outside plant (OSP), Data Package 5; G

Commercial off-the-shelf manuals shall be provided for operation, installation, configuration, and maintenance of products provided as a part of the telecommunications outside plant (OSP). Submit operations and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein not later than months prior to the date of beneficial occupancy. In addition to requirements of Data package 5, include the requirements of paragraphs TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTSIDE PLANT SHOP DRAWINGS and TELECOMMUNICATIONS ENTRANCE FACILITY DRAWINGS.


Record Documentation; G



In addition to other requirements, provide in accordance with paragraph RECORD DOCUMENTATION.


1.6.1 Shop Drawings

Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated installation. Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment devices. Submittals shall include the nameplate data, size, and capacity. Submittals shall also include applicable federal, military, industry, and technical society publication references.

1.6.1.1 Telecommunications Outside Plant Shop Drawings

Provide Outside Plant Design in accordance with TIA-758-A, RUS Bull 1751F-630 for aerial system design, and RUS Bull 1751F-643 for underground system design. Provide T0 shop drawings that show the physical and logical connections from the perspective of an entire campus, such as actual building locations, exterior pathways and campus backbone cabling on plan view drawings, major system nodes, and related connections on the logical system drawings in accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A. Drawings shall include wiring and schematic diagrams for fiber optic and copper cabling and splices, copper conductor gauge and pair count, fiber pair count and type, pathway duct and innerduct arrangement, associated construction materials, and any details required to demonstrate that cable system has been coordinated and will properly support the switching and transmission system identified in specification and drawings. Provide Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) approved drawings of the telecommunications outside plant. The telecommunications outside plant (OSP) shop drawings shall be included in the operation and maintenance manuals.

1.6.1.2 Telecommunications Entrance Facility Drawings

Provide T3 drawings for EF Telecommunications as specified in the paragraph TELECOMMUNICATIONS SPACE DRAWINGS of Section 27 10 00, BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEMS. The telecommunications entrance facility shop drawings shall be included in the operation and maintenance manuals.

1.6.2 Telecommunications Qualifications

Work under this section shall be performed by and the equipment shall be provided by the approved telecommunications contractor and key personnel. Qualifications shall be provided for: the telecommunications system contractor, the telecommunications system installer, the supervisor (if different from the installer), and the cable splicing and terminating personnel. A minimum of 30 days prior to installation, submit documentation of the experience of the telecommunications contractor and of the key personnel.

1.6.2.1 Telecommunications Contractor Qualifications

The telecommunications contractor shall be a firm which is regularly and



professionally engaged in the business of the applications, installation, and testing of the specified telecommunications systems and equipment. The telecommunications contractor shall demonstrate experience in providing successful telecommunications systems that include outside plant and broadband cabling within the past 3 years. Submit documentation for a minimum of three and a maximum of five successful telecommunication system installations for the telecommunications contractor. Each of the key personnel shall demonstrate experience in providing successful telecommunications systems in accordance with TIA-758-A within the past 3 years.

1.6.2.2 Key Personnel Qualifications

Provide key personnel who are regularly and professionally engaged in the business of the application, installation and testing of the specified telecommunications systems and equipment. There may be one key person or more key persons proposed for this solicitation depending upon how many of the key roles each has successfully provided. Each of the key personnel shall demonstrate experience in providing successful telecommunications systems within the past 3 years.

Cable splicing and terminating personnel assigned to the installation of this system or any of its components shall have training in the proper techniques and have a minimum of 3 years experience in splicing and terminating the specified cables. Modular splices shall be performed by factory certified personnel or under direct supervision of factory trained personnel for products used.

Supervisors and installers assigned to the installation of this system or any of its components shall have factory or factory approved certification from each equipment manufacturer indicating that they are qualified to install and test the provided products.

Submit documentation for a minimum of three and a maximum of five successful telecommunication system installations for each of the key personnel. Documentation for each key person shall include at least two successful system installations provided that are equivalent in system size and in construction complexity to the telecommunications system proposed for this solicitation. Include specific experience in installing and testing telecommunications outside plant systems, including broadband cabling, and provide the names and locations of at least two project installations successfully completed using optical fiber and copper telecommunications cabling systems. All of the existing telecommunications system installations offered by the key persons as successful experience shall have been in successful full-time service for at least 18 months prior to the issuance date for this solicitation. Provide the name and role of the key person, the title, location, and completed installation date of the referenced project, the referenced project owner point of contact information including name, organization, title, and telephone number, and generally, the referenced project description including system size and construction complexity.

Indicate that all key persons are currently employed by the telecommunications contractor, or have a commitment to the telecommunications contractor to work on this project. All key persons shall be employed by the telecommunications contractor at the date of issuance of this solicitation, or if not, have a commitment to the telecommunications contractor to work on this project by the date that the bid was due to the Contracting Officer.



Note that only the key personnel approved by the Contracting Officer in the successful proposal shall do work on this solicitation's telecommunications system. Key personnel shall function in the same roles in this contract, as they functioned in the offered successful experience. Any substitutions for the telecommunications contractor's key personnel requires approval from The Contracting Officer.

1.6.2.3 Minimum Manufacturer's Qualifications

Cabling, equipment and hardware manufacturers shall have a minimum of 3 years experience in the manufacturing, assembly, and factory testing of components which comply with, TIA-568-C.1, TIA/EIA-568-B.2 and TIA-568-C.3. In addition, cabling manufacturers shall have a minimum of 3 years experience in the manufacturing and factory testing of cabling which comply with ICEA S-87-640, ICEA S-98-688, and ICEA S-99-689.

1.6.3 Outside Plant Test Plan

Prepare and provide a complete and detailed test plan for field tests of the outside plant including a complete list of test equipment for the copper conductor and optical fiber cables, components, and accessories for approval by the Contracting Officer. Include a cut-over plan with procedures and schedules for relocation of facility station numbers without interrupting service to any active location. Submit the plan at least 30 days prior to tests for Contracting Officer approval. Provide outside plant testing and performance measurement criteria in accordance with TIA-568-C.1 and RUS Bull 1753F-201. Include procedures for certification, validation, and testing that includes fiber optic link performance criteria.


Provide materials and equipment that are standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship and shall be the manufacturer's latest standard design that has been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for at least 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 1-year period. Products supplied shall be specifically designed and manufactured for use with outside plant telecommunications systems. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.


Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is provided.







1.6.5.1 Independent Testing Organization Certificate

In lieu of the label or listing, submit a certificate from an independent testing organization, competent to perform testing, and approved by the Contracting Officer. The certificate shall state that the item has been tested in accordance with the specified organization's test methods and that the item complies with the specified organization's reference standard.


Ship cable on reels in 1500 feet length with a minimum overage of 10 percent. Radius of the reel drum shall not be smaller than the minimum bend radius of the cable. Wind cable on the reel so that unwinding can be done without kinking the cable. Two meters of cable at both ends of the cable shall be accessible for testing. Attach permanent label on each reel showing length, cable identification number, cable size, cable type, and date of manufacture. Provide water resistant label and the indelible writing on the labels. Apply end seals to each end of the cables to prevent moisture from entering the cable. Reels with cable shall be suitable for outside storage conditions when temperature ranges from minus 40 degrees C to plus 65 degrees C, with relative humidity from 0 to 100 percent. Equipment, other than cable, delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with protection from weather, humidity and temperature variation, dirt and dust, or other contaminants in accordance with manufacturer's requirements.

1.8 MAINTENANCE

1.8.1 Record Documentation

Provide the activity responsible for telecommunications system maintenance and administration a single complete and accurate set of record documentation for the entire telecommunications system with respect to this project.

Provide record documentation as specified in Section 27 10 00, BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM.

1.8.2 Spare Parts

In addition to the requirements of Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA, provide a complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply, and a list of spare parts recommended for stocking. Spare parts shall be provided no later than the start of field testing.



1.9 WARRANTY


PART 2 PRODUCTS


Products supplied shall be specifically designed and manufactured for use with outside plant telecommunications systems.

2.2 TELECOMMUNICATIONS ENTRANCE FACILITY

2.2.1 Building Protector Assemblies

Provide self-contained 5 pin unit supplied with a field cable stub factory connected to protector socket blocks to terminate and accept protector modules for all pairs of outside cable. Building protector assembly shall have interconnecting hardware for connection to interior cabling at full capacity. Provide manufacturers instructions for building protector assembly installation. Provide copper cable interconnecting hardware as specified in Section 27 10 00, BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM.

2.2.2 Protector Modules

Provide in accordance with UL 497 three-electrode gas tube or solid state type 5 pin rated for the application. Provide gas tube protection modules in accordance with RUS Bull 345-83 and shall be heavy duty, A>10kA, B>400, C>65A where A is the maximum single impulse discharge current, B is the impulse life and C is the AC discharge current in accordance with NEMA C62.61. The gas modules shall shunt high voltage to ground, fail short, and be equipped with an external spark gap and heat coils in accordance with UL 497. Provide the number of surge protection modules equal to the number of pairs of exterior cable of the building protector assembly.

2.2.3 Fiber Optic Terminations

Provide fiber optic cable terminations as specified in Section 27 10 00, BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM.

2.3 CONDUIT

Provide conduit as specified in Section 26 20 00, INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

2.4 PLASTIC INSULATING TAPE

UL 510.

2.5 WIRE AND CABLE

2.5.1 Copper Conductor Cable

Solid copper conductors, covered with an extruded solid insulating compound. Insulated conductors shall be twisted into pairs which are then



stranded or oscillated to form a cylindrical core. For special high frequency applications, the cable core shall be separated into compartments. Cable shall be completed by the application of a suitable core wrapping material, a corrugated copper or plastic coated aluminum shield, and an overall extruded jacket. Telecommunications contractor shall verify distances between splice points prior to ordering cable in specific cut lengths. Gauge of conductor shall determine the range of numbers of pairs specified; 19 gauge (6 to 400 pairs), 22 gauge (6 to 1200 pairs), 24 gauge (6 to 2100 pairs), and 26 gauge (6 to 3000 pairs). Copper conductor shall conform to the following:

2.5.1.1 Underground

Provide filled cable meeting the requirements of ICEA S-99-689 and RUS 1755.390.

2.5.1.2 Screen

Provide screen-compartmental core cable filled cable meeting the requirements of ICEA S-99-689 and RUS 1755.390.

2.5.2 Fiber Optic Cable

Provide single-mode, 8/125-um, 0.10 aperture 1310 nm fiber optic cable in accordance with TIA-492CAAA, TIA-472D000-A, and ICEA S-87-640 including any special requirements made necessary by a specialized design. Provide 12 optical fibers as indicated. Fiber optic cable shall be specifically designed for outside use with loose buffer construction. Provide fiber optic color code in accordance with TIA/EIA-598-B

2.5.2.1 Strength Members

Provide central strength members with sufficient tensile strength for installation and residual rated loads to meet the applicable performance requirements in accordance with ICEA S-87-640. The strength member is included to serve as a cable core foundation to reduce strain on the fibers, and shall not serve as a pulling strength member.

2.5.2.2 Shielding or Other Metallic Covering

Provide bare aluminum or coated aluminum, single tape covering or shield in accordance with ICEA S-87-640.

2.5.2.3 Performance Requirements

Provide fiber optic cable with optical and mechanical performance requirements in accordance with ICEA S-87-640.

2.5.3 Grounding and Bonding Conductors

Provide grounding and bonding conductors in accordance with RUS 1755.200, TIA J-STD-607-A, IEEE C2, and NFPA 70. Solid bare copper wire meeting the requirements of ASTM B 1 for sizes No. 8 AWG and smaller and stranded bare copper wire meeting the requirements of ASTM B 8, for sizes No. 6 AWG and larger. Insulated conductors shall have 600-volt, Type TW insulation meeting the requirements of UL 83.

2.6 CABLE TAGS IN MANHOLES, HANDHOLES, AND VAULTS

Provide tags for each telecommunications cable or wire located in manholes,



handholes, and vaults. Cable tags shall be polyethylene and labeled in accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A. Handwritten labeling is unacceptable.

2.6.1 Polyethylene Cable Tags

Provide tags of polyethylene that have an average tensile strength of 3250 pounds per square inch; and that are 0.08 inch thick (minimum), non-corrosive non-conductive; resistive to acids, alkalis, organic solvents, and salt water; and distortion resistant to 170 degrees F. Provide 0.05 inch (minimum) thick black polyethylene tag holder. Provide a one-piece nylon, self-locking tie at each end of the cable tag. Ties shall have a minimum loop tensile strength of 175 pounds. The cable tags shall have black block letters, numbers, and symbols one inch high on a yellow background. Letters, numbers, and symbols shall not fall off or change positions regardless of the cable tags' orientation.

2.7 BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE

Provide fiber optic media marking and protection in accordance with TIA-590-A. Provide color, type and depth of tape as specified in paragraph BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE in Section 31 00 00, EARTHWORK.

2.8 GROUNDING BRAID

Provide grounding braid that provides low electrical impedance connections for dependable shield bonding in accordance with RUS 1755.200. Braid shall be made from flat tin-plated copper.




Provide laminated plastic nameplates in accordance with ASTM D 709 for each patch panel, protector assembly, rack, cabinet and other equipment or as indicated on the drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and, when applicable, the position. Nameplates shall be melamine plastic, 0.125 inch thick, white with black center core. Surface shall be matte finish. Corners shall be square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be one by 2.5 inches. Lettering shall be a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal block style.

2.11 TESTS, INSPECTIONS, AND VERIFICATIONS

2.11.1 Factory Reel Test Data

Test 100 percent OTDR test of FO media at the factory in accordance with TIA-568-C.1 and TIA-568-C.3. Use TIA-526-7 for single mode fiber and TIA-526-14-A Method B for multi mode fiber measurements. Calibrate OTDR to show anomalies of 0.2 dB minimum. Enhanced performance filled OSP copper cables, referred to as Broadband Outside Plant (BBOSP), shall meet the requirements of ICEA S-99-689. Enhanced performance air core OSP copper cables shall meet the requirements of ICEA S-98-688. Submit test reports, including manufacture date for each cable reel and receive approval before delivery of cable to the project site.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Install all system components and appurtenances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and as indicated. Provide all necessary interconnections, services, and adjustments required for a complete and operable telecommunications system.

3.1.1 Contractor Damage

Promptly repair indicated utility lines or systems damaged during site preparation and construction. Damages to lines or systems not indicated, which are caused by Contractor operations, shall be treated as "Changes" under the terms of the Contract Clauses. When Contractor is advised in writing of the location of a nonindicated line or system, such notice shall provide that portion of the line or system with "indicated" status in determining liability for damages. In every event, immediately notify the Contracting Officer of damage.

3.1.2 Cable Inspection and Repair

Handle cable and wire provided in the construction of this project with care. Inspect cable reels for cuts, nicks or other damage. Damaged cable shall be replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer. Reel wraps shall remain intact on the reel until the cable is ready for placement.

3.1.3 Direct Burial System

Installation shall be in accordance with RUS Bull 1751F-640. Under railroad tracks, paved areas, and roadways install cable in conduit encased in concrete. Slope ducts to drain. Excavate trenches by hand or mechanical trenching equipment. Provide a minimum cable cover of 24 inches below finished grade. Trenches shall be not less than 6 inches wide and in straight lines between cable markers. Do not use cable plows. Bends in trenches shall have a radius of not less than 36 inches. Where two or more cables are laid parallel in the same trench, space laterally at least 3 inches apart. When rock is encountered, remove it to a depth of at least 3 inches below the cable and fill the space with sand or clean earth free from particles larger than 1/4 inch. Do not unreel and pull cables into the trench from one end. Cable may be unreeled on grade and lifted into position. Provide color, type and depth of warning tape as specified in paragraph BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE in Section 31 00 00, EARTHWORK.

3.1.3.1 Cable Placement

a. Separate cables crossing other cables or metal piping from the other cables or pipe by not less than 3 inches of well tamped earth. Do not install circuits for communications under or above traffic signal loops.

b. Cables shall be in one piece without splices between connections except where the distance exceeds the lengths in which the cable is furnished.

c. Avoid bends in cables of small radii and twists that might cause



damage. Do not bend cable and wire in a radius less than 10 times the outside diameter of the cable or wire.

d. Leave a horizontal slack of approximately 3 feet in the ground on each end of cable runs, on each side of connection boxes, and at points where connections are brought aboveground. Where cable is brought aboveground, leave additional slack to make necessary connections.

3.1.3.2 Identification Slabs Markers

Provide a marker at each change of direction of the cable, over the ends of ducts or conduits which are installed under paved areas and roadways and over each splice. Identification markers shall be of concrete, approximately 20 inches square by 6 inches thick.

3.1.3.3 Backfill for Rocky Soil

When placing cable in a trench in rocky soil, the cable shall be cushioned by a fill of sand or selected soil at least 2 inches thick on the floor of the trench before placing the cable or wire. The backfill for at least 4 inches above the wire or cable shall be free from stones, rocks, or other hard or sharp materials which might damage the cable or wire. If the buried cable is placed less than 24 inches in depth, a protective cover of concrete shall be used.

3.1.4 Cable Protection

Provide direct burial cable protection in accordance with NFPA 70 and as specified in Section 26 20 00, INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Galvanized conduits which penetrate concrete (slabs, pavement, and walls) shall be PVC coated and shall extend from the first coupling or fitting outside either side of the concrete minimum of 6 inches per 12 inches burial depth beyond the edge of the surface where cable protection is required; all conduits shall be sealed on each end. Where additional protection is required, cable may be placed in galvanized iron pipe (GIP) sized on a maximum fill of 40% of cross-sectional area, or in concrete encased 4 inches PVC pipe. Conduit may be installed by jacking or trenching. Trenches shall be backfilled with earth and mechanically tamped at 6 inches lift so that the earth is restored to the same density, grade and vegetation as adjacent undisturbed material.

3.1.4.1 Cable End Caps

Cable ends shall be sealed at all times with coated heat shrinkable end caps. Cables ends shall be sealed when the cable is delivered to the job site, while the cable is stored and during installation of the cable. The caps shall remain in place until the cable is spliced or terminated. Sealing compounds and tape are not acceptable substitutes for heat shrinkable end caps. Cable which is not sealed in the specified manner at all times will be rejected.

3.1.5 Penetrations

Caulk and seal cable access penetrations in walls, ceilings and other parts of the building. Seal openings around electrical penetrations through fire resistance-rated wall, partitions, floors, or ceilings in accordance with Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.



3.1.6 Cable Pulling

Test duct lines with a mandrel and swab out to remove foreign material before the pulling of cables. Avoid damage to cables in setting up pulling apparatus or in placing tools or hardware. Do not step on cables when entering or leaving the manhole. Do not place cables in ducts other than those shown without prior written approval of the Contracting Officer. Roll cable reels in the direction indicated by the arrows painted on the reel flanges. Set up cable reels on the same side of the manhole as the conduit section in which the cable is to be placed. Level the reel and bring into proper alignment with the conduit section so that the cable pays off from the top of the reel in a long smooth bend into the duct without twisting. Under no circumstances shall the cable be paid off from the bottom of a reel. Check the equipment set up prior to beginning the cable pulling to avoid an interruption once pulling has started. Use a cable feeder guide of suitable dimensions between cable reel and face of duct to protect cable and guide cable into the duct as it is paid off the reel. As cable is paid off the reel, lubricate and inspect cable for sheath defects. When defects are noticed, stop pulling operations and notify the Contracting Officer to determine required corrective action. Cable pulling shall also be stopped when reel binds or does not pay off freely. Rectify cause of binding before resuming pulling operations. Provide cable lubricants recommended by the cable manufacturer. Avoid bends in cables of small radii and twists that might cause damage. Do not bend cable and wire in a radius less than 10 times the outside diameter of the cable or wire.

3.1.6.1 Cable Tensions

Obtain from the cable manufacturer and provide to the Contracting Officer, the maximum allowable pulling tension. This tension shall not be exceeded.

3.1.6.2 Pulling Eyes

Equip cables 1.25 inches in diameter and larger with cable manufacturer's factory installed pulling-in eyes. Provide cables with diameter smaller than 1.25 inches with heat shrinkable type end caps or seals on cable ends when using cable pulling grips. Rings to prevent grip from slipping shall not be beaten into the cable sheath. Use a swivel of 3/4 inch links between pulling-in eyes or grips and pulling strand.

3.1.6.3 Installation of Cables in Manholes, Handholes, and Vaults

Do not install cables utilizing the shortest route, but route along those walls providing the longest route and the maximum spare cable lengths. Form cables to closely parallel walls, not to interfere with duct entrances, and support cables on brackets and cable insulators at a maximum of 4 feet. In existing manholes, handholes, and vaults where new ducts are to be terminated, or where new cables are to be installed, modify the existing installation of cables, cable supports, and grounding as required with cables arranged and supported as specified for new cables. Identify each cable with polyethylene cable tags.

3.1.7 Surge Protection

All cables and conductors, except fiber optic cable, which serve as communication lines through off-premise lines, shall have surge protection installed at each end which meet the requirements of RUS Bull 1751F-815.



3.1.8 Grounding

Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with RUS 1755.200, TIA J-STD-607-A, IEEE C2, and NFPA 70. Ground exposed noncurrent carrying metallic parts of telephone equipment, cable sheaths, cable splices, and terminals.

3.1.8.1 Telecommunications Master Ground Bar (TMGB)

The TMGB is the hub of the basic telecommunications grounding system providing a common point of connection for ground from outside cable, CD, and equipment. Establish a TMGB for connection point for cable stub shields to connector blocks and CD protector assemblies as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS.

3.1.8.2 Incoming Cable Shields

Shields shall not be bonded across the splice to the cable stubs. Ground shields of incoming cables in the EF Telecommunications to the TMGB.

3.1.8.3 Campus Distributor Grounding

a. Protection assemblies: Mount CD protector assemblies directly on the telecommunications backboard. Connect assemblies mounted on each vertical frame with No. 6 AWG copper conductor to provide a low resistance path to TMGB.

b. TMGB connection: Connect TMGB to TGB with copper conductor with a total resistance of less than 0.01 ohms.

3.1.9 Cut-Over

All necessary transfers and cut-overs, shall be accomplished by the telecommunications contractor.

3.2 LABELING

3.2.1 Labels

Provide labeling for new cabling and termination hardware located within the facility in accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A. Handwritten labeling is unacceptable. Stenciled lettering for cable and termination hardware shall be provided using thermal ink transfer process.

3.2.2 Cable Tag Installation

Install cable tags for each telecommunications cable or wire located in manholes, handholes, and vaults including each splice. The labeling of telecommunications cable tag identifiers shall be as indicated and in accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A. Do not provide handwritten letters. Install cable tags so that they are clearly visible without disturbing any cabling or wiring in the manholes, handholes, and vaults.

3.2.3 Termination Hardware

Label patch panels, distribution panels, connector blocks and protection modules using color coded labels with identifiers in accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A.




Provide ferrous metallic enclosure finishes in accordance with the following procedures. Ensure that surfaces are dry and clean when the coating is applied. Coat joints and crevices. Prior to assembly, paint surfaces which will be concealed or inaccessible after assembly. Apply primer and finish coat in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

3.3.1 Cleaning

Clean surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 6.

3.3.2 Priming

Prime with a two component polyamide epoxy primer which has a bisphenol-A base, a minimum of 60 percent solids by volume, and an ability to build up a minimum dry film thickness on a vertical surface of 5.0 mils. Apply in two coats to a total dry film thickness of 5 to 8 mils.

3.3.3 Finish Coat

Finish with a two component urethane consisting of saturated polyester polyol resin mixed with aliphatic isocyanate which has a minimum of 50 percent solids by volume. Apply to a minimum dry film thickness of 2 to 3 mils. Color shall be the manufacturer's standard.




Provide the Contracting Officer 10 working days notice prior to each test. Provide labor, equipment, and incidentals required for testing. Correct defective material and workmanship disclosed as the results of the tests. Furnish a signed copy of the test results to the Contracting Officer within 3 working days after the tests for each segment of construction are completed. Perform testing as construction progresses and do not wait until all construction is complete before starting field tests.

3.5.1 Pre-Installation Tests

Perform the following tests on cable at the job site before it is removed from the cable reel. For cables with factory installed pulling eyes, these tests shall be performed at the factory and certified test results shall accompany the cable.

3.5.1.1 Cable Capacitance

Perform capacitance tests on at least 10 percent of the pairs within a cable to determine if cable capacitance is within the limits specified.

3.5.1.2 Loop Resistance

Perform DC-loop resistance on at least 10 percent of the pairs within a cable to determine if DC-loop resistance is within the manufacturer's



calculated resistance.

3.5.1.3 Pre-Installation Test Results

Provide results of pre-installation tests to the Contracting Officer at least 5 working days before installation is to start. Results shall indicate reel number of the cable, manufacturer, size of cable, pairs tested, and recorded readings. When pre-installation tests indicate that cable does not meet specifications, remove cable from the job site.

3.5.2 Acceptance Tests

Perform acceptance testing in accordance with RUS Bull 1753F-201 and as further specified in this section. Provide personnel, equipment, instrumentation, and supplies necessary to perform required testing. Notification of any planned testing shall be given to the Contracting Officer at least 14 days prior to any test unless specified otherwise. Testing shall not proceed until after the Contractor has received written Contracting Officer's approval of the test plans as specified. Test plans shall define the tests required to ensure that the system meets technical, operational, and performance specifications. The test plans shall define milestones for the tests, equipment, personnel, facilities, and supplies required. The test plans shall identify the capabilities and functions to be tested. Provide test reports in booklet form showing all field tests performed, upon completion and testing of the installed system. Measurements shall be tabulated on a pair by pair or strand by strand basis.

3.5.2.1 Copper Conductor Cable

Perform the following acceptance tests in accordance with TIA-758-A:

a. Wire map (pin to pin continuity)

b. Continuity to remote end

c. Crossed pairs

d. Reversed pairs

e. Split pairs

f. Shorts between two or more conductors 3.5.2.2 Fiber Optic Cable

Test fiber optic cable in accordance with TIA/EIA-455-B and as further specified in this section. Two optical tests shall be performed on all optical fibers: Optical Time Domain Reflectometry (OTDR) Test, and Attenuation Test. In addition, a Bandwidth Test shall be performed on all multimode optical fibers. These tests shall be performed on the completed end-to-end spans which include the near-end pre-connectorized single fiber cable assembly, outside plant as specified, and the far-end pre-connectorized single fiber cable assembly.

a. OTDR Test: The OTDR test shall be used to determine the adequacy of the cable installations by showing any irregularities, such as discontinuities, micro-bendings or improper splices for the cable span under test. Hard copy fiber signature records shall be obtained from the OTDR for each fiber in each span and shall be



included in the test results. The OTDR test shall be measured in both directions. A reference length of fiber, 66 feet minimum, used as the delay line shall be placed before the new end connector and after the far end patch panel connectors for inspection of connector signature. Conduct OTDR test and provide calculation or interpretation of results in accordance with TIA-526-7 for single-mode fiber and TIA-526-14-A for multimode fiber. Splice losses shall not exceed 0.3 db.

b. Attenuation Test: End-to-end attenuation measurements shall be made on all fibers, in both directions, using a 1310 nanometer light source at one end and the optical power meter on the other end to verify that the cable system attenuation requirements are met in accordance with TIA-455-46A for multimode and TIA-526-7 for single-mode fiber optic cables. The measurement method shall be in accordance with TIA-455-78. Attenuation losses shall not exceed 0.5 db/km at 1310 nm and 1550 nm for single-mode fiber. Attenuation losses shall not exceed 5.0 db/km at 850 nm and 1.5 db/km at 1300 nm for multimode fiber.

c. Bandwidth Test: The end-to-end bandwidth of all multimode fiber span links shall be measured by the frequency domain method. The bandwidth shall be measured in both directions on all fibers. The bandwidth measurements shall be in accordance with TIA TIA/EIA-455-204.

3.5.3 Soil Density Tests

a. Determine soil-density relationships for compaction of backfill material in accordance with ASTM D 1557, Method D.



joliet - [project.toc] arc...arc/oms/uhs ***safety pays*** w912qr-10-r-0001 joliet il certified...

Documents

joliet - [project.toc] arc...arc/oms/uhs safety pays w912qr-10-r-0001 joliet il certified...